Home

R&S FSW K70 VSA User Manual

1. c User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 124 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurement Basics EES VSA in MSRA Operating Mode Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard radio signals is how each data chan nel is correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced in firmware version 1 60 The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the mea surement in all applications and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit diagrams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view manually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not e orange AL the line lies within the interval e white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e no AL the line lies outside the interval 42 gt wsRAView MSRAMaster Tue gt 13 Ref Level 0 00 dim Std DECT P32 FwedPart SR 1 152 MHz SGL An 1048 Freq 1325 GHz C
2. m o P Configuring VSA Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 142 See Input Settings on page 162 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R amp S FSW B13 Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are sup pressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 143 INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Preselec tor on page 143 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for UO Analyzer GSM VSA and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 143 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which connec tor is used to input
3. J OK Overview of the Demodulation Process The figure 4 44 provides an overview of the demodulation stages of the vector signal analysis option The function blocks of the signal processing kernel can be found at the left in grey and their appropriate settings at the right in blue A more detailed description of the most important stages is given in the following sections Burst Search In this stage the capture buffer is searched for bursts that comply with the signal descrip tion The search itself can be switched on or off via the Burst Search dialog see Enabling Burst Searches on page 182 A list of the detected bursts is passed on to the next processing stage UO Pattern Search The I Q Pattern Search is performed on the capture buffer This means the VSA appli cation modulates the selected pattern according to the transmit filter Tx filter and the modulation scheme Subsequently it searches the capture buffer for this UO pattern i e the UO waveform of the pattern It is assumed that patterns can only appear within bursts i e the I Q pattern search range is limited to the bursts detected by the burst search stage If the burst search is switched off the whole capture buffer is searched for the UO pattern A list of all detected I Q patterns is passed on to the next processing stage It is important to note that the VSA application can only search for one pattern at a tim
4. betes 177 Drop OUt MR TEILS 178 SIODB credita Vera e OM TK ORI ee 178 Mira H 178 Capture OTS Sb P 178 Trigger Source Defines the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 346 Free Run Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 346 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector on the front or rear panel meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 177 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Note in VSA trigger output is not supported thus the connector is always configured for input External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the
5. su s Mrn ge np Analysis Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 100 RST 1 5 Default unit CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the upper limit for the current peak or mean UO offset Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 200 0 to 0 0 RST 40 0 mean 45 0 Default unit DB CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean phase error peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 3
6. nennen 121 4 8 Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions 122 49 VSA in MSRA Operating Mode eene nennen nnnm 124 AR DD REEL NE ee ee eee eee meee ener es 126 5 1 Default Settings for Vector Signal Analysis eee 127 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards eeeeees 128 5 3 Configuration Overview esses nnne nn nnne nnn nennen nnne nnns 130 54 Signal Descriptio DERE CDs atr ELI PEL ec eyes 133 5 5 Input and Frontend Settings ccccccccccceesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeneeeseeeeeeeneesseeeeseeeeeeseeneneaes 141 5 6 Sigal ST EE 171 5 7 Burst and Pattern Configuration eese nennen nnns 181 5 8 Result Range Configuration eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenen nnne nnne nnn nnns 190 LEE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 3 R amp S FSW K70 Contents 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 7 1 7 2 8 1 8 2 8 3 9 1 9 2 9 3 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 Demodulation Settings cccccccssseenceeeeeseeeeseesesseeeseeeeesseeeseeesesseceeseeeseeseenseeeeseseeaes 192 Measurement Filter Settings eese nnne nnn nnn 200 Evaluation Range Configuration eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenn nennen nnn 202 Adjusting Settings Automatically
7. seuessss 191 eeleren eege EE ER 16 Capture Buffer BI rv 122 Capture length Data acquisition ssesssseee 172 BI ryc 13 Capture offset MSRA applications eene 178 Bcc E 394 lnc M M GEES 178 Capture oversampling see Sample rate ente 61 Carrier frequency drift Compensation ics eene rmn tere ren entr trea 195 Bm 116 ul e 466 Carrier frequency error genu Center frequency P D ie Analog Baseband D 157 cnc M 159 SLED SIZE A 159 Channel bandwidth MSRA Mu 124 Channel Frequency Response Magnitude FROSUIE ty DO as 23 Channel Group Delay ResUl YPE ioiaren awener AE AEN 23 Clock rate Bem 66 Coarse Synchronization sssseeee 199 Compatible nre 187 Compensation Derodulation roii tette 193 194 Modulation errors ccccccscesessecsseeeesneesesenesesoneees 103 Bi cM 357 Constellation Frequency result type essen 24 Constellation UO eelste rre optet e en ye dee ege 25 Rotated Result type sessseee 26 Constellation points Symbol mapping ssse 68 Continue single sweep kien c 179 Continuous signal sese 139 Continuous sweep SONKEY erede e
8. EQUalizer MODE on page 360 Event See Equalizer Settings on page 195 See Reset Equalizer on page 196 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer SAVE Name This command saves the current equalizer results to a file Setting parameters Name Example Manual operation string File name DDEM EQU SAVE D MMyEqualizer Saves the current equalizer results to D MyEqualizer vae See Equalizer Settings on page 195 See Store Load Current Equalizer on page 196 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 361 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA mAA 9 C 7o7r c s Pre Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod EQualizer STATe State This command activates or deactivates the equalizer For more information on the equalizer see chapter 4 4 5 The Equalizer on page 98 Setting parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST OFF Example DDEM EQU OFF Manual operation See Equalizer Settings on page 195 See State on page 195 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc AUTO lt FineSyncAuto gt This command selects manual or automatic Fine Sync Setting parameters lt FineSyncAuto gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Fine Synchronization on page 199 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel lt SERLevel gt This command sets the Fine Sync Level if fine sync works on Known Data Setting parameters lt SERLevel gt numeric v
9. e 1 Select the measurement window e 2 Press the TRACE key e 3 Press the Trace Config softkey e 4 Select a second trace and choose the preferred Trace Mode e g Max Hold or Average Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm Mod m el Att 20 0dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen S TRG EXT Trace Trace Mode Evaluation AEVM 1 Cw 2 Avge 3 Max Mr n geseis Trace Wizard Screen 1 i k y 1 Start 0 sym Stop 100 sym Trace 5 Blank C Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw ET TE TENE 20 dBm Preset Select Select 40 E All Traces Max Avg Min Max ClrWrite Mi 60 dBm Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Start 2 535 Measuring User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 274 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement I BEEN Frequently Asked Questions Problem The spectrum is not displayed in the logarithmic domain Solution e 1 Select the measurement window e 2 Press the AMPT key e 3 Press the Unit softkey e 4 Press the Y Axis Unit softkey e D Select dB Problem The Vector I Q result display and the Constellation I Q result display look different Spectrum VSA Ref Level 1 96 dBm Std EDGE 8PSK SR 270 833 kHz Att 22 dB Freq 1 0 GHz Res Len 148 SGL BURST PATTERN A EVM el Crw B Const I1 Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 0 sym sym Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 C Mag CapBuf i Crw D Yector I Q Meas amp Ref iM Clrw Start 0
10. esee 425 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent STATe sss ennemis CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent VALue essere nnne nnn entren CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent RESult CAL Culate cnzLlMtMACCuracv FDERrorMEAN GTATe nennen nennen nennen enn CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEANVAL ue CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEANTRE Su 425 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK STATe sss nnne ener nnne nenne CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK VALue eseeessesseseee enne rennen nennen nennen CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK RESult CAL Culate cnzLlMitMACCuracvFtRbRorbCUlbrentG AaTe nennen CAL Culate cnzLlMtMACCuracvFtERbRorbCUbrenVAl ue nennen nennen nnne CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent RESUIt essen 425 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan STATe sss enne ener nennen nenne CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan VALue sess rennen CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan RESult CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak STATe essere rennen nennen CAL Culate cnzLlMtMACCuracvFtERbRorbPEakVAL ue CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak RESUult cessent 425 CAL Culate cnzLlMitMACCuracvFtRborbRcCllbrentGTATe rennen CAL Culate cnz
11. 448 Predefined Standards and SettingS ccccccceseseeencceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeaes 449 Predefined Measurement and Tx Filters esee 456 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data seeeeeeeeeeeee eene 458 Known Data File Syntax Description esee 460 Formul ae eicere EA 462 UO Data File Format iq tar eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenennnneennn nennen 476 List of Remote Commande NSA ees 483 j 494 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 5 R amp S9FSW K70 Preface About this Manual 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This R amp S FSW Vector Signal Analysis User Manual provides all the information specific to the application All general instrument functions and settings common to all applica tions and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FSW User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included Welcome to the VSA Application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application Typical applications Example measurement scenarios in which the application is frequently used Measurements and Result Displays Details on supported measurements and their result types Measurement Basics Background information on basic terms and princip
12. M B User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 22 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays REESEN Result Types in VSA 3 2 2 Channel Frequency Response Magnitude The frequency response magnitude of the channel indicates which distortions occurred during transmission of the input signal It is only determined if the equalizer is activated 2 ChanFreqResp Equalizer Start 100 MHz Stop 100 MHz The bandwidth for which the channel transfer function can be estimated is not only limited by the usable UO bandwidth but also by the bandwidth of the analyzed input signal Areas with low reception power e g atthe filter edges may suffer from less accurate estimation results Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 3 2 3 Channel Group Delay The group delay of the channel is the derivation of phase over frequency for the original input signal It is a measure of phase distortion User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 23 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays a_a a ee P Result Types in VSA 4 ChanGroupDelay Equalizer Start 100 MHz Stop 100 MHz Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required sourc
13. J Jw P A e Configuring VSA Manual operation See Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto on page 201 SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME Name This command selects a measurement filter and automatically sets its state to ON Setting parameters Name Name of the measurement filter or User for a user defined filter An overview of available measurement filters is provided in chap ter A 3 2 Measurement Filters on page 456 Manual operation See Type on page 202 SENSe DDEMod MFILter STATe lt MeasFilterState gt Use this command to switch the measurement filter off To switch a measurement filter on use the SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME command Setting parameters lt MeasFilterState gt ON OFF 1 0 OFF Switches the measurement filter off ON Switches the measurement filter specified by SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME on However this command is not necessary as the SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME command automatically switches the selected filter on RST 1 Manual operation See Type on page 202 SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER lt FilterName gt This command selects the user defined measurement filter For details on user defined filters see chapter 4 1 5 Customized Filters on page 59 Setting parameters lt FilterName gt Name of the user defined filter Example SENS DDEM MFIL NAME USER S
14. 442 Continuous QPSK signal remote 440 Measurement Hier 57 Alpha BT hs Configuration EE Configuration remote sss Demodulation process Enabling ere reet eter ous Loading ep 202 Predefiried neret exe 202 456 457 Type is 202 User defined rte et e 202 Measurement ranges COM PaniSON PT 117 Definition Snarere eege iced ieee de 117 Measurement signal Evaluating 1 2 erii RETRO 208 Measurement time Auto settings eee hn er RN 204 Microbutton djs T 158 Min max values beo 168 Min Gap Length cip S Hr 183 Minimum Marker positioning esses 214 Qm 215 ic M HC aE ERa 214 Minimum shift keying MSK Symbol Mapping rero erexit 80 Mixer Type External Mixer B21 sss 146 MKR gt Kee eot heel n ede N 214 ModAcc Limits Ric M 216 Modulation COnfiQurration c 133 Display A Errors FSK ia Inverted UO remote eee 341 Inverted Q irte noe 157 173 Mapping lov EE Remote Symbol Rate E BEE e ca iib Eee ee User defined Modulation accuracy Data Terum 18 Individual results A 48 Limit checking gei Limit checking enabling sesssessess 216 Limit lines remote
15. eese 204 UIDI 206 TAGE SOtei GS im 206 Trace Export Settin s iii aAA a AAEE ENKADRE 209 Mark ree M 210 Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines eese ener 215 Display and Window Configuration essere nnn 217 Zoom FU nctions one 220 VO Data Import and E e E 222 Import Export A Te d ET 222 How to Export and Import UO Data eeesessseeeeeseeseeeeeer ener enn 223 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis 226 How to Perform VSA According to Digital Standards 226 How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements enne 228 How to Analyze the Measured Data eee nnnm 237 Measurement Examples eeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeneee nennen 244 Connecting the Transmitter and Analyzer eene 244 Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal 245 Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals esse 253 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 262 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting eese nnne 262 Explanation of Error Messages eene nennen nnn 264 Frequently Asked Questions eeeeeeeee
16. esses 388 Limits Reos lt types reete dee tr inne ease eat 18 Modulation Error Ratio MER BT ifo Troc e M 104 Modulation errors s sese 101 103 Data GOUD E dE EES evens 17 Formula Se D 2 PSK QAM MSK seen 101 Result type S siradis aet itte teeta 17 Modulation order KNOWN data EE 123 P tternisymbolS retire rientro eco 190 Modulation type i cc ind Atenas 111 MSK Error model 24 inercia ne 101 Modulation e 134 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 499 R amp S FSW K70 Index MSRA Analysis interval ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 172 339 Operating mode 124 Een 174 342 MSRA applications Capt re offset dn ere ene 178 Capture offset remote sss 394 Multiple Measurement channels esses 12 Multiple ZOOE circo cde rere Eee terere 221 N Next Minimum Marker positioning essen 215 kien v 215 Next Peak Marker positioning sese 214 cnl m 214 Noise Le EE 111 Normalization Demodulation 5 eren rer retta 197 O Offset Analysis interval seeeeen 178 SM 200 Frequency 160 Pattern 140 QPSK cerei 76 QPSK symbol mapping 76 Reference level 161 165 Ixesult Ee iret iare iais 192 On Off Keying OO
17. rn 15 Meas GREP Me 16 Modulation accuracy 18 Modulation errors sssesseen 17 IS C ior E E 19 nyc ee tege 17 Decimal separator ele EXPONE suolo vete reine 210 Default values Dico EEA 127 reg Mee 169 Deleting Settings Tiles 130 EI Ee E 130 Delta markers IST une ee heats a ee eects 212 Demodulation Advanced m 196 B ndwidth m P E 55 Compensation eene 193 194 Configuration Estimation points per symbol 198 MIO 123 Normalization ucc nr rere tenens 197 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 R amp S FSW K70 Index Offset EV Ml eins nito ari ene Reb etd 200 mecnm 89 Remote Synchronization sss 196 199 Diagram footer information sss 14 Differential input Analog Baseband B71 remote control 324 Analog Baseband GB 157 Differential PSK DPSK Symbol Mapping rn intente 73 DiglConf Softkey see also R amp S DiglConf 155 Digital Baseband Interface B17 Aput Settings ertet eterne 153 Input status remote ssssssssssssssssss 321 Digital UO Bandwidths nente erre Input connection information Se leif dn iet eee diente an kia Sample rates et
18. Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following e complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and Q values interleaved and Q are unitless real Real number unitless polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or float64 DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter A 7 2 Q Data Binary File on page 480 The following data types are allowed e int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data 10at32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 478 R amp S9FSW K70 Annex UO Data File Format iq tar Element ScalingFactor Description Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary UO data itself has no unit To get an I Q sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value ofthe ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor m
19. Annex R amp S9FSW K70 Predefined Standards and Settings e ge IeAe s WO4 ous e Jo eujeu pJepuejs euj WO sJeyllp 11 aal pepi oJd si spueuuuioo Jowa Jo 1ejeureJed Le UL x WL 219 Wopz we Jojuo2 MSdO dOO 338 0 sung 0001 SUIS HeH ZHN Jesyuo 9IZ I 9UON jeyeN 009 e Jojuo2 dg 339 0 sung 0001 0 Ou ZH 009 Sda 9IZ Joy 4 seaw obuey u16ue ulayed sang Jet Bug dem x Idd uonenjeaq jueuiuBiv ynsey ulayed 10 Q2ue9S 104 YOIeAS 1g eydiy jusueJJ 9je1joqui S uonenpow pyepuejs Jopjo4 455 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 R amp S FSW K70 Annex Predefined Measurement and Tx Filters A 3 Predefined Measurement and Tx Filters A 3 1 A 3 2 Measurement Filters The most frequently required measurement and TX filters required for vector signal analysis according to digital standards are provided by the R amp S FSW VSA application For general information on the use of these filters see chapter 4 1 Filters and Band widths During Signal Processing on page 54 Transmit Filters The transmit filters required for common standards are predefined in the VSA application Table 1 2 Overview of predefined Transmit filters RC Raised cosine RRC Root raised cosine Gauss Gauss filter GMSK Gauss filter convolved with a rectangular filter typically used for MSK Linearized GMSK EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape Standard specific fi
20. Start 3 sym Stop 203 sym Start 3 sym Stop 203 sym D Yector I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw a Sea Stop 5 13 09 30 16 Solution These spikes are usually uncritical and are caused by zero transitions in the 1 Q Plane Question The y axis unit for the spectrum of the measurement signal can be chosen to be dB What level is this relative to Answer Spectrum Reallmag Meas amp Ref calculates the FFT of the result Reallmag Meas amp Ref Reallmag Meas amp Ref has the unit none In this case none means the measured sig nal has been scaled such that it matches the ideal corresponding reference signal as well as possible The reference signal in turn is scaled such that max abs at symbol instants 1 0 Question How can I get the demodulated symbols of all my GSM bursts in the capture buffer in remote control Answer Use the following remote commands SENSel DDEMod PRESet GSM NB Load the GSM standard SENSe1 DDEMod RLENgth 10000 SYM Enlarge the capture buffer length such that all the bursts you want to demodulate can be seen within the capture buffer INITiatel CONTinuous OFF Go to single sweep mode ur MlM User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 279 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Obtaining Technical Support SENSe1l SWEep COUNt 0 Set the Statistic Count to Auto mode INITiatel IMMediate Do single sweep SENSe1l SWEep COUNt CURRen
21. 9 A J P A Input and Frontend Settings X Axis Scaling For statistics a histogram is displayed For these diagrams the x axis can be configured as well Adjust Settings X Axis Scaling Adjusts the x axis scaling to the occurring statistical values Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 335 Default Settings X Axis Scaling Resets the x and y axis scalings to their preset values for the current measurement window Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet on page 335 Quantize X Axis Scaling Defines the number of bars to be displayed in the graph i e the granularity of classifi cations Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X BCOunt on page 336 X Axis Reference Value X Axis Scaling Defines a reference value on the x axis in the current unit Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RVALue on page 337 X Axis Reference Position X Axis Scaling Defines the position of the X Axis Reference Value on the x axis The position is defined as a percentage value where 0 refers to the beginning left side 100 refers to the end right side of the diagram The x axis is adapted so that the reference value is dis played at the reference position Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe
22. M 15 Result length So Display d BO dat p QAM modulation is Range S eC User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 R amp S FSW K70 Index Result range let 120 192 Alignment known data 123 Configuratio sessie adenina aaa adia 190 Defining Definition E E Demodulation process sssssseese 90 DiSplaY e aa 118 Evaluating Length ineo rete 119 191 pur C M 192 Overlapping 2 adiac e H R 191 acc deve 355 Run In out 120 III pe ohn 180 Results Retrieving remote sssessssesses 409 Updating the display esses 181 Updating the display remote 374 Result Summary COnTGQUIATION e 48 Display points per symbol sssssesess 122 Evaluations ps Formule e Formulae FSK EE 466 Result type rere te eee ert 46 Result type Display iri 14 Transformation ss Window configuration esse 218 Result types Bit error rate BER esses 21 Capture Duffer irsini e Eee cereis 16 Channel Frequency Response Magnitude 23 Channel Group Delay Constellation Frequency sss 24 Constellation VQ EE 25 Constellation UO Rotated Equalizer aii
23. e colored bar Result Range in a range where you expect the signal to have the set modulation See part 2 yes mm ES Try to increase Run In and Run Out in the Signal Description gt Signal Structure dialog Is your signal bursted Is Sync prefers more valid symbols displayed in the status bar yes his can be problematic If you have a pattern you can try to use it for synchronization i e use the setting Coarse Synchronization Pattern Demodulations Advanced dialog ad Normalize EVM to con Constckolon Power EstiationPoins sim_ jj Aso en an you increase the length burst possibly larger of your Result Range Is your Increase the Result Range to at least 8xModulation Order gS o back to Do you transmit uncor related random bits on the physical level s your Result Range large than 8xModulation Order e g 8x4 32 for QPSK no Hard to find the origin of the problem It might be that Your DUT suffers from massive impairments Your DUT suffers from a severe symbol rate error The adjacent channel power is very high User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 263 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement no From 1 Is your signal bursted yes Explanation of Error
24. eee einen enint nnns 89 e Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Error 101 e Measurement Rangos EE 117 e Display Points vs Estimation Points per Gwvmbol AA 121 e Known Data Files Dependencies and HResirtctons 122 VSA in MSRA Operating Mod rini dti e deer cete Euer as 124 4 1 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing This section describes the used filters in vector signal analysis with an R amp S FSW as well as the bandwidth after each filter The relevant filters for vector signal analysis are shown in figure 4 1 IQ Demodulation Bandwidth Bandwidth Optional Fe KR E mg Measurement Fiar E e Vos Baseband Analog Section Digital Hardware Section DSP Section Fig 4 1 Block diagram of bandwidth relevant filters for vector signal analysis e After the IF Filter only for RF input operation bandwidth 40 MHz e After the digital hardware section The phase and amplitude distortions of the IF filter have been compensated for Usually the UO data has a usable bandwidth of about 0 8 sample rate For details refer to chapter 4 1 1 I D Bandwidth on page 55 The I Q data s sample rate and bandwidth are automatically adjusted to the set sym bol rate For most modulated signals even the smallest allowed value for the sample User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 54 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics D M O AX C A VEHK ee Filters and Ban
25. 07 265 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Explanation of Error Messages 1 Clrw FEI EXT 01 04 2010 gm Start 0 sym xs Stop 3000 sym RT EXT 01 04 2010 ded REF 14 43 12 Fig 10 4 Example for measurement on complete burst capture Solution Change the trigger settings or increase the result length Note however that in this case the results are actually correct and the message can be ignored e The settings do not match the signal In order to allow you to select certain bursts the burst search only searches for bursts that have a length between Min Length and Max Length plus a tolerance that you can set in the Burst Search Dialog In case the burst is e g shorter than the Burst Min Length the burst search fails Mag CapBuf Modulation amp Signal Description Modulation Signal Description Signal Type Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst Min Length C 200 sym JP 738 462 Max Length 800 sym 21 108 m Start 0 sym Stop 1300 sym Run In S sym 11 077 te 3 sym B OZ Fig 10 5 Example for a failed burst search due too a burst that is too short User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 266 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Explanation of Error Messages Solution try one of the following Switch on the Magnitude Capture Buffer result display Move a marker to the start of the bu
26. P s eG s Overview of the Demodulation Process modulation scheme and transmit filter The I Q pattern search can also be referred to as the UO waveform An UO pattern is considered detected if the correlation metric i e the correlation value between the ideal UO pattern and capture buffer exceeds a specified I Q Correlation Threshold see I O Correlation Threshold on page 184 If the burst search is switched on the UO pattern search only searches the UO pattern in bursts previously detected by the burst search Furthermore it only finds the first UO pattern within each burst If the burst search is switched off the UO pattern search searches for the UO pattern in the entire capture buffer The first detected pattern in the capture buffer for the current pattern search settings is indicated by a green line in the preview area of the Pattern Search configuration dialog box see chapter 5 7 2 Pattern Search on page 183 Information Selected pattern for Search GSM_TSCO Pattern Found S Preview Preview Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Predefined Patterns Common standards usually have predefined pattern lists with standard specific patterns Patterns required for the current measurement can be selected from this list This list can be extended by patterns that are already available in the instrument Newly created pat terns can also be added to the list 4 4 3 Demodulation and Symbo
27. Parameters Value numeric value Range 0 1 dB to 100 dB RST 10 dB Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Auto ID Threshold on page 148 Mixer Settings The following commands are required to configure the band and specific mixer settings SENS amp MIXer FREG ency HANDOV E 1 eteee eret esac enitn ey haa A Ra par rav a Rad Roe Ea nal 310 SENSe MIXerFREQuerncy S TARU 2 roit teinte reete EENEG 310 ISENGe Mixer ER Ouenc GTOP nnne nene ssss na nana iaa s asi r assa sss a saa aan nnns 310 SENSe MIXer HARMonicBANDIPRESl 1 2 22 reet Letter pedea deae uou Elek EES 310 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue 2 eiecit eene i avun itta seien EEN 311 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATE 0 cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee eren enhn enne str nnne r nnn enn 311 SENSe MIXer HARMonIcGHIGPB VAL 2 1 eruit dedo n na deno g e d e 312 SENSE MI Xe HARMONie bd 312 SENSE Ke LE LOW EE 312 EK e E 313 SENSe MIXerEOSS TABLE MIGH TEE 313 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW cente tette teneret tette 313 EEUU RA N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 309 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA IGENSeIMigerLOSst LO 313 SENS amp IMIXS T PORT n 314 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange S TATe inicie aa iiaa aiat 314 SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover Frequency This command defines the frequency at which th
28. State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier option B24 on page 143 See Input Settings on page 162 Configuring the Attenuation INPUEATTOnDBUAtioE cire eise rores Eege EE SEENEN 332 d otis e umani po 333 dez UEM 333 INPUUEATTSAU TD eeh genee Ee reg reru eo vu vex Ed Eege ge a 334 leie WEN ENEE 334 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If an electronic attenuator is available and active the command defines a mechanical attenuation see INPut EATT STATe on page 334 E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 332 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA PREGA COUC JQ U e Configuring VSA If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This function is not available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the refer
29. seessseessse 199 200 Loading Recording TOO orent eege 234 Symbol decisions ecoute gek tre rer enn 95 tele lie KEEN 233 L Limit lines Current mean peak values eessseess 216 Default cene Se 216 Enabling 216 Modulation accuracy 215 Peak search 214 Values 216 Values checking 217 Limits GCONMQUMIAGE PCT 241 Defining remote 388 Modulation Accuracy eg 241 Retrieving check results remote 425 Linear average ont mc ege 468 Lines Limit CHECKING ie erts 215 LO Level External Mixer B21 seese Level External Mixer B21 remote control Loading Functions Settings files Lower Level Hysteresis slc M E 205 Low ISI filters Frequency response esee 472 M Magnitude Formula sieer eginera d rd dE 462 Magnitude absolute Res lt type 2 onde ep ott e cete dads 39 Magnitude Absolute Result tyDe 2 idc pete pede re cete Bide 39 498 R amp S FSW K70 Index Magnitude error Definition E 103 Formula sis Result tyDG ent tt nie tre 42 RMS peak formulae sssssseesseessesssreeseeeseee 465 466 Magnitude Overview Absolute Result type 3 en ei eren eere 40 Magnitude Relative Ixesult type ride reti e rper 41 Mapping see Symbol Mapping eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeees 68 Mapping wizard mapwi
30. 100 101 110 111 tion MSB LSB Phase shift 0 45 90 135 180 225 270 315 M User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 74 R amp S9FSW K70 Table 4 5 D8PSK GRAY Measurement Basics mmm M ed Symbol Mapping Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indica 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 tion MSB LSB Phase shift 0 45 135 90 270 315 225 180 Table 4 6 D8PSK VDL Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indica 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 tion MSB LSB Phase shift 0 45 135 90 315 270 180 225 4 3 4 Rotating Differential PSK Modulation Phase differential modulation is frequently combined with an additional phase shift e g T 4 DQPSK 11 4 phase shift modulation differential modulated 4PSK The logical mapping diagram corresponds to the diagram for DPSK The physical constellation diagram shows the symbol decision points obtained after ISI free demodulation Fig 4 23 Constellation diagram for 77 4 DQPSK including the symbol mapping for APCO25 Phase 2 NADC NATURAL PDC PHS TETRA and TFTS the 77 4 rotation is already compensated for Table 4 7 7 4 DQPSK NADC PDC PHS TETRA Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00
31. 51 Vector 51 Bit Error Rate BER A bit error rate BER measurement compares the transmitted bits with the determined symbol decision bits BER error bits number of analyzed bits As a prerequisite for this measurement the VSA application must know which bit sequen ces are correct i e which bit sequences may occur This knowledge must be provided as a list of possible data sequences in xml format which is loaded in the VSA application see chapter 4 8 Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions on page 122 Auxiliary tool to create Known Data files An auxiliary tool to create Known Data files from data that is already available in the VSA application is provided on the instrument free of charge See To create a Known Data file using the recording tool for sequences on page 234 If such a file is loaded in the application the BER result display is available Available for source types Modulation Accuracy T User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 21 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays b_i Result Types in VSA Note that this measurement may take some time as each symbol decision must be com pared to the possible data sequences one by one The BER measurement is an indicator for the quality of the demodulated signal High BER values indicate problems such as e inadequate demodulation settings e poor quality in the source data e false or missing sequences
32. MEAS with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 219 Note that for very large numbers of samples 225000 the samples are mapped to 25000 trace points using an autopeak detector for display Thus this result display is not suitable to detect transient effects or analyze individual symbols closely For these purposes use the Magnitude Absolute result display instead The Magnitude Overview Absolute is only available for the source type e Capture Buffer 1 Mag Overview CaptureBuffer 1 Clrw 220000 sym Fig 3 13 Result display Magnitude Overview Absolute for capture buffer data Restrictions Note the following restrictions that apply to this result display e Only one trace is available e Only the trace modes Clear Write and View are available See also chapter 6 1 Trace Settings on page 206 EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 40 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 23 Result Types in VSA Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL CBUF to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM MOV to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 Magnitude Relative Magnitude of the source signal the signal amplitude is scaled to t
33. Peak max MAG ERR n T User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 466 R amp SS9FSW K70 Annex Formulae FSK Deviation Error A A err m A gas Ager B z I Aa A ERR A Estimated FSK deviation error Hz FSK Measurement Deviation A meas B A per A MEAS Estimated FSK deviation of the meas signal Hz FSK Reference Deviation FSK reference deviation as entered by the user Hz AREF Carrier Frequency Error C h _ fo 2 7 The carrier frequency error of the measured signal Hz Carrier Frequency Drift D fa fa 2 2 T The drift in the carrier frequency of the measured signal Hz Sym A 6 3 Statistical Evaluations for the Result Summary The statistical evaluations in the result summary are based on the measurement results that are displayed in the Current column Hence the index m here represents the current evaluation M is the total number of evaluations In single sweep mode M core sponds to the statistics count If the measurement values are represented in the logarithmic domain the linear values are averaged The result is then subsequently converted back into logarithmic domain The linear values are indicated by the subscript lin in chapter A 6 2 1 PSK QAM and MSK Modulation on page 465 Mathematical expression Calculation in R amp S FSW Mean 2 DR Uh 1 x 5 XM A Xn Xm Xu Mo M with Xo 0 Peak Au Xa Xy Xy if Ix gt xi
34. SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO SENS DDEMod MFILter NAME eene nnne ea aiaia trennen entren trennen nnne SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER ceccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeerecaeeceesenecaeseaecesesaeecaeceecaeseaeetesanseeeseneeeeneeenteeas SENSe DDEMod MFILter S TATe inais aaia nnne rne tret rennen nennen ISENSeDDEModcMSk kObRMat dee eec ene etd edlen andaa obe na Le de ai a tpa a Ea dme rio Da Ee Roa det daa dnd SENS DDEMod NORMal ZE ADboop nne nenne treten trennen inni IEN Ge IDDEModNObRMaltze CDR SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CHANnel essent e tnter inniti trennen enne SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERTor esses erret nnne tnr inneren SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQIMbalance IEN Ge IDDEModNObRMaltzeOOFtsel nemen eene nennen nre nnns SENSe DDEMod NORMalize SRERTOr essent tne trennen tnnt nnne n nennen IGENSGe IDDEModNORMalzelvAL ue SENSe DDEMOd OP Timizatioll 2 i ooo dept teeth ner tuac sette de doa Ped ebd a a esa iaie Aaaa di det ctm d SEENEN SENSe BDEMOG PRATO titan th De ed d a e dude ae Di ede paso ugue dd de IEN Ge IDDEMod PREGeCHRL EVel nennen rennen rennen trennen nennen enne SENSe DDEMOd PRESeERLDEWVeOl 2 En espe cte rre ee E S A EE ER dna SEAT DEA VR gud SENSe DDEMod PRESet S TANdard esses enne enne enne nennen nnns nnne SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat SENSe DDEMod PSK NS Tate nennen rennen erret trr erret erin
35. The estimation of the distortion parameters listed previously is performed separately for the magnitude and phase frequency distortions as illustrated in figure 4 62 It is noted that the estimation of the timing offset is performed only on the frequency of the signal as the reference magnitude is assumed to be constant over the estimation range For details on the estimation range see Estimation ranges on page 102 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 114 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Compute Reference Waveform Estimate Timing Ref deviation Carrier offset Carrier drift Compute d Meas H Frequency i Filter DO aas MEAS R Measured Signal Estimate Gain Amp droop Compute Magnitude Fig 4 62 FSK Estimation Strategy In figure 4 62 MEAS n denotes the sampled complex baseband measured signal waveform The magnitude samples are denoted Aye s n while the instantaneous fre quency samples of the measured and reference signals are denoted by fugas n and fage n respectively The dashed outline of the Meas Filter block indicates that this operation is optionally de activated based on the corresponding user settings see Type on page 202 For the estimation of the magnitude parameters the following least squares criterion is minimized 2 Cy K a X Auzas boer with respect to the model parameters K and a where Tg denotes the sampling pe
36. lt BiasSetting gt numeric value RST 0 0A Default unit A Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BIAS 3A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 148 See Write to CVL table name gt on page 149 See Bias on page 152 SENSe CORRection CVL CATAlog This command queries all available conversion loss tables saved in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory on the instrument This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Usage Query only LSS SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 315 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA aa M M uM M Ma Configuring VSA SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr This command deletes the selected conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 318 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL CLE Usage Event Manual operation See Delete Table on page 150 SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent Text This command defines a comment for the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 318 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed
37. to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 Impulse Response Phase The Impulse Response Phase is the derivation of the Impulse Response Magnitude E M User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 37 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Result Types in VSA 4 ImpRespPhas Equalizer Start 5 sym Stop 5 sym Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM UPH to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 3 2 20 Impulse Response Real Imag The Real Imag diagram of the impulse response is a stem diagram It displays the filter characteristics in the time domain for both the and the Q branches individually Using this information the equalizer is uniquely characterized and can be recreated by other applications 1 Real ImpRespReallmag Equalizer 1 Imag ImpRespReallmag Equalizer Available for source types e Equalizer EEUU EA I User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 38 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 21 Result Types
38. 4 D D 1 1 D 4 D D D 1 D e zm zm mm zm mm d a zm zm mm zm L ee ee gp apnyiubepy eee ee ee EE T Eri eee EC Eed 80 06 08 0 4 0 2 100 f ymbol Frequency in Formulae APCO25 H CPM D D q 4 2 2 pBp 2 2 24 2 2 2 2 22 2Bp 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2224 2 2 2 2 2 2p 2 22 24 20 FETT EE DEET EE TEE E e 4 2 2 R 4 J7 Jg Pessac gp apnyiubeyy de shades niin dodi Jee Mitis icc acci eet deer eendeiteg dace viet 80 100 12 14 16 18 kp 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 Frequency in APC 025 H DQPSK q 4 2 pBp 2 2 2 2Q4 2 2 2 22 Bp 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 22 24 2 2 2 2 2p 2 2 2 4 20 DH DH DH eee eee eee eee ee TTT D D D DH D D D 1 1 D D D 4 1 D 1 D D 1 4 D D 1 D 1 D 4 D 1 D D 1 D 4 1 1 D D D 4 1 1 D D 1 D D 4 D 1 D 1 D 4 D 1 D D D D DH DH D DH D DH DH r AL wm zm wm zm sl e zm sm zm ss zm wb a wm wm zm mm zm d a mm zm zm mm zm sa zm wm zm dh ss a wm zm mm mm zm sl mm zm mm zm zm ss kb e zm zm mm zm mm d a mm zm mm mm FETT D D D DH r VU H H 1 1 1 D 1 ee ce N DU 100 8p apnyufeyy 0 8 04 06 0 2 fsymbol Frequency in CDMA2000 1X Forward q 2 4 2 2 pBp 2 2 24 2 2 2 2 2B 2 20 4 2
39. DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 354 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 353 ENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 354 ENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 355 Delete Deletes the selected patterns Any existing assignments to other standards are removed Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DELete on page 354 Pattern details Pattern details for the currently focussed pattern are displayed at the upper right hand side of the dialog box You can refer to these details for example when you want to add a new pattern to the standard and want to make sure you have selected the correct one Pattern Search On If enabled the VSA application searches for the selected pattern This setting is identical to the setting in the Pattern Search dialog box see Enabling Pattern Searches on page 184 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 352 Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct If enabled measurement results are only displayed and are only averaged if a valid pattern has been found When measuring signals that contain a pattern and are averaged over several measurements it is recommended that you enable this option so that erro neous measurements do not affect the result of averaging Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE on page 352 5 7 4 Pattern Definition New patter
40. Manual operation See Mixer S N on page 152 Programming Example Working with an External Mixer This example demonstrates how to work with an external mixer in a remote environment It is performed in the Spectrum application in the default layout configuration Note that without a real input signal and connected mixer this measurement will not return useful results Jem Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON LL M User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 318 Configuring VSA Configuring basic mixer behavior Set the LO level of the mixer s LO port to 15 dBm SENS MIX LOP 15dBm Set the bias current to 1 mA SENS MIX BIAS LOW 1mA eer Configuring the mixer and band settings Use band V to full possible range extent for assigned harmonic 6 SENS MIX HARM BAND V SENS MIX RFOV ON Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Use a 3 port mixer type SENS MIX PORT 3 Split the frequency range into two ranges cange 1 covers 47 48 GHz GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 average conv loss of 20 dB range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS LOW 20dB S
41. Off and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe SWAPiq on page 341 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency for analog baseband input For real type baseband input or Q only the center frequency is always 0 Hz User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 157 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Note If the analysis bandwidth to either side of the defined center frequency exceeds the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the maximum frequency 40 MHz 80 MHz an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency or the analysis bandwidth Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 329 5 5 1 5 Probe Settings Probes are configured in a separate tab on the Input dialog box which is displayed when you select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then Input Source Config Input Source Power Sensor Probes Probe I Name RT ZS30 Serial Number 1410 4309 02 E Not Present Part Number 101241 Type Single Ended Microbutton Action Run Single For each possible probe connector Baseband Input Baseband Input Q the detected type of probe if any is displayed The following information is provided for each con nected probe e Probe name e Serial number e R amp S part number e Type of probe Differential Single Ended For more information on using probes with an R amp S FSW see the R amp S FSW User Manual For general
42. PHASE yas t PHASE prr t This measurement parameter is of great importance for MSK modulation measurements The phase error should not be confused with the error vector phase The error vector phase is the absolute phase of the error vector see figure 4 55 The effects of the different modulation errors in the transmitter on the result display of the analyzer are described in the next topics All diagrams show the equivalent complex baseband signal Modulation Error Ratio MER The modulation error ratio MER is closely related to EVM MER 20 log EVM where the EVM is normalized to the mean reference power Symbol Rate Error SRE The symbol rate error SRE describes the difference between the defined reference symbol rate and the currently measured symbol rate in relation to the reference symbol rate The value is given in parts per million ppm SR meas U SRret SRrer SRE Currently the SRE is only calculated for PSK QAM and User QAM modulation and only if compensation for SRE is activated see chapter 5 9 1 Demodulation Compensa tion on page 193 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 104 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Example For a defined symbol rate of SRge 1 MHz and a measured symbol rate of SRweas 999 9 kHz the symbol rate error is SRE 999 9 1000 1000 1 000 000 ppm 100 ppm UO Offset Origin Offset Quadrature Fig 4 56 Effect of an UO or
43. R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Signal Capture Table 5 2 Assignment of general purpose bits to LVDS connector pins Bit LVDS pin GPO SDATA4_P Trigger1 GP1 SDATA4_P Trigger2 GP2 SDATAO P Reserve GP3 SDATA4_P Reserve2 GP4 SDATAO P Marker1 GP5 SDATAA P Marker2 Remote command TRIG SOUR GPO see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 346 Trigger Level Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 345 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower on page 345 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 344 For analog baseband B7 1 or digital baseband B17 input only TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 344 Trigger Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep The time may be entered in s or in symbols offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for zero span e g UO Analyzer application and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretriggermax sweep time When using the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See table 4 2 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIMI GI on page
44. Signal Capture MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the VSA application in MSRA mode define the application data extract and analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Capture Length Seung oc cic cceet cesses cdeedesaicectagseeetendectsdasentuadeeeadeteaeesadecesdeetessaceees 172 Sc TT 172 Maximum Sne le n EE 172 Usable VG Bandwidth rt hn tern et ibt e di dr ids 173 SiL Mp 173 Capture Length Settings The capture length defines how many symbols are captured during each measurement Enable the Auto option to define the capture length automatically according to the burst and pattern length settings and the statistics count Thus a minimal capture length is used which improves performance If the capture length is not defined automatically enter the number of symbols or seconds to be captured and select the used unit The defined number is converted to the alterna tive unit seconds symbols for reference As of firmware version 1 70 up to 64000 samples can be captured and processed during each measurement previously 50000 Remote command SENSe DDEMod RLENgth AUTO on page 340 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue on page 340 Sample Rate Defines the number of samples to captu
45. Symbol Mapping on page 68 Remote command SENSe DDEMod FORMat on page 296 Load User Modulation Modulation Type This function is only available if the modulation type User Modulation is selected Opens a file selection dialog box to select the file that contains the user defined modu lation vam file For details on user defined modulation files see chapter 4 3 11 User defined Modula tion on page 88 Remote command SENS DDEM FORM UQAM see SENSe DDEMod FORMat on page 296 SENSe DDEMod USER NAME on page 301 Modulation Order Depending on the Modulation Type various orders of modulation are available Type Available orders PSK BPSK 3Pi 4 QPSK Pi 8 D8PSK QPSK 8PSK DQPSK Offset QPSK 3Pi 8 8PSK Pi 4 DQPSK Pi 4 QPSK D8PSK MSK MSK DMSK QAM 16QAM Pi 4 32QAM 256QAM Pi 4 16QAM 64QAM 512QAM 32QAM 128QAM 1024QAM FSK 2FSK 4FSK 8FSK User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 135 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration SSS ss oe m o n gn Signal Description Type Available orders ASK 2ASK 4ASK APSK 16APSK 32APSK Remote command PSK SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat on page 298 SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate on page 298 SENSe DDEMod QPSK FORMat on page 299 MSK SENSe DDEMod MSK FORMat on page 298 QAM SENSe DDEMod QAM FORMat on page 298 SENSe DDEMod QAM NSTate on page
46. TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ALL on page 369 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 205 R amp S FSW K70 Analysis Trace Settings 6 Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers windows etc can be con figured via the Analysis button in the Overview They are identical to the analysis functions in the base unit except for the special window functions Window specific configuration The settings in the Analysis dialog box are specific to the selected window Thus the Analysis button is only available in the Overview if the Specifics for option is enabled To configure the settings for a different VSA window select the window outside the dis played dialog box or select the window from the Specifics for selection list in the dialog box EN TEE 206 e race Export GOEN co dee e Fate Fen pae Ead he e ao Re Ea idee 209 o MIKO ci DIL 210 e Modulation Accuracy Limit ET 215 e Display and Window ConfIgureatloH 2 2 ri nior idee it sette E eed rene 217 UE ZOOM FUNCIONS E 220 6 1 Trace Settings The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed in the window Depending on the result display between 1 and 6 traces may be displayed Trace settings can be configured via the TRACE key in the Traces dialog box or in the vertical Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box Trace data can also be exported to an ASCII file for fu
47. The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 213 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level LSS SSS Sra User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 385 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA LEG T d J v Mew Analysis If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 214 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 213 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 213 See Search Next Minimum on page 215 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 213 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level I
48. active differential active single ended Usage Query only SSS N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 328 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA 11 5 2 6 Frequency SENSeJFREQuericy GENT er dise ien cncadaveneeducuedessesscdvccvaneacdedachtanededesseneedevesas 329 I SENSeJFREQU erncy CENTGEISSTEP iius cut repete ed Hee corner dn pna cea o ep De E SE 329 IGENSelEREOuency CENTer STERPAUTO teet tet tette ttt 330 SENSE FREQU nt OFF Sef cni en rne tente rne ore e ESL Ke AEN E Ee 330 SENSe FREQuency CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency Parameters Frequency The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center Frequency on page 157 See Center on page 159 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS FREQ UP AND SENS FREQ DOWN commands see SENSe FREQuenc
49. 06 08 12 14 16 18 Frequency in feymbol 0 4 0 2 EDGE Wide Pulse Shape H H H H H ap D Ee e mm 1 D D 1 D Bee ee ee ee 20 Tb 2 1 ee ee eer cb gp A mr mm mm ml R D T 4 42 2 R mr mm mm mm aile mm mm mr mr mm mm El mr mm mm mm mi D T 4 RAT EE EN 4 H DH DH H p 4 f ee eee eee eer pees eee eee ee eee EE EE EE ess 80 e Y apnyubeyy 1 D Frequency in 0 6 0 4 0 2 100 f ymbol R amp S FSW K70 Annex SSeS aes UO Data File Format iq tar Half Sine ee eee eee a Magnitude dB 1 4 1 1 1 1 J 1 1 1 1 1 lt 1 1 1 1 J 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 mm zm sl ss zs a ss zs zk o 0 2 04 05 08 1 12 14 1 6 1 8 2 Frequency in kat Linearized GMSK e git eee ita d Magnitude dB 0 2 204 05 08 1 12 14 1 6 1 8 2 Frequency in f symbol A 7 VQ Data File Format iq tar UO data is packed in a file with the extension ig tar An ig tar file contains UO data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the ig tar file format is to separate I Q data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the UO data in a web browser and allows you to include us
50. 3 2 10 Result Types in VSA TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 Eye Diagram Imag Q The eye pattern of the quadrature Q channel the x axis range is from 1 to 1 symbols MSK 2 to 2 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 2 Eye Q Meas amp Ref 2 sym Fig 3 6 Result display Eye Diagram Imag Q Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM QEYE to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 Eye Diagram Real I The eye pattern of the inphase lI channel the x axis value range is from 1 to 1 symbols MSK 2 to 2 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 29 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 11 Result Types in VSA 1 Eye I Meas amp Ref e iM Clrw Fig 3 7 Result display Eye Diagram Real I Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see L AYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM IEYE to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 Frequency A
51. A scrollbar beneath the input area alows you to scroll through the table for long patterns The numbers beneath the scrollbar indicate the sequential number of the following sym bols from left to right e the first symbol e the currently selected symbol e the last symbol Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 354 Symbol format Symbols Defines the format in which each symbol is defined hexadecimal decimal or binary Adding symbols Symbols Adds a new symbol in the symbol table to the left of the currently selected symbol Removing symbols Symbols Removes the currently selected symbol in the symbol table Comment Optional comment for the pattern displayed in the pattern details kept for compatibility with FSQ Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 353 Result Range Configuration The result range determines which part of the capture buffer burst or pattern is displayed For more information see chapter 4 6 Measurement Ranges on page 117 A visualization of the result display with the current settings is displayed in the visualiza tion area at the bottom of the dialog box The result range settings are displayed when you select the Cut Result Ranges button in the Overview or the Range Settings softkey in the main VSA menu _L_L________ MN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 190 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Result
52. Constellation diagram for 2FSK NATURAL including the logical symbol mapping 4FSK With 4FSK the symbol decision is made by a frequency discriminator with 3 decision thresholds 2 3 0 2 3 normalized to the FSK reference deviation EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 78 Symbol Mapping 1 3 1 3 Fig 4 26 Constellation diagram for 4FSK NATURAL including the logical symbol mapping Symbol Numbers EE 1 3 Fig 4 27 Constellation diagram for 4FSK GRAY including the logical symbol mapping Symbol Numbers EE 1 3 Fig 4 28 Constellation diagram for 4FSK for APCO C4FM and APCO Phase 2 including the logical symbol mapping R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Symbol Mapping 8FSK NATURAL Fig 4 29 Constellation diagram for 8FSK NATURAL including the logical symbol mapping 4 3 7 Minimum Shift Keying MSK MSK modulation causes modulation dependent phase shifts of 90 which can be shown in an Constellation I Q diagram As with PSK demodulation is performed by eval uation of the phase positions Table 4 12 MSK NATURAL Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 0 1 Phase shift 90 90 Table 4 13 MSK GSM Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 0 1 Phase shift 90 90 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 80 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Symbol Mappin
53. Digital Q on page 176 RST IMMediate TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 347 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 175 See Free Run on page 175 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 175 See IF Power on page 176 See Baseband Power on page 176 See 1 Q Power on page 176 See Digital UO on page 176 11 5 5 Configuring Sweeps The sweep commands define how often data from the input signal is acquired and then evaluated Manual configuration of the sweeps is described in chapter 5 6 3 Sweep Settings on page 178 SENSegDDEMod SEARCh MBU RSEGALGC erri ore e enun Ret dRRddx dE 348 SENSe SWEep COUNI VALue eccentric 348 ISENSe TSWEep COUNEGURREeril E 349 SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURst CALC lt SelResRangeNr gt Sets the result range to be displayed after a single sweep e g a burst number Setting parameters lt SelResRangeNr gt numeric value Range 1 to 1000000 RST 1 Default unit NONE Manual operation See Select Result Rng on page 180 SENSe SWEep COUNt VALue lt SweepCount gt This command sets the statistics count For more information see Statistic Count on page 180 Setting parameters lt SweepCount gt numeric value 0 activates Auto mode numeric value gt 0 Activates Manual mode and sets the
54. FSW K70 Annex Formulae Gauss ETSI TS 100 959 V8 3 0 Filter Type Setting Parameter Impulse Response Raised cosine RC Alpha a E sin T cos T h t i 2 1 42 T T Root raised cosine Alpha a in 1 T RRC cos a ya T D h t 4o SCH Dap Gat Ty Gaussian filter BT App Standard Specific Filters A 6 6 1 Transmit filter EDGE Tx filter ETSI TS 300 959 V8 1 2 Linearized GMSK 3 3 5 7 fr o lt tssT 087 i 0 0 EE Oe E Jaco S 0 g t zi 0 3 Zu E else for else O lt t lt 4T fo 47 lt t lt 8T t 37 2 037 Zell User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 469 Formulae 2 Leide o 5 C t is the impulse response of the EDGE transmit filter A 6 6 2 Measurement Filter EDGE Measurement filters RC filter Alpha 0 25 single side band 6 dB bandwith 90 kHz Windowing by multi plying the impulse response according to the following equation 0x 1 5r w t 10 PONE Lsry23sr 1 57 lt lt 3 75T 0 EC The following figure shows the frequency response of the standard specific measurement filters EDGE HSR Narrow Pulse Magnitude dB DH 1 D DH DH D D DN D 1 1 D DH D DH b D D 02 04 06 O86 1 12 14 16 18 2 Frequency in f symbol Formulae EDGE HSR Wide Pulse 20 Am mm mm mm ale E gp apnyubepy 100 0 8 0 6 0 4
55. Message ing section describes error messages and possible causes Burst Not Found Pattern Not Found Result Alignment Failed Pattern Search On But No Pattern Selected Pattern Not Entirely Within Result Range Short Pattern Pattern Search Might Fail Sync Prefers More Valid Symbols Sync Prefers Longer Pattern Result Ranges Overlap User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 264 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Explanation of Error Messages Message Burst Not Found The Burst Not Found error message can have several causes Burst search is active but the signal is not bursted c Start 0 sym 18 03 2016 09 53 45 Fig 10 1 Example for active burst search with continuous signal Solution Select Continuous Signal as the signal type For more information see Signal Type on page 139 Signal is bursted but bursts have not been captured completely The burst search can only find bursts that start and end within the capture buffer It ignores bursts that are cut off C Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw G irw Start 0 sym Fig 10 2 Example for incomplete burst capture Solution Change the trigger settings and or enlarge the capture length For more information see chapter 5 6 Signal Capture on page 171 The current measurement is being performed on a burst that has not been captured completely EE User Manual 1173 9292 02
56. Overview of the Demodulation Process Patter Symbol Check Settings 2 3 0 0 1 3 2 2 3ToToT 1312 DISSI rer Fig 4 48 Pattern Symbol Check algorithm The Equalizer A possible source of high modulation errors of the DUT with PSK and QAM signals is a non flat frequency response or ripple in frequency response within the modulation band width This could be caused by the DUT s e Analog filter sections e Digital filter sections if a shortened filter length is used e Digital arithmetic sections if a shortened bit length is used R amp S9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Overview of the Demodulation Process Analyzer DUT Meas Demodulation TX Analog 8 MEAG IQ Meas Filter Filter Filter Signal Error of Transfer Function Fig 4 49 General processing in the modulation and demodulation stages An equalizer filter with a reverse frequency response characteristic is able to compensate less distorted frequency responses in order to improve the modulation analysis results see figure 4 50 Analyzer PUT Meas Demodulation TX E Analog 8 N m MEAS b IQ Meas Filter Filter Filter Signal Compensation Function Error of Transfer Function Fig 4 50 Compensation of the transfer function s error by inserting an equalizer in the receive path For small distortions the reference signal can be determined correctly without pre equal ization The equalizer can be calculated by comparing the reference signal
57. RPOSition on page 337 Range per Division X Axis Scaling Defines the value range to be displayed per division on the x axis Since the display consists of 10 divisions by default the displayed range is Range 10 lt Range per Division gt Note If fewer divisions are displayed e g because the window is reduced in width the range per division is increased in order to display the same result range in the smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond to the actual display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe PDIVision on page 337 EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 169 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings 5 5 3 4 Units You can configure the units for both axes of the diagrams The unit settings are displayed when you do one of the following e Select Input Frontend from the Overview and then switch to the Unit tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Unit Config softkey Hz Res Len 0 m L e Amplitude YScale Unit X Axis Unit CH Note that unit settings are window specific as opposed to the amplitude settings E e RR 170 YAKS Tt E M Muu US 170 X Axis Unit Defines the unit of the x axis in the current result diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt X UNIT TIME on page 337 Y Axis Unit Defines the unit of the y axis in the current result diagram Remote command
58. STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHo EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe EVENt lt ChannelName gt E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 436 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA LECT c M H v Status Reporting System STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle lt BitDefinition gt ChannelName STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency EN
59. See Shifting the Display Offset on page 161 SENSe DDEMod PRESet RLEVel This command initiates a measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current measurement This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Usage Event INPut GAIN VALue Gain This command selects the preamplification level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 332 The command requires option R amp S FSW B24 LEES User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 331 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 5 2 8 Configuring VSA Parameters lt Gain gt 15 dB 30 dB The availability of preamplification levels depends on the R amp S FSW model e R amp S FSW8 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier option B24 on page 143 See Input Settings on page 162 INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns the preamplifier on and off The command requires option R amp S FSW B24 This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Parameters
60. Versions and Options the status of all software and hardware options installed on your instrument System Messages messages on any errors that may have occurred An xml file with information on the system configuration device footprint can be created automatically e Error Log The RSError 1og file in the log directory of the main installation direc tory contains a chronological record of errors _L_L_________ SSRIS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 280 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Eh Obtaining Technical Support e Support file a zip file with important support information can be created automat ically The zip file contains the system configuration information device footprint the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display To collect the support information 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Select Service R amp S Support and then Create R amp S Support Information The file is stored as C R_S instr user service zip Attach the support file to an e mail in which you describe the problem and send it to the customer support address for your region as listed at the beginning of the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual LSS SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 281 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Introduction 11 Remote Commands for VSA The following commands are required to perform measurements in VSA in a remote environment It assum
61. according to SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 340 To define a different number of points per symbol for display use the MANual parameter and the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe VALue command Setting parameters lt DisplayPPSMode gt AUTO MANual Manual operation RST AUTO See Display Points Sym on page 219 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 408 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 9 Retrieving Results DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe VALue lt DisplayPPS gt This command determines the number of points to be displayed per symbol if manual mode is selected see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe AUTO on page 408 This command is not available for result displays based on the capture buffer in this case the displayed points per symbol are defined by the sample rate SENSe DDEMod PRATe command Setting parameters lt DisplayPPS gt 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 1 only the symbol time instants are displayed 2 4 8 16 32 more points are displayed than symbols RST 4 Manual operation See Display Points Sym on page 219 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe SYMBol This command enables the display of the decision instants time when the signals occur red as dots on the trace Manual operation See Highlight Symbols on page 219 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis When the display update during r
62. edit existing or define new patterns For details on managing standard patterns see chapter 8 2 2 3 How to Man age Patterns on page 232 The list can be filtered using the following functions Prefix Displaying available patterns Shows only patterns that contain the specified prefix Show Compatible Show All Displaying available patterns Shows only patterns that are compatible to the selected modulation mode or all patterns regardless of the selected standard Edit Opens the Edit Pattern dialog box to edit the pattern definition See chapter 5 7 4 Pat tern Definition on page 188 For details on defining a pattern see example Defining a pattern on page 232 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 354 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 353 ENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 354 ENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 355 Save As Saves a copy of an existing pattern under a new name Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COPY on page 353 New Opens the Pattern dialog box to create a new pattern definition See chapter 5 7 4 Pattern Definition on page 188 L User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 187 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration EE Burst and Pattern Configuration For details on defining a pattern see chapter 8 2 2 2 How to Define a New Pattern on page 231 Remote command SENSe
63. esee 426 GLEN 223 Impulse response Magnitude result type ssesssssssese 37 Phase result type esses 37 Real Imag result type sse 38 Input Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 156 Configuration st Configuration remote sess 305 COPING iet e deer rie nana Coupling remote Digital Baseband Interface B17 settings 153 Overload remote ssssssssssssssseeeee 305 TE le EE 141 162 Source Analog Baseband 156 Source digital UO ES Source Configuration softkey 141 Source Configuration Softkey 141 Input Frontend E ciE M 141 Input sample rate ISR DEMHON ERE 62 66 Digital e eter tr oie een 154 Input sources Radio frequency EE 142 Installation rrr rrr tne 11 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 Intersymbol interference ISI ssssssssssss 56 Blcic P 56 ISOC System crt eret neces 57 K Keys BANDE Iesele Eege 126 Mk oL etus r LM ILE 214 MKR FUNCT not used Peak Search HI Ee ol WEE RUN SINGLE M SPAN NOUUSEG E 126 ao eric Pm Creating files 2 Dependencies restrictions ssesssse 122 Enabling s 141 Files is File Synta em Em 460 Fine synchronization
64. esses 457 YIG remote 2 Mr Fine Synchronization sessssssssee 199 Folders Digital standards sosincs iissa 129 Formulae Analytically calculated filters 468 Eval atiOn rettet tne rendent rre 462 Measurement filters esee 470 Parameters iy Result Summary parameters n s eneee 465 Result Summary parameters FSK 466 Standard specific filters Ss icu m P Trace averaging esessssssseeeene Transmit filters rro ett ertet Free Run Trigger softKeyy dire eerie 175 Frequency Absolute result type sss Configuration remote ssssesssssss Configuration softkey ges EE Ll ME Relative result type sse Frequency error Absolute result type sss 33 POMS sieeve 462 Relative result type RMS peak formulae Frequency offset 22 n eroi eet 160 Frequency response Channel result type sese 23 EDGE ters eorr e citet Ries 470 Low ISI filters err tres 472 Magnitude result type cccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeee 35 Phase result type esses 36 Frequency shift keying FSK Symbol Mapping E 78 Frontend Eeler EE 141 Co
65. limited search range are considered Remote command CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits STATe on page 387 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits LEFT on page 387 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits RIGHT on page 387 Marker Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search These functions are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu which is displayed when you press the MKR gt key Peak SEWOT ende ek 214 Search Next EE 214 Max IP ask oer t et o e b a oues 214 elei ER ld ln DE 214 ele RE GU ie Vin UI ME 215 Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 385 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 384 Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 385 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 384 Max Peak Sets the active marker delta marker to the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum APEak on page 385 Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the t
66. lt float gt 67 lt float gt float 69 float float 70 float lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt Spectrum gt IQ Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt IQ lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt A 7 2 Q Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed UO data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex samples for R amp SS9FSW K70 Annex mE CE R O UO Data File Format iq tar channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 R 2 Real sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 Q 0 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 Q 1 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 I 2 QI21 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 Phi ll Magnitude and phase part of
67. nitet EEN dee 412 FORMatDEXPORI MODE eruca x nare oe ra ca ve rera diene e eaae aera vr ener ye aiu oa 412 MMEMbRESTORSSDSST AGB eintreten SEN a aiaia a aa 412 TRADERS ENEE 412 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X ABSolute This command queries the absolute x value of the selected delta marker in the specified window The command activates the corresponding delta marker if necessary Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis SSC User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 410 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA m c rr a i Retrieving Results If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also 1NTTiate CONTinuous on page 373 Return values Result Result at the marker
68. on page 362 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc RESult on page 362 If SER lt This setting is only available if Known Data is selected for Fine Synchronization You can define a maximum symbol error rate for the known data in reference to the evaluated data Thus if a wrong file was mistakenly loaded or the file proves to be unsuitable it is not used for synchronization Otherwise the results would be strongly distorted If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit the default synchronization using the detected data is performed Remote command SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel on page 362 Offset EVM The offset EVM is only available for Offset QPSK modulated signals Unlike QPSK modulation the Q component of Offset QPSK modulation is delayed by half a symbol period against the component in the time domain The symbol time instants of the and the Q component therefore do not coincide The offset EVM controls the calculation of all results that are based on the error vector It affects the EVM Real Imag and Vector UO result displays as well as the EVM results in the Result Summary EVM and MER You can configure the way the VSA application calculates the error vector results If Offset EVM is disabled the VSA application substracts the measured signal from the reference signal to calculate the error vector This method results in the fact that the error vector contains two symbol instants per symbol period o
69. up to 5 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time GAL GOulatespn MARKerems AOFPF eei eene itane rt Ine sensed settee vecadeeeececsisidedee e 380 CAL Culate nz M Ab kercmz Nk 380 CAECulatesjs E REN EE 381 GALGulate n MARKerem t TRA irit eerte intend eee ease Ya e saevae aga petas du so Ne 381 GALGulatesns MARKerSISN EE 381 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker AO 381 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker m S TATe iieuie iudi aa iaaa d iann inan 382 CAL Cilate lt n DEL TFamarkerems TRACE ett m oreet tepore eite toner AE sili cesses 382 CAL Culateem DELETamalfkeremi X eco sce es ecc utes cepe n Fabro susto abet an acc se tanadan iniaa 382 CAECulatesg DEL LaankereqeY 9 iui aacecedes tesa odedeadu s ea eae tde ex daro Ea PELO XR CR sa REDE LD D Rma x 382 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 212 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK lt MarkerCoupling gt With this command markers between several screens can be coupled i e use the same x value All screens can be linked with the marker x value scaled in symbols or time except those showing the capture buffer If several capture buffer measurements are visible their markers are coupled too Setting parameters lt MarkerCoupling gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Couple Windows on page
70. x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See X value on page 211 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt q gt Y This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker Return values lt Value gt Usage Query only SSS SSS N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 382 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA pem SS SS SSS ES Sas Analysis 11 7 2 2 Marker Search and Positioning Settings Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings Useful commands for positioning markers described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 381 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe on page 382 Remote commands exclusive to positioning markers CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzM ANimumAbDtEak senes ness nn ns 383 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumlEEFT nnns 383 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT sre ne enne nnn aas 384 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK eeeeeseseseeee nennen 384 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzM ANimumbRlcGHt eene snnt nns 384 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimum LEET 384 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimumNENT enhn nn enses nn aas 384 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eeee
71. you must check the subregister of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a subregister always returns the result for the currently selected channel o The STATus QUEStionable register sums up the information from all subregisters The commands to query the contents of the following status registers are described in chapter 11 11 9 Querying the Status Registers on page 434 Status Reporting System g QD sogea OR of all Lits s DI DigtallQ D specific for ESW K70 13 One register for each active channel D ACPLimit SYNC SYNC BURSt 10 Marge STATus QUEStionable S YNC n T n D CALIbration UNCAL MODulation D FREQuency D FDEPeak TEMP erature D FDEMean POWer D FDECurrent STATus QUEStionable PFEMean PIOQOffset H PFECurrent MIQOfset a CIQOffset PPEsk E i RFEPask rs e PCURrent RFEMean PRHo DH RFECurrent MRHo H CRHa RPEak Gi STAT QUES MOD FSK RMEan STB IQRHo STAT QUES MOO IOR RCURrent STAT QUES MOO CFR MAGNitude STAT QUES MOO MAGN ne STAT QUES MOD PHAS STAT QUES MOD EVM STATus QUEStionable MODulation n Fig 11 2 Overview of VSA specific status registers e STATus QUEStionable SYNC lt n gt Register eese 431 e STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt Register 431 e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM Register 431 e STATus QUESTionable MODulation
72. 0 2 Frequency in f ymbol EDGE NSR Aa sm e mm mm alc a a mr e e be e mm mm mm mr de e e e mr om cb mr e e zm mm A a mm mr mm mm le e mm mm mm sc ba mm mm mm mm da mm mm mm ei Aas es ss ales bss ss keck ms de Ae mm e zm mm sie sel a ww e t af e em d 20 Ee ni zt kg Se BI Hece 8p epnyiubeyy Ae mm mm dl ss es ms ba sm mm sr o ds eck TETTETETT 90 100 fsymbol Frequency in Low Pass Narrow 20 20 esses Ae e zm mm mm all ms mr e zm zm wb mm mm mm mr mm mm d mr scht e mr eck a e ms mr mm zm er mm mm mm mr mm ll mm e mm zm sc be mm mm ms mm mm d e e mm mm FETTEN 4 amp e 2 2 2 2 24d2 2 2 2 2 2 b 2 24 Ep K Ee gp epp Bea eee eee eee eee GD bss 100 0 4 06 06 1 2 1 4 1 5 1 8 f ymbol 0 2 Frequency in Formulae Low Pass Wide 20 Ae e mm mm dl mm e a ms ba mm mm mm mm dm e mm mm mm wb a mm e e r mm mm mm mr all mm e mm zm wb e mm a mm mm d ms e e mm OA 0L L BZ O ET za eene anti bourse gp epniiuBey Ass em dl e mm e ebe me e mm de e mm e em cb mm mm a mm A a mr mm mm le e e mm sc be mm e mm mm de e mm mm ei BO L 100 14 16 18 1 2 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 Frequency in f ymbol Rectangular 20 KU Aas e mm zm zm le e ms e e be e em mm ms mr d e zm ms mr e zm cb ms wm mm a ms mr ee e mm
73. 000 000 0 00 D OL 0 0 000 000 Power 24 21 24 24 21 nels 1EVM 349 sym 451 sym Fig 3 20 Example for result summary with current EVM peak value marked If you want to compare the trace values to the results of the Result Summary make sure to match the displayed points per symbol of the trace and of the Result Summary Refer to Display Points Sym on page 219 for details SST User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 47 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays REESEN Result Types in VSA Mean value In the Mean column the linear mean of the values that are in the Current column is displayed Note that if the values are in a logarithmic representation e g the UO Offset the linear values are averaged Peak value In the Peak column the maximum value that occurred during several evaluations is displayed Note that when the value can be positive and negative e g the phase error the maximum absolute value maintaining its sign is displayed The peak value of Rho is handled differently since its minimum value represents the worst case In that case the minimum value is displayed Standard Deviation The value for the standard deviation is calculated on the linear values and then converted to the displayed unit 95 percentile The 95 percentile value is based on the distribution of the current values Since the phase error and the magnitude error can usually be assumed to be distributed around zero the 95 Pe
74. 10 xx Q 00 xx 10 xx Q 00 xx e 11 01 10 KT 5 e e 40 11 2 S e 4 ho o o So 00 0 01 00 00 10 AE eo Su d 11 xx 01 xx 11 xx 01 xx In the following diagrams the symbol mappings are indicated in hexadecimal and binary form 0 1 3 2 1100 1101 1111 1110 1000 1001 1011 1010 Fig 4 32 Constellation diagram for 16QAM GRAY including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal and binary SSS SSSR User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 82 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Symbol Mapping 1011 1001 0001 0011 1010 1000 0000 0010 e E ec e A 6 D e e D 1110 1100 0100 0110 F e D 05 7 D e e D 1111 1101 0101 0111 Fig 4 33 Constellation diagram for 16QAM including the logical symbol mapping for EDGE hexadec imal and binary 1011 1001 0010 0011 1010 1000 0000 0001 1101 1100 0100 0110 1111 1110 0101 0111 Fig 4 34 Constellation diagram for 16QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB C hexadec imal and binary 11010 11110 01011 01111 Fig 4 35 Constellation diagram for 32QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB C hexadec imal and binary User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 83 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Symbol Mapping e e e e 001000 001001 001101 001100 e e e 001010 001011 001111 001110 H H 000010 000011 000111 000110 H H H 000000 000001 000101 000100 Fig 4 36 Constellation diagram for 64QAM
75. 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 11 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters Index1 The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right corner of the screen See figure 11 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the figure above to the left Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any com bination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 401 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring the Result Dis
76. 1173 9292 02 07 290 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 4 Digital Standards Parameters lt ChannelType gt VSA VSA R amp S FSW K70 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 132 Digital Standards Various predefined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the VSA application In addition you can create your own settings files for user specific measurements Manual configuration of digital standards is described in chapter 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards on page 128 ISENGe IDDEModFACTorwVAl ue 291 SENSe DDEMod PRESet S TANdard cente tette 292 SENSe IDBEMod STANdard COMMENT ENEE EEER ENEE NERAEEESEd ertt nee SNE einen pe nnn ec 292 SENSeJDDEMod S TANdard DELele roo rennen te tna nen Supe ep RO iaaa 292 SENSe DDEMod STANdard PREset VAL ue 293 E Ee e RE NEE 293 SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue Factory This command restores the factory settings of standards or patterns for the VSA appli cation Setting parameters Factory ALL STANdard PATTern ALL Restores both
77. 187 See Comment on page 190 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COPY Pattern This command copies a pattern file The pattern to be copied must have been selected before using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 354 Tip In manual operation a pattern can be copied in the editor by storing it under a new name Setting parameters Pattern string Example DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME GSM TSCO Selects the pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC COPY GSM PATT Copies GSM TSCO to GSM PATT Usage Setting only User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 353 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA Manual operation See Save As on page 187 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DELete This command deletes a sync sequence The sync sequence to be deleted must have been selected before using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 354 Usage Event Manual operation See Delete on page 188 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA lt Data gt This command defines the sync sequence of a sync pattern The pattern must have been selected before using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 354 Important The value range of a symbol depends on the degree of modulation e g for an 8PSK modulation the value range is from 0 to 7 The degree of modulation belongs to the pattern and is set using the DDEM SEAR SYNC NST command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NST
78. 2 2 22 24 2 2 2p 2 22 24 2 2 20 D D D 1 D 4 1 D 1 D 1 1 eee eee eet D D p 4 p 4 m 4 2 2 KETTEN vie mm mm zm mr ellen e 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 d 4 RB 24 2 4 KETTER e zm zm mm ss e ms zm mm mm mm le mm mm zm zm wm slk a wm mm mm zm wm da a zm mm ms zm sc ms zm wm mm ss a mm mm mm mm ll mm mm mm p 4 Es eee B Ee e Y 80 100 gp apnyiubeyy f ymbol Frequency in Formulae CDMA2000 1X Reverse 20 T4 DEER sl wm zm zm zm zm wk e zm zm mm zm mm d e mm zm mm zm DH T U H O DH Ji 4 H mL mm mm mm eb wm wm wm e o wm a mm D T 2 2 2 24 2 d p Q4 B 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 24 pBp 2 2 2 24 wm mm mm mm wm wm le mm e mm mm mm slk o wm wm wm wed a mm mm mm eee ebore dore wb wm wm dor ETC EE 20 40 BO esce ee gp apnyiubeyy LEEFER T 4 T 1 4 80 See OTT 100 f ymbol Frequency in EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape D 4 2 1 Ee e mm p 1 D D 1 D DU ee a e wn ee mb E mm ai mm 20 E m UN ee EE Dr N 2 2 2 2 24 2 AD ae H 8p apnyufeyy T 1 4 2 2 2 2 p 2 4 pRp p 4 80 TR 4d4 R 4 24 RB 100
79. 2 53 4 30 4 3 11 User defined Modulation In addition to the modulation types defined by the standards modulation including sym bol mappings can also be defined according to user requirements In this case the mapping is defined and stored in a specific format vam file format and then loaded to the VSA application Modulation files in vam format can be defined using a mapping wizard mapwiz an auxiliary tool provided by R amp S via Internet free of charge This tool is a precompiled MATLAB file MATLAB pcode To download the tool together with a detailed description see http www rohde schwarz com search term mapwiz EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 88 Overview of the Demodulation Process 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Process K70 Kernel Settings IQ Capture Buffer Burst Search BEEBEEEEEEEEEEED optional Burst Search Settings Pattern Search Settings Reference Signal Generation Measurement Filtering optional Measurement Filter Settings Ref Signal Synchronization Demodulation Fine Estimates Settings Mess Signal Modulation amp Signal Ref Signal Description ene L Result Display Display Configuration Fig 4 44 Demodulation stages of the vector signal analysis option R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics mmE MH M
80. 206 External Mixer B21 remote control 308 Analysis interval External Mixer B21 sees 148 Configuration MSRA remote sssssse 393 Bit error rate BER MSRA tcd ora ven ri dede ee eei 172 339 Res lt type C 21 Analysis line 125 Burst GSM EDGE Configuration MSRA remote sssssse 393 Measurement example see 253 Analyzing Bursts Measured data 2 duse tenet 237 DiSplaYy M 13 APSK Length min max aS 139 Modulation type 2 euidenter gs Programming example 442 Symbol mapping Reference for result range 191 ASCII Trace export remet nnne DUE P 139 ASK Signal structure 139 Modulation type ceciderit teer tg 134 Useful length 2 ect ter tere nere 120 Symbol mapping 1 rrr cda 86 Burst search Attenuation 1 noe tnr ere Fnit gt 163 le Lei ul Auto us Auto configuration Configuration remote sssssesssssss 332 Configuration User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 494 R amp S FSW K70 Index Demodulation process s sse 90 Enabling erit tete aes tates 182 Errors E s Gap We EE 183 al CEET EN Process Remote Robustness Tolerance ees EI Eet EI C Capture buffer BE c 16 Length xi SN Na vigating WEE 251 Reference for result range
81. 212 EEUU RA MN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 380 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA El Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is currently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 211 See Marker Type on page 212 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace 1to6 Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 212 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See X value on page 211 CALCula
82. 217 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 Bit Error Rate BER EE 21 e Channel Frequency Response Magnitude esee 23 e Channel Group Delay eeeccceeeece erento erneute tnt d e ERR ane haue fada i RR 23 e Constellation E EE 24 e Constellatidm EE 25 e Constellation UO Rotated nennen nnne 26 e Error Vector Magnitude EVM 1 rient anr a estes ri Ea Dot Eder Dee 27 e Eye Diagram FIeguefioy ne eres reticere ce AEN SEENEN 28 e Eye Dagma Q sue 29 e Eye Diagram Real L ieuccieerre rrt etienne NEES ERR nnne nnn 29 e Frequency Absollite EE 30 Froguency REVO EE 32 e Frequency Error Absolute cnet ecaetete ee rennen nnne n nnne 33 e Frequency Eror EE 34 e Frequency Response Magnitudg crecer cerae uode ee nena 35 e Frequency Response Phase 36 2885000710901 is vaccine ee 36 e Impulse Response Moagnitude tenete rane ri rrt rne rer ee re Yee d e 37 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 20 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 1 Result Types in VSA Impulse Response Phase 37 Impulse Response Reali Magis ET 38 Ee Ee 39 Magnitude Overview Absolute rooted tna adn iine aaea 40 Ee EE C 41 ME re Into EN jo C 42 ee em LEES 43 Phase lr Lt 43 EE cp C 44 Realimag WO ERR 45 PRESUME SMI e E deen 46 iue TEE 50 Vector FICQUCIMOY T
83. 299 FSK SENSe DDEMod FSK NSTate on page 297 ASK SENSe DDEMod ASK NSTate on page 295 APSK SENSe DDEMod APSK NSTate on page 295 FSK Ref Deviation FSK only The FSK Reference Deviation sets the deviation to the reference frequency In case of 2FSK it indicates the distance from the reference frequency to the positive negative deviation frequency and in case of 4FSK the distance to the outer positive negative deviation frequency To set the deviation as a multiple of the symbol rate x SR select Relative mode To set the deviation as an absolute value in Hz select Absolute mode Note that this parameter is available only for FSK modulated signals Remote command CALCulate n FSK DEViation REFerence VALue on page 295 CALCulate n FSK DEViation REFerence RELative on page 294 Modulation Mapping The available mapping types depend on the Modulation Type and Modulation Order For more information on the modulation mapping refer to chapter 4 3 Symbol Map ping on page 68 Remote command SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue on page 297 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog on page 297 Symbol Rate The symbol rate also determines the UO bandwidth of the data recording and demodu lation You can change the default rate by entering a value in Hz EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 136 R amp S9FSW K70 Configuration 5 4 2 Signal Descripti
84. 374 IN TIste REFROS EE 374 INITiate SEQuencer REFResh ALL eeeeeeeeeeeeee nnne nennen nnns nnn naar nnne 375 INITiate SEQ encerABOR 21 reati rera r rige rao dn uro anna Tox rae n aae Ern a Yea AANEREN 375 LE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 371 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA c m Pnmnqe n uns Performing a Measurement INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate crecen eth tenen nnnc bnt kk rant NENNEN EEN 375 IN Tiga SEO We AGO IDE EE 376 SYS Tem SE Que EG 377 ABORt This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measurement has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAI command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INI Tiate SEQuencer ABORt on page 375 command Note on blocked remote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel GPIB LAN or other interface to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must interrupt processing on the remote channel first i
85. 5 7 2 Pattern Search The Pattern Search settings define when a pattern is detected in the evaluated signal A live preview of the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly The Pattern Search settings are displayed when you select the Burst Pattern button in the Overview or the Burst Pattern Search softkey in the main VSA menu and then Switch to the Pattern Search tab ERREUR RA SSRs User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 183 Burst and Pattern Configuration 120 demi Start 0 sym Enabling Pattein Searches enina AAEE EAS 184 VO Corclation Threshold EE 184 Meas only if Pattern Symbols GCoffecl 2 eee ettet bases 185 Selected Pattern for Search eene tn nnne kann nena Ru nnne 185 xui M HIE 185 Enabling Pattern Searches Enables or disables pattern searches If Auto is selected pattern search is enabled only if the signal structure defines a pattern in the signal in the Signal Structure tab of the Modulation amp Signal Description dialog box see Pattern Settings on page 139 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 352 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC AUTO on page 351 UO Correlation Threshold The I Q correlation threshold decides whether a match is accepted or not during a pattern search see also chapter 4 4 2 I Q Patte
86. Average of maximum magnitude errors over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS magnitude error over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum magnitude errors over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum magnitude errors over several sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of magnitude errors over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MPOWer type This command queries the results of the power measurement of digital demodulation Query parameters lt type gt Usage lt none gt power measurement for current sweep AVG Average of power measurement over several sweeps RPE Peak of power measurement over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of power measurement PCTL 95 percentile value of power measurement Query only User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 421 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA mA EXU 1 9 J A A um Retrieving Results CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic OOFFset type This command queries the results of the I Q offset measurement performed for digital demodulation Query parameters type none Origin offset error for current sweep AVG Average origin offset error over
87. B Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 164 Configuration remote ee Band Configuration softkey ssessssessssss 160 Conversion loss table B21 ssss 152 Distortion effect rere renes 109 External Mixer B21 remote control 310 TE ue oet e E Ert Ashes 160 External Mixer B21 s is 145 146 Amplitude droop Bandwidth Compensation e seein erede e tee 194 Coverage MSRA mode sese 124 Definition Demodulation Gene DD Formula depending on sample rate ss 67 Analog Baseband Digital 1 Q data 66 Amplitude settings sesesseees 164 Sari 172 Input settings EE 156 Extension options sesseene 62 63 Analog Baseband B71 MaxiMUIM UE 172 Fullscale level 2 5 trt 165 Maximum usable e 62 VQ mode ente nre ren 156 Relationship to sample rate 63 Input type remote control seesssssse 325 Signal processing 2s 04 Analog Baseband Interface B71 Usable MaX p 62 Amplitude settings ssssseees 164 BB Power Input settings retener rennen 156 Trigger softkey sseesssssseeeee 176 Analysis Bias Bandwidth definition usseesssssss 62 66 Conversion loss table B21 149 152 BUOM p
88. Basics 4 3 1 Symbol Mapping Phase Shift Keying PSK With this type of modulation the information is represented by the absolute phase posi tion of the received signal at the decision points All transitions in the UO diagram are possible The complex constellation diagram is shown The symbol numbers are entered in the diagram according to the mapping rule BPSK NATURAL Fig 4 9 Constellation diagram for BPSK including the symbol mapping QPSK Fig 4 10 Constellation diagram for QPSK including the symbol mapping for CDMA2000 FWD and DVB S2 EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 69 Symbol Mapping Fig 4 13 Constellation diagram for QPSK including the symbol mapping for WCDMA Symbol Mapping 8PSK Vu 2 wi E Fig 4 16 Constellation diagram for 8PSK including the symbol mapping for DVB S2 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics a CUM C Q naPnsppewm Symbol Mapping 4 3 2 Rotating PSK A rotating PSK modulation is basically a PSK modulation in which additional phase shifts occur These phase shifts depend on the symbol number e g for a rr 4 QPSK the third symbol has an additional phase offset of 3 1 rr 4 This offset has the same effect as a rotation of the basic system of coordinates by the offset angle after each symbol The method is highly important in pr
89. CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonDDEMod STATlepcMERbor 420 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MPOWer ssees 421 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic OOFFset eesess 422 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonDDEMod STATlepc PERor 422 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzFUNGCHonDDEMod STATispc OERor 423 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonDDEMod STATiepchRHO 423 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic NR 423 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonDDEMod STATlepc GbRtror 424 CALCulate n BERate Format Queries the Bit Error Rate results The available results are described in chapter 3 2 1 Bit Error Rate BER on page 21 Query parameters Format Specifies a particular BER result to be queried If no parameter is specified the current bit error rate is returned The parameters for these results are listed in table 11 4 Table 11 4 Parameters for BER result values Result Current Min Max Acc Bit Error Rate CURRent MIN MAX TOTal Total of Errors TECurrent TEMIN TEMAX TETotal Total of Bits TCURrent TMIN TMAX TTOTal CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ADRoop lt type gt This command queries the results of the amplitude droop error measurement performed for digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Mod ulation Accuracy table see
90. CFRequency ENABle eeeessseeeeee 437 STATusOUEGuonable MODulaton nz EVMENAbDle eene nnne 437 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n FSK ENABle seeeeeeeeeeee enne 437 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n IQRHo ENABle esses nnns 437 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n MAGNitude ENABle cesses 437 STATusOUEGnonable MODulation nz DHAGeENAb le nennen 437 STATusOUEGuonable POWertENAble eene e enhn setenta sns na as 437 STATUS e Tele Eh de en TE 437 STAT s QUESHonable ACPLImitNTR nsitlon iie ieiuna nemen SEENEN 437 STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRANSItiON nennen niente nn nnns 437 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition eese enne 437 STATusOUEGuonable LUlMit zmmzNTRansition enses 438 STATusOUEGtonabiel MAbRoin mN Ransition tretororersrnsnsnnnnenenent 438 STATusOUEGuonable MODulaton nzNTRaneition seen 438 SGTATusOUEGtonable MODulatton nz CFReouencvNTRansitton renee eeoreee nnne 438 STATusOUEGnonable MODulaton nz EVMNTbRansition eee 438 STATusOUEGuonable MODulaton nz F kNTbRansigon eene 438 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n IQRHo NTRansition esee eene 438 STATusOUEGuonable MODulaton nz M ACGhtudeNTRansi on 438 STATusOUEGuonable MODulaton nz DHAGehTRansiton 438 STATusOUEGuonable POWerNTRansiton esee seen nenne 438 STATUus QUESHonable SYNG NTRansItloh 21 ao Eo inaani 438 STATus QUESHonable ACPLImIEPTRarSillo
91. Conversion Loss Tables tab For details on conversion loss tables see the External Mixer description in the R amp S FSW User Manual For details on importing tables see Import Table on page 150 Remote command Average for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW on page 313 Table for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW on page 313 Average for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH on page 313 Table for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH on page 313 Basic Settings The basic settings concern general use of an external mixer They are only available if the External Mixer State is On LI Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Bias Settings Range 1 Digital IQ Signal ID Bias Settings Range 2 Auto ID Bias Value Auto ID Threshold e E EE 148 enu E e 148 Pp m 148 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 147 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration SE SS nr Input and Frontend Settings Aute ND MOS e EE 148 Bias SUAS A E 148 L Write to CVL table namez tenet treten ts 149 LO Level Defines the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Possible values are from 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm in 0 1 dB steps Default value is 15 5 dB Remote command SENSe MIXer LOPower on page 308 Signal ID Activates or deactivates visual signal identification Two sweeps are performed alter nat
92. D n un Activating Vector Signal Analysis INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e starts a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement settings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a con secutive number e g Spectrum gt Spectrum 2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command This command is not available if the MSRA Master channel is selected Example INST SEL Spectrum INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named Spectrum and creates a new mea surement channel named Spectrum 2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see table 11 1 Example INST CRE SAN Spectrum 2 Adds an additional spectrum display named Spectrum 2 INSTrum
93. DIO idee er tior ero ado eR Eee demde a aai 436 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENI ENEE ENEE ENEE EH 436 STATus QUESI tnable DIODEVENI nacioni ante nero de eo eo ee ceo e base eene 436 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENI 2 renidet enne dduen e aa aana 436 STATus QUEStiorable IMiEem EVEN ENER iiaa 436 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin m EVENIt eeesseseessseeesenenen nennen nennen 436 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n EVENIt J eeeseeeseseseseseese nne 436 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CFRequency EVENItJ sees 436 STATusOUEGtonabie MODulatton nz EVMIEVENON n 436 STATusOUEGtonable MODulatton nz FSRIEMENUN enn 436 STATusOUEGtonable MODulatton nz IORHOTEVENU enne 436 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude EVENt cececeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeneneeeees 436 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n PHASe EVENItJ sese 436 STATUS QUEStionable POWer EVEN 437 STA TuS QUESTionable SYNC EVEN KEE 437 STATus QUESHonable ACPLEImIEENABIG 2 1 2 3 sale nein rper EEEE EE KERETE randi 437 STATus QUESIionable DIG ENABle 131 2 i rti Seed SE 437 STATusOUEGtonabie FREQUEN y ENAble eene nennen etes nnne 437 STATus QUESflonable LIMitem ENABIa E 437 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin m ENABle eese nennen nnnm nnn 437 STATusOUEGuonable MODulaton nz ENADie enne nennen nnns 437 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n
94. DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SPACing on page 339 For phase diagrams CALCulate lt n gt UNIT ANGLe on page 337 For statistics CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT on page 336 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 170 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Signal Capture 5 6 Signal Capture The Signal Capture settings define how much how and when data is captured from the input signal The Signal Capture settings are displayed when you select the Signal Capture button from the Overview or the Signal Capture softkey from the main VSA menu e Data ACQUISIVIT icine a a a a aiaa a iaa 171 E Bled e cS 173 9 OWGOSD Sel e EE 178 5 6 1 Data Acquisition The Data Acquisition settings define how much and how data is captured from the input signal A live preview of the signal in the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly The Data Acquisition settings are displayed when you select the Signal Capture button from the Overview or the Signal Capture softkey from the main VSA menu Data Acquisition Trigger Capture Length Auto 8000 0 sym sm 2 083 ms J Sample Rate 4 Symbol Rate 15 36 MHz Maximum Bandwidth Auto Usable I Q Bandwidth 12 288 MHz Swap WAS Preview Mag CaptureBuffer 8000 sym User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 171 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration
95. E MN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 359 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA EG T 9 J npn Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt EstOverSmplg gt 1 the estimation algorithm takes only the symbol time instants into account 2 two points per symbol instant are used required for Offset QPSK 4 8 16 32 the number of samples per symbol defined in the signal capture settings is used see SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 340 i e all sample time instants are weighted equally RST 1 Manual operation See Estimation Points Sym on page 198 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LENGth lt FilterLength gt This command defines the length of the equalizer in terms of symbols Setting parameters lt FilterLength gt numeric value Range 1 to 256 RST 10 Default unit SYM Example DDEM EQU LENG 101 Sets the equalizer length to 101 symbols Manual operation See Equalizer Settings on page 195 See Filter Length on page 196 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LOAD Name This command selects a user defined equalizer The equalizer mode is automatically Switched to USER see SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer MODE on page 360 Setting parameters Name string Path and file name without extension Example DDEM EQU LOAD D MMyEqualizer Selects equalizer named MyEqualizer in directory D Manual operation See Eq
96. Equalizer Settings Deletes the data ofthe currently selected equalizer After deletion averaging and tracking starts anew This is useful in the rare case that calculation takes a wrong symbol decision into con sideration and distorts the signal such that the original signal can no longer be deter mined Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer RESet on page 361 Store Load Current Equalizer Equalizer Settings Saves the current equalizer results to a file or loads a user defined equalizer The equalizer Mode must be set to USER in order to load a file Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer SAVE on page 361 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LOAD on page 360 Advanced Demodulation Synchronization You can influence the synchronization process and calculation of error values during demodulation _L_L_L________ MMN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 196 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Demodulation Settings Advanced demodulation settings are displayed when you select the Demodulation but ton in the Overview or the Demod Meas Filter softkey in the main VSA menu and then switch to the Demodulation Advanced tab A live preview of the constellation with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Demodulation Demodulation Advanced Meas Filter Advanced Normalize EVM to Mean Ref P
97. FSK Modulation Signal Model Frequency shift keying FSK involves the encoding of information in the frequency of a transmitted signal As opposed to other modulation formats such as PSK and QAM the FSK process is a non linear transformation of the transmitted data into the transmitted waveform User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 111 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors A sequence of symbols sj are modulated using a frequency pulse g t to form the instantaneous frequency of the transmitted complex baseband waveform denoted by fage t and defined as Face O 3 sat T where fsymp 1 T is the symbol rate and h is a scaling factor termed the modulation index The transmitted or reference FSK signal is formed by frequency modulation of the instantaneous frequency passe u au REF t e S s ef Pace where pe t denotes the phase of the transmitted waveform In the VSA application a continuous phase FSK signal is assumed which is ensured by the integral in the expres sion for REF t A graphical depiction of the reference waveform generation is shown below in figure 4 61 Frequency Modulator Fig 4 61 Reference complex baseband FSK signal generation Reference Deviation The transmitted symbols s are assumed to be chosen from a finite and real valued constellation of M values 6 65 gj The maximum absolute constellation point is denoted by yax The
98. LEE 191 Reference deviation Definition teer iot e ee e erret nen er EiS 112 FSK 136 Reference fillel somris verdi rentrer A RRA 56 Reference level Auto EE Digital 1 Q Reference position L t Ke Reference signal e Demodulation process ssssssseeseeee 91 SU le ribi er ei 208 Generating rint eee teen ti er ren Lr ie 91 Reference value Pc 169 c 168 Refresh iic Me X m 180 Refreshing MSRA applications sss 181 MSRA applications remote ssssse 374 Roi M CM 181 Remote commands Basics on syntax 282 Boolean values 286 Capitalization eesssssseeneenn 283 Character data tener tet tns 286 Data blocks 287 Numeric values net nentes 285 Optional keywords ss essen 284 Parameters 285 lo mL 287 Ic m 284 Resetting RF input protection esssseeenesee 305 Restoring Channel settings iet tegere cicezs 132 Factory Settings softkey ssssssssss 128 P tterri files aeree 128 Standard files ssesssssssss 128 130 Result display Configuration remote sssssssssss 396 Troubleshooting 2 2t reete and 273 Result displays DER
99. MHz 200 MHz to 10 GHz 160 MHz User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 64 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth Usable UO bandwidth UO bandwidths for RF input 160 MHz Activated option Vi B160 U160 i ET NEN i NN EN M EN 90 Eg 1 ption B80 U80 80 or deactivated AH pinnae EN IOC CT i LLLI LLLLCLL L LCL PLATT 30 LL VTE LLL LLL opion 28 ze Without BW 10 extension options or B8 Output sample 10000 rate fan MHz 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Fig 4 6 Relationship between maximum usable HO bandwidth and output sample rate with and without bandwidth extensions R amp S FSW with activated option B320 or U320 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 320 MHz Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 400 MHz proportional up to maximum 320 MHz 400 MHz to 10 GHz 320 MHz R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth Usable UO bandwidth UO bandwidths for RF input MHz Activated option PTT TT TT TTT TTT TTT TTT yy 1 PETTITT TT TTT TTT TT et PTT TT TT TT TTT TTT Ar Output sample 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400 10000 et MHz Fig 4 7 Relationship between maximum usable DO bandwidth and output sample rate for active R amp S FSW B320 4 2 2 Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Digital UO Data Definitions Clock rate the rate at which data is physically transmitt
100. RA MN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 230 R amp S FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 Select the pattern from the list of Standard Patterns 4 Select Remove from Standard The pattern is removed from the list of Standard Patterns and is no longer assigned to the current standard but is still available for assignment from the list of All Pat terns 8 2 2 2 How to Define a New Pattern 1 Inthe Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 Select the New button The pattern definition dialog box is displayed 4 Define the following pattern settings Setting Description Name Pattern name that will be displayed in selection list Description Optional description of the pattern which is displayed in the pattern details Modulation order Number of values each symbol can represent e g 8 for 8 PSK Comment Optional comment for the pattern displayed in the pattern details kept for com patibility with FSQ 5 Define the format used to define the individual symbols of the pattern 6 Define the symbols of the pattern a Select the symbol field you want to define If necessary add a new symbol field by selecting Add b Enter a valu
101. RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEAN RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent RESUIt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy O0OFFset CURRent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset MEAN RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak RE
102. RST does not influence the status registers Description of the Status Registers In addition to the registers provided by the base system the following registers are used in the VSA application e STATus QUEStionable SYNC lt n gt contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during burst detection e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt provides information on any limit vio lations that occur after demodulation in one of the 4 windows e STATus QUESTionable MODulationcn EVM limit violations in EVM evalua tion e STATus QUESTionable MODulationcn PHASe limit violations in Phase Error evaluation e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude limit violations in Mag nitude Error evaluation e STATus QUESTionable MODulationcn CFRequency limit violations in Car rier Frequency evaluation e STATus QUESTionable MODulationcn IQRHO limit violations in I Q Offset and RHO evaluation e STATus QUESTionable MODulationcn FSK limit violations in FSK evaluation User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 428 Status Reporting System e g bit 11 sums up the information for all STATus QUEStionable SYNC registers For some subregisters there may be separate registers for each active channel Thus if a status bit in the STATus QUEStionable register indicates an error the error may have occurred in any of the channel specific subregisters In this case
103. Range Configuration um Result Range Evaluation Range Length Result Range Alignment Reference Capture Burst mn Pattern Waveform Alignment b Left o Center k Right e e e Offset Symbol Number at Burst Start Visualization PROSITE SHE p Siicdeit vn sped dee ve EA E 191 EE 191 Plugin ite odit E M a dde te ad MER Eee 192 src c M 192 Symbol Number at Reference SEIT ciere ta Recte eet i Rec re 192 Result Length Defines the number of symbols that are to be demodulated All traces over time are dis played over the result range Remote command SENSe DDEMod TIME on page 357 Reference Defines the reference for the result range alignment The result of the current setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box Capture the capture buffer Burst the detected burst Pattern the detected pattern Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust VALue on page 356 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 191 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration 5 9 Demodulation Settings Alignment Defines the type of alignment of the result range to the reference source The result of the current setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box Remote command CALCulate n TRACe t ADJust ALIGnment DEFault on page 356 Offset Defines the offset of the result range to the alignment refere
104. Result 5 CALC5 FORM MAGN Set result type for window 5 to magnitude EVM DISPlay WINDow5 TRACe2 MODE AVER Add a second trace in average mode DISPlay WINDow5 TRACe3 MODE MAXH Add a third trace in max hold mode SWE COUN 10 Calculate an average over 10 sweeps INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiate a new measurement and wait until the 10 sweeps have finished R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 13 2 Programming Examples DISP WIND1 SIZE LARG Display the I Q Constellation result display window 1 in full screen HCOP DEST MMEM Define the destination of the screenshot as a file HCOP DEV LANG BMP Select bmp as the file format MMEM NAME C R_S INST USER IQConstellation bmp Select the file name for the printout HCOP ITEM ALL Print all screen elements HCOP Store the printout in a file called IQConstellation bmp DISP WIND5 SIZE SMAL Restore the I Q Constellation result display to one subwindow FORM DEXP HEAD ON Include a header in the trace export file FORM DEXP MODE TRAC Export the trace data not raw I Q data MMEM STOR4 TRAC 1 AverageEVM Save the detected symbol values x values are not exported with trace data Results MMEM STOR5 TRAC 1 AverageEVM Save the EVM values window 5 to an ascii file Results Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard The following ex
105. Result Types in VSA Frequency Response Phase The frequency response phase of the equalizer is derived from the Frequency Response Magnitude Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM UPH to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 Group Delay The group delay of the equalizer is the derivation of phase over frequency It is a measure of phase distortion 3 GroupDelay Equalizer Start 100 MHz Stop 100 MHz Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM GDEL to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 EEUU RA N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 36 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 18 3 2 19 Result Types in VSA TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 Impulse Response Magnitude The impulse response magnitude of the equalizer shows the filter in the time domain 3 ImpRespMag Equalizer Start 5 sym Stop 5 sym Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU
106. S FSW You can transfer the va filter files to the R amp S FSW using a USB memory device 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth The Symbol Rate defined in the Signal Description settings determines how many symbols are captured and demodulated during a certain measurement time However for each symbol more than one sample may be captured so that the sample rate may be higher than the symbol rate The Sample Rate parameter in the Data Acquisition settings defines the number of samples to capture per symbol not to be confused with the estimation points per sym bol or display points per symbol see chapter 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol on page 121 The resulting sample rate depending on the Symbol Rate is indicated behind the parameter The number of samples to capture per symbol was referred to as the Capture Over sampling value in previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers The resulting sample rate also referred to as the user or output sample rate is the rate at which the I Q data is demodulated and analyzed The sample rate also affects the demodulation measurement bandwidth see also chapter 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 62 If the bandwidth is too narrow the signal is not displayed completely If the bandwidth is too wide interference from outside the actual signal to be measured can distort the result Thus for signals wi
107. SEARCh BURSt SKIP FALLing on page 303 Pattern Settings If the signal is expected to have a specific pattern enable the Pattern option to define the pattern settings Note The pattern search itself must be enabled separately in the Pattern Search Set tings see Enabling Pattern Searches on page 184 By default the pattern search is active if the signal description contains a pattern Name lt Pattern Settings Specifies the pattern name from the list of defined patterns You can also configure new patterns see chapter 5 7 3 Pattern Configuration on page 185 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SIGNal PATTern on page 304 Pattern Configuration Pattern Settings Displays the Pattern Configuration dialog box see chapter 5 7 3 Pattern Configura tion on page 185 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 139 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration 5 4 3 Signal Description Offset Pattern Settings The offset of the pattern is defined with respect to the start of the useful part of the burst see Useful length on page 120 If the position of the pattern within the burst is known it is recommended that you define the offset That will accelerate the pattern search and enhance the accuracy of the burst search Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet STATe on page 304 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OF FSet VALue on page 304 Known Data The Known Data setting
108. SNR values over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic SRERror type This command queries the symbol rate error Query parameters lt type gt Usage PEAK AVG SDEV PCTL TPEak RPEak PAVG PSDev PPCTI lt none gt Symbol rate error for current sweep AVG Average symbol rate error over several sweeps RPE Peak symbol rate error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of symbol rate error PCTL 95 percentile value of symbol rate error Query only User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 424 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA pem cu XM H R B UR REUE ER UM UR UEO Retrieving Results 11 9 3 Retrieving Limit Check Results The modulation accuracy parameters can be checked against defined limits The follow ing commands are required to query the results of these limit checks CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PPEak RESUIt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan
109. Settings The basic settings concern general usage of an external mixer SENSe MIXeI STA TEE 307 I SENS amp MIXeEBIAS HIGH rreren erre ara ocn SINNER EENS Rae eue raa aa Ex dee 308 ISENSe Mier BIAStLOWL ence t tette tet tenta 308 SENSe MIXer e eene rede tenere nre p e ener ev Read cr Rap 308 SENSE MIXER SIGNA ET 308 ISENS amp MIXer EE ET 309 SENSe MIXer STATe State Activates or deactivates the use of a connected external mixer as input for the measure ment This command is only available if the R amp S FSW B21 option is installed and an external mixer is connected _L_________ SSS SSF User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 307 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA mAEMmETE d 7e c QQn Configuring VSA Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX ON Manual operation See External Mixer State on page 145 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the high second range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 307 Parameters lt BiasSetting gt RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 148 SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the low first range This command is only available
110. SpanNmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 329 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size of the center frequency The step size can be set to a predefined value or it can be manually set to a user defined value Auto The step size is set to the default value e using the rotary knob 100 kHz e using the arrow keys 1 MHz Manual Defines a user defined step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO on page 330 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 329 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 159 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration 5 5 3 5 3 1 Input and Frontend Settings Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the R amp S FSW hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute frequency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Re
111. State to On at the top of the dialog box to switch modulation on 6 Press the RF ON OFF key to switch the RF transmission on User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 247 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurement Examples Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal 9 2 2 Analyzer Settings This section helps you get your first valid measurement It starts with step by step instruc tions and continues with a more detailed description of further functionality Frequency 1GHz Ref Level 4 dBm Modulation QPSK Symbol Rate 1 MHz Tx Filter Root Raised Cosine with Alpha BT 0 35 To define the settings on the R amp S FSW 1 2 3 Press the PRESET key to start from a defined state Press the FREQ key and enter 1 GHz Press the AMPT key and enter 4 dBm as the reference level This corresponds approximately to the peak envelope power of the signal Start the VSA application by pressing the MODE key and then selecting VSA Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for VSA Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal character istics a Inthe Modulation Settings section ensure that the Type is PSK and that the Order is QPSK The Mapping defines the mapping of the bits to the QPSK symbols It is relevant if you are interested in a bit stream measurement but does not affect the other measurement results Hence you do not need to change it here b Enter the Sym
112. The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table o lM User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 419 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Query parameters type Usage Retrieving Results none Gain imbalance error for current sweep AVG Average gain imbalance error over several sweeps RPE Peak gain imbalance error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of gain imbalance error PCTL 95 percentile value of gain imbalance error Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic IQIMbalance type This command queries the results of the UO imbalance error measurement of digital demodulation Query parameters type Usage lt none gt IO imbalance error for current sweep AVG Average UO imbalance error over several sweeps RPE Peak WO imbalance error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of UO imbalance error PCTL 95 percentile value of UO imbalance error Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MERRor type This command queries the results of the magnitude error measurement of digital demod ulation User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 420 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Query parameters type Usage Retrieving Results lt none gt RMS magnitude error of display points of current sweep AVG Average of RMS magnitude errors over several sweeps PAVG
113. This command sets the vector analyzer so that the measurement is performed only if the measurement was synchronous to the selected sync pattern The command is available only if the pattern search is activated see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 352 Setting parameters lt MeasOnlyOnPatt gt MEAS SYNC MEAS The measurement is performed independently of successful syn chronization SYNC The measured values are displayed and considered in the error evaluation only if the set sync pattern was found Bursts with a wrong sync pattern sync not found are ignored If an invalid or no sync pattern is found the measurement waits and resumes running only when a valid sync pattern is found RST 0 Manual operation See Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct on page 185 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect lt Select gt This command selects a predefined sync pattern file Setting parameters lt Select gt string Manual operation See Selected Pattern for Search on page 185 See Standard Patterns selecting an assigned pattern on page 186 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe lt PatternSearch gt This command switches the search for a sync sequence on or off Setting parameters lt PatternSearch gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 E lN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 352 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 5 6 3 Configuring VSA Manual operation See Enabling Pattern Searches on
114. User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 437 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA ECCO c a H Status Reporting System STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt ChannelName STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHo NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated register The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Paramete
115. a aano TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel IFPower TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPoOwWer ener rnnt theta AEAEE SANNE ARANEAE nas TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port esses eerte nennen nnne TRIGger SEQuence SLOBe recom a aari naa ENEE dE ENEE Ee FER EEN TRIGger SEQuence SOURCe 2 5 ntt ne rent rtr i ret rin tpa ro herr e Re e gene du ye Ep abs SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation esee enne nennen nn nree nnne nnne nnns SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYS Teresiel Ower 370 IGENZGe IADlustCOhNFoure Hz Teresa Ulbter nennen nennen tren rennes 371 SEN Seet geesde Eech SENSe CORRection CVEBAND 2 Gier oc in ette ne bead ie dia t eas rtc E Sachs SENS CORRection NEE SENSe CORRection CVL CATAlog SENSe CORRection eer BEE SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent sess rennen nne tnit e rennen nre trennen enne SENS leeden CVE DA A EE SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonicC nenat SENSe CORRection e KT SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs SENSe CORR ction e E IENGeICObRRechon CHL GNUMier AAA SENSe DDEMOG APSK NST le 2 eere ni asii agna e ERENNERT SENSe DDEMod ASK NSTate essen rennen erret inrer ritenere trennen erinnern E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 490 R amp S FSW K70 List of Remote Commands VSA SENSe DDEMod ECALC OFFSet ettet
116. active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged _L_L_______ MMN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 374 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA i a ss Performing a Measurement Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INST SEL IQ ANALYZER Selects the IQ Analyzer channel INIT REFR Refreshes the display for the I Q Analyzer channel Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh on page 181 INITiate SEQuencer REFResh ALL This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only in MSRA mode The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by all active MSRA applications Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the sweep INIT SEQ REFR Refreshes the display for all MSRA channels Usage Event INITiate SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 375 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 377 Usage Event INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a
117. amplitude of the received signal at the decision points Symbol Mapping Fig 4 42 Constellation diagram for 4ASK 4 3 10 APSK With Amplitude Phase Shift Keying APSK modulation the information is represented by the signal amplitude and the signal phase 16APSK Fig 4 43 Constellation diagram for 16APSK including the logical symbol mapping for DVB S2 For DVB S2 16APSK mappings the ratio of the outer circle radius to the inner circle radius y R2 R1 depends on the utilized code rate and complies with figure 4 43 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics a NC C Jp p esr Symbol Mapping Table 4 15 Optimum constellation radius ratio y linear channel for 18APSK Code Rate Modulation coding spectral Y efficiency 2 3 2 66 3 15 3 4 2 99 2 85 4 5 3 19 2 75 5 6 3 32 2 70 8 9 3 55 2 60 9 10 3 59 2 57 32APSK For DVB S2 32APSK mappings the ratio of the middle circle radius to the inner circle radius y4 R2 R1 and the ratio of the outer circle radius to the inner circle radius y2 depend on the utilized code rate and comply with table 4 16 Table 4 16 Optimum constellation radius ratios y and y linear channel for 32APSK Code Rate Modulation coding Yi Y2 spectral efficiency 2 3 3 74 2 84 5 27 3 4 3 99 2 72 4 87 4 5 4 15 2 64 4 64 5 6 4 43 2 54 4 33 8 9 4 49
118. be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Fur thermore the evaluated UO data from the VSA application can be exported for further analysis in external applications The import and export functions are available in the Save Recall menu which is dis played when you select the LI Save or EN Open icon in the toolbar For details on importing and exporting UO data see the R amp S FSW User Manual e Default Settings for Vector Signal Analyse 127 e Configuration According to Digital Standards AE 128 e Configuration OVOLEVIQW 22 ce eter tiani EE ES SEENEN 130 w SIO Mall DOSCHOUOM m 133 e inputarid Frontend Setliigs EE 141 N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 126 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Default Settings for Vector Signal Analysis san Inii EE 171 e Burstand Patter Gonfigllauart cereo oon eder eii Riedie 181 e Result Range Configuration cicer eadem renidet teer keeper eese ua 190 e Demoeg laton SSUINOS EEN 192 e Measurement Filter Selfifigs 1 iini dinde cer e bre Ea pede e abad ecu 200 e Evaluation Range Configuration eseririk SEENEN 202 e Adjusting Settings Automatically trn trend ane 204 5 1 Default Settings for Vector Signal Analysis When you switch the application of a measurement channel to VSA the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application e center frequency and frequency offset e reference level and re
119. by pressing the MODE key and then selecting VSA Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for VSA Press the MEAS key then select the Digital Standards softkey From the file selection list select the GSM folder and then the file EDGE_8PSK Select Load Predefined settings corresponding to the selected standard are loaded The VSA application should show good measurement results Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 dBm Std EDGE_8PSK SR 270 833 kHz m el Att 20 4dB Freq 1 0GHz Cap Len 1500 BURST PATTERN A EYM 1Clrw B Result Summary Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Amplitude Droop Bait Start 0 sym Stop 148 sym C Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw D Symbol Table Start 0 sym Fig 9 7 Default display configuration for GSM 8PSK EDGE In window 3 you see the currently evaluated burst marked with a green bar To include more bursts in the display you need to increase the capture length a Press the MEAS CONFIG key and then the Overview softkey b Select Signal Capture C Increase the Capture Length e g to 10000 symbols In the preview area of the dialog box you see that more bursts are now contained in the capture buffer They are all marked with a green bar meaning that they are all evaluated _L_____SS_ SSSR aa User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 256 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples i Se ee Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals Mag CapBuf Start 0 sym St
120. case of bursted signals the pattern search finds only the first occurrence of the I Q pattern within each burst If a false positive occurs in this situation cf case 1 the use of Meas only if pattern symbols correct will not provide a satisfactory solution In this case do the following Increase the I Q Correlation Threshold Specify the expected position of the pattern within the burst by adjusting the Offset parameter Message Sync Prefers More Valid Symbols Note Note that this message does not necessarily indicate a problem Its purpose is to inform you that you might have the opportunity to get a more stable demodulation and or better measurement results by improving your setup Synchronization in the VSA application is performed in two stages coarse synchroniza tion that precedes the reference signal generation and fine synchronization based on the reference signal e The coarse synchronization stage can work data aided i e based on a known pat tern or non data aided i e based on the unknown data symbols The default is a non data aided coarse synchronization In the case that a pattern is part of signal the user can switch to data aided synchronization e The fine synchronization stage always works data aided Sync Prefers More Valid Symbols indicates that one of the synchronization stages has too few symbols to ensure that the synchronization is robust The message is given if e Coarse Synch
121. channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see table 11 1 Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ Analyzer SANALYZER Spectrum Usage Query only Table 11 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Name Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum UO Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse Analog Demodulation ADEM Analog Demod R amp S FSW K7 GSM R amp S FSW K10 GSM GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay MCGD MC Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 289 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA PRENNE EEMMMCIU U a a npe Activating Vector Signal Analysis Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Name Phase No
122. chapter 3 2 29 Result Summary on page 46 Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Amplitude droop in dB symbol for current sweep AVG Amplitude droop in dB symbol evaluating the linear average value over several sweeps RPE Peak value for amplitude droop over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of amplitude droop PCTL 95 percentile value of amplitude droop Usage Query only User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 415 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA nM C J snqu TU P aer Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ALL The command queries all results of the result summary as shown on the screen Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic CFERror lt type gt This command queries the results of the carrier frequency error measurement performed for digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Carrier frequency error for current sweep AVG Average carrier frequency error over several sweeps RPE Peak carrier frequency error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of frequency error PCTL 95 percentile value of frequency error Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic EVM lt type gt This c
123. cocer eene rtrnno centran ocean ak anra aaa Fan cu a n a a RB DR uaa a Rana D 7 1 2 Documentation Overview eeeseeeeeeeeeenee nennen nennen nnn nennen nin in nnn nien nnns 8 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation eese nnn 9 2 Welcome to the Vector Signal Analysis Application 11 2 4 Starting the VSA Appltcatton ANEREN EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEN 11 2 2 Understanding the Display Information eee 12 3 Measurements and Result Displays eee 15 3 4 Evaluation Data Sources in VSA eeseeeeeeseeeeeeeneenen nennen nnns 15 3 2 Result Types in VSA REENEN ENNEN EEN ROESER EENEG 19 3 3 Common Parameters in VSA eeessesssseeeeeeneen nennen nennt nnn nnn nnne nnns 52 4 Measurement Basics e eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene nn 54 4 1 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing eeeeeeee 54 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth sss 61 4 3 E IDIBUS 68 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Process eene 89 4 5 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors esses 101 4 6 Measurement Ranges esses nennen nnne nena rien nennr nari n nnn nr irren nnne 117 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol
124. commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 _L______SS___ SSSR User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 34 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 15 Result Types in VSA CALC FORM FREO to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 DISP TRAC Y MODE REL to define relative values see DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe MODE on page 409 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 Frequency Response Magnitude Frequency response of the current equalizer to the input signal Note that the frequency response of the equalizer is not a pure inverted function of the channel response as both functions are calculated independantly The frequency response is calculated by deter mining an optimal EVM for the input signal 1 FreqRespMag Equalizer 1 Clrw Start 100 MHz Stop 100 MHz Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 LSS SSS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 35 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 16 3 2 17
125. complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data I channel no time index Q channel no time index 01 0 OTOT 0 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 1 1 0 O 11I0 Channel 1 Complex sample 0 21 0 Q 2 0 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 01 11 Q 01 1 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 T t ODLITII Channel 1 Complex sample 1 2 1I 1 1 QI2 1 Channel 2 Complex sample 1 01 21 Q 0 2 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 VI 27 GTE 121 Channel 1 Complex sample 2 2 2 O21 2 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This is an example of how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MAT LAB Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k float32 p M M PYPYP srl User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 481 UO Data File Format iq tar fwrite fid single imag iq k f10at32 end fclose fid R amp S FSW K70 List of Remote Commands VSA List of Remote Commands VSA ABORT cC 372 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMIts BEE 387 CAL C
126. defines the maximum length of a burst Only those bursts will be recog nized that fall below this length The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt MaxLength gt numeric value Range 0 to 15000 RST 1600 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Burst Settings on page 139 See Min Length Max Length on page 139 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt LENGth MINimum lt UsefulLength gt This command defines the minimum length of a burst Only those bursts will be recog nized that exceed this length The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds LEE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 302 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA M mse n e s Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt UsefulLength gt numeric value Range 10 to 15000 RST 98 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Burst Settings on page 139 See Min Length Max Length on page 139 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt SKIP FALLing lt RunOut gt This command defines the length of the falling burst edge which is not considered when evaluating the result The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt RunOut gt numeric value Range 0 to 15000 RST 1 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Burst Settings on
127. deviation error is the difference between the measured frequency deviation and the reference frequency deviation as entered by the user see FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on page 136 The evidence of a deviation error in the instantaneous frequency of an FSK signal is demonstrated in figure 4 64 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 116 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics Measurement Ranges Instantaneous Frequency GMSK Modulation 1 5 m Meas Deviation Deviation Error E i 1 Ref Deviation a j 8 f S Kl i d A S ost f 4 D i d l z a c gt 2 o 2 os i l i j Y I b v a iJ Freq Ref Freq Meas 1 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Time Symbols Fig 4 64 The reference and measured instantaneous frequency of a GMSK signal with reference devi ation error 4 6 Measurement Ranges The VSA application contains three measurement ranges that need to be set by the user Capture Buffer Length The length of the capture buffer specifies how many data points are captured during a single VSA measurement For example if you want to measure a bursted signal it is recommended that you make the capture length long enough to ensure that in each capture buffer at least one entire burst is included The maximum capture buffer length is 64 000 symbols for a sample rate of 4 or 256 000 samples Result Range The result range defines the symbols from the capture buffer
128. file will be found To avoid this try one of the following Align the result range to a pattern instead of the burst User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 123 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics EES VSA in MSRA Operating Mode Use a precise external trigger and align the result range to the capture buffer This requires a very precise trigger timing otherwise the result range start may be incorrect again e Continuous signals For continuous signals without a pattern the result range is aligned randomly Thus a very large number of possible sequences must be predefined Use a precise external trigger and align the result range to the capture buffer This requires a very precise trigger timing otherwise the result range start may be incorrect again 4 9 VSA in MSRA Operating Mode The R amp S FSW VSA application can also be used to analyze data in MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications receive an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the appli cation data For the R amp S FSW VSA application in MSRA operating mode the application data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal capture in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the application data for vector signal analysis The Capture Buffer displays show t
129. following parts e Getting Started printed manual e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation CD ROM with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and options Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the R amp S website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com prod uct FSW html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional software option The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documentation CD ROM delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument functions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote con trol commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on opera
130. gt For CFERor OOFFset RHO CURRent MEAN PEAK For EVM FERRor MERRor PERRor PCURRent Peak current value PMEan Peak mean value PPEak Peak peak value RCURRent RMS current value RMEan RMS mean value RPEak RMS peak value Setting parameters lt LimitState gt ON OFF Activates a limit check for the selected result and limit type RST OFF Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC CFER CURR VAL 100 Hz define a limit of 100 100 CALC2 LIM MACC CFER CURR STAT ON switch limit check ON Manual operation See Current Mean Peak on page 216 See Check on page 217 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the limit for the current peak or mean center frequency error limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 1000000 RST 1000 0 mean 750 0 Default unit Hz CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALC
131. gt is only available with detector AUTOPEAK and contains the smallest of the two measured values for a measurement point Header section for individual trace Trace 2 Meas Result IQ Next trace in same window Result type Meas Signal Meas Data source measurement or reference data Demodulator Offset QPSK Demodulation type ResultMode Trace Result mode x unit sym Unit of the x axis y unit dBm Unit of the y axis Trace Mode Clear Write Trace mode User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 459 R amp S9FSW K70 Annex Known Data File Syntax Description File contents Description Values 800 Number of measurement points Data section for individual trace Header section for individual window Screen 2 Name of next window Header section for individual trace Trace 1 First trace in second window Data section for individual trace A 5 Known Data File Syntax Description When you load a Known Data file the R amp S FSW K70 application checks whether the file complies with the following syntax Table 1 6 Known Data File Syntax Syntax Possible Values Description RS VSA KNOWN DATA FILE as specified File Header Version 01 00 gt lt Comment gt lt Comment gt arbitrary Optional file description lt Base gt lt Base gt 2 16 The base used to specify the lt Data gt values binary
132. instr user cv1 directory of the instrument Digital UO Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the Digital Base band Interface R amp S FSW B17 in the applications that support it EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 153 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Input Input Source Power Sensor Radio Frequency ott put Setting Digital IQ Input Sample Rate 10 0 MHz Adjust Reference Level femmen A to Full Scale Level Yes Name IQR 100 Serial Number 101165 Port Name Digital IQ OUT Sample Rate 10 MHz Full Scale Level 10 dBm For more information see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Blees 154 Input Sample 8l8 ertet Rh eere Rudd e ER Ra Eben eto etae re RI RR daa 154 Essi m iere a aE edel Eegen deeg 154 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level 155 Connected InstrutTierit ese cei rrt ornate ERR Rae e enne eset ese n aeneus 155 jc y MEOS 155 Digital UO Input State Enables or disable the use of the Digital IQ input source for measurements Digital IQ is only available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 306 Input Sample Rate Defines the sample rate of the digital I Q signal source This sample rate must correspond with the sample rate provi
133. iq tar file e g R amp S FSW For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as int16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFactor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215 1 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt lt Channel gt lt PowerVsTime gt lt Min gt User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 479 UO Data File Format iq tar ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 134 lt float gt lt float gt 142 lt float gt lt float gt 140 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 71 lt float gt float 69 float ArrayOfFloat Max lt PowerVsTime gt lt Spectrum gt lt Min gt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 133 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt
134. level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 332 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 333 Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 If option R amp S FSW B25 is installed you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 13 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as pos sible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenuation may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenu ation may be setto automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 163 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration m m SS SS SS e C u nam T Input a
135. lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy DEFault sess rreer enne 388 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent STATe essen rennen nennen 389 SSS SSS SS SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 483 R amp S FSW K70 List of Remote Commands VSA CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent VALue ssssseseeenneeen nennen enne 390 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent RESult essen 425 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan STATe seen enne nre 389 CAL Culate nzLIMrMACCuracvEVMPMEanVAl ue enne nnne enne 390 CAL Culate nzLUIMrMACCuracvEVMPDMEantREGORI AA 425 CAL Culate nzLUlMrMACCuracvEVMPDPEakGTATe nennen 389 CAL Culate nzLUIMrMACCuracvEVMDPESKVAL ue 390 CAL Culate nzLIMrMACCuracvEVMDPESKRESGUION cece cece eee cee eeeeceeeeseseeeseesaeseeeseeeeeeaeeegs 425 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent STATe sse 389 CAL Culate nzLUIMrMACCuracvEVMRCURrent VAL ue nennen 390 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent RESUlt essen 425 CAL Culate nzLUlMrMACCuracvEVMHRMEanGTATe nennen nnne 389 CAL Culate nzLUIMrMACCuracvEVMHRMEanVAL ue 390 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPE k STATE cccccccceserecereeeeereereceeeerecaeseaeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeateees 389 CAL Culate nz LUIMIMACCuracyEVMRPEakKVAL ue 390 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPEak RESuUlt
136. lt n gt PHASe Register 432 e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude Register 432 e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency Register 433 e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO Register 433 e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt FSK Register AA 434 Querying the Status Registers ciae eb dece le dace bie Ra des d kb RD tah d 434 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Status Reporting System 11 11 14 STATus QUEStionable SYNC n Register This register contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during burst detection for each window in each VSA channel It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition on page 436 and STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt on page 437 Table 11 5 Status error bits in STATus QUEStionable SYNC register for R amp S FSW K70 Bit Definition 0 Burst not found This bit is set if a burst could not be detected 1 Sync not found This bit is set if the sync sequence pattern of the midamble could not be detected 2to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 11 11 2 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt Register This register comprises information about any limit violations that may occur after demod ulation in any of the VSA windows It can be querie
137. maximum phase contribution of a data symbol is given by Pmax 72 zh Gay 26 at o0 The reference deviation of the FSK signal is defined as 1 oo A rer Ze p Sar Let dt In the VSA application the frequency pulse filter is normalized such that eO d User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 112 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics mA T Xx O CH J ew Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors The constellation for M FSK is assumed to be 71 3 2 M 1 which implies Gmax M 1 The expression for the reference deviation in terms of the modulation index is there fore given by 1 A REF S AM T fus The above formula provides the necessary calculation for measurement of an FSK signal with known symbol rate and modulation index Calculation examples The GSM standard describes the transmission of binary data using MSK i e 2FSK modulation with a modulation index of h 1 2 at a symbol rate of 270 8333 KHz The reference deviation is therefore given by 1 1 Aer 5 H 2 1 270 8333 kHz 67 7083 kHz The APCO Project 25 standard phase 2 defines a H CPM signal i e 4AFSK with a modulation index of h 1 3 and a symbol rate of 6 KHz The reference deviation is Arn EENS 4 5 2 1 Error Model The FSK measurement model used assumes that signal distortions in both the magnitude and phase frequ
138. new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 377 E M User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 375 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA PEREMGNSGNEEMPMCIM t C C A M s Performing a Measurement Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event INITiate SEQuencer MODE Mode This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 377 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters Mode SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per
139. of 200 MHz The figure 4 6 shows the maximum usable I Q bandwidths depending on the output sample rates R amp S FSW without additional bandwidth extension options sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum UO bandwidth 10 MHz Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 10 MHz proportional up to maximum 10 MHz 10 MHz to 10 GHz 10 MHz User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 63 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth R amp S FSW with options B28 or U28 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 28 MHz Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 35 MHz proportional up to maximum 28 MHz 35 MHz to 10 GHz 28 MHz R amp S FSW with option B40 or U40 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 40 MHz Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 50 MHz proportional up to maximum 40 MHz 50 MHz to 10 GHz 40 MHz R amp S FSW with option B80 or U80 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 80 MHz Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 100 MHz proportional up to maximum 80 MHz 100 MHz to 10 GHz 80 MHz R amp S FSW with activated option B160 or U160 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 160 MHz Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 200 MHz proportional up to maximum 160
140. of TX Filter fct CaptureOV of TX Filter symbol rate meen 4 Symbols bits naan Demodulation filter of IQ capture amp symbol with Dp decision Symbols IQ Signal REF Signal errors PS E uo zo 3 Correction S Parameters S I Signal 2 I processing a correction of eee pat Analyzer estimated Transmitter I Fig 4 2 Measurement filter in the block diagram MSK PSK QAM and UserQAM k TX Filter Any QAM Any PSK bee UO E Map bits to TX Filter d Polarto instantaneous frequency cartesian frequency pulse f Magnitude 1 Fig 4 3 Modulator with Transmit filter in detail As the measurement filters of the VSA application have low pass characteristics they suppress high frequency distortion components in the Meas Ref Error signal The errors are weighted spectrally Thus turning off the measurement filter can have an influence on the numeric and graphical error values However the measurement filter should be switched off if non linear distortions have to be measured they usually produce high frequency components R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing Predefined measurement filters The most frequently required measurement filters are provided by the VSA application see chapter A 3 2 Measurement Filters on page 456 The freq
141. operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 194 See Compensate for FSK on page 195 SENSe DDEMod OPTimization Criterion This command determines the optimization criteria for the demodulation RMSMin Opti mization goal is the minimization of RMS of the error vector EVMMin Optimization goal is the minimization of the EVM Setting parameters Criterion RMSMin EVMMin RMSMin Optimizes calculation such that the RMS of the error vector is minimal EVMMin Optimizes calculation such that EVM is minimal RST RMSMin depends on selected standard Manual operation See Optimization on page 198 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC AUTO lt UseWfmForSync gt This command selects manual or automatic synchronization with a pattern waveform to speed up measurements Setting parameters lt UseWfmForSync gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Manual operation See Coarse Synchronization on page 199 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC STATe lt FastSync gt This command switches fast synchronization on and off if you manually synchronize with a waveform pattern EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 365 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 5 9 Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt FastSync gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Coarse Synchronization on page 199 Measurement Filter Settings You can configure the measurement filter to be used Manual configuratio
142. page 139 See Run Out on page 139 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt SKIP RISing lt Runin gt This command defines the length of the rising burst edge which was not considered when evaluating the result The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters Runin numeric value Range 0 to 15000 RST 1 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Burst Settings on page 139 See Run In on page 139 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC CATalog Patterns This command reads the names of all patterns stored on the hard disk The file names are returned as a comma separated list of strings one for each file name without the file extension Setting parameters Patterns CURRent ALL CURRent Only patterns that belong to the current standard ALL All patterns RST ALL E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 303 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA PEHEMGNSGNEEMMMCI sa mr Configuring VSA Example DDEM SEAR SYNC CAT CURR Result GSM ABO GSM AB1 GSM AB2 GSM TSCI SENSe DDEMod SIGNal PATTern lt PatternedSignal gt This command specifies whether the signal contains a pattern or not Setting parameters PatternedSignal ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Pattern Settings on page 139 See Name on page 139 SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue lt SignalType gt Th
143. page 199 SENSe DDEMod KDATa STATe lt KnownDataState gt This command selects the Known Data state The use of known data is a prerequisite for the BER measurement and can also be used for the fine sync Setting parameters lt KnownDataState gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Known Data on page 141 SENSe DDEMod KDATa NAME lt FileName gt This command selects the Known Data file Setting parameters lt FileName gt string Manual operation See Load Data File on page 141 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize ADRoop lt CompAmptDroop gt This command switches the compensation of the amplitude droop on or off Setting parameters lt CompAmptDroop gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 194 eee ears User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 363 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA EMG ECCO C Pu n r no Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CFDRift lt CarrFreqDrift gt This command defines whether the carrier frequency drift is compensated for FSK mod ulation Setting parameters lt CarrFreqDrift gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Compensate for FSK on page 195 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CHANnel lt TransmitChannel gt This command switches the channel compensation on or off With equalizer only Setting paramet
144. pattern and the demodulated bits It is important to note that this comparison is only performed at posi tions that have been identified by the I Q pattern search as possible pattern positions The algorithm and a simple example are illustrated in figure 4 48 First the pattern candidate bits are extracted from the whole bitstream calculated by the Demodulation amp Symbol Decisions stage This means that the symbol stream is cut at the position that has been detected by the Q Pattern Search as the start of the pattern The extracted sequence is then compared to the selected pattern If the demodulation has been ambiguous with respect to the absolute phase position the extracted sequence needs to be compared to all possible rotated versions of the selected pattern For example in the case of QPSK modulation the rotational symmetry has the order four i e there are four pattern hypotheses If the extracted sequence coincides with one of the hypotheses the pattern is declared as found and the absolute phase corre sponding to the appropriate hypothesis is passed on Both the symbol decisions and the UO measurement signal are then rotated with this pattern phase for the whole result range thus resolving the phase ambiguity For more information refer to chapter 4 4 3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions on page 94 e chapter 4 4 2 I Q Pattern Search on page 93 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 97 Generation 4 4 5
145. power level results will be shifted by this value Note however that the Reference Level value ignores the Reference Level Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle To determine the required offset consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal A positive value indicates that an attenuation took place R amp S FSW increa ses the displayed power values a negative value indicates an external gain R amp S FSW decreases the displayed power values The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 331 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the fullscale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal com pression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 204 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 371 Fullscale Level Mode Value The fullscale level defines the maximum power you can input at the Baseban
146. qQ A A Mj 0 ums Performing a Measurement INITiate IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement For a statistics count gt 0 this means a restart of the corresponding number of measure ments With trace mode MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the previous results are reset on restarting the measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Example For Spectrum application INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Sets the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 179 INITiate REFMeas Repeats the evaluation of the data currently in the capture buffer without capturing new data This is useful after changing settings for example filters patterns or evaluation ranges Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh non MSRA mode on page 180 INITiate REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA mode not the MSRA Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently
147. query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 42 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Result Types in VSA 3 2 25 Phase Error Displays the phase error of the measuremente signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time PHASE _ERR t PHASE yras t PHASE pep t with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 219 1 Phase Error Clrw Fig 3 16 Result display Phase Error Available for source types e Modulation Errors Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM PHAS to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 3 2 26 Phase Wrap The phase or argument of the signal the display is limited to the phase value range of 180 180 Phase yras Z MEAS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 43 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Result Types in VSA with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 219 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 1 PhaseW
148. range is indicated beneath the entries User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 202 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Evaluation Range Configuration A visualization of the evaluation range in relation to the result range with the current settings is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box The green bar below the trace indi cates the defined result range indented red lines indicate defined start and stop symbols see Evaluation range display on page 121 The visualization is not editable directly The evaluation range settings are displayed when you select the Evaluation Range button in the Overview or the Range Settings softkey in the main VSA menu and then switch to the Evaluation Range tab Result Range Evaluation Range Evaluation Range Entire Result Range 0 sym 148 sym Pj Stop 144 75 sym Length 142 0 sym 524 308 us Visualization For details on the evaluation range see chapter 4 6 Measurement Ranges on page 117 For an example on setting the evaluation range see chapter 9 3 5 Setting the Evaluation Range on page 259 Evaluating the Entire Result IRange 2 EENRENEEEEER KAREN Eege 203 suppli M 203 Evaluating the Entire Result Range If enabled the entire result range is evaluated If disabled you can define a specific part of the result range to be evaluated Remote command CALCulate n ELIN startstop STATe on page 36
149. select the standard whose settings file you want to delete Standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz can also be deleted To change the path press the arrow icons at the right end of the Path field and select the required folder from the file system 3 Press the Delete button 4 Confirm the message to avoid unintentionally deleting a standard The standard file is removed from the folder To restore standard files 1 Torestore the predefined standard files do one of the following e Inthe Meas menu select the Digital Standards softkey The Manage VSA Standards file selection dialog box is displayed e Inthe Meas menu select the Restore Factory Settings softkey e O Y User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 227 R amp S FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis 2 How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements Select Restore Standard Files The standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery are restored to the Standards folder 8 2 How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements In addition to performing vector signal analysis strictly according to specific digital stand ards you can configure the analysis settings for customized tasks The general process for a typical VSA measurement is described here 1 2 10 Pres
150. several sweeps RPE Peak origin offset error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of origin offset error PCTL 95 percentile value of origin offset error Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic PERRor type This command queries the results of the phase error measurement performed for digital demodulation Query parameters type none RMS phase error of display points of current sweep AVG Average of RMS phase errors over several sweeps PAVG Average of maximum phase errors over several Sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS phase error over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum phase errors over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum phase errors over several sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of phase errors over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps Usage Query only User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 422 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA mA EX u Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic QERRor type This command queries the results of the Quadratur error measurement performed for digital demodulation Query parameters type none quadrature error for current sweep AVG Average qua
151. signal to the actual deviation of the mea surement signal OFF Uses the entered nominal deviation for the reference signal RST 1 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize VALue lt Normalize gt This command switches the compensation of the IQ offset and the compensation of amplitude droop on or off Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the more spe cific SENSe DDEMod NORMalize commands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 5 8 Demodulation Settings on page 357 E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 439 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Programming Examples Setting parameters lt Normalize gt ON OFF 1 0 OFF No compensation for amplitude droop nor UO offset ON Compensation for amplitude droop and UO offset enabled RST 1 SENSe DDEMod SBANd lt SidebandPos gt This command selects the sideband for the demodulation Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the SENS SWAP IQ command for new remote control programs see SENSe SWAPiq on page 341 Setting parameters lt SidebandPos gt NORMal INVerse NORMal Normal non inverted position INVerse Inverted position RST NORMal 11 13 Programming Examples The following examples demonstrate how to perform vector signal analysis in a remote environment These examples are meant to demonstrate the use of the most common remote com mands for vector signal
152. specified by the suffix lt n gt from the display The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Usage Event User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 402 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 8 3 Configuring the Result Display LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow command To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 for a list of available window types LAY out WINDow lt n gt TYPe Queries the window type of the window specified by the index n For a list of possible window types see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 Example LAY WIND2 TYPE Response MACC Modulation accuracy Usage Query only VSA Window Configuration For each window you can select a different evaluation method result type based on the data source selected in the Display Configuration Further window settings are available for some result types Manual configuration of VSA windows is described in chapter 6 5 1 Window Configu ration on page 218 Useful commands for configuring the window described elsewhere e LAYout ADD WINDow o
153. statistics count to the cor responding number Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Default unit NONE Usage SCPI confirmed E MUN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 348 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA Manual operation See Statistic Count on page 180 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent lt Counter gt This command queries the current statistics counter value which indicates how many result ranges have been evaluated For results that use the capture buffer as a source the number of used capture buffers can be queried Setting parameters lt Counter gt CAPTure STATistics STATistics Returns the number of result ranges that have been evaluated CAPTure Returns the number of used capture buffers evaluated RST STATistics 11 5 6 Configuring Bursts and Patterns The burst and pattern search settings can be configured and new patterns can be defined Manual configuration of bursts and patterns is described in chapter 5 7 Burst and Pat tern Configuration on page 181 e Burst Search ooo REM mde M beate uen ou me E NM tds 349 e Pattern Searches onian etta eet it ier eoe en EU Dose s oe e Ex EES 351 I Poner S Rm 353 11 5 6 1 Burst Search The burst search commands define when a burst is detected in the analyzed signal ISENSe IDDEMod SEARCBIBURSEBLUTO EE 349 IGENZGeIDDEMod GEARch BURG CONFioure AUTO 350 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt GLENgth MiNimum AANER 350 ISENSe IDBEMod SEARCH BUR
154. step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 380 Couple Windows If enabled markers in all diagrams with the same x axis time or symbols have coupled x values except for capture buffer display i e if you move the marker in one diagram it is moved in all coupled diagrams Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK on page 380 Marker Search Settings Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings These settings are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu or in the Search tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following ES User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 212 R amp S FSW K70 Analysis Markers e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Then select the hori zontal Search tab e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Config tab Then select the horizontal Search tab Marker JUICEERITZ SR t Markers Search Peak Search NextPeakMode Left Real Imag Plot search Mode for Next e m Reed aa tede aati 213 Real Imag Plot at ac M 213 Search Limits Le el EE 214 Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak se
155. sym Stop 1500 sym Start 2 91 l Stop 2 91 NIY 16 03 2010 CODES 10 08 34 Date 16 MAR 2010 10 08 34 Reason e The Vector I Q diagram shows the measurement signal after the measurement filter and synchronization e The Constellation UO diagram shows the de rotated constellation i e for a rr A DQPSK 4 instead of 8 points are displayed The inter symbol interference has been removed In case the measurement filter does not remove the inter symbol interference the win dows show measurements that are significantly different Problem The Constellation UO measurement result display has a different number of constellation points in the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R amp S FSW K70 Reason User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 275 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement ES a a ee ee ee Frequently Asked Questions In the FSQ K70 the Constellation UO measurement displays the symbol instants of the Vector UO measurement Hence this is a rotated constellation e g for a 1 4 DQPSK 8 points are displayed In the R amp S FSW K70 the Constellation UO diagram shows the de rotated constellation i e for a 17 4 DQPSK 4 instead of 8 points are displayed The inter symbol interference has been removed Note The result display I Q Constellation Rotated displays the rotated constellation as the FSQ K70 does For details on the Constellation I Q diagram in the R amp S FSW K70 see chapter 3 2 5 Constellati
156. table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 318 _L_L_____S M User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 314 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA _ c CIO CO Pna M Configuring VSA This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Band KIA KA Q JU VIEJW F D GJ Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Note The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA the input parameter A is still available and refers to the same band as KA For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 RST F 90 GHz 140 GHz Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BAND KA Sets the band to KA 26 5 GHz 40 GHz Manual operation See Band on page 152 SENSe CORRection CVL BIlAS lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias setting to be used with the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 318 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters
157. table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 318 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 65 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 152 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer Type This command defines the mixer name in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 318 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Type string Name of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX FS Z60 Manual operation See Mixer Name on page 152 SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs lt PortNo gt This command defines the mixer type in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 318 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parame
158. the Result Range covers the burst ramps it is important to adjust the Evaluation Range appropriately rr M User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 276 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Frequently Asked Questions Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm Std EDGE 16QAM SR 270 833 kHz m el Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0GHz Res Len 300 SGL ResRange Count 0 BURST PATTERN B Result Summary Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Start 76 sym C Mag CapBuf Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm Std EDGE 16QAM SR 270 833 kHz m t el Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0GHz Res Len 300 SGL ResRange Count 0 BURST PATTERN 1 Clrw Phase Err RMS Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err e Die Pattern Start 76 syr C Mag CapBuf Start 0 sym Fig 10 13 Solution Result Summary with correct evaluation range setting Make sure that the same samples are evaluated By default the EVM trace displays all sample instants e g if the sample rate is 4 the EVM trace shows 4 samples per symbol The Result Summary does not automatically evaluate all sample instants User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 277 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Frequently Asked Questions E g fora PSK modulation by default only symbol instants contribute to the EVM result Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm m tel Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0 GHz Res Len 100 SGL ResRange Count 0 Start 3 Ei C Const
159. the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 305 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R amp S FSW B13 Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are sup pressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 306 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW ensures that image frequencies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW which may lead to image frequency display Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz Therefore Switching the YIG preselector on or off ha
160. the symbol points or all points are considered for the statistical calculations Setting parameters lt StatisticMode gt SONLYy INFinite SONLy Symbol points only are used INFinite All points are used RST SONLy Manual operation See Oversampling on page 220 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ITEM LINE VALue lt SingleValue gt DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ITEM LINE VALue lt SingleValue gt This commands switches between the whole Result Summary and the diagram showing only a single value e g the EVM RMS value as a bargraph The same parameters are available as those for which modulation accuracy limits can be defined see Limit Value on page 216 SS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 407 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Parameters lt SingleValue gt Manual operation Configuring the Result Display ALL EVMR EVMP PERM PEP MERM MEP CFER RHO IQOF FERM FEP FDER ALL Complete Result Summary EVMR RMS EVM EVMP Peak EVM PERM RMS Phase error PEP Peak phase error MERM RMS Magnitude error MEP Peak magnitude error CFER Carrier frequency error RHO RHO IQOF 1 Q offset FERM RMS frequency error FEP Peak frequency error FDER FSK deviation error RST ALL See Result Summary Individual Results on page 48 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe AUTO lt DisplayPPSMode gt Defines the number of display points that are displayed per symbol automatically i e
161. ttt ttt ttt ttt ttti 358 ISENSeIDDEMo ECALEMODEL ttt ttt ttt 358 SENSe DDEMod EPRate AUTO ettet ttt ttt ttt ttt 359 ISENSe IDDEMod EPRatetv luel ttt ttt ttt ttt 359 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LENGIh esttttttttt ttt ttt ttt ttt 360 ISENSe IDDEMod EOUsltzerLOAf ttt ttt ttt ttt SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer MODE SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer RESet SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer SAVE eet ttt ttt ttt SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer S TATe ttti 362 SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue cett ttt ttt ttt 291 ISENSe IDDEMod ElUTer At Pa 295 ISENSe DDEMod ElUTertSt ATfel ttt ttt ttt ttt 296 SERIES SENSe DDEMGd F SKINS T te ee eee treo eg deeg geed de SENSe DDEMod FSYNc AUTO SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel SENSe DDEMod FSYNC RESUIt ee ceceecceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeseeseeesaeeeeeeaeeeaeseeesaeseeeseeeaeseeeeaeeeeeenteeieenteeas 362 IGENSGe IDDEMod FSYNMODEI nennen nnne nenne nnne nenne ener ener eniin 362 SENSe DDEMOG KDATA S TATO 21e irriie gegen tob ata e Blended dba Doe seva La abaco deed apa cane Re andan 363 SENSe DDEMOQG KDATA NAME 2d portae receta a edet Dur Ege ue DRE RR FEE XE deed 363 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog essent rennen nnne nens 297 SENSe DDEMOd MAPPing VALUE iieii nriran aian tree ca ea eran inna RR ER FER tah SENSe DDEMOQd MEILter AEPEG ettet petet retain ici n Pe teen pa A AEE ERE e XE Rx SERERE
162. values obtained from the distorted channel User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 100 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors 4 5 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors This section describes the signal and error models used within the VSA application The estimation algorithms used to quantify specific modulation errors are then outlined The descriptions vary depending on the modulation type e PSK QAM and MSK Modulation essen nnne 101 e PSNKModgulaloli EE 111 4 5 1 PSK QAM and MSK Modulation 4 5 1 4 Error Model cos 2pi f t Modulated Baseband RF Signal Inputs Amplitude Quadrature Inbalance Offset UO Offset Distorsion Noise Fig 4 52 Modelling Modulation Errors The measured signal model for PSK QAM and MSK modulation is shown in fig ure 4 52 and can be expressed as MEAS REF c j Qo REF cl c lei e enm att where REF t and REF 0 the inphase and quadrature component of the reference signal g and go the effects of the gain imbalance c and Go the effects of an UO offset the quadrature error a the amplitude droop ES User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 101 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics 4 5 1 2 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors fo the carrier frequency offset the carrier phase offset C the timing offset n t a disturbing additive noise process of unkn
163. x S M with Xy Xm if x lt xm idx arg maxp with m Xp 0 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 467 R amp S9FSW K70 Annex Formulae Mathematical expression Calculation in R amp S FSW StdDev oy ou zs ES with 1 Xm J o n m oy DAnte M 95 ile X95 M xosu Mrt x 0 95 Pr denotes the probability Sorting the values and giving the 95 ile A 6 4 Trace Averaging The index m represents the current evaluation M is the total number of evaluations In single sweep mode M coresponds to the statistics count The index s represents the st sample within the trace If the measurement results are represented in logarithmic domain the average operation is performed on the linear values The result is then subsequently converted back into logarithmic domain Measurements Calculation in R amp S FSW RMS Average e Error Vector Magnitude EVM 2 8 e Meas Ref magnitude m M 1 Xs M Xs M Xs M e Capture Buffer magnitude Xs M 7 LU Linear Average All measurements where trace averaging M 1 a e 8 is possible except for the measurements x Ze 2 s M XsM listed for RMS averaging i M A 6 5 Analytically Calculated Filters The following filters are calculated during runtime of the unit and as a function of the operating parameter Alpha or BT User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 468 R amp S
164. zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range O to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 221 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom win dows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 221 See Restore Original Display on page 221 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 221 Configuring the Result Display The following commands are required to configure the result display in a remote envi ronment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 6 5 Display and Win dow Configuration on page 217 e General Window Commande 396 e Working with Windows in the Display erronee rere eee inet 397 VSA Window CohtlgUladion i aec t odere b pecore eee tae o eel ce Rae tid 403 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independant of the application EEUU RA M User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 396 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring the Result Display Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel
165. 0 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps INIT CONM WAI Continues the measurement next 20 sweeps and waits for the end Result Averaging is performed over 40 sweeps Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 179 INITiate CONTinuous State This command controls the sweep mode Note that in single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual If the sweep mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see rNiTiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 375 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous sweep OFF 0 Single sweep RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sweep mode to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sweep mode to continuous sweep Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 179 E User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 373 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA PEEMGNSGNE EMO
166. 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 45 90 45 90 45 180 45 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 75 R amp S9FSW K70 Table 4 8 17 4 DQPSK TFTS Logical symbol mapping Measurement Basics REESEN Symbol Mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 180 45 90 45 90 45 0 45 Table 4 9 7 4 DQPSK Natural Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 45 90 45 180 45 90 45 Table 4 10 7 4 DQPSK APCO25 and APCO25Phase2 Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 45 90 45 90 45 180 45 4 3 5 Offset QPSK Offset QPSK differs from normal QPSK in the fact that the Q component is delayed by half a symbol period against the component in the time domain Hence the symbol time instants of the and the Q component do not coincide The concept of Offset QPSK is illustrated in the diagrams below User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 76 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics a CUM C Q naPnsppewm Symbol Mapping Derivation of OQPSK Table 4 11 I Q diagram and constellation diagram QPSK O
167. 02 07 269 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Explanation of Error Messages Message Pattern Search On But No Pattern Selected Spectrum VSA Modulation amp Signal Description Ref Level 4 00 d m a Att 16 dB Modulation Signal Description SGL BURST PATTERN Signal Type A EVM Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst Min Length 148 sym 546 462 us Max Length 148 sym 546 462 us Run In B sym 11 077 us Run Out 3 sym 11 077 us wv Pattern EE 5 Start 13 sym Name 0 JPattem settings m w Offset 58 sym 214 154 us Description K Burst Length Offset Start 0 sym Stup 1900 Syiti E Fig 10 9 The red circle shows the place where you can specify a pattern Solution Select an existing pattern or create a new pattern that you expect to be within the signal For more information see e Pattern Settings on page 139 chapter 8 2 2 How to Perform Pattern Searches on page 229 Message Pattern Not Entirely Within Result Range A pattern can only be found if it is entirely within the result range Therefore this error message always occurs with a Pattern Not Found error Solution Choose the pattern as reference of your result range alignment Then the pat tern will be forcefully part of your result range and the pattern search can succeed For more information see e chapter 5 8 Result Range Configu
168. 03 Remote command SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQOFfset on page 364 ENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQIMbalance on page 364 ENSe DDEMod NORMalize ADRoop on page 363 ENSe DDEMod NORMalize SRERror on page 365 ENSe DDEMod NORMalize CHANnel on page 364 Compensate for FSK If enabled compensation for various effects is taken into consideration during demodu lation Thus these distortions are not shown in the calculated error values e Carrier Frequency Drift e FSK Deviation Error e Symbol Rate Error For details on these effects see chapter 4 5 2 3 Modulation Errors on page 115 Remote command SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CFDRift on page 364 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERror on page 364 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize SRERror on page 365 Equalizer Settings The equalizer can compensate for a distorted transmission of the input signal or improve accuracy in estimating the reference signal For details see chapter 4 4 5 The Equalizer on page 98 State Equalizer Settings Activates or deactivates the equalizer to compensate for a distorted channel Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer STATe on page 362 Mode Equalizer Settings Defines the operating mode of the equalizer Normal Determines the filter values from the difference between the ideal ref erence signal and the measured signal Normal mode is sufficient for small distortions and performance remains high E M User Ma
169. 07 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics M M HP iM Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors ks Buin e 25 e where g and gq are the gain of the inphase and the quadrature component and 6 rep resents the quadrature error The UO imbalance can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings In this case the UO imbalance does not affect the EVM Note that the I Q imbalance is not estimated and cannot be compensated for in a BPSK signal Amplitude Droop The decrease of the signal power over time in the transmitter is referred to amplitude droop E CO i T ji Magnitude of Meas Signal relative e O ji e N i 0 50 100 150 200 Time Symbols Fig 4 59 Effect of amplitude droop E M User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 108 R amp S9FSW K70 Gain Distortion Measurement Basics a CC o S Mo unm Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Table 4 17 Effect of nonlinear amplitude distortions ter Nonlinear distortions amplitude distortion transmit Amplitude distortion analyzer D 08r 05 04r magnary Gain Distortion Trara
170. 2 7 Amplitude Settings Amplitude and scaling settings allow you to configure the vertical y axis display and for some result displays also the horizontal x axis Useful commands for amplitude settings described elsewhere INPut COUPling on page 305 e SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 371 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTRACGevtSCALelbRLEVel nennen 331 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet sees 331 SENGEM EE eeh Ee aire erre tee ete See REENEN e ide 331 PPLE SAI PAL E 331 lee LEE AE 332 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 330 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA a CO C J Ms Configuring VSA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level With a reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 0 dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 161 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset Parameters Offset Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Reference Level on page 161
171. 205 Auto Scale Allis ceed 205 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the fullscale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal com pression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 204 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 371 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto Resets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the default value Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 370 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual This function allows you to change the measurement duration for automatic setting adjustments Enter the value in seconds Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 370 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 369 ET User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 204 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Adjusting Settings Automatically Upper Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically
172. 3 INPUT DIQ SRATE AUTO EN 324 INPut EATT Joli is NEQUEO dade 334 INPUEEATT STATO onde tos Euboea e i eue este iu eta i e DES 334 INPUEFIETERAPASS S RN RE 306 INP tEIETer YIGESTATe i error tp eer rtr here Er ee err eur b e E HER EE E 306 ele e RH up 332 INPut GAIN VALue chri ert o Eege tuta ae pea epe eere tenen er e de e cree e dE 331 INbPutIO BAL ancedGTATel ener nnne ennn ether inrer en res inns ser nr seres inns serere nans d nnns int 324 Jl vis le Kal ITER Ke E 325 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel INPUtIO TYP INPUT SELEG niee e T a E A e EEE EEA DE Ea EEA ESES INSTrumerit GREate DUPELicate irae de ar adaa aa eo eerte tei Eb ra ee EE Ere gE de 288 INSTrument CREate REPLACE EE 288 INSTrument CREate NEW tiat iuret cria tere etri eben Chor Ee E tin dE age Eug Re ye incites 288 IN Sfrument DEL ee 289 INS Trumerits UIS Rc H 289 INS Tr ment VIE El 290 INSTrument SELect LAYGUEADDEWINBOW 5 ecoute ron engen terree eer rere e eere ete rn ive De eere rece redeas 398 LAYout CATalog WINDoOw sess eene nennen nennnnnnennnmr init nns liit nnns ss tent rsen nnts sene rns sen rnns sinn 399 LAYout IDENUTVEWINDOW S iii ooa ie rcr ke rhe reote nt rao bial aint See Eee t Ee oe epo aaa 399 LAYout REMovel WINDOW E ESE gd EEN ERE AREA 400 E
173. 326 ISENSeJPROBespsIDSRButmibet E 327 E LEI E d le TE 327 SENS amp TPROBE p SETUpNAME tree e eee distance E EEN 327 SENSE PROBE lt p gt SE TUP STA E 328 SENSe FROBe lt p gt SE Nk DT 328 SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID PARTnumber Queries the R amp S part number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 1 213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input Return values lt PartNumber gt Part number in a string LEE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 326 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA _ cmc sss ee ee Configuring VSA Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID SRNumber Queries the serial number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input I Return values lt SerialNo gt Serial number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup MODE lt Mode gt Select the action that is started with the micro button on the probe head See also Microbutton Action on page 158 Suffix p 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input I Parameters lt Mode gt RSINgle Run single starts one data acquisitio
174. 343 Hysteresis Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 177 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration 5 6 3 Signal Capture This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 344 Drop Out Time Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Note For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 using the baseband power trigger BBP the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to avoid unintentional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 343 Slope For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 345 Trigger Holdoff Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trig ger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 343 Capture Offset This setting is only available for applications in M
175. 3903 cav WSS av Ws9 Ettel C ANON ZH WSS jsungss G8 8 o Weed 98 08v Wee 0 MSWD 6 8 0 2 ASNA av WSS a4 WS9 jsung 1995 Logd WS 3NON zin Wee Bees prL Oopuened srl oats WSO c o MSWD EEEE8B OLZ ASWA eu WSS aS WS9 cas Wee ae jsunguon Ja Uu99 C ANON ZH Ws eziuoJuo prL Oopuened srl 08S Wee 0 MSWD 8 0 2 YSNA uAs Weg LOSL Wee Nso Ja Uu99 C ANON ZH WSS jsungjeuu SZ vL SO0 o uengd srl 0OSL WSO CO MSWD 8 0 2 ASNA JON Weg ISO Jet 4 seo oDuey u1bue ulayed jsung Joy Budde 1d9S uonenje 3 jueuiuBiv ynsey ulayed 10 Q23ue9S 104 YOIeAS 1g eydiy jyusueJJ a e1 oquiAs uone npo N DIEDUEIS Jopjo4 sburjes pue sp4epuejs pauljapad Jo S17 L 4 afqeL User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 Annex R amp S9FSW K70 Predefined Standards and Settings 451 e qe ieAe SI WO POUS e JO SWEU pJepuejs BU WO SIOJIP Y eeuw pepi oud si spueuuuloo ejouleiJ 104 JejeuleJed We SUL x 2 LOSL WYO9 C ue 39d3 eeng C MSH 3903 esingepiM Lauer 0081 Weg adeys esind 4903 usu wy SLZLL Y o wened LL V ve 3633 2 epw3oda zu ger WVOOI v 091 3903 us esind bOSL WVO9 MOEN HSH 3903 SE Sen C edeus MOJEN j9 u9 0081 Weg asind wo1 4903 usu wv SLZLL Y o wened 1L SH 3633 Aen geg zHsze WVOOI V L O91 3903 LU LOS gd O MSH 39d3 TONS C MSH 3903 esingepiM Lauer 0081 Sd adeys
176. 410 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe sessi nennen rese nnne rne enne 382 CAL Culatesn gt DEL Tamarker lt q gt 2 EE 382 CALCulate n ELIN startstop STATe sessssssssssssseseeeeeee seen iriiri aridi edadia naia 368 CAlCulate cnz EL lN zstartstopzfVAl ue 368 CALCulate lt n gt FEED CALCu latesn gt Wel d E EE CALOCulate n FSK DEViation COMPensation essen enne nnne n nnne CALOCulate n FSK DEViation REFerence RELative eese nennen CALOCulate n FSK DEViation REFerence VALue essent CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy ResultType LimitType STATe essere CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt RESUIt S CAL Culate cnzLlMitMACCuracvCFEbRrorCURbRentGTATe rennen CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALue sess CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent RE Gu 425 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN STATe essent CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN VALUue sssssessssesesee eene nennen nennen nennen nnne nnn CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK STAT enne ennt CAL Culate nz LUIMrMACCuracvCFERrorPEARK VAL ue CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK RESuUlt eese 425 CALCulate
177. 476 e Import EXport ee EE 222 Howto Export and Import YQ Dala ertet ettet hte enean nnn hn 223 7 1 Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the toolbar ES Some functions for particular data types are also available via softkeys or dialog boxes in the corresponding menus e g trace data or marker peak lists D For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FSW User Manual 2j M M M 223 L Export Trace to ASCII File neret rrt t nter tet 223 DE EE 223 NEE EE 223 SEKR EE 223 E oe se User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 222 R amp S FSW K70 UO Data Import and Export 7 2 0 How to Export and Import UO Data Export Opens a submenu to configure data export Export Trace to ASCII File Export Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format dat to the specified file and directory The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 412 IQ Export
178. 59 None No measurement filter is used Remote command SENSe DDEMod MFILter STATe on page 367 To turn off the measurement filter SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER on page 367 To use a user defined filter SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME on page 367 To define the name of the measurement filter Load User Filter Type Opens a file selection dialog box to select the user defined measurement filter to be used This setting is only available if User is selected as the Filter Type For detailed instructions on working with user defined filters see chapter 8 2 1 How to Select User Defined Filters on page 229 Remote command SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER on page 367 Alpha BT Type Defines the roll off factor Alpha or the filter bandwidth BT The roll off factor or filter bandwidth are available for RC RRC and Gauss filters If the measurement mode is automatically selected according to the transmit filter this setting is identical to the Alpha BT value in the modulation settings see Alpha BT on page 137 Remote command Measurement filter SENSe DDEMod MFILter ALPHa on page 366 Transmit filter SENSe DDEMod TFILter ALPHa on page 300 5 11 Evaluation Range Configuration The evaluation range defines which range of the result is to be evaluated either the entire result range or only a specified part of it The calculated length of the specified
179. 59 SENSe amp DBEModg EOUalzerENGILh 1 orte enero tepore peau ene ENNER tu pnta vein 360 RETE RA I e LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLMMM X User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 357 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod EQUalIZEr LOAD nicioni nene ever iuta deian ipia aA iaa iadaaa ta 360 SENS amp DDEMod EQUalizer MODE nisan aa aa a ia aA 360 SENS amp DDEMod EQUalizerRESel 2 2 21 rper ll ra Lade te eee 361 SENSeJDDEMGbd EOUalizek EE 361 SENSe DDEMod EQUaAlizerES FAT iiia epe 2c gd E EA 362 SENS amp J DDEMod ES YNGUAUTO viriau cree tanken Ra aree npa a Ra Dern reed nexa reete Ye Ra Rande 362 SENSe JDDEMod FSYNCG EEVel 12 2 cedo bri onn aa EEN SR NEEN 362 SENS amp J DDEMod FSYNGRESHIE iaiireeorr terere rtt nnn nh rnm unn 362 SENSe DDEMod FSYNG MODE center tentes 362 SBENS amp TIDDEMOOGKBATa STAT eiie rre erani ous ne dn enu SEENEN ira Rink nitus 363 ISENS amp JDDEMOSIKDATaENAMIE aa ipao oon are uh pano EENS ENEE EEN 363 SENSe amp DDEMod NORMalize ADRGOD 21 ciiin n Rente heran 363 SENS amp TIDDEMod NORMalize CPDIENL eege ERKENNEN ENNER NEEN art niens 364 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CHAWNnel oinnia tne tnnt nnn dien 364 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERror eeeeeeeeee eene nennen nnnm ne enne nnne nnn 364 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQlIMbalance eeeee esee 3
180. 60 RST 3 5 RMS 1 5 Default unit deg CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the lower limit for the current peak or mean Rho limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 1 0 RST 0 999 mean 0 9995 Default unit NONE EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 392 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA EG C Z i Analysis 11 7 4 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications For the VSA application the commands to define tha analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 11 5 3 Signal Capture on page 339 Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before executing these commands Useful commands related to MSRA mode described elsewhere e INITiate REFResh on page 374 INITiate SEQuencer REFResh ALL on page 375 Remote commands exclusiv
181. 64 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize QOPFfsel 2 erect iier ra aide tonne Rosana nnnc 364 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize SRE RIOT 1 1 hh orar ida n to sare di tron rna 365 SENSe DDEMaod OP TImIZB OR EE 365 IEN Ze IDDEMod SGEARch PDATTem NC AUTO 365 IGENSGe JDDEMod GEAbRch PATTem SNCTGSTATel ENEE ENNEN n 365 SENSe DDEMod ECALc MODE lt EvmCalc gt This command defines the calculation formula for EVM Setting parameters lt EvmCalc gt SIGNal SYMBol MECPower MACPower SIGNal Calculation normalized to the mean power of the reference signal at the symbol instants SYMBol Calculation normalized to the maximum power of the reference signal at the symbol instants MECPower Calculation normalized to the mean expected power of the mea surement signal at the symbol instants MACPower Calculation normalized to the maximum expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants RST SIGNal Manual operation See Normalize EVM to on page 197 SENSe DDEMod ECALc OFFSet lt EVMOffsetState gt ConfigureS the way the VSA application calculates the error vector results for offset QPSK User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 358 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA PECHINO A X Pr D mes Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt EVMOffsetState gt ON OFF 1 0 ON VSA application compensates the delay of the Q c
182. 7 1 Burst Search on page 181 Information Expected Burst Length 148 4 sym Burst Found Preview Preview Mag CapBuf Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 92 Overview of the Demodulation Process Burst Search Algorithm Settings 1Q Capture Buffer Power Averaged Calculate Average Filter Length Calculate Threshold Find Next Rising amp Falling Edge Calculate Acceptable Burst Lengths Burst Length Okay Add to Burst List Fig 4 46 Burst search algorithm 4 4 2 I Q Pattern Search The UO pattern search is performed only if it is switched on Otherwise this stage is skipped The main benefit of the UO pattern search is that it enables an alignment of the result range to the pattern Furthermore this stage can function as a filter If the burst search and UO pattern search are switched on and the parameter Meas Only If Pattern Symbols Correct is set to true only bursts with the correct pattern are demodulated see Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct on page 185 During the UO pattern search stage the capture buffer is searched for an UO pattern by trying different time and frequency hypotheses The UO pattern is generated internally based on the specified symbol number of the pattern and the signal description i e R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics mA
183. 73 9292 02 07 209 R amp S9FSW K70 Analysis 6 3 6 3 1 Markers Header If enabled a header with scaling information etc is included in the file Remote command FORMat DEXPort HEADer on page 412 Decimal Separator Defines the decimal separator for floating point numerals for the data export files Eval uation programs require different separators in different languages Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 411 Trace ASCII Export Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the traces of the captured data in ASCII format to the specified file and directory Either the traces for the selected window only see Specifics for on page 132 are exported or the traces of all windows are exported one after the other For details on the file format see chapter A 4 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data on page 458 Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 412 Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Markers are configured in the Marker dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Individual Marker Semgmge EE retener trennt nenne 210 EE e C 212 Marker Positioning PUMGUOMG TEE 214
184. 8 Start Stop Defines the symbol in the result range at which evaluation is started and stopped The start and stop symbols themselves are included in the evaluation range User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 203 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration 5 12 Adjusting Settings Automatically Note Note that the start and stop values are defined with respect to the x axis including an optional offset defined via the Symbol Number at Reference Start parameter Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue on page 368 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings In order to do so a measurement is performed The duration of this measurement can be defined automatically or manually To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 204 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto 204 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual 204 Upper Level Fysteresls iie ERENNERT EENS 205 Lower Level Flysteresis sucues cerne ec ruere euren eeu kenn cuan trnkrtYu ERR nnn dea a 205 Auto Scale Once Auto Scale Window inesse cirea
185. 92 02 07 99 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics mmI m Overview of the Demodulation Process extended using Averaging mode In this case the statistics from all previously deter mined reference signals and measurement signals are averaged to determine the current equalizer function Thus the results of previous sweeps are continuously considered to calculate the current equalizer values Averaging is only restarted when the instrument is switched off or when the user manually resets the equalizer Obviously this method requires a stable input signal for the entire duration of the measurement as otherwise the current equalizer is distorted by previous results This process requires extended calculation time so that the measurement update rate of the instrument decreases distinctly When the distortions are compensated sufficiently this averaging process can be stopped The current filter is frozen that means it is no longer changed Keep in mind that in Tracking and Averaging mode for sweep counts gt 1 repeated analy sis of past result ranges might lead to differing readings The equalizer algorithm is limited to PSK and QAM modulation schemes as the optimi zation criterion of the algorithm is based on minimizing the mean square error vector magnitude Thus it cannot be used for FSK modulation User de
186. 9292 02 07 207 R amp S9FSW K70 Analysis Clear Write Max Hold Min Hold Average View Blank Trace Settings Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting The Detector is automatically set to Auto Peak The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The Detector is automatically set to Positive Peak The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one The Detector is automatically set to Negative Peak The average is formed over several sweeps The Statistic Count determines the number of averaging procedures The Detector is automatically set to Sample The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 378 Evaluation Defines whether the trace displays the evaluation of the measured signal or the reference signal if Meas amp Ref Signal is used as the evaluation data source see Signal Source on page 218 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt VALue on page 378 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config Commonly required tra
187. ABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHo ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle lt BitDefinition gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt BitDefinition gt ChannelName This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt or MM
188. AM NSTale accion nl e ette ere ERR ENEE ENEE ENEE 299 SENSe uDDEModOPSRFORMUl 5 ernia etre derer nha dade er ye uRd onec iiia a aataid 299 SENSE IDBEMGG SIS Te ieri bee ete teat ere e pRR CDU m RR Apo a a aa aaa AA aS MEIN NR RAMS 300 I SENS amp J DBEMogd TFIEteEAEPHa EE 300 ISENSeJIDDEMod TFIbtor NAME 2 2 tbe rp pere RE BE Rec un E RE RERO cune ten RR e ert Ras 301 SENSe DDEMod TFILter S TATe eccentric 301 SENSeJDBEModg TFIbtet USE etaed ne a a dx u pe en ntn pue RE aaa 301 BENSe DBEMod USERNAME reuera epe etre geed Se ER reco etuer Er eaaa vu IS 301 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence RELative lt FSKRefDev gt This command defines the deviation to the reference frequency for FSK modulation as a multiple of the symbol rate For details see FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on page 136 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 294 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt FSKRefDev gt numeric value Range 0 1 to 15 RST 1 Default unit NONE Manual operation See FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on page 136 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence VALue lt FSKRefDevAbsRes gt This command defines the deviation to the reference frequency for FSK modulation as an absolute value in Hz Setting parameters lt FSKRefDevAbsRes gt numeric value Range 10 0 to 64e9 RST 100e3 Default unit Hz Manual operation See FSK
189. ATA FILE Version 01 00 gt Comment Standard EDGE 8PSK lt Comment gt Base 16 Base lt ModulationOrder gt 8 lt ModulationOrder gt lt ResultLength gt 148 lt ResultLength gt lt Data gt 777 511 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607 770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522 IURE IFY E LIF ETE Er Hr TIY IIL 615 527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344 241 264 773 1 337 446 514 600 677 7 lt Data gt lt Data gt 77 511 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607 770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522 IUE FUP EE LIF rt Er IET TIY IIL 615 527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344 241 264 773 1 337 446 514 600 677 7 7 Data 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522 Data 7 5 1 5 FA TE ATE IY WAT E ELL St H 6 770 17 177 17 527 04 241 26 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344 KSC A 337 446 514 600 677 7 77 Data 4 0 1 U H Data 7 777 511 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607 770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522 LUE rt gi i UIT 177 717 717 111 615 527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344 241 264 773 1 337 446 514 600 677 Data Data 77 777 511 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607 770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522 IUE rt EXE IIT rt AVT Hr VET ILL 615 527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344 IECH User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 461 R amp SS9FSW K70 Annex Formulae 241 264 773 111 337 446 514 600 67 Data lt RS VSA KNOWN DATA FILE A 6 Formul
190. AYOUEREPLEace WINDOW edet eiue tet a tne teen de EX EE FEE eek E IRSE RUERRER ERR e dE Yee ERN 400 LAYO SPET c PUT DUE 400 Egeter E RTR WEE 402 LAYout WINDowsin gt IDENURY 2 sic is feces 402 MMEMory LOADAQ Egeter Ee 427 MMEMory STORe IQ COMMent nente tet Eege geleed 427 MMEMOry STORe IQ S T ATQ nuit icit ed erede et eset t d esee eee Dio dd eta tete deen 427 MMEMory S TOResn TRAC eseu g et tp bucaishcanadessetdascepitads EEN 412 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition essen nnmis 436 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle essen enne enne nennen nnne nnns STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit NTRansition STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit PTRansition STATus QUEStionable ACPLimitE EVENt iii iecit ere rere eet Pert rtr re re ere rH eS 436 STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition esses nennen enne eaii nennt nennen rena 436 STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABIe 5 rrr eerte ei err pr prn p tee De ere e Kees 437 STATusOUEGtonable DilONTRansitton nennen nennen nnne nnne nnne rennen 437 EET RU M User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 488 R amp S FSW K70 List of Remote Commands VSA STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRAMSItiON sissi ee eee eee e ener tere eceeseaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeseaeessaeeseaeessaeeseaeessaeennees 438 ENT ee EN Rep EC KEE 436 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDiition eese ennemi 436 SGTATusOUEG onable FRtOuencv ENADi
191. CCuracy EVM PPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEAN STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFs
192. Channels gt DataFilename xyz complex float32 DataFilename lt UserData gt lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat gt Element RS_IQ_TAR_File Format Description The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute ileFormatVersion that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd Samples Contains the number of samples of the UO data For multi channel signals all channels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values e A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values e Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the UO data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the UO data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock frequency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz
193. Configuration 5 5 1 1 Input and Frontend Settings Radio Frequency pg iue iere etre tene enaena en e io ER ERE nnn 142 External Mixer Setuigs dier eode e deed EEN 144 Digital 1 6 Input Settings EE 153 Analog Baseband Input Settings eerte ere iret anat dee 156 Probe lee o Hp 158 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the R amp S FSW is the radio frequency If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source Input Frontend Radio Frequency Input Couplin Digital IQ nC High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz YIG Preselector Preamplifier Spectrum Realimag CapBufl Radio PEQUOMNGY TEE 142 input COMPING E 142 High Pass WE EE 143 Mdiccur re M M M M 143 Preamplifier eeh A EE 143 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 306 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct current DC This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 SS R B M a User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 142 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from
194. DDEMod PSK NSTate lt PSKNstate gt Together with DDEMod PSK FORMat this command defines the demodulation order for PSK see also SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat on page 298 Setting parameters lt PSKNstate gt 2 8 RST 2 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 135 SENSe DDEMod QAM FORMat lt QAMformat gt This command defines the specific demodulation order for QAM User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 298 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Setting parameters lt QAMformat gt Manual operation Configuring VSA NORMal DIFFerential NPI4 MNPI4 NORMal Demodulation order QAM is used DIFFerential Demodulation order DQAM is used NPI4 Demodulation order rr 4 16QAM is used MNPI4 Demodulation order 11 4 32QAM is used RST NORMal See Modulation Order on page 135 SENSe DDEMod QAM NSTate lt QAMNState gt This command defines the demodulation order for QAM lt QAMNSTate gt Order 16 16QAM 16 Pi 4 16QAM 32 32QAM 32 Pi 4 32QAM 64 64QAM 128 128QAM 256 256QAM Setting parameters lt QAMNState gt Manual operation numeric value RST 16 See Modulation Order on page 135 SENSe DDEMod QPSK FORMat lt QPSKformat gt This command defines the demodulation order for QPSK User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 299 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Setting parameters lt QPSKformat gt Example Man
195. DEMod RLENgth VALue eccentric 340 Cal EE 341 Tied c EN EE 341 TRACelOWBANOMBWIDTH ttt ttt tte ttt ttn ttt tenens ntt Lost 342 SENSe DDEMod PRATe lt CaptOverSmplg gt Defines the number of samples that are captured per symbol i e the factor by which the symbol rate is multiplied to obtain the sample rate This parameter also affects the demodulation bandwidth and thus the usable I Q bandwidth The sample rate depends on the defined Symbol Rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth on page 61 Setting parameters lt CaptOverSmplg gt 4 8 16 32 The factor by which the symbol rate is multiplied to obtain the sample rate e g 4 samples per symbol sample rate 4 symbol rate RST 4 Manual operation See Sample Rate on page 172 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth AUTO lt RecLengthAuto gt If enabled the capture length is automatically adapted as required according to the cur rent result length burst and pattern search settings and network specific characteristics e g burst and frame structures Setting parameters lt RecLengthAuto gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Capture Length Settings on page 172 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue lt RecordLength gt This command defines the capture length for further processing e g for burst search The record length is defined in time S default or symbols SYM Note that the maximum record length depends on the
196. DEMod STATieticMERhbor 420 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCion DDEMod GTATieticMbOWer 421 CAlLCulate cnzMAbRker mzFUNGHonDDEMod STATsticOOFtset 422 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic PERRor CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCnon DDEMod GTATietcOERor 423 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCion DDEMod GTATietchRHO 423 CAlLCulate cnzMAbker mz FUNGHonDDEMod STATsncCGNR 423 CALCulate n2 MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic SRERrOr essen 424 CAl Culate n MARKersm LINK ueniens SEENEN RR Enn nna deae ick e uk Moe ke dau pane a a nm deeg CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum APEak CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiMUM LEET CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz MAvimum NENT CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiMUM RIGHL esent n nnne tnnt nnn ne nnns n rnntn sena CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK CAL Culate cnz MAbker mz MiNimum LEET CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT CAL Culate nz MAbker mzMiNimum HIGH CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK eene eene nnne enne s nnne CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe nennen ehnnen nen nes nen rrnr sene rnn seen ness ennt nien renis rnnt nsn CALCulatesn gt MARKGRSMm gt X ssc fev Aide 381 CALCulatesn gt MARKGrSMme iY e 410 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe CALCulatesn gt STATisticS CODFESTAT e ooi ort re er reto dar aer dons reel t
197. E SONGS _ 4 esind LOSL We MOLEN YSH 3903 n HSH 3904 asind edeus MOJEN Jaju29 me Woz asind moz 4903 usu wv GLZLL y op ued LL HSH 3903 en 3903 ZHA SZE WVOZE p u OZE 3903 eut Spe buey 5u ulayed sang Jet Budden x Id9S uonenje 3 jueuiuBi v Unsen ulayed 10 Q2ue9S 104 YOIeAaS 1g eydiy jusueJJ 9je1joqui S uonenpow pyepuejs Jopjo4 452 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 Annex R amp S9FSW K70 Predefined Standards and Settings e qe ieAe SI WO UOous e Jo eujeu pJepuejs BU WO Sal 11 eeuw pepi oud si spueuuuloo zowa 104 JejeuleJed We SUL x Jee SR IEANEN cuq uioo 9 1982 Z 0 jsung 028Z P en ASNO ZHN ASAZ enig Jee SAEN DIEN eH moo GL6LOL Z 0 sung Cat en ASNO ZHN ASAZ enig Jee SR Ie N LHC JOO g 9 Z 0 sung 99 en ASNO ZHN L ASAZ enig ujojenig Z eseud oDuei eT seinBuejoou Sc OOdv MSdOQ H yns u aus Jede OSL 3NON ZH 9 MSdv Zd OOdV JejnBueyooy zZ eseud aue 19 Ndo sc OOdv ING2 H inse esque u 9 sung 891 P H S ZO2dY zp 9 ei zd OOdV JejnBueyooy ye1 Wo ANNE E adeg 00z GZO2dY ZH 9v ei 9 SZO2dY 491 7 ANON ScOOdV 7 SS adeg 00z zo ou ZH18 y MSdOd EI 2 szOOdV SZO2dY 12 Sea ISI 01 aor ye1 einen X AE wat emde5 008 000Z VINO ZHW 89ZZ MSdO 19SJJO 0002 VIGO ams X 19y4 See L MzviNdo ISI 01 0M a213 Ver AM4 XL d MeVWOO am
198. ENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB eege Activating automatic signal identification functions Activate both automatic signal identification functions SENS MIX SIGN ALL Use auto ID threshold of 8 dB SENS MIX THR 8dB Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data for the input signal without distortions default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACE3 Configuring a conversion loss table for a user defined band o PERSEEIEEEERES Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON 11 5 2 3 Configuring VSA 2 Configuring a new conversion loss table Define cvl table for range 1 of band as described in previous example extended V band SENS CORR CVL SEL UserTable SENS CO SENS CO SENS CO RR CVL COMM User defined conversion loss table for USER band H R SENS COR H R R CVL BAND USER CVL HARM 6 CVL BIAS 1mA CVL MIX FS Z260 CVL SNUM 123 4567 R CVL PORT 3 SENS CO SENS CO SENS CO DH Ai A A A A Conversion loss is linear from 55 GHz to 75 GHz SENS CORR CVL DATA 55GHZ 20DB 75GHZ 30DB 1 a aa Configuring the mixer and band settings Use user defined band and assign new cvl table SENS MIX HARM BAND USER Defin
199. ERRor PCURrent VALue on page 392 Magnitude Err Rms CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue on page 391 Magnitude Err Peak CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue on page 391 Carr Freq Err CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALue on page 390 Rho CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent VALue on page 392 SS PY User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 216 R amp S FSW K70 Analysis a_a a n Display and Window Configuration Result type Remote command IQ Offset CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent VALue on page 392 FSK modulation only Freq Err Rms CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent VALue on page 391 Freq Err Peak CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue on page 391 Magnitude Err Rms CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue on page 391 Magnitude Err Peak CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue on page 391 FSK Dev Err CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue on page 391 Carr Freq Err CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALue on page 390 Check Current Mean Peak Considers the defined limit value in the limit check if checking is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt STATe on pag
200. ERRor RCURrent STATe sese 389 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue sees nnne 391 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent REG 425 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan STATe essent rennen neret 389 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan VALue essent nennen rennen 391 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan RESUlt eene 425 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak STATe essent eene ennemis CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak VALue esses eene eene eterna CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak RESult CAL Culate cnzLlMtMACCuracv ODOFtserCUbentGiAaTe eene enne nnne CAlCulate nz LUIMrMACCuracvOOFtsetrCUlRbentvVAl ue CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent RESUlt esee 425 CAlCulate nz UM MACCuracvOOFFserMEAN GTATe eene rennen nennen CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracvOOFFesecMEAN MAL ue CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset MEAN RESult CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracvOOFteebEAk GTATe nennen CAlCulate nz LUIMrMACCuracvOOFFserbEAkKVAL ue CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracvOOFFeebEAKTREGul enn 425 CAL Culate cnzLlMtMACCuracv PEbRorbCllbrentGTATe eene CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent VALue essen nennen nennen CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent RESult CAlCulate nz LUlMrtMACCura
201. EStionable POWer PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated register The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVEN register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Commands for Compatibility The following commands are maintained for compatibility reasons with previous R amp S analyzers only Use the specified alternative commands for new remote control pro grams CALCulate n FSK DEViation COMPensation eese nnne 439 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize VALUE 0 0c cceeeeeeeeee eee ee ease eee nennen eene nennen enne 439 ISENSE IDB EMGGISBAING EE 440 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation COMPensation lt RefDevComp gt This command defines whether the deviation error is compensated for when calculating the frequency error for FSK modulation Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only For newer remote programs use SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERror on page 364 Setting parameters lt RefDevComp gt ON OFF 1 0 ON Scales the reference
202. EUU RA N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 90 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurement Basics 4 4 1 Overview of the Demodulation Process Pattern Symbol Check The I Q Pattern Search stage can only detect whether the similarity between the I Q pattern and the capture buffer exceeds a certain threshold and in this way find the most likely positions where a pattern can be found Within this stage the VSA application checks whether the pattern symbols bits really coincide with the symbol decisions at the pre detected position For example if one out of 20 symbols does not coincide the I Q Pattern Search stage might detect this UO pattern but the Pattern Symbol Check stage will decline it Note that this stage is only active if the pattern search is switched on If individual symbols do not match the pattern these symbols are indicated by a red frame in the symbol table Reference Signal Generation The ideal reference signal is generated based on the detected symbols and the specifi cations of the signal model i e the modulation scheme and the transmit filter Tx filter Measurement Filtering Both the measurement signal and the reference signal are filtered with the specified measurement filter Synchronization In this stage the measurement signal and the reference signal are correlated For PSK QAM and MSK modulated signals an estimation algorithm is used in order to obtain estimates for the signal amplitude signal timing
203. Entire Result Range on page 203 CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue lt LeftDisp gt Defines the start and stop values for the evaluation range see CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt STATe on page 368 Suffix lt startstop gt 1 2 1 start value 2 stop value EEUU RA N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 368 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 5 11 Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt LeftDisp gt numeric value Range 0 to 1000000 RST 0 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Start Stop on page 203 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings Manual execution of automatic adjustment functions is described in chapter 5 12 Adjust ing Settings Automatically on page 204 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONE 369 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ALL cesses 369 ISENGelAD lust CONEioure DURaton eene nn ns 369 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE cessisse nennen 370 IGENGelADlust CONEioure Hv teresle LOMer eene nnne 370 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer sse rere nennen 371 SENS ADJS KLE Vel irin i a pee ed dee Eege 371 SENS DDEM0d PRESet RLEV Ol aiena a aier aiad els 371 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once then switche
204. Examples Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals e Select the Burst Type Normal 8PSK EDGE f C 5 Toggl modu GSM EDGE B Burst Slotd Gg Burst Type Normal 8P SK EDGE m Save Recall Slots Slot Level Fun Slot Attenuation o o dB A1 Multislot Configuration Number Of Slots H Burst Fields 111111111 PRES 9 D Training Sequence TSC rsc 0 User TSC 11 1111 0 Guard 111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 Slot Marker Definition lose the GSM EDGE Burst Slot0 dialog box e the State to On at the top of the GSM EDGE dialog box to switch the lation on 6 Press the RF ON OFF key to switch the RF transmission on 9 3 2 Analyzer Settings This section helps you get your first valid measurement with a bursted signal It starts with step by step instructions and continues with a more detailed description of further functionality Frequency 1 GHz Ref Level 4 dBm Standard GSM 8PSK EDGE To define the settings on the R amp S FSW 1 Press the PRESET key to start from a defined state 2 Press the FREQ key and enter 7 GHz User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 255 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples No oO R Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals Press the AMPT key and enter 4 dBm as the reference level This corresponds approximately to the peak envelope power of the signal Start the VSA application
205. Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications For details see chapter 7 I Q Data Import and Export on page 222 Remote command MMEMory STORe IQ STATe on page 427 MMEMory STORe IQ COMMent on page 427 Import Provides functions to import data IQ Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note that the I Q data must have a specific format as described in chapter A 7 I Q Data File Format iq tar on page 476 UO import is not available in MSRA mode For details see chapter 7 I Q Data Import and Export on page 222 Remote command MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe on page 427 How to Export and Import UO Data UO data can only be exported in applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Ana lyzer or optional applications Capturing and exporting UO data 1 Press the PRESET key User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 223 R amp S FSW K70 I Q Data Import and Export ECT c SS SS ll How to Export and Import UO Data 2 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that sup ports UO d
206. FERRor PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean frequency error peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical This command is available for FSK modulation only Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 100 RST 1 5 mean 1 0 Default unit Hz CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean magnitude error peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical SSE Sanam User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 391 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA SS
207. How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis REESEN How to Analyze the Measured Data The range of the displayed x axis for statistics diagrams can be defined in the following ways e manually by defining reference values and positions e automatically according to the current results The range of the displayed y axis can be defined in the following ways e manually by defining the minimum and maximum values to be displayed e automatically according to the current results After changing the scaling you can restore the default settings To define the number of bars 1 Focus the result window 2 Select AMPT gt XScale Config gt X Axis Quantize 3 Enter the number of bars to be displayed The diagram is adapted to display the specified number of bars To define the x axis scaling manually using a reference point and divisions With this method you define a reference value on the x axis to be displayed at the Ref Position of the y axis The reference value is determined internally according to the displayed data and cannot be changed The beginning of the diagram is at the position 0 the end is at 100 Additionally you define the range to be displayed in each of the 10 divisions of the display which determines the total range to be displayed on the x axis 1 Focus the result window 2 Select AMPT gt Scale Config gt Reference Value 3 Enter a reference value on the x axis in the current unit 4 Define the r
208. I Q Meas amp Ref Start 2 535 Mod Offset QPSK SR 1 0 MHz Y Settings Overview icirw B Result Summary Mean peak unit Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Amplitude Droop Biwer Stop ivy sym 1M Clrw D Vector I Q Error 1 Clrw Restore Factory Settings Stop 2 535 Start 0 254 Stop 0 254 TT Gal 12 03 2010 a 09 44 29 Question Why isn t the FSK Deviation Error in R amp S FSW K70 identical to the FSK DEV ERROR in R amp S FSQ K70 Solution The FSK deviation error in the R amp S FSW K70 is calculated as the difference between the measured frequency deviation and the reference frequency deviation as entered by the user see FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on page 136 What is referred to as the FSK DEV ERROR in the R amp S FSQ K70 is calculated differently see the R amp S FSQ K70 Software Manual and is comparable to the Freq Err RMS in the R amp S FSW K70 However while the FSK DEV ERROR in the R amp S FSQ K70 is given in Hz the Freq Err RMS in the R amp S FSW K70 is given in percent i e relative to the FSK Meas Devi ation User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 278 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Frequently Asked Questions Problem The PSK QAM Signal shows spikes in the Frequency Error result dis play Spectrum VSA Ref Level 22 00 dBm Mod QPSK SR 270 833 kHz m el Att 10 0 dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen 200 SGL TRG EXT A Freq Error Abs SL Clrw B Phase Error
209. Individual Marker Settings In VSA evaluations up to 5 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time E o User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 210 R amp S FSW K70 Analysis Markers Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Selected State Stimulus Code Domain Settings On Off SEE or Norm on or m Marker All Marker Off ea 1 Code Domain Power Selected VIGOR EG 211 AE STEE 211 POT c 211 uico 212 Assigning the Marker to a Trat uir eani ee at Ret eee enero rada esce eae 212 Ul MSIKOES OI e esee sense oed fedens ta futu rr Rm utu cec ta aw ee f e futu ces ER eue ees 212 Couple ee 212 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 381 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 382 X value Defines the position of the marker on the x axis Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 382 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 381 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 211 R amp S9FS
210. IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters lt Offset gt This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data The offset must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to lt Record length gt RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 178 11 7 5 Zooming into the Display 11 7 5 1 Using the Single Zoom BISPIay WINDowshs ZOOM AREA EE 394 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM STATe cies nennen nennen nnns reserare rna 395 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm EU User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 394 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 7 5 2 Analysis 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagr
211. Its flat usable bandwidth no considerable amplitude or phase distortion depends on e the used sample rate which depends on the defined Symbol Rate see Symbol Rate on page 136 the defined Sample Rate parameter see Sample Rate on page 172 e the type of input used digital baseband input RF input etc For details on the maximum usable bandwidth see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth on page 61 played in the Signal Capture dialog see chapter 5 6 1 Data Acquisition o The sample rate and the usable UO bandwidth achieved for the current settings is dis on page 171 4 1 2 Demodulation Bandwidth Measurement Bandwidth Some modulation systems do not use a receive filter In these cases special care should be taken that no interference or adjacent channels occur within the demodulation band LEE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 55 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing width The Sample rate parameter should be set to a low value see Sample Rate on page 172 Typical communication systems demand special receive or measurement filters e g root raised cosine receive filter or EDGE measurement filter If no such filtering is performed care should be taken that neither interfering signals nor adjacent channels fall within the demodulation bandwidth 4 1 3 Modulation and Demodulation Filters Sample points are required for d
212. JUSE TTC 356 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe VOFFset eeessssssssessee enne 357 ISENSe JDDEMadg TIME iier iaaa an eer re KE eene gue e uo RE De gu ER RR rie ERR ERE pera 357 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment DEFault Alignment This command defines where the reference point is to appear in the result range Suffix t 1 6 Setting parameters Alignment LEFT CENTer RIGHt LEFT The reference point is at the start of the result range CENTer The reference point is in the middle of the result range RIGHt The reference point is displayed at the end of the result range RST LEFT Manual operation See Alignment on page 192 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet FitOffset This command shifts the display range relative to the reference time by the number of given symbols The resolution is 1 symbol A value gt 0 results in a shift towards the right and a value lt 0 results in a shift towards the left Suffix lt t gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt FitOffset gt numeric value Range 8000 to 8000 RST 0 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Offset on page 192 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust VALue Reference This command defines the reference point for the display Suffix lt t gt 1 6 E MN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 356 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 5 8 Configuring VSA Sett
213. K Constellation diagram sesene 86 OOK Symbol mapping sese 86 Optimization Nuet TO le TE 198 Options B160 ER 172 Bandwidth extension 62 63 172 Electronic attenuation B25 163 High pass filter B13 143 306 Preamplifier B24 143 162 VUIGO certes E E E N 172 OQPSK Constellation diagram esee 77 Output lere nile mr 141 Sample rate definition ssssssssse 62 66 Overload RE input remote tne rnnt rn 305 Oversampling icut Lm 220 Overview ere nile clio P e 130 P Parameters Reg e WE 52 53 PSK QAM MSK Retrieving results remote sssssssse 414 SCPI parameters AA 52 53 Patterns Adding to standard sss 187 Assigning to standard sss 230 Available A Coarse synchronization eeeessssseeess 199 Compatible EE Configuration Copying Creating Definition ie Definition remote sssssssseeeeeee 353 Deleting EE 188 Details A Displaying ER 187 TE rte e EET Enabling S Fine synchronization sse 199 Managing WEE 232 Name m Reference for result range e Removing from standard 0ceeeeeeeeeteeteeeees Restorilig io crt iie dar dde es Selected eg Stan
214. Keying FSK ISI Inter symbol Interference ISI free demodulation Demodulation structure in which the signal is no longer influenced by adjacent symbols at the deci sion instants after signal adapted filtering System Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters MEAS filter Measurement Filter Weighting filter for the measure ment System Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters MSK Minimum Shift Keying Modulation mode Minimum Shift Keying MSK NDA Demodulator Non Data Aided Demodulator Demodulation without any knowl edge of the sent data contents Demodulation and Algorithms PSK Phase Shift Keying Modulation mode for which the information lies within the phase or within the phase transitions Phase Shift Keying PSK QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Modulation mode for which the information is encrypted both in the amplitude and phase Quadrature Amplitude Modulation QAM User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 448 R amp S FSW K70 Annex DESSERT Predefined Standards and Settings Abbreviation Meaning See section RMS Root Mean Square Averaging RMS Quantities RX filter Receive Filter System Theoretical Modulation Baseband filter in analyzer used and Demodulation Filters for signal adapted filtering Transmit filter Transmitter Filter System Theoretical Modulation Digital impulse shaping filter in sig and D
215. Le RPOSition lt RPos gt This command defines the position of the reference value for the X axis Setting the position of the reference value is possible only for statistical result displays All other result displays support the query only Setting parameters lt RPos gt numeric value lt numeric_value gt Example DISP TRAC X RPOS 30 PCT The reference value is shifted by 30 towards the left Manual operation See X Axis Scaling on page 169 See X Axis Reference Position on page 169 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RVALue lt RVal gt This command defines the reference value for the x axis for statistical result displays LSS SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 337 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA For all other result displays this command is only available as a query Setting parameters lt RVal gt numeric value Reference value for the x axis Manual operation See X Axis Scaling on page 169 See X Axis Reference Value on page 169 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Usage SCPI confirmed DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible Parameters lt Value gt numeric value the unit depends on the result display Defines the range per divisi
216. LlMtMACCuracvFtRborbRCUlbRrent VAl ue esses eene nennen nnne CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan STATe sse nennen nennen nnn CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan VALue essere nnne enne CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan RESUIt eese 425 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak STATe esses ennemis 389 CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracvFERbRorRbEakVA ue 391 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak RESult CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent STATe esses eene nennen nnn 389 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue eese rennen nnne nennen 391 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent RESUlt eee 425 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan STATe essent een eren 389 N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 484 R amp S FSW K70 List of Remote Commands VSA CAL Culate nzLIMtMACCuracv MERbor PME anVAl ue 391 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan RESUuIt esee 425 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak STATe esses eene nennen 389 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak VALue sess 391 CAL Culate nzLIMiMACCuracvMERRor PPEaKT RE GOIN 425 CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy M
217. Messages no Does your signal contain pattern S this pattern relevant e g to align your result to the pattern or to check whether the pattern is transmitted correctly Does your signal consist of ranges with different modulation types no omm in the Signal Description dialog is a Burst Signal Make sure your Signal Type Name Eegen ous Make sure the pattern is indicated in the Signal Description dialog BurstSearch Pattern Search a iccording to Signal Structure Make sure the burst search switched on in the Burst Search dialog se the Offset and Result Length parameters in the Result Range dialog to move your result range to the desired point in the capture buffer E Make sure the pattern search is switched on Is Burst Not Found displayed in the status bar o you see a Pattern Not Found Message se an external trigger and a appropriate trigger offset Go back to no Make sure your Result Range Alignment reference is Burst Range Settings dialog Make sure your Result Range Alignment reference is Pattern Waveform Range Setting Dialog Go back to 10 2 Explanation of Error Messages The follow Message Message Message Message Message Message Message Message
218. Mod TFILter USER IEN Ge IDDEMod Elter STATel enne nnnnrntnren rennen nnne EI Eeler D HO ISENGeIDDEModUSERNAME ue SENSe FREQuenoy GENTESr e retten tren rrr haer rere ser Reb e de n a EE E Fo e re erus IEN Ge IEbREOuencv CENT er SGTER nennen nennen neret inre nre tenen erret nnne p MM MJ User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 492 R amp S FSW K70 List of Remote Commands VSA SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO cccssescscessscsrseesssssnesonesseescscnsacesssscesecesenensestenseeasenensestensasens 330 SENSe FREQuency OFFSeLt rnit tiri trei Ea rene ere arris aa EN TETE EAS TASTIERE EEA 330 SENSE MIX6r BIAS HIGH EUER 308 SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW EE 308 IGENGe Mixer EREOuencv HANDover enne en nn enirn nnns irn rnts sentes nennen ennan seni 310 SENSe MIXer FREQuency S TARE erected tee rna dee hnnc de dea ee ded a e RR e Race re ea nete vas 310 SENSe MIXer FREQuency S T OP inertiae tentent bana in benannt X RR Ro FER CR Eo aa Ero ERR SEENEN 310 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet esses nnne ren nneenren reset reset re tnr enne 310 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue esses nnne nnne ren neneneren neret eren nr etr sentes 311 IEN Ge Mixer HAbRMontc HIGH SGTATe essere nennen ennt 311 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALuUue esee enne enne nennen rennen nennt rennen 312 SENSe MIXer HARMoniC TYPE eiecerunt hentai di
219. NEW 17 Format patterns oie pues ceres eee 190 Elei ue WEE 219 Patterns sss Result types C 17 Window Configuration eessessssssssss 219 Symbol tables acidi C 50 Synchronization 2 5 2 cecinere e teret ea etre ede 102 Coarse er Neie le TEE 196 Demodulation process sssssseses 91 Fine de Krown dat a 4 enr rere rent 199 200 uci e 199 Remote s 957 Symbol error rate GERT 200 Syntax Known data files eese 460 T Trace Export r ue Uu eL 209 Data mode TE 209 Header information Storage location rr eem rere teens 210 Traces Averaging formulae see 468 Configuration Softkey sess 206 Configuring remote control eessssss 377 Evaluation e Export format cei cu cava eere cemere eter GE 210 EXDOMING 210 223 Exporting data Measurement Signal esee 208 Merl 207 Mode remote eus Ges Reference signal erre 208 Retrieving data remote ssuessesss 410 e at 207 Settings predefined AAA 208 Settings remote control sssssssssss 377 Softkeys 2 Troubleshooting 2 2 rrt lee trennen 273 Transmit EE 56 Alpha BT a i Predefined osco ca NEEN TYDE eege i e iie tie en io Pete eerie
220. NGe COUPling State If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the full scale level changes This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 155 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer Level Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that corresponds to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters Level numeric value Range 1 UV to 7 071 V RST 1V Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 154 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Full Scale Level on page 154 The availability of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters Level VOLT DBM DBPW WATT DBMV DBUV DBUA AMPere RST Volt Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 154 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 see Input Sample Rate on page 154 Note the final user sam
221. Parameters Text Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL COMM Conversion loss table for FS Gen Manual operation See Comment on page 152 SENSe CORRection CVL DATA lt Freq gt lt Level gt This command defines the reference values of the selected conversion loss tables The values are entered as a set of frequency level pairs A maximum of 50 frequency level pairs may be entered Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 318 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt Freq gt numeric value The frequencies have to be sent in ascending order lt Level gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL DATA 1MHZ 30DB 2MHZ 40DB Manual operation See Position Value on page 153 EEUU RA m User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 316 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA EMG EC C A e H PT Configuring VSA SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic lt HarmOrder gt This command defines the harmonic order for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss
222. Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IQP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 177 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe lt Type gt For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Parameters lt Type gt POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 345 Configuring VSA Manual operation See Slope on page 178 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can con tinue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Parameters Source Example Configuring VSA IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connec
223. QPSK delayed Q component Inphase Quadratu re Quadratur e a time 6 amb symbols symbols PSK vector diagram with alpha 0 35 OQPSK vector diagram with alpha 0 35 2 Quadrature e Quadrature Inphase Inphase Offset QPSK reduces the dynamic range of the modulated signal with respect to nor mal QPSK and therefore the demands on amplifier linearity by avoiding zero crossings A distinction is made in the analyzer display In the Vector I Q result display of the measurement or reference signal the time delay is not compensated for The display corresponds to the physical diagram shown in table 4 11 In the Constellation UO result display of the measurement or reference signal the time delay is compensated for The display corresponds to the logical mapping as in fig ure 4 24 ES User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 7T R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics 4 3 6 Symbol Mapping OQPSK Fig 4 24 Constellation diagram for OQSK GRAY including the symbol mapping Frequency Shift Keying FSK To illustrate symbol mappings for FSK modulations the symbol numbers are marked in the logical mapping diagram versus the instantaneous frequency An instantaneous fre quency of zero in the baseband corresponds to the input frequency of the analyzer 2FSK NATURAL With 2FSK the symbol decision is made by a simple frequency discriminator Symbol Numbers Fig 4 25
224. R amp S FSW K70 Vector Signal Analysis User Manual Ampiitiigs 1 22 Power el RespMag Stop 25000 sym S 7 1173 9292 02 07 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S9FSW models with firmware version 1 70 and higher e R amp S FSW8 1312 8000K08 e R amp S FSW13 1312 8000K13 e R amp S9FSW26 1312 8000K26 e R amp S9 FSWA3 1312 8000K43 e R amp S FSW50 1312 8000K50 The following firmware options are described es R amp S FSW K70 1313 1416 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2013 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW R amp S FSW K70 Contents Contents TE 7 1 1 About this Manual
225. RHO MEANTRE Su 425 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAK STATE eene nere n eret nere en nnne 389 a User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 485 R amp S FSW K70 List of Remote Commands VSA CAL Culate nzLIMtMACCuracvRHOPDEAKVAL ue 392 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAKT RESUIt sss eene 425 CAL Culate cnz LlMitMACCuracvGTATe eene nnnnn eh nrner ne nrnnr rnit nnns sn nnn nennen sinn 388 CALECulatesnx MARKSESEARCh iet tetigit e E E RENE eee ee reto eee e e bes 386 CAL Culate cnz MAbRkercmzAOEE nennen nnne nt nnne etn nnts dh nrnnd ien renr set r enti intent rsen ene sinn nnns sena 380 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCnon DDEMod GTATieticADbRoop 415 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCion DDEMod GTATietc All 416 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic CF ERror sss 416 CAL Culate cnz MAbker mz FUNGCion DDEMod GTATieneEVMH nne 416 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic F DERror sse 417 CAlLCulate cnzMAbker mz FUNGHonDDEMod STATeicEGkCEDR 417 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCion DDEMod GTATietcEGk DERhRor 418 CAlLCulate cnzMAbker mz FUNGHonDDEMod STATieticEGkMDEViatton eneee 419 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK RDEViation CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCnon DDEMod GTATietic GlMalance eerren 419 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCion DDEMod GTATietclOlMbalance 420 CAlLCulate cnzMAbker mz FUNGHonD
226. RST 1 SENSe DDEMod FORMat lt Group gt This command selects the digital demodulation mode Setting parameters lt Group gt Example MSK PSK QAM QPSK FSK ASK APSK UQAM QPSK Quad Phase Shift Key PSK Phase Shift Key MSK Minimum Shift Key QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation FSK Frequency Shift Key ASK Amplitude Shift Keying APSK Amplitude Phase Shift Keying UQAM User defined modulation loaded from file see SENSe DDEMod USER NAME on page 301 RST PSK SENS DDEM FORM QAM User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 296 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA Manual operation See Modulation Type on page 134 See Load User Modulation on page 135 SENSe DDEMod FSK NSTate lt FSKNstate gt This command defines the demodulation of the FSK modulation scheme Setting parameters lt FSKNstate gt 2 4 8 2 2FSK 4 4FSK 8 8FSK RST 2 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 135 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog This command queries the names of all mappings that are available for the current mod ulation type and order A mapping describes the assignment of constellation points to symbols Return values lt Mappings gt A comma separated list of strings with one string for each map ping name Example SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog Result CDMA2K FWD DVB S2 GRAY NATURAL WCDMA Usa
227. Ree Cre 388 e Dein Emisor ec deor etre ee eno noo ends ERE nnn Ped e REI en ERR nianna FR aAA 388 General Commands The following commands determine the general behaviour of the limit line check CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy DEFaull eeeeeisisee eese e nente REENEN ENNER ERR ntn nns 388 CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracvGTATe nennen nent nnt nter nh nennen 388 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy DEFault Restores the default limits and deactivates all checks in all windows Usage Event Manual operation See Set to Default on page 216 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy STATe lt LimitState gt Limits checks for all evaluations based on modulation accuracy e g Result Summary are enabled or disabled Setting parameters lt LimitState gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Checking Modulation Accuracy Limits on page 216 Defining Limits The following commands are required to define limits for specific results E SSS SS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 388 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA El Analysis CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MA
228. Ref Deviation FSK only on page 136 SENSe DDEMod APSK NSTate lt APSKNstate gt This command defines the specific demodulation mode for APSK The following APSK demodulation modes are possible DDEMod APSK NSTate 16 16APSK 32 32APSK Setting parameters lt APSKNstate gt numeric value RST 16 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 135 SENSe DDEMod ASK NSTate lt ASKNstate gt This command defines the specific demodulation mode for ASK The following ASK demodulation modes are possible DDEMod ASK NSTate 2 OOK 4 4ASK Setting parameters lt ASKNstate gt numeric value RST 2 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 135 SENSe DDEMod FILTer ALPHa lt MeasFiltAlphaBT gt This command determines the filter characteristic ALPHA BT The resolution is 0 01 E a User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 295 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Setting parameters lt MeasFiltAlphaBT gt Configuring VSA numeric value Range 0 1 to 1 0 RST 0 22 Default unit NONE SENSe DDEMod FILTer STATe lt MeasFilterState gt This command defines whether the input signal that is evaluated is filtered by the mea surement filter This command has no effect on the transmit filter Setting parameters lt MeasFilterState gt ON OFF 1 0 ON SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO is activated OFF The input signal is not filtered SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO is deactivated
229. Remote Commands for VSA LEGEM M Analysis CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 213 See Search Next Peak on page 214 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 214 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 213 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 213 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 213 See Search Next Minimum on page 215 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimu
230. Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe on page 311 Harmonic Order Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines which of the available harmonic orders of the LO is used to cover the frequency range By default the lowest order of the specified harmonic type is selected that allows con version of input signals in the whole band If due to the LO frequency the conversion is not possible using one harmonic the band is split E User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 146 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings For the band USER the order of harmonic is defined by the user The order of harmonic can be between 2 and 61 the lowest usable frequency being 26 5 GHz Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW on page 312 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue on page 312 Conversion loss Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines how the conversion loss is handled The following methods are available Average Defines the average conversion loss for the entire range in dB Table Defines the conversion loss via the table selected from the list Prede fined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R amp S FSW Alternatively you can define your own conversion loss tables Imported tables are checked for com patibility with the current settings before being assigned Conversion loss tables are configured and managed in the Managing
231. S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Result Types in VSA The following results that are based on internal estimation algorithms see chapter 4 5 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors on page 101 are calculated over the Estimation range see also chapter 4 5 1 2 Estimation on page 102 Table 3 3 Results calculated over the estimation range PSK MSK QAM FSK Carrier Frequency Error FSK Deviation Error Symbol Rate Error Symbol Rate Error UO Offset FSK Measurement Deviation UO Imbalance Carrier Frequency Error Gain Imbalance Carrier Frequency Drift Quadrature Error Amplitude Droop Current value In the Current column the value evaluation for the current evaluation is displayed For example the EVM Peak value in the current sweep corresponds to the peak of the trace values within the evaluation range for the current sweep as indicated by marker 1 in figure 3 20 2 Result Summary Current StdDev 95 ile Unit EVM RMS 0 32 0 32 0 3 0 00 Peak 0 84 0 84 d 0 00 MER RMS 49 87 49 49 8 0 00 Peak 41 54 5 0 00 Phase Error RMS 0 15 R 0 15 9 00 Peak 0 48 a 0 48 0 00 Magnitude Error RMS 0 18 1 1 0 Peak 0 53 0 53 0 53 0 00 Carrier Frequency Error 178 54 178 54 8 54 0 00 Symbol Rate Error 9 00 Rho 0 999 990 0 0 0 999 990 0 000 000 Ae Offset 66 07 7 0 00 T Q Imbalance 65 51 1 9 00 Gain Imbalance 0 01 0 01 9 00 Quadrature Error 0 01 0 01 0 00 Amplitude Droop 0
232. S FSW uses the measurement length defined by SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 369 RST AUTO Manual operation See Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto on page 204 See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 204 SENSe JADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 371 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range O dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm _L__________ E e LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLALLLLEMJ User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 370 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 6 Performing a Measurement Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 205 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 371 command the inter
233. SEL command only those patterns can be selected which belong to the current standard see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect on page 352 Setting parameters lt AddPattern gt string Usage Setting only Manual operation See Adding patterns to a standard on page 187 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern REMove This command deletes one or all patterns from the current standard Usage Setting only Manual operation See Removing patterns from a standard on page 187 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT lt Text gt This command defines a text to explain the pattern The text is displayed only in the selection menu manual control This text should be short and concise Detailed infor mation about the pattern is given in the comment see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 353 Setting parameters Text string Manual operation See Edit on page 187 See New on page 187 See Description on page 189 11 5 7 Defining the Result Range The result range determines which part of the capture buffer burst or pattern is displayed User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 355 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA ailau Mla Configuring VSA Manual configuration of the result range is described in chapter 5 8 Result Range Con figuration on page 190 CAL Culate nzTR ACectADJuet AL GnmenttDEF au 356 CAL Culate nzTR ACectADluet Al GnmentOrtzet 356 LE er E Ke AD
234. SEMONDE ether tenen apte nen Seele ENEE ASSEN 350 IENZGeIDDEMod GEARch BURGCGTATe AE 350 SENSeJ DDEMod SEARCH BURSE EOLGFBRGE EAR SEENEN e 351 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt AUTO lt AutoBurstSearch gt This command links the burst search to the type of signal When a signal is marked as bursted burst search is switched on automatically Setting parameters lt AutoBurstSearch gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Manual operation See Enabling Burst Searches on page 182 E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 349 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA PERENNE EC m g Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt CONFigure AUTO lt AutoConfigure gt This command sets the search tolerance and the min gap length to their default values Setting parameters lt AutoConfigure gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Burst Configuration on page 183 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt GLENgth MINimum lt MinGapLength gt This command defines the minimum time between two bursts A minimum time with decreased level must occur between two bursts The default unit is symbol The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt MinGapLength gt numeric value Range 1 to 15000 RST 1 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Burst Configuration on page 183 See Min Gap Length on page 183 SENSe DDEMod SEARc
235. SK SR 270 833 kHz Att 10 dB Freq 1 0 GHz ResLen 148 SGL Stat Count B BURST PATTERN A EVM Crw s 2 Maz B Result Summary Mean Single 4 Continuous 8weep Sweep Continue 5 3 Single Select Result Range i 5 aq 9 X Carrier Freq Error H2 Sweep ES om co Gain Imbalance IM Quadrature Error Amplitude Droop Refresh Start 0 sym Stop 148 sym C Mag CapBuf i _ 1 Cirw Statistic Count Auta Select Result Rng 2 Com T Start 0 sym Stop 10000 sym Fig 9 9 Navigation through the capture buffer 9 3 4 Evaluating the Rising and Falling Edges The Result Length is the number of symbols that are to be demodulated and analyzed together In most common applications only the parts of the capture buffer containing the bursts need to be analyzed Hence for bursted signals the Result Length usually coincides with the burst length However there are certain scenarios where the rising and falling edge of a burst are also of interest e g checking the power ramping of the device under test For this measurement task it is useful to choose a Result Length that exceeds the burst length 1 In order to include the rising and falling edges of the bursts in the EVM vs Time display window 1 you need to increase the Result Length In the Overview select Cut Result Range and increase the Result Length to 200 symbols To evaluate the rising and falling edges further display the absolute magnitude va
236. SRA operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data The offset must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 394 Sweep Settings The sweep settings define how often data from the input signal is acquired and then evaluated They are configured via the SWEEP key Continuous Sweep RUN DONT egeo poo Ehe eu ea m ed tus era Pa dace ea a deae eontra tu 179 single Sweep RUN SINGLE rta iria oe intent no tranne n tht en reed 179 Continue e e d M M 179 Refresh non MSRA mode 4 eiiis cesi isekese eite etes denn aan atte a nasa nde s ER uana dad 180 cipes ER 180 Select ROSU DEE 180 ico E 181 N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 178 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Signal Capture Continuous Sweep RUN CONT After triggering starts the measurement and repeats it continuously until stopped This is the default setting While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is activ
237. Se DDEMod TFILter NAME Name This command selects a transmit filter and automatically switches it on For more information on transmit filters refer to chapter A 3 1 Transmit Filters on page 456 Setting parameters Name string Name of the Transmit filter an overview of available transmit filters is provided in chapter A 3 1 Transmit Filters on page 456 Manual operation See Transmit Filter Type on page 137 See Load User Filter on page 137 SENSe DDEMod TFILter STATe lt TXFilterState gt Use this command to switch the transmit filter off To switch a transmit filter on use the SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME command Setting parameters lt TXFilterState gt ON OFF 1 0 OFF Switches the transmit filter off ON Switches the transmit filter specified by SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on However this command is not necessary as the SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME command automatically Switches the filter on RST 1 Manual operation See Transmit Filter Type on page 137 SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER lt FilterName gt This command selects a user defined transmit filter file Setting parameters lt FilterName gt The name of the transmit filter file Manual operation See Transmit Filter Type on page 137 See Load User Filter on page 137 SENSe DDEMod USER NAME lt Name gt Selects the file that contains the user defined modulation to be loaded EES Us
238. Sult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAK RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt RESUIt This command queries whether the limit for the specified result type and limit type was violated For details on result types and limit types see chapter 3 2 29 Result Summary on page 46 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 425 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results Suffix lt ResultType gt CFERror EVM FDERror FERRor MERRor OOFFset PER Ror RHO CFERror Carrier Frequency Error EVM Error Vector Magnitude FDERror Frequency deviation error FSK only FERRor Frequency error FSK only MERRor Magnitude Error OOFFset UO Offset PERRor Phase Error RHO Rho lt LimitType gt CURRent MEAN PEAK PCURRent PMEan PPEak RCUR Rent RMEan RPEak For CFERor OOFFset RHO CURRent MEAN PEAK For EVM FDERror FERRor MERRor PERRor PCURRent Peak current value PMEan Peak mean value PPEak Peak peak value RCURRent RMS current value RMEan RMS mean value RPEak RMS peak value Return values lt LimitResult gt NONE PASS FAIL MARGIN NONE No limit check result available yet PASS All values have passed the limit check FAIL At least one value has exceeded the limit MARGIN currently not
239. T SEQ OFF 11 7 Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers windows etc can be con figured Configuring RK 377 e Working Wi E EE 380 e Configuring Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines 388 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only 393 e Zooming into the Display racer ricorrere etude te Roe Heo REED reris 394 11 7 1 Configuring Traces The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the screen Depending on the result display between 1 and 6 traces may be displayed Manual configuration of traces is described in chapter 6 1 Trace Settings on page 206 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 377 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Analysis Commands for storing trace data are described in chapter 11 9 1 Retrieving Trace Data and Marker Values on page 410 Useful commands for trace configuration described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe on page 338 Remote commands exclusive to trace configuration CAL Culate nzTR ACectGlv Aluel cece eee eeee aaa eeeeeeeeesaaeaaaaaeeeeeeesesaeaaaeaneees 378 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE cctcecceneaectceeseseeadeeeeenansececcasnancacdaennaenseeeenes 378 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe cessere neret tenete 379 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt VALue lt TrRefType gt This commands sel
240. TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note in VSA trigger output is not supported thus the connector is always configured for input Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 346 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 175 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration BEE Signal Capture IF Power Trigger Source The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger threshold is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency It is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger bandwidth at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or UO measurements the third IF represents the center frequency The trigger threshold depends on the defined trigger level as well as on the RF attenu ation and preamplification For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet This trigger source is only available for RF input Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 346 Baseband Power Trigger Source Defines triggering on the baseband power for baseband input via the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B7 1 For more inform
241. Te on page 395 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M AREA on page 394 Multiple Zoom Ee In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corresponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 396 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 395 Restore Original Display Restores the original display and closes all zoom windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M STATe on page 395 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 396 for each multiple zoom window Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates zoom mode tapping the screen no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 395 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00OM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 396 for each multiple zoom window L User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 221 R amp S FSW K70 I Q Data Import and Export Import Export Functions 7 IO Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal rep resentation that consists of tw
242. User defined eg Using as measurement lier 201 Trigger Configuration Softkey sessssssssss 173 Drop out tme ace teen rere triti rare ten 178 External remote AA 346 Holdoff eg HySteresis terree eieiei Level EEE Offset softkey zs S E Remote control neret EI A Trigger level External trigger remote sss 344 VQ Power remote rtt 345 IF Power remote sess 345 Triggers MSRA e 174 342 Trigger source BB POWE M Digital e E External s Free RUM e len VF e Troubleshooting B rst Search o nre rrt in 264 Flow chart ger Frequently asked questions ieeeeeee eienen 273 Input overload siete het eene 305 Pattern search 264 Result display n recente endete 273 Uc EERE 273 U Units Reference level ren 161 164 PRAXIS 170 SSES ACIER 170 icol 170 Updating FRESUIE display Zeene gege deser po trier tenens 181 Result display remote sesesssse 374 Upper Level Hysteresis cuc 205 Usable UO bandwidth pr 2 ners 62 66 FRESUIE display rrr 15 173 Useful length sc gege 120 User filters Eo nnp 137 User mariuals etre re opo ir ed re eat
243. W K70 Analysis 6 3 2 Markers Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not acti vate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the specified reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 381 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 382 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace determines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace The marker can also be assigned to the currently active trace using the Marker to Trace softkey in the Marker menu If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactivated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 381 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one
244. When deactivated the additional information from the previously loaded data file is removed Any references to the known data in the Demodulation dialog box are replaced by the default parameter values see chapter 5 9 2 Advanced Demodulation Synchronization on page 196 Note When a standard is loaded the use of a Known Data file is automatically deacti vated Remote command SENSe DDEMod KDATa STATe on page 363 Load Data File If Known Data is activated this function displays a file selection dialog box to select the xml file that contains the known data Once a file has been selected any additional infor mation provided by the file is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box Remote command SENSe DDEMod KDATa NAME on page 363 Input and Frontend Settings The R amp S FSW can evaluate signals from different input sources The frequency and amplitude settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup AE IS pde 141 UE E UE te M 159 e Amplitude and Vertical Axis Confouraton eee ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaeees 160 Input Settings Input settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Some settings are also available in the Amplitude tab of the Amplitude dialog box The DigiConf softkey is described in chapter 5 5 1 3 Digital WO Input Settings on page 153 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 141 R amp S FSW K70
245. Window Configuration on page 217 Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences _L_L_________ M User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 237 R amp S9FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis 8 3 1 8 3 1 1 10 11 How to Analyze the Measured Data For each data source a window with the default result type for that data source is displayed Exit the SmartGrid mode Select the Window Config softkey to change the result types and other display set tings for the selected window To change the settings in other windows select a different window from the Specifics for list in the Window Config dialog box Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview Enable the Specifics for option to access the analysis functions for the selected window Select the Analysis button in the Overview to configure special analysis settings for the individual result displays for example e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the results e g when comparing errors or peaks e Configure the trace to display the average over a series of measurements If necessary increase the Statistics Count defined in the Sweep menu Press the SWEEP key and select the Selected Result Rng softkey to select a spe cific burst to be evaluated The result displays are updated to show the results for the selected burst Tip You can use a capture buffer display to navigate th
246. XTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Suffix lt port gt 11213 Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 344 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA a S t Configuring VSA Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5 V RST 1 4 V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 177 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IF Power lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed For compatibility reasons this command is also available for the baseband power trig ger source when using the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 177 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I
247. ____S_ SSS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 110 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Noise Arelyze EAE Gi a Kar D tf Eu Y GR VEA SRRI Imaginary Fig 4 60 Additive noise A 64QAM signal with additive noise is shown in figure 4 60 only the first quadrant is shown The symbol decision thresholds are also shown The noise signal forms a cloud around the ideal symbol point in the constellation dia gram Exceeding the symbol decision boundaries leads to wrong symbol decisions and increases the bit error rate Similar displays are obtained in case of incorrect transmitter filter settings When an incorrect filter is selected crosstalk occurs between neighbouring symbol decision points instead of the ISI free points The effect increases the more the filtering deviates from actual requirements The two effects described cannot be distinguished in the Constellation UO diagram but in statistical and spectral analyses of the error signal Channel transmission distortion During transmission disturbances in the transmission channel may cause distortions in the input signal at the R amp S FSW Such influences are included in the EVM calculation However if the ideal reference signal can be estimated with sufficent accuracy by the R amp S FSW e g using the equalizer the channel distortions can be compensated for and deducted from the EVM 4 5 2
248. a Reference Point and Divisions on page 168 See Y Axis Reference Value on page 168 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in the specified unit PERCent Linear scaling in RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Selects linear scaling in Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Y Axis Unit on page 170 Signal Capture The signal capture commands define how much how and when data is captured from the input signal MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the VSA application in MSRA mode define the application data extract and analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 5 6 Signal Capture on page 171 LSS N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 339 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA mA Q Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod PRATe ecce ttettntntetntetttetet s ttt test tests sons 340 SENSe DDEMod RLENGth AUTO ccce ttt tentent ttes 340 SENSe D
249. a xy emde5 008 000Z VINGO ZHN 89ZZ SdO ooozvwao vw 19 JI J SeoN abuey u16ue ulayed sang 193414 Bug dem x 1d9S uonenjeag yu wu iy Unsen ulayed 10 youeag 104 yoseas L igudiv jusueJ ejeJjoqui S uonejnpow pyepuejs Jopjo4 453 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 Annex R amp S9FSW K70 Predefined Standards and Settings 454 e qe ieAe SI WO POUS e Jo GWU pJepuejs BU WO SIOJIP 11 eeuw pepi oud si spueuuuloo ejouJeJ 104 JejeuleJed We SUL x euoN jesnyen 00 Weg Jejue MSda 334 oyusng 0001 0L OH ZMA OOE DEER ol aasoZ NEG i ous Oz an ex emdeo 06 S 0 ou ZHN OZ ad 0 zs gg ve ASdY ze Ce ald EN SES amp eze xsdvz emdeo ozz S 0 ou zHWOZ Wvosn zs SAC ve ASdY a 7S 8AQ EN icis Keg xsdve emdeo 081 S 0 ous zHWOZz Wyolesn ZS ag we ge ou d ZS amna e 5 emdeo 06 S 0 ou ZHN OZ xsd8e d eau ze s a peBuo ued S T od dJ 1030 Suen IENEN olgeyiog 9 emdeo rr dj 1030 en MSWO ZHN ZSI ASZ zed Loaa 9 m E ee dt 103Q e ge eid dd 1930 SEN DIN yiegpoxi4 3 g 66 0 emdeo ver dd 193q P P en MSWO ZHIN ZSV saz zed Load 103a 2 D Aet spe buey y5u uJ9j3ed jsung 1934 Bug dem x 1d9S o uonenje 3 3ueuuBilv ynsoy uleyed JO yoseag 104 uoJeeg 1g eudiv juisueJ eje1joqui amp g uonejnpow pyepuejs J9pjo4 5
250. aA 133 s Sigdal SUCU HER 137 Seier WE E EE 140 5 4 1 Modulation The Modulation settings contain modulation and transmit filter settings A live preview of the Constellation UO trace using the currently defined settings is displayed at the bot tom of the dialog box to visualize the changes to the settings The preview area is not editable directly The modulation settings vary depending on the selected modulation type in particular FSK modulation provides some additional settings The Modulation settings are displayed when you select the Signal Description button in the Overview or the Signal Description softkey in the main VSA menu LEE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 133 R amp S9FSW K70 Configuration Signal Description Modulation Signal Structure Known Data Modulation Settings Type Order Mapping FSK Ref Deviation Symbol Rate Transmit Filter Type Alpha BT Preview Preview Constellation Freq Meas amp Ref Start 30 758 MHz Stop 30 758 MHz Fig 5 1 Signal modulation settings for FSK modulation Modulation Type Defines the modulation type of the vector signal The following types are available e PSK e MSK e QAM User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 134 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Signal Description FSK ASK APSK User Modulation Uses the selected user defined modulation loaded from a file For more information on these modulation types see chapter 4 3
251. actical applications because it prevents signal tran sitions through the zeros in the I Q plane This reduces the dynamic range of the modu lated signal and the linearity requirements for the amplifier In practice the method is used for 311 8 8PSK for example and in conjunction with phase differential coding for rr 4 DQPSK Symbol mapping The logical constellation diagram for 311 8 8PSK comprises 8 points that correspond to the modulation level see figure 4 17 A counter clockwise offset rotation of 3171 8 is inserted after each symbol transition Fig 4 18 I Q symbol stream after 3778 rotation in I Q plane if the symbol number 7 is transmitted six times in a row e i User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 72 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics 4 3 3 Symbol Mapping Fig 4 19 Constellation diagram for 37 4 QPSK including the symbol mapping for EDGE 3 Fig 4 20 Constellation diagram for 77 4 QPSK Natural including the symbol mapping Differential PSK With differential PSK the information is represented in the phase shift between two con secutive decision points The absolute position of the complex sample value at the deci sion point does not carry information In the physical constellation diagram the constellation points at the symbol decision poin
252. ae e Traca based E 462 e Result Summary Evaluations 2 cccc ccccccceeeceeceeseceeccceesneseeccceeeneneecsdeceneaeeneeeed 464 e Statistical Evaluations for the Result Summary ees 467 NEBST UI eno EH 468 e Analyucally Calculated FItefS eeng hrec ter tardi ai 468 Standardespecilie F HEBES uisi e ete anten agno rta DOR e RR pae BN nha dde n RR Mee ud 469 A 6 1 Trace based Evaluations The trace based evaluations all take place at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 219 The sampling instants at this rate are referred to as t here i e t n Tp where Tp equals the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter Test parameter Formula Error vector EV MEAS REF t Error Vector Magnitude EVM EV t EVM t EVE i with the normalization contant C depends on your setting By default C is the mean power of the reference signal c x Xen ry T duration of symbol periods Magnitude Mag yeas IMEAS Mag pup REF Phase PhaseygA4g Z MEAS Phase pgp t Z REF t User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 462 R amp SS9FSW K70 Annex Formulae Test parameter Formula Frequency ld FREQ uas e ZMEASQ 1 d P tscht ZREF Magnitude eral MAG ERR t MAG yes MAG peer t heen PHASE _ERR t PHASE yr
253. age 301 SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on page 301 Alpha BT Defines the roll off factor Alpha or the filter bandwidth BT The roll off factor and filter bandwidth for transmit filter is available for RC RRC Gauss and GMSK filter Remote command SENSe DDEMod TFILter ALPHa on page 300 Signal Structure The Signal Structure settings describe the expected input signal and determine which settings are available for configuration You can define a pattern to which the instrument can be synchronized thus adapting the result range E P User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 137 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Signal Description A visualization of the currently defined signal structure is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box The Signal Structure settings are displayed when you select the Signal Description button in the Overview or the Signal Description softkey in the main VSA menu and then switch to the Signal Structure tab Modulation Signal Structure Known Data Signal Type Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst DORIS ER 148 sym 546 462 pus a M Nr LUCI Pattern Name EDGE_TSCO Offset 58 sym 214 154 ps Description Burst Length Run In EE Ru
254. alue Range 0 0 to 100 0 RST 10 0 Default unit PCT Manual operation See If SER lt on page 200 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc RESult The result of this query is O if the fine sync with known data failed otherwise 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See Fine Synchronization on page 199 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc MODE lt FineSync gt This command defines the fine synchronization mode used to calculate results e g the bit error rate E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 362 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA EMG EE COUC J E u n nt Configuring VSA Note You can define a maximum symbol error rate SER for the known data in reference to the analyzed data If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit the default syn chronization using the detected data is performed See SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel on page 362 Setting parameters lt FineSync gt KDATa PATTern DDATa KDATa The reference signal is defined as the data sequence from the loaded Known Data file that most closely matches the measured data PATTern The reference signal is estimated from the defined pattern This setting requires an activated pattern search see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 352 DDATa Default The reference signal is estimated from the detected data RST DDATa Manual operation See Fine Synchronization on
255. am that define the lt x2 gt lt y2 gt Zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 221 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 221 See Restore Original Display on page 221 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 221 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA essere rennen 395 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztZOOM ML Tiple zoomz GTATe nennen 396 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm e 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 395 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 8 11 8 1 Configuring the Result Display Suffix zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define the lt x2 gt lt y2 gt
256. amp Schwarz can be restored 1 Press the MEAS key 2 Select the Restore Factory Settings softkey 3 Select the Restore Pattern Files softkey The patterns as defined by Rohde amp Schwarz at the time of delivery are restored Restoring user defined patterns User defined patterns can only be restored if you have a copy of the pattern file created during creation In this case copy the file named Patternname xml back to the installation directory of the VSA application under vsa standards After a preset or after performing certain operations e g changing the modulation settings the pattern will be included in the list of All Patterns again 8 2 3 How to Manage Known Data Files 8 2 3 1 You can load xml files containing the possible sequences to the VSA application and use them to compare the measured data to In particular you can use known data for the following functions e Fine synchronization during the demodulation process see figure 4 44 and Fine Synchronization on page 199 Calculation of the Bit Error Rate BER see chapter 3 2 1 Bit Error Rate BER on page 21 How to Load Known Data Files Known Data files are loaded in the Modulation amp Signal Description settings E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 233 R amp S9FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements To load an existing Known Data file 1 2 3 In the Over
257. ample describes a scenario similar to the one for manual operation described in chapter 9 3 Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals on page 253chapter 9 2 Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal on page 245 Note that although this example uses the settings from a predefined digital standard the configuration is changed to demonstrate the possibilities of the VSA application A mea surement that is performed strictly according to the standard requires much less pro gramming efforts The rising and falling edges of a GSM burst are analyzed using the following result range settings SS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 442 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Programming Examples Result Range Evaluation Range Length Result Length 200 sym 738 462 ps Result Range Alignment Reference Capture Ee Burst Pattern Waveform Alignment P Left Center k Right Offset 10 sym Symbol Number at Burst Start 10 sym Visualization RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 1GHz Set the center frequency DISP TRAC Y RLEV 4dBm Set the reference level INST CRE NEW DDEM VSA Create new measurement channel for vector signal analysis named VSA DDEM PRES EDGE NB Loads the GSM EDGE 8PSK standard file and the settings defined there DDEM RLEN 10000 sym f aesesee Defining the result range DDEMod TIME 200 Defines the result length as 200 symb
258. an change the position of the result range quickly and easily by dragging the blue bar representing the result range to a different position in the capture buffer The default result type is Magnitude Absolute The following result types are available e chapter 3 2 21 Magnitude Absolute on page 39 e chapter 3 2 28 Real Imag I Q on page 45 e chapter 3 2 11 Frequency Absolute on page 30 e chapter 3 2 32 Vector I Q on page 51 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 Measurement amp Reference Signal The measurement signal or the ideal reference signal or both The default result type is Magnitude Relative The following result types are available chapter 3 2 21 Magnitude Absolute on page 39 chapter 3 2 23 Magnitude Relative on page 41 chapter 3 2 26 Phase Wrap on page 43 chapter 3 2 27 Phase Unwrap on page 44 chapter 3 2 11 Frequency Absolute on page 30 chapter 3 2 12 Frequency Relative on page 32 chapter 3 2 28 Real Imag I Q on page 45 chapter 3 2 10 Eye Diagram Real I on page 29 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 16 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays m HHH ay Evaluation Data Sources in VSA chapter 3 2 9 Eye Diagram Imag Q on page 29 chapter 3 2 8 Eye Diagram Frequency on page 28 chapter 3 2 5 Constellation I Q on page 25 ch
259. analysis Note that not all commands executed here are actually necessary as they may reflect default settings e Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal E EE 440 e Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Stand zo D P 442 e Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check 445 11 13 14 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal The following example describes a scenario similar to the one for manual operation described in chapter 9 2 Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal on page 245 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 440 Programming Examples RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 1GHz Set the center frequency DISP TRAC Y RLEV 4dBm Set the reference level INST CRE NEW DDEM MyVSA Create new measurement channel for vector signal analysis named MyVSA DEM FORM QPSK Set the modulation type DEM QPSK FORM NORM Set the modulation order DEM MAPP CAT DEM MAPP WCDMA Set the symbol mapping to WCDMA DEM SRAT 1 MHz Set the symbol rate DEM TFIL NAME RRC DEM TFIL ALPH 0 35 Select the RRC transmit filter D D D Query the available symbol mappings for QPSK modulation D D D D LAY ADD 1 RIGH EVEC Create new window to the right of I Q constellation window 1 with error vector as data type
260. and Interface R amp S FSW B7f1 324 Seting Up el 326 9 IIPQUBIU oce tette EE ede sata Meme p pM EE 329 e Amplitude Settings x nee itn HARE Ete rd EE ed 330 Configuring the AttenualiE ice esee eic ere IESSEN Eege ner ERR eR Ruhe 332 e Scaling MG UNIS eicere ete rhe n Ren ree nen Mena e Reed 334 11 5 2 1 RF Input INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet esee sssaa sesenta sessi aas 305 K ee el T 305 INPutFIETetHPASSISTATe E 306 dignissi fede OSTATE n 306 lists oad 306 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared For details on the status register see the R amp S FSW User Manual The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first Usage Event INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input The command is not available for measurements with the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC LEE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 305 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA se CIO
261. and limits RF Start and RF Stop In this case the full LO range of the selected harmonics is used Remote command SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe on page 314 Preset Band Restores the presettings for the selected band Note changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function This function allows you to restore the original band settings Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet on page 310 Mixer Type The R amp S FSW option B21 supports the following external mixer types 2 Port LO and IF data use the same port 3 Port LO and IF data use separate ports Remote command SENSe MIXer PORTs on page 314 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration The harmonics configuration determines the frequency range for user defined bands see Band on page 145 Harmonic Type Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines if only even only odd or even and odd harmonics can be used for conversion Depending on this selection the order of harmonic to be used for conversion changes see Harmonic Order on page 146 Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE on page 312 Range 1 2 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Enables the use of a second harmonic to cover the band s frequency range For each range you can define which harmonic to use and how the Conversion loss is handled
262. and request infor mation query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the commands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parameters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another e H s User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 282 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Introduction Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For amore complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FSW Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 11 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions e Command usage If not specified otherwi
263. and the mea sured signal and is only applied to the measured signal This is referred to as normal equalizer mode Note that the resulting equalizer function is not simply the inverted dis tortion function For more complex distortions the reference signal might not be determined correctly due to wrong symbol decisions Despite the resulting imperfect equalizer calculation the estimated equalizer is often good enough to improve the reference signal creation in the succeeding sweep Thus the new equalizer is improved successively This processing mode of the equalizer is called tracking mode After only few sweeps the results are sufficiently accurate and the learning phase is completed Then the equalizer can be used without additional calculations as long as the input signal remains stable If an unstable input has led to an unusable equalizer filter reset the equalizer with the Reset button IQ Input Equalizer Averaging IQ Reference Equalizer Control Compensate for MEAS Filter IQ Measure ment Signal Fig 4 51 An equalizer filter can be activated in the reference and measurement signal path The filter coefficients are determined in such a way that the error vector magnitude EVM is mini mized The result range used for equalizer calculation might be quite short leading to unstable equalizer impulse responses For time invariant channels the estimation length can be User Manual 1173 92
264. ange External Mixer B21 ssssssssss 146 314 RHO nj 465 RMS average FoOrmMUla 468 Roll off factor Alpha Measurement filter esses 202 Transmit filter rtr 137 Rotating Differential PSK Symbol Mapping erro ee ets 75 Rotating PSK Symbol Mapping E 72 RRO TEE 56 RUN CONT Cy eec 179 Run in ll 139 RUN SINGLE KEY M 179 S ue 55 121 Basics Definition 1 roro mere nenteene BIG TAN e EE Digital 1 Q remote Se Digitall G data t t eren Max usable UO bandwidth A 62 Maximum SC Relationship to bandwidth sssssssesss 63 Relationship to symbol rate n eerren 62 Remote Setting Saving li gere otccessh cos sawesendendeneacausnesactnenesnenceres 222 e EE 130 Settings as standard sess 130 Scaling Automatically eese 168 205 Diagrams changing seen 238 X axis Sep X axis y axis default sssesessssssss 169 X axis automatically sees 169 Y axis Y axis remote Control esesssessses 339 Y axis StatlsliGS EEN 168 Search Direction Real or Imag eeeeseess 213 Tolerance Burst Search c cece eeeeeeeeeeeeee 183 Se
265. ange to be displayed per division total range 10 The x axis is adapted so that it displays the defined range with the reference value at the specified position User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 240 R amp S FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis How to Analyze the Measured Data Example If you want to analyze the probabilities of occurrence for errors greater than 95 enter the reference value 95 1 Clrw 2 Clrw l Start 95 0 Stop 100 0 Fig 8 4 Defining the x axis scaling using a reference point To define the x axis scaling automatically 1 Focus the result window 2 Select AMPT XScale Config Auto Scale The x axis is adapted to display the current results optimally only once not dynam ically To define the y axis range manually With this method you define the upper and lower limits of the displayed probability range Values on the y axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1 0 If the y axis has logarithmic scale the distance between max and min value must be at least one decade 1 Focus the result window 2 Select AMPT gt YScale Config gt Y Axis Min Value 3 Enter the lower limit in the current unit 4 Select AMPT gt YScale Config gt Y Axis Max Value 5 Enter the upper limit in the current unit The y axis is adapted to display the specified range Probabilities of occurrence loca ted outside the display area are applied to the bars at
266. anual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 163 INPut EATT AUTO lt State gt This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command is only available with option R amp S FSW B25 It is not available if R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 163 INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off This command is only available with option R amp S FSW B25 It is not available if R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 163 11 5 2 9 Scaling and Units Useful commands for scaling described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 369 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe VOFFset on page 357 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 334 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA Remote commands exclusive to scaling and units CAL CGulatespnssSTATISUcS PRESl 0 diede a aa a a E a aA 335 CAL Culate nzSTATletceGCAleAlTOONCE rrer nnne 335 CALCu
267. ap Len 1500 Capt Count 0 YIG Bypass BURST PATTERN 1 Freq Error Rel 91 Clrw 2 Symbols Analysis Interval 230 902778 us 616 319444 ys Al Analysis Interval 230 902778 us 616 319444 ys tlrltlal si izj o t 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 i a T T Y o d I i 2 0 o 0 0 D 0 0 1 1 0 0 oo 1 1 0 9 1 1 1 0 1 1 12 sym 432 sym UG 3 Mag CaptureBuffer IS EM 4 MagAbs McasRRcf 91M Cirw Y tery Analysis Interval 230 902778 ys 616 319444 us AL ASSISA Mt Ol Obe 0 0 Om 0 10 dtm o diim 20 dBm o dBm 30 diim 1 d o dtm 40 diim e lo d m 1 t 2 30 dem H lo dBm H H 60 cBm lo dBm but ab dll Las M il 1 302 ms 12 sym 432 sym For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual EEUU RE MM User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 125 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration 5 Configuration Using the VSA application you can perform vector signal analysis measurements using predefined standard setting files or independently of digital standards using user defined measurement settings Such settings can be stored for recurrent use Thus configuring VSA measurements requires one of the following tasks e Selecting an existing standard settings file and if necessary adapting the measure ment settings to your specific requirements e Con
268. ap Length on page 183 e The pattern search is switched on fails and the alignment is with reference to the pattern In case the pattern search is switched on and the reference for the alignment is the pattern and not the burst a non detected pattern causes the result range to be positioned at the beginning of the capture buffer Hence if a the burst does not start right at the beginning of the capture buffer you will see a Burst Not Found Message Solution Refer to Message Pattern Not Found on page 267 Switch the pattern search off Choose Burst as the reference for the result range alignment Message Pattern Not Found The Pattern Not Found error message can have several causes e The burst search has failed User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 267 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement REESEN Explanation of Error Messages If burst and pattern search are active the application looks for patterns only within the found bursts Hence in case the burst search fails the pattern search will also fail Solution Try one of the following Make sure the burst search is successful Deactivate the burst search but keep the pattern search active For more information see Message Burst Not Found on page 265 chapter 5 7 1 Burst Search on page 181 e The offset of the pattern within the burst is incorrectly set It is possible to set a pattern offset to speed up the patte
269. apter 3 2 32 Vector I Q on page 51 chapter 3 2 4 Constellation Frequency on page 24 chapter 3 2 31 Vector Frequency on page 51 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL REF see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 Symbols The detected symbols i e the detected bits displayed in a table The default result type is a hexadecimal symbol table Other formats for the symbol table are available but no other result types see chap ter 3 2 30 Symbol Table on page 50 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL SYMB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 Error Vector The modulated difference between the complex measurement signal and the complex reference signal Modulation measurement signal reference signal For example EVM Mag meas ref The default result type is EVM The following result types are available e chapter 3 2 7 Error Vector Magnitude EVM on page 27 e chapter 3 2 28 Real Imag I Q on page 45 e chapter 3 2 32 Vector UO on page 51 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL EVEC see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 Modulation Errors The difference between the modulated complex samples in the measurement and the modulated reference signal Modulation measurement signal Modulation reference signal For example Magnitude Error Mag meas Mag ref The default result type is Magnitude Error The following result types are available e chapter 3 2 21 Magnit
270. arator FORMat DEXPort HEADET iiec terret ra ri eee ON Tarta oe po n E earn a banane da a e Freud FORMatDEXPOIt MODE rte corte eere reta n eterne anes Pa y Preserve eye e Eve ee ER NER Y Eee ve Ded Rer gas IN UGTA EOIN AS eerte nter ce act tese brit ered ty mec nn icf oe D Led pe ci Cn d E Ds aid lee RELIER EC S aes INITiate su eee UPPER INITiate REFResh INiTiate SEQuencer Ee INITlate ZGEOuencer IMMedhate nennen eene nennen enn ren niet rnnt rin hnnt EEES EEEE nnn Ennen INITiate ele le RE INITiate SEQuencer REFRESH ZALL ccccsssscccsscssecsscssscensstesssssasecenscvsesssseaesseseeesonsenssedsesasessesstieseetaess JlN NEIE ET E INPut ATTenuation INPutPATLenuationzAU TO ik ies teri aide ives eee ded ee i a ee aie ae INbPutATTenuaton Ph OTectonRE Get INPUT COUPIO BEE INP t DIQ CDEVICE verica ioed iedota ieia aeee e aae a a pea a eee cna daai rae iaaa Ea hee aaa Ea e User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 487 R amp S FSW K70 List of Remote Commands VSA INPutDlORANGe COUpilmg enne tnnt etre irn r ne rn rrr nr serre erret i nnns nnn 323 INPut DIQ RANGeEUPPar itd rear ir ter rere eerte ttt erii eiie eei ee 323 INPut DIG RANGe UPPer AUTO 1 cra ttti prc Rene reo ease sae Fue ena pa or to ena Een uper db eae YER REG 322 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT 2 212 ierra iut e ea cete te tope te trece zs 323 INPUEDIOFS RAM c E 32
271. arch Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 383 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 385 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 384 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 385 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 384 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 385 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum LEFT on page 384 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 386 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 384 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 386 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum RIGHt on page 385 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHt on page 386 Real Imag Plot Defines whether marker search functions are performed on the real or imaginary trace of the Real Imag measurement Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer SEARch on page 386 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 213 R amp S9FSW K70 Analysis 6 3 3 Markers Search Limits Left Right If activated limit lines are defined and displayed for the search Only results within the
272. arch limits Tome 214 Select Result Rng OTK OY agg SE 180 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 R amp S FSW K70 Index TE LE Aborting remote sese Activating remote Sr Sp Mode remote AA acre H RR Settings AI 129 Restoring filles retten ee 128 130 Saving Storage location ettet mec een iet 129 Settings files Deleting NEE 130 Re ao EE 129 SAVING 55 2 et get i eei od ntes att 130 Signal capture Remote control i omnee 339 SOMKCY E aan 171 Signal description Configuration o 133 Configuration remote sse 294 Pattern Softkey Signal ID External Mixer B21 remote control 308 External Mixer B21 ssssessessss 148 Signal model EE 101 ESI uL Sepatu ae tds 111 Signal source REMOTE certet men rd ERE ad 306 Signal structure Elle EE 139 Configuratio ieri rite ertet iere ete 137 acc S 302 Signal type Continuous Burst Signal ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeetees 139 Single sweep SOfIKOV EE 179 SIMONS ZOOM EE 221 Slope vie ee 178 345 Ee LE 67 Softkeys Amplitude Config apnesi 160 AUtO Level geet cete ari 162 165 204 BB Power 176 Capture Offsel etate 178 Ec MM 159 Continue Single Sweep Continuous Sweep esee le V lu iii ide
273. are completed 9 3 Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals In this measurement example a bursted GSM EDGE signal will be measured and eval uated The goal of this section is to familiarize you with the VSA application features that are relevant specifically for the analysis of bursted signals 9 3 1 Transmitter Settings This section summarizes the necessary transmitter settings It contains a list of the parameters and step by step instructions for the R amp S SMU If you are interested in a more detailed description or background information refer to the user manual of the R amp S SMU which can be downloaded from the Rohde amp Schwarz website www rohde schwarz com downloads manuals smu200A html Frequency 1 GHz Level 0 dBm Standard GSM EDGE Burst with normal symbol rate User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 253 Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals To define the settings for the R amp S SMU 1 Press the PRESET key to start from a defined state 2 Press the FREQ key and enter 1 GHz 3 Press the LEVEL key and enter 0 dBm 4 To define the standard a Press the DIAGRAM key b Select the first block Baseband A in the settings overview and press ENTER c Select GSM EDGE d Highlight the first slot in the frame diagram and press ENTER Jog Framed Single Y Normal Symbol Rate Fig 9 6 R amp S SMU GSM EDGE Frame Configuration Dialog R amp S FSW K70 Measurement
274. armonic Type 146 Name 152 Programming example sse 318 Range 146 Restoring bands ope reete 146 RF overrange eter eei t reete tended ned RF Start RF Stop Serial number tnnt ennt Uc External trigger Level remote rrinin nn soiden tete eiie 344 ioi M a 175 Eye diagram Frequency result type sss 28 Imag Q result type esee 29 Real I result type sssesssssssee 29 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 496 R amp S FSW K70 Index F Factory settings KE e EE 128 File format eds ic ER 476 File name TE ue E 129 Files UO data binary XML eeseeene 480 UO parameter XML eseeeeeeenen 477 Filter bandwidth BT Measurement filter 2 2 2 cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 202 Transmit MGR cs iier erre recette 137 Filters De Modulation tette rere CUSTOMIZED ERES Customized creating Customized selecting FOMMNUIAS ec High pass remote n High pass RF input sssem 143 Meas r ment ss 3 nier 56 57 456 Measurement formulae Predefined nmt nene acl M 56 Reference re Signal PrOCeSSinG EE 54 Standard specific formulae ssssss 469 Transmit Transmit formulae sse 469 Typcial combinations
275. as t PHASE pep t Frequency eiar FREQ _ERR t FREQ yas FREQ pepe FSK Modulation The trace based results for FSK signals are the same as those available for linear mod ulation types However as the signal processing for FSK signals is performed on the magnitude and instantaneous frequency the UO based results first require a reconstruc tion of the reference and measured UO waveforms as illustrated in Reconstruction of the reference and measured UO waveforms for FSK modulation The dashed outline of the compensate blocks indicate that these operations are option ally de activated depending on the corresponding user settings With respect to FSK measurements the optional compensation parameters are e FSK Reference deviation e Carrier frequency drift User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 463 R amp SS9FSW K70 Annex Formulae Figure 3 Compensate i Reference i Ref deviation Frequency frer n E Compensate Frequency Reference Ref deviation Modulator UO Measured Frequency fugas Qt Compensate Compensate Frequency Measured Timing er ot gt Carrier drift Modulator UO Carrier offset i Compensate Auras Timing Gain Fig 1 1 Reconstruction of the reference and measured I Q waveforms for FSK modulation Note that a reference deviation error is corrected in the reference frequency trace This ensures that the frequency deviation in the measured frequency trace c
276. as required for performing the measure ments For more details on the measurements refer to the test transmitter documenta tion 9 1 Connecting the Transmitter and Analyzer In order to perform measurements with the R amp S FSW K70 you require a test transmitter to emulate a DUT For Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals the test transmitter needs to be GSM compatible Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU with the RF input of the R amp S FSW SS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 244 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal RF Output 85G0G8 III 9 v Signal and Spectrum nr input Analyzer FSW Fig 9 1 Connection to a test transmitter for example R amp S SMU 9 2 Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal In this measurement example a continuous QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying sig nal will be measured and evaluated QPSK is used in several standards such as DVB 2 APCO25 WCDMA CDMA2000 etc For the description characterization of a con tinuous QPSK signal the following parameters are the most important e Carrier Frequency e Level e Symbol Rate e Transmit Filter 9 2 1 Transmitter Settings This section summarizes the necessary transmitter settings It contains a list of the parameters and step by step instructions for the R amp S SMU If you are interested in a more detailed description or background information refer to the user
277. ata Configure the data acquisition Press the RUN SINGLE key to perform a single sweep measurement Select the EJ Save icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Export softkey In the file selection dialog box select a storage location and enter a file name o M o mF o Select Save The captured data is stored to a file with the extension iq tar Importing UO data 1 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that sup ports UO data If necessary switch to single sweep mode by pressing the RUN SINGLE key Select the E Open icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Import softkey Select the storage location and the file name with the iq tar file extension o o P Qo Im Select Open The stored data is loaded from the file and displayed in the current application Previewing the UO data in a web browser The iq tar file format allows you to preview the I Q data in a web browser 1 Useanarchive tool e g WinZip or PowerArchiver to unpack the iq tar file into a folder 2 Locate the folder using Windows Explorer 3 Open your web browser p M OMM M fP a User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 224 How to Export and Import UO Data 4 Drag the UO parameter XML file e g example xml into your web browser Elia S xzy xml of iq tar file Saved by FSV IQ Analyzer Commen
278. ate on page 355 Setting parameters lt Data gt string Four values represent a symbol hexadecimal format The value range of a symbol depends on the degree of modulation With a degree of modulation of 4 all symbols have a value range of 0000 0001 0002 0003 With a degree of modulation of 8 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 Example DDEM SEAR SYNC DATA 00010000FFFF Defines the pattern data Manual operation See Edit on page 187 See New on page 187 See Symbols on page 190 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME Name This command selects a sync pattern for editing or for a new entry Setting parameters Name string Manual operation See Edit on page 187 See New on page 187 See Name on page 189 RETE RU E MM User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 354 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate lt NState gt This command selects the degree of modulation number of permitted states The pat tern must have been selected before using using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 354 The number of permitted states depends on the modulation mode Setting parameters lt NState gt numeric value Manual operation See Mod order on page 190 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern ADD lt AddPattern gt This command adds a pattern to the current standard Using the DDEM SEAR SYNC
279. ation on the the Digital Baseband Interface or the Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command TRIG SOUR BBP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 346 UO Power Trigger Source This trigger source is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is used for input Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled UO data exceeds the trigger threshold The trigger bandwidth corresponds to the Usable I Q Bandwidth setting for data acqui sition see Usable Q Bandwidth on page 173 Remote command TRIG SOUR IQP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 346 Digital I Q Trigger Source For applications that process UO data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications and only if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector In the selection list you must specify which general purpose bit GPO to GP5 will provide the trigger data The following table describes the assignment of the general purpose bits to the LVDS connector pins For details on the LVDS connector see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual E P User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 176
280. ay Frequency Error Absolute Available for source types e Modulation Errors Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM FREQ to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 EEUU RU RA a User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 33 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 14 Result Types in VSA TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 Frequency Error Relative Displays the error of the instantaneous frequency of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time The results are normalized to the symbol rate PSK and QAM modulated signals the estimated FSK deviation FSK modulated signals or one quarter of the symbol rate MSK modulated signals FREQ ERR t FREQwreas FREQyz lt with tn T5 and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 219 This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations See also the note for chapter 3 2 13 Fre quency Error Absolute on page 33 1 Freq Error Rel 49 sym Fig 3 11 Result display Frequency Error Relative Available for source types e Modulation Errors Remote
281. ays the default number of displayed points per symbol is identical to the sample rate 4 8 Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions For various vector signal analysis functions the measured signal is compared to a defined ideal reference signal The more precise the reference signal the more precise the results become In the best case the possible data sequences within the signal to analyze are known in advance and can be used to compare the measured data to This is similar to defining a pattern for the entire result range Thus a falsely estimated reference signal due to false symbol decisions is avoided and does not influence the error calculation e MM M User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 122 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics SS E Prae Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions You can load xml files containing the possible sequences to the VSA application and use them to compare the measured data to In particular you can use known data for the following functions e Fine synchronization during the demodulation process see figure 4 44 and Fine Synchronization on page 199 e Calculation of the Bit Error Rate BER see chapter 3 2 1 Bit Error Rate BER on page 21 For details on working with Known Data files see chapter 8 2 3 How to Manage Known Data Files on page 233 Auxiliary tool to cr
282. ble in the R amp S FSW K70 Solution Make sure that the correct pattern is specified in the Signal Description dialog User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 268 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Explanation of Error Messages For more information see chapter 5 4 Signal Description on page 133 Message Result Alignment Failed The result range alignment is not possible for the patricular capture buffer The result range needs l Q data that has not been captured trur VSA Ref Level 10 00 dim Att 10 d8 Freq 1 SGL TRG EXT BURST Result Range f saluatiomRengen A EVM Length Result Length 400 sym Result Range Alignment Result Range Alignment and Evaluation Range Reference Capture e Burst Alignment Left e Center Offset Symbol No Burst Start Visualization Start 126 sym C Mag CapBuf Display EE Config Start 0 sym Stop 500 sym N y 11332018 11 57 07 Fig 10 8 Example for failed alignment In this windowshot the alignment of the long result range to the burst center is not pos sible because there are not enough samples in the capture buffer before the burst starts In this scenario the trigger settings should be changed such that the burst is in the middle of the capture buffer Solution Change the trigger settings and or enlarge the capture length For more information see chapter 5 6 Signal Capture on page 171 User Manual 1173 9292
283. bol Rate 7 MHz N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 248 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal c Inthe Transmit Filter section select RRC as Type and enter the Alpha BT value 0 35 In the preview area of the dialog you should then see a non distorted QPSK constellation diagram as shown in figure 9 3 i Modulation amp Signal Description Modulation Modulation Settings Mapping WCDMA Symbol Rate 1 0 MHz Transmit Filter Alpha BT 0 35 Trace Constellation 1 Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Stop 4 68 Fig 9 3 QPSK signal with RRC transmit filter 7 Closeall open dialog boxes By default four measurement windows showing different measurement results are displayed User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 249 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 dBm Mod QPSK SR 1 0 MHz m elAtt 20 4dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen 800 A Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw B Result Summary Phase Err RMS Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Amplitude Droop ifi Start 2 43 Stop 2 43 C Mag CapBuf Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym Fig 9 4 Default window layout for Measurement Example 1 9 2 3 Changing the Display Configuration 1 To change the window layout i e the display configuration do one of the following e Select the Display Config softkey in the main VSA menu e Select the Display Con
284. bsolute The instantaneous frequency of the signal source the absolute value is displayed in Hz Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal e Capture Buffer Meas amp Ref signal d J MEAS 1 FREQ yzastt ES with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 219 EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 30 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays b ON MR Result Types in VSA Capture buffer l d FREQ cpr t ZCapt t 2 a dt When evaluating the capture buffer the absolute frequency is derived from the measured phase with Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate see Sample Rate on page 172 This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations However since these modulations can have transitions through zero in the UO plane in this case you might notice uncritical spikes This is due to the fact that the phase of zero or a complex value close to zero is of limited significance but still influences the result of the instantaneous frequency measurement 1 FregAbs CaptureBuffer Fig 3 8 Result display Frequency Absolute Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the req
285. carrier frequency error phase error Q offset gain imbalance quadrature error and the amplitude droop Alternatively it is possible to disable the estimation algorithm For FSK modulated signals estimates for the signal amplitude signal timing carrier fre quency error FSK deviation error and the carrier frequency drift are calculated The measurement signal is subsequently corrected with these estimates Compensation for FSK deviation error and carrier frequency drift can be enabled or disabled For more information on synchronization see e chapter 4 5 1 2 Estimation on page 102 chapter 5 9 2 Advanced Demodulation Synchronization on page 196 Result Display The selected measurement results are displayed in the window s Configuration of the windows can be performed via the Window Configuration dialog see chapter 6 5 Dis play and Window Configuration on page 217 Burst Search The burst search is performed only if it is switched on Otherwise this stage is skipped It is recommended that you switch the burst search on if the signal is bursted This E MT User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 91 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics D R a CG i Overview of the Demodulation Process ensures that all internal estimators are operated in time ranges where the burst power ramping is up In order to e
286. ce on page 321 DiglConf Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This softkey is available in the In Output menu but only if the optional software is installed Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 20 360 86 Build 170 or higher is required To return to the R amp S FSW application press any key on the front panel The R amp S FSW application is displayed with the Input Output menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is mini mized not closed If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSW once again EEEEETIR RIT SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 155 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration 8 BE Input and Frontend Settings 5 5 1 4 Analog Baseband Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the Analog Base band Interface R amp S FSW B71 in
287. ce settings have been predefined and can be applied very quickly by selecting the appropriate button Function Trace Settings Preset All Traces Trace 1 Clear Write Traces 2 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold Max Avg Min Trace 2 Average Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold Max CirWrite Min Trace 2 Clear Write Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 208 R amp SSFSW K70 Analysis ES ae Trace Export Settings Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys Displays the Traces settings and focuses the Mode list for the selected trace For the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display only one trace is available Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 379 6 2 Trace Export Settings The captured trace data can also be exported to an ASCII file The format of these files can be configured Traces Std 3G WCDMA SR 3 84 MHz mm Traces Trace Export Mode RAW Trace Header Decimal Seperator Pot Export Trace to ASCII File for all Windows Export Trace to ASCII File for Specific Window Ge ee GTA Constellation I Q Meas amp Ref Decimal Separeto TEE 210 Trace ASCI EXPO E 210 Data Export Mode Defines whether raw UO data as captured or trace data evaluated is stored Remote command FORMat DEXPort MODE on page 412 User Manual 11
288. commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFREQuency CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFREQuency EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current value 1 Error in mean value 2 Error in peak value 3 15 These bits are not used 11 11 7 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO Register This register comprises information about limit violations in UO offset or RHO evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulationcn IQRHO EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RHO value 1 Error in mean RHO value 2 Error in peak RHO value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current UO offset value 6 Error in mean UO offset value User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 433 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Status Reporting System Bit No Meaning 7 Error in peak UO offset value 8 15 These bits are not used 11 11 8 STATus QUESTionable MODulation n FSK Register This register comprises information about limit violations in FSK evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current Frequency Error RMS value 1 Error in mean Frequenc
289. cording to reference and per Ref Value 10 0 dBm Ref Position Per Division Oe Ce Tal 4 Statistics MagAbs Mea For details on the different methods to configure the scaling see on page 238 A visualization of the diagram scaling with the current settings is displayed at the right side of the dialog box r rc rr rrr Tr User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 167 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Auto Scale Once Auto Scale Window If enabled both the x axis and y axis are automatically adapted to the current measure ment results only once not dynamically in the selected window To adapt the range of all screens together use the Auto Scale All function Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 369 Defining Min and Max Values Indicates the current range borders according to the current settings for information only For statistical evaluations only defines the displayed range using minimum and max imum values Values in the range 1e lt value lt 0 1 are allowed The y axis unit is defined via the Y Axis Unit on page 170 setting The distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer on page 336 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer on page 336 Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions Defines the displayed range using a reference point and t
290. ctive see Enabling Pattern Searches on page 184 Stat Count Statistics count for averaging and other statistical operations see Statistic Count on page 180 cannot be edited directly Capt Count Capture count the current number of captures performed if several captures are necessary to obtain the number of results defined by Statistics Count cannot be edited directly SGL The sweep is set to single sweep mode In addition the channel bar also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though this is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values e g transducer or trigger settings This information is displayed only when applicable for the current measurement For details see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual LEE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 13 R amp S FSW K70 Welcome to the Vector Signal Analysis Application Understanding the Display Information Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 1 Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in VSA application 1 Window name 2 Result type 3 Data source type 4 Trace color 5 Displayed signal for Meas amp Ref data source M Meas or R Ref 6 Trace mode Diagram area The diagram area displays the results according to the selected result displays see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Disp
291. currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged This is useful for example after evaluation changes have been made or if a new sweep was performed from another application in this case only that application is updated automatically after data acquisition Remote command INITiate REFResh on page 374 Burst and Pattern Configuration Information on known patterns and bursts in the captured signal improve the accuracy of the determined ideal reference signal and calculation of the signal parameters becomes quicker For details on burst and patterns see chapter 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Proc ess on page 89 Burst Search The Burst Search settings define when a burst is detected in the evaluated signal A live preview of the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The blue lines below the trace indicate the detected bursts The preview area is not editable directly The Burst Search settings are displayed when you select the Burst Pattern button in the Overview or the Burst Pattern Search softkey in the main VSA menu SSES User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 181 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Burst and Pattern Configuration Burst Search Pattern Search Auto according to Signal Structure wm ou Advanced Meas only if Burst found Auto Configuration Search Tolerance 14 769
292. cvPERborbMEanGTATe sse enn eee eene CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan VALue esses eene nnne nnne nnne CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan RESult eese 425 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak STATe sse 389 CAlCulate nz LUIMrMACCuracvPERbor PPESkKVA ue ennemis 392 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak RESult 425 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent STAT 6 000 eeeeeeceeeeeenee sense seeeeesaeeseaeeseneeseeeseeees 389 CAL Culate nzLlMtMACCuracv PERRorbRCllbrentVAl ue 392 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent RESult esee 425 CAL Culate cnzLlMtMACCuracv PERRorhRMEanGTATe nennen nnne CAL Culate cnzLlMtMACCuracv PDERRorRMEanVAl ue nnne ener nnne CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan RESult CAL Culate cnzLlMitMACCuracvPERorbRptakGrTATe eene nennen entren CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak VALue essere ener nre CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak RESult eene 425 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURREMNESTATE nene eee nerenrennnni CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent VALue essere remettre CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent RESult CAL Culate nzLIMIrMACCuracvRHOMEAN STATe nennen nennen mnes CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN VAL ue CAL Culate nz LIMIMACCuracv
293. d SENSe DDEMod OPTimization on page 365 Estimation Points Sym During synchronization the measurement signal is matched to the reference signal and various signal parameters are calculated You can define how many sample points are used for this calculation at each symbol For more information on estimation points per symbol see chapter 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol on page 121 You can set the estimation points manually or let the VSA application decide how many estimation points to use If automatic mode is enabled the VSA application uses the following settings depending on the modulation type Modulation Est Points PSK QAM 1 Offset QPSK 2 FSK MSK Capture Oversampling For manual mode the following settings are available an the estimation algorithm takes only the symbol time instants into account 2 two points per symbol instant are used required for Offset QPSK Capture Oversampling the number of samples per symbol defined in the signal capture settings is used see Sample Rate on page 172 i e all sample time instants are weighted equally Remote command SENSe DDEMod EPRate AUTO on page 359 SENSe DDEMod EPRate VALue on page 359 EEUU RA MMN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 198 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration EG C SS SS SSS SS Demodulation Settings Coarse Synchronization It is not only possible to check whet
294. d Input connector without clipping the signal User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 165 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings The fullscale level can be defined automatically according to the reference level or man ually For manual input the following values can be selected e 0 25V e 05V e 1V e 2V If probes are connected the possible fullscale values are adapted according to the pro be s attenuation and maximum allowed power For details on probes see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO on page 325 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel on page 325 5 5 3 3 Scaling Depending on the type of display time spectrum or statistics various scaling functions are available to adapt the result display to the current data D Note that scaling settings are window specific as opposed to the amplitude settings The scaling settings are displayed when you select the AMPT key and then the Scale Config softkey User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 166 R amp S9FSW K70 Amplitude Scale Unit YScale Automatic grid scaling Scaling according to min and max values Max Scaling according to reference and per div Ref Value Ref Position Per Division Configuration Input and Frontend Settings o XScale Automatic grid scaling Adjust Settings Automatic grid scaling All Axes Default Setting Quantize Scaling ac
295. d and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband l If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF I Q Only Low IF Q The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT Q connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband Q If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF Q Remote command INPut IQ TYPE on page 325 Input configuration Defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain UO signal via 2 simple ended lines Note Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Single ended setting must be used for all probes Differential l Q and inverse 1 Q data Single Ended Q data only Remote command INPut IQ BALanced STATe on page 324 Swap UO Activates or deactivates the inverted UO modulation If the and Q parts of the signal from the DUT are interchanged the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it On and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l
296. d band read only The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configuration see Range 1 2 on page 146 For details on available frequency ranges see table 11 2 Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt on page 310 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP on page 310 Handover Freq Defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover on page 310 Band Defines the waveguide band or user defined band to be used by the mixer The start and stop frequencies of the selected band are displayed in the RF Start and RF Stop fields For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 The mixer settings for the user defined band can be selected freely The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configuration see Range 1 2 on page 146 Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue on page 311 E User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 145 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration SS 8 Input and Frontend Settings RF Overrange If enabled the frequency range is not restricted by the b
297. d off again Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Auto Scale Once Auto Scale Window on page 168 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ALL Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once in all windows then switched off again Usage Event Manual operation See Auto Scale All on page 205 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation Duration In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command defines the length of the measurement if SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 369 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA Parameters Duration Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 204 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command selects the way the R amp S FSW determines the length of the measurement Parameters Mode AUTO The R amp S FSW determines the measurement length automatically according to the current input data MANual The R amp
298. d with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CONDition on page 436 and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVENt on page 436 The status of the STATus QUESTionable MODulation register is indicated in bit 7 of the STATus QUESTionable register It can be queried using the STATus QUESTionable EVENt command Bit No Meaning 0 Error in EVM evaluation 1 Error in Phase Error evaluation 2 Error in Magnitude Error evaluation 3 Error in Carrier Frequency evaluation 4 Error in UO offset or RHO evaluation 5 Error in FSK evaluation 6 15 These bits are not used 11 11 3 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM Register This register comprises information about limit violations in EVM evaluation It can be queried with commands User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 431 R amp S9FSW K70 STATus QUI STATus QUI Remote Commands for VSA Di EN EStionable MODulation lt n gt EStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM CON EVM EV Status Reporting System tion and EL Bit No Meaning Error in current RMS value Error in mean RMS value Error in peak RMS value These bits are not used Error in current peak value Error in mean peak value Error in peak peak value 8 15 These bits are not used 11 11 4 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe Register This register comp
299. dard EE SYMDONCHECK EE Symbol check demodulation process Symbol format 2 2 i dieere e tette ul el EE WOKING WIN e Pattern search Configuration E Demodulation process Sc Display secs RRE Enabling EE Errors Found ln EE I Q correlation threshold sess Performing sg iere E Ee EE Selected pattern s essen Peaks Absolute a cette dtr e tet 214 Formula E 2 Marker positioning esses 214 NeXt EE 214 ioi Mc M 214 Peak search Hl aint Limits Moo r M Phase Distortion e WEEN 110 FOMA mecra gees bteetdee chend Ag edd deg eege see 462 Wrap result type ssssseseeeene 43 Phase error Definition FROWN EL Result type as RMS peak formulae ssssssess 465 Phase Error Result type certet etre eden 43 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 500 R amp S FSW K70 Index Phase shift keying S66 PSK 69 Phase unwrap Unwrap result type esses 44 Ports External Mixer B21 remote control 314 Preamplifier E e RE 143 162 SOFIKGy 5nd aei ren e tend 143 162 Prefix uci d HR 187 Preset Bands External Mixer B21 remote control 310 Exter
300. data to the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed only RF input is supported EEUU RU RA I E e e LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLU ULLUIM A A User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 306 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 5 2 2 Configuring VSA Parameters Source RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ data only available with optional Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 For details on UO input see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Man ual AIQ Analog Baseband signal only available with optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For details on Analog Baseband input see the R amp S FSW UO Ana lyzer User Manual RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 142 See Digital UO Input State on page 154 See Analog Baseband Input State on page 156 Using External Mixers The commands required to work with external mixers in a remote environment are descri bed here Note that these commands require the R amp S FSW B21 option to be installed and an external mixer to be connected to the front panel of the R amp S FSW In MSRA mode external mixers are not supported For details on working with external mixers see the R amp S FSW User Manual BASIC SOUINGS ic 307 Mixer SUING E 309 e Conversion Loss Table Zeta 314 e Programming Example Working with an External Mixer 318 Basic
301. ded by the connected device e g a generator If Auto is selected the sample rate is adjusted automatically by the connected device The allowed range is from 100 Hz to 10 GHz Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 323 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO on page 324 Full Scale Level The Full Scale Level defines the level and unit that should correspond to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 154 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration REESEN Input and Frontend Settings If Auto is selected the level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 323 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 323 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO on page 322 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 323 Connected Instrument Displays the status of the Digital Baseband Interface connection If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed e Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face e Used port e Sample rate of the data currently being transferred via the Digital Baseband Interface Level and unit that corresponds to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level if provided by connected instrument Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVi
302. del parameters as follows Table 1 7 Evaluation of results in the PSK QAM and MSK result summary EVM RMS 1 i 3 EVM n T Y NG Peak max E VM n Tp Modulation RMS 1 error Y EV n Tp y NC 20 log e nem TY E Peak min MER n T H 1 y Xv E with MER n T 20 log 7 VIREF k T et Magnitude RMS 1 2 error x Eua zz Peak max MAG ERR n Tq 1 Phase error RMS 1 2 mmm zem Tp Peak max PHASE ERR n T tion coeffi cient RHO correla 3 REF n DEN E KKF MEAS REF P 5 REF n Ka MEAS AKF REF AKF MEAS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 465 R amp SS9FSW K70 Annex Formulae IQ Offset C 2 2 Je Bien Zi 8g lin 1 p p AREP T C 10 log o Cin EI IQ Imbalance j lin e 25 ei B 20 log g GO Ho Gain Imbal Se G Ghin 2 G 20 logio kon Quadrature Error e i Oin D VE 0 Oin deg Amplitud Ra Droop A Val A 20 log 4j HB Sym A 6 2 2 FSK Modulation For FSK modulation the estimation model is described in detail in section chapter 4 5 2 FSK Modulation on page 111 The parameters of the FSK specific result summary table can be related to the distortion model parameters as follows Table 1 8 Evaluation of results in the FSK result summary FEIRE enn F Frequency Error RMS inn max FREQ ERR n T Magnitude Error RMS 1 hun Fait y
303. display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 219 The normalization constant C is chosen according to the EVM normalization By default C is the mean power of the reference signal C x Xieertery and T duration of symbol periods Note that k 0 5 n T for Offset QPSK with inactive Offset EVM User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 27 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Result Types in VSA ei Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 5 Result display Error Vector Magnitude Available for source types e Error Vector Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EVEC to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 3 2 8 Eye Diagram Frequency The eye diagram of the currently measured frequencies and or the reference signal The time span of the data depends on the evaluation range capture buffer Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM FEYE to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 28 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 9
304. drature error over several sweeps RPE Peak quadrature error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of quadrature error PCTL 95 percentile value of quadrature error Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic RHO lt type gt This command queries the results of the Rho factor measurement performed for digital demodulation Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Rho factor for current sweep AVG Average rho factor over several sweeps RPE Peak rho factor over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of rho factor PCTL 95 percentile value of rho factor Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic SNR lt type gt This command queries the results of the SNR error measurement performed for digital demodulation E User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 423 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Query parameters type Usage Retrieving Results lt none gt RMS SNR value of display points of current sweep AVG Average of RMS SNR values over several sweeps PAVG Average of maximum SNR values over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS SNR value over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum SNR values over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum SNR values over several sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of
305. dth provided by the R amp S FSW in the basic installation can be extended by additional options These options can either be included in the initial installation B options or updated later U options The maximum bandwidth provided by the individual option is indicated by its number for example B80 extends the band width to 80 MHz Note that the U options as of U40 always require all lower bandwidth options as a pre requisite while the B options already include them User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 62 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth Max usable Required B option Required U option s UO BW 10 MHz 28 MHz B28 U28 40 MHz B40 U28 U40 or B28 U40 80 MHz B80 U28 U40 U80 or B28 U40 U80 or B40 U80 160 MHz B160 U28 U40 U80 U160 or B28 U40 U80 U160 or B40 U80 U160 or B80 U160 320 MHz B320 U28 U40 U80 U160 U320 or B28 U40 U80 U160 U320 or B40 U80 U160 U320 or B80 U160 U320 or B160 U320 As a rule the usable UO bandwidth is proportional to the output sample rate Yet when the I Q bandwidth reaches the bandwidth of the analog IF filter at very high output sample rates the curve breaks Relationship between sample rate and usable UO bandwidth Up to the maximum bandwidth the following rule applies Usable LO bandwidth 0 8 Output sample rate MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate
306. dwidths During Signal Processing rate leads to a sufficient UO data bandwidth The whole spectrum of the input signal is captured but most adjacent channels and interferers are effectively suppressed Only for very wide signals FSK no TX filter used it can be necessary to try higher values for the sample rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth on page 61 increasing the UO bandwidth The I Q data delivered to the DSP section has no considerable amplitude or phase distortion and a suitable bandwidth The Signal Capture dialog box Data Acquisition tab shows the sample rate and the usable UO bandwidth achieved for the current settings see Usable UO Bandwidth on page 173 e After the optional measurement filter The measurement signal and the reference signal can be filtered by various mea surement filters which have different bandwidths The filters described above are the ones that directly affect the bandwidth of the captured UO data and the final measurement signal and reference signal Note however that several other filters are also involved in the DSP section but are not mentioned above e Receive filter to prevent ISI intersymbol interference e filters necessary for various estimators e others 4 1 4 UO Bandwidth The bandwidth of the UO data used as input for the vector signal analysis is filtered as described in chapter 4 1 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing on page 54
307. e The pattern search can be switched on or off via the Pattern Search dialog see Ena bling Pattern Searches on page 184 Detected patterns are indicated by a green background in the symbol table If during demodulation individual symbols do not match the pattern after all these symbols are indicated by a red frame Extraction of Result Range The result range can be aligned to a burst a pattern or simply the start of the capture buffer see Reference on page 191 Within this stage the result range is cut from the capture buffer starting at a point that is specified by the user e g the start of a detected burst The VSA application automatically takes into account filter settling times by making the internal buffers sufficiently longer than the selected result range Demodulation amp Symbol Decisions This stage operates on the extracted result range and aims at making the correct symbol decisions Within this stage a coarse synchronization of the carrier frequency offset the carrier phase the scaling and the timing takes place Furthermore an automatically selected internal receive filter Rx filter is used in order to remove the inter symbol inter ference as effectively as possible The outputs of this stage are the coarsely synchron ized measurement signal and the symbol decisions bits The symbol decisions are later used for the Pattern Symbol Check stage and for the Reference Signal Generation stage E
308. e Parameters Average numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS HIGH 20dB Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 146 See Conversion loss on page 147 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the high second range Parameters lt FileName gt string file name gt Example MIX LOSS TABL HIGH MyCVLTable Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 146 See Conversion loss on page 147 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the low first range Parameters lt FileName gt string file name gt Example MIX LOSS TABL mix 1 4 Specifies the conversion loss table mix_1_4 Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 146 See Conversion loss on page 147 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire low first range Parameters lt Average gt numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB _L________ SSS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 313 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA Example MIX LOSS 20dB Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 146 See Conv
309. e the Continuous Sweep softkey only con trols the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly Furthermore the RUN CONT key on the front panel controls the Sequencer not individ ual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode For details on the Sequencer see the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command INITiate CONTinuous on page 373 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE After triggering starts the number of evaluations set in Statistics Count The measure ment stops after the defined number of evaluations has been performed While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highligh ted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key on the front panel controls the Sequencer not indi vidual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequenc
310. e 389 6 5 Display and Window Configuration The captured UO data can be evaluated using various different methods without having to start a new measurement As opposed to the R amp S FSW Spectrum application or other applications in VSA config uring the result display requires two steps 1 Display Configuration In the first step you select the data source for the evaluation and the window placement in the SmartGrid The SmartGrid mode is activated automatically when you select the Display Con fig softkey from the main VSA menu or the Display Config button in the Overview Note however that this button is only displayed in the general Overview not for window specific configuration Specifics for must be disabled The default evaluation for the selected data source is displayed in the window Up to 16 result displays can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The VSA evaluation methods are described in chapter 3 Measurements and Result Dis plays on page 15 For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual E P M t User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 217 R amp S FSW K70 Analysis a SSS SSS SS a ee a Ss Display and Window Configuration 2 Window Configuration In a second step you can select a different evaluation method r
311. e Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 342 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA EMG EC C y Configuring VSA Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 343 command for new remote control programs Parameters Period Range 150 ns to 1000s RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 using the baseband power trigger BBP the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to avoid unintentional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range O sto 10 0s RST 0s Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 178 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep data cap turing Parameters Offset The allowed range is 0 s to 30 s RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 177 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This com
312. e Commands for VSA CALC LIM MACC EVM PPE Query the value and check the in the measurement Result CALC2 MARK FUNC DDEM STAT CFER CALC LIM MACC CFER MEAN Query the value and check the in the result summary for the Result Storing trace data to FORM DEXP HEAD ON Include a header in the trace FORM DEXP MODE TRAC Export the trace data Programming Examples limit for the largest error vector magnitude AVG limit for the mean carrier frequency offset current evaluation range export file not raw I Q data Query the first value of the x axis for the current result range trace 1 in window 4 to an ascii file to an ascii file trace 2 in window 4 window 2 for the current result range DISP WIND1 TRAC2 X STAR x values are not exported with trace data Result MMEM STOR4 TRAC 1 Measurement signal Save the measurement signal values Results MMEM STOR4 TRAC 2 Reference signal Save the reference signal values Results MMEM STOR2 TRAC 1 Result Summary Save the result summary values to an ascii file Results aseene Retrieving DDEM SEAR MBUR CALC Query the number of Use variable x to determine DDEM SEAR MBUR CALC x Move to next result range and range specific results 11 13 3 Check results for further result ranges result ranges current is last number of previous re
313. e ERE ied deeds 163 L Attenuation Mode Value tnter 163 Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 EE 163 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the R amp S FSW hardware is adapted according to this value it is recommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Note that the Reference Level value ignores the Shifting the Display Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle Note that for input from the External Mixer R amp S FSW B21 the maximum reference level also depends on the conversion loss see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual for details Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel on page 331 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the applicati
314. e Known Data files from data that is already available in the VSA application is provided on the instrument free of charge To create a Known Data file using the recording tool for sequences 1 Import or apply input data for which stable demodulation results are available to the VSA application If necessary adapt the demodulation settings until the requested results are obtained Start the R amp S Recording Tool for Sequences from the Windows task bar on the R amp S FSW or execute the file RecordingToolforSequences EXE from the instal lation directory on the instrument The R amp S Recording Tool for Sequences window is displayed SSES User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 234 R amp S FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements R amp S Recording Tool for Sequences E HR Configuration VISA TCPIP localhost Results Analyzed Sequences 33 Modulation PSK Format NORM Order 8 ResultLength 148 Different Sequences 83 Last New Sequence Found Os ago Throughput 0 72 kSymbols s Store for K70 Stop Reset 3 Start a measurement in the VSA application 4 Inthe tool window select Run The tool records the demodulated data sequences The following result information is provided by the tool during recording e Analyzed Sequences number of data sequences analyzed since the tool was started Different Sequences number of unique sequences detected in the
315. e Name Digital Standards Contain the name of the data file without the path or extension By default the name of a settings file consists of a base name followed by an underscore Multiple files with the same base name are extended by three numbers e g limit lines 005 For details on the file name and location see the Data Management topic in the R amp S FSW User Manual Comment Digital Standards An optional description for the data file A maximum of 60 characters can be displayed Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard COMMent on page 292 Load Standard Digital Standards Loads the selected measurement settings file E P E w User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 129 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration 5 3 id ke SC Overview Configuration Overview Note When you load a standard the usage of a known data file if available is auto matically deactivated Remote command SENSe DDEMod PRESet STANdard on page 292 Save Standard Digital Standards Saves the current measurement settings for a specific standard as a file with the defined name Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard SAVE on page 293 Save Standard Digital Standards Saves the current measurement settings for a specific standard as a file w
316. e band by two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 cvl table UserTable range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS TABL LOW UserTable SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACe1 Configuring Digital UO Input and Output Useful commands for digital UO data described elsewhere e INST SEL DIQ see INPut SELect on page 306 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 344 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SG amp DiglConf Soft
317. e chap ter 5 8 Result Range Configuration on page 190 Result range display The result ranges are indicated by green bars along the time axis of the capture buffer result diagrams User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 118 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics El Measurement Ranges C Mag CapBuf 20 dBm 40 d amp m aiid i all A iM i M Start 0 sym Fig 4 66 Result ranges for a burst signal Result displays whose source is not the capture buffer are based on a single result range such as the EVM vs Time display or the data in the Current column of the Result Summary In this case you can use the capture buffer display to navigate through the available result ranges Select Result Rng softkey and analyze the individual result ranges in separate windows The currently displayed result range is indicated by a blue bar in the capture buffer display You can change the position of the result range quickly and easily by dragging the blue bar representing the result range to a different position in the capture buffer Continuous and discrete result ranges Depending on the type of signal and your result range definition the result ranges may be continuous or discrete Bursted signals commonly have several discrete result ranges at the bursts with intervals during the noise periods which should not be included in the results see figure 4 66 Continuous signals on the other hand have result ranges that cover the
318. e chapter 5 11 Evaluation Range Configuration on page 202 Display Configuration The Display Config button is only available in the general overview not in the win dow specific overview see Specifics for on page 132 PE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 131 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration REENEN Configuration Overview See chapter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 217 10 Analysis See chapter 6 Analysis on page 206 To configure settings gt Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Select a setting in the channel bar at the top of the measurement channel tab to change a specific setting For step by step instructions on configuring VSA measurements see chapter 8 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis on page 226 Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key on the front panel restores all measurements in all mea surement channels on the R amp S FSW to their default values See chapter 5 1 Default Settings for Vector Signal Analysis on page 127 for details Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 291 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialo
319. e dee 179 Conventions SGPlcommands rrt rra 283 Conversion loss External Mixer B21 remote control 313 Conversion loss tables sss Available remote control ee Band remote control sss Bias remote control esses Configuring B21 us T ecco Deleting remote control sssssesss External Mixer B21 remote control 2 External Mixer B21 sss Harmonic order remote control Importing External Mixer B21 EI Te Uu WEE Mixer type remote control sssssssss Saving External Mixer B21 us Selecting remote control seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Shifting values External Mixer B21 153 Values External Mixer B21 ssssussss 153 Copying Measurement channel remote 288 Couple Screens iic M E 212 Coupling Input remote iniecto tette pre 305 Customized Measurement performing sssesuuss 228 D Data acquisition RI RE 172 COMIQUIATION dassi Pt 171 Meed Sample rate Usable UO Bandwidth eese 173 Data source Capture buffer eorr etd 16 Display 14 EQUAIIZEN T guer 18 Error vector ne ri Evaluation Method
320. e enne nnenneee neret nnns serere nnd 437 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition eese nennen nennen 437 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition esses 438 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVEN 436 STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt TEEN 436 STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt CONDItION nennen rennen rennen nentes 436 STATusOUEGtonableL lMit zmz ENARle emere nennen nennen 437 SGTATusOUEG onable L Mit zmzNTbRansitton nnne ennnnid 438 STATus QUEStionable LIMit m P TRansition sessi nre 438 SGTATusOUEG onableL M Aboin mz CONDnton ennemi 436 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt ENABle STATus QUEStionable LMARgin m NTRansition esee enne nnne 438 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin m PTRansition eese nne 438 STATusOUEGtonable MAboin mzlIEVENUN nen enn enne 436 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency CONDItiON eee cece eee eee reese eee eteneeeeaeeeaees STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CFRequency ENABle essessseeeeeeeeeeeene enn STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency NTRansition STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency PTRansition STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CFRequency EVEN 436 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CONDItiON enne eene nnne 436 STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz ENAbDle esent n eren nennen nena 437 STATusOUEG onable MODulat
321. e limit check can be enabled individually for current or peak values 5 Enable the Check option for each result type to be included in the limit check 6 If necessary define limits and enable the limit check for the mean values of the dif ferent result types on the Mean tab 7 If necessary enable the limit check for the peak values of the different result types on the Peak tab 8 Toreset the limits to their default values press Set to Default 9 Enable the Limit Checking On option or press the ModAcc Limits On softkey in the Limits menu The limit check is performed immediately on the current modulation accuracy mea surement results and for all subsequent measurements until it is disabled The results of the limit check are indicated by red or green values in the result summary 8 3 3 How to Export the Trace Data to a File The measured data can be stored to an ASCII file either as raw data directly from the capture buffer or as displayed in the diagrams evaluated trace data Optionally a header can be included with additional information on the used measurement settings rr User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 242 R amp S FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis Boo DN How to Analyze the Measured Data Press the TRACE key and select the Trace Export Config softkey Define which type of data to export raw or trace By default trace data is exported Optionally enable the heade
322. e mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency for each band can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 307 Parameters Frequency numeric value Example MIX ON Activates the external mixer MIX FREQ HAND 78 0299GHz Sets the handover frequency to 78 0299 GHz Manual operation See Handover Freq on page 145 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band starts Example MIX FREQ STAR Queries the start frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 145 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band stops Example MIX FREQ STOP Queries the stop frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 145 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet This command restores the preset frequency ranges for the selected standard waveguide band Note Changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function Use this command to restore the predefined band ranges E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 310 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Example Usage Manual operation MIX HARM BAND PRI Confi
323. e que ee teretes re ebbe eos WMO e uin ro EE Digital input Bandwidths 5 nnn ene ere 67 Connection information E Restctone oi M Digital output age 67 Digital standards Assigned patterns ssssessssseeeee 186 Assigning patterns zi Configuratio E 128 Performing measurement according to 226 Predefined gis Mc cc Removing assigned patterns sssuus 187 Saving E Selecting it t eee nerit 129 SOMKGCY M ranean 129 VSA measurements sssseseeee 128 Display Configuration softkey sssssssessssss 217 Information Points per symbol 121 219 462 464 Drop out time Erg 178 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 288 E EDGE Filters frequency response n e 470 Measurement example sse 253 Electronic input attenuation eeseeseessees 163 Equalizer BASICS nEn 98 Bru 18 Loading xa E Mute 124 FROSUIE TY DOS M eege geed 18 Storing m sig opio mec Em Error messages EXPAN AON rrr gege 264 Error model FSK xot uL RUE E 113 PSK QAM EE 101 Errors F OVE D EE 161 164 Error vector Bruce RR 17 DefiNiti N e 103 F
324. e tene nns tst nns tnter nnne ennt SENSe BDEMOG SEARCh SYNCG DATA tn tern dt ee ce Ea cec eg a a o peas opp dais IEN Ge IDDEMod SGEARch SGvNC DEI ete eene nennen erret nnne nnr ennt IEN Ge IDDEMod SGEARch GvNC OCThresbold nennen IGENZGe IDDEMod SEARch SNCMODE trennen nne unea daitan nitrate trennen eniin SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME IGENZGe IDDEMod SGEAbRch GvNCH Tate nete tne trennen entr tnnt nne trennen IGENZGe IDDEMod SGEAbRch SGvNCPATTemADD nennen trennen etri IGENZGe IDDEMod GE AbRch SGvNCPATTemREMove nennen tnnt trennen innen IEN Ge IDDEMod GEARch SGvNC GEL ect SENSe DDEMOG SEARCh SYNG STATS tette ee etri ardet EENS ge IGENZGe IDDEMod SGEARch SGNCTENT trennen ennt tne trennen inneren tnn tete trennen enin SENSe DDEMOd SIGNAEPAT T6rhh ss ciere tec tue do ees ees E ea ea ee EAA c aea pe ERR eR EXC EEA RE XL EERRL ate SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue eee aeaiaioii nn nennen SENSe DDEMod SRATe IEN Ge IDDEMod SGTANdard COMMent nennen nnne nennen nnne nennen enne SENSe DDEMod STANdard DELete sessi tne nre trennen nnne nne SENSe DDEMod STANdard PREset VALue essent tnter nnne nnne SENS IDDEMod STANdard SAVE IGENZGe IDDEMod STANdard SNC OFFGerGTATe eret nnne tein nnne IEN Ge IDDEMod SGTANdard GvNC OFFGelVAL ue SENSe DDEModAIFILtEr AL BH E NEE SENSe DDEMod TFILtet NAME racer deeg de SENSe DDE
325. e to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels CAE CUTIE MSRATALING SHOW E 393 CAL Gulate MSRA ALINS amp VALUus 3 2c tertie easet EEN EES EENS 393 GALGulate MSRA WINDowspnPIMAL ducc keen enne be konnen ccn no Rek dna c ARR oai eq cua 394 SENSe MSRA CAPT re QFF Set ae 394 CALCulate MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON CALCulate MSRA ALINe VALue Position This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master Parameters Position Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s E S User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 393 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA El Analysis CALCulate MSRA WINDows lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the index lt n gt This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt
326. e to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 283 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 1 3 11 1 4 11 1 5 Introduction Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instan ces of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a measurement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets n next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compliance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffi
327. e transmission filter Measurement Filters The measurement filter can be used to filter the following two signals in the same way e the measurement signal after coarse frequency phase and timing synchronization have been achieved e the reference signal i e the UO symbols that have been determined in the demodu lator and have already been filtered with the Transmit filter For FSK the measurement filter filters the instantaneous frequency of the signal not the UO signal For MSK PSK QAM and User QAM the measurement filter filters the real part and imaginary part of these signals i e not the instantaneous frequency or magnitude of the signal The VSA application defines the error signal as the difference between the reference signal and the measurement signal Thus the measurement filter also shapes the spec trum of the error signal which is used to calculate the EVM for example In many applications the measurement filter is the same as the RX filter However unlike the measurement filter the RX filter is not relevant for the measurement but is only required to create the reference signal optimally The RX filter and the transmit filter are usually chosen such that their combination results in an Inter Symbol Interference ISI free system see figure 4 2 and figure 4 3 LEE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 57 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing Set by user Auto Auto Function Auto Function
328. e type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM GDEL to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 412 3 2 4 Constellation Frequency The instantaneous frequency of the source signal without inter symbol interference as an X Y plot only the symbol decision instants are drawn and not connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal ES User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 24 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Result Types in VSA 1 Const Freq Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 9 907 MHz Fig 3 2 Result display Constellation Frequency Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM CONF to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 3 2 5 Constellation UO The complex source signal without inter symbol interference as an X Y plot only the de rotated symbol decision instants are drawn and not connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 25 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Result Types in VSA 1 Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Fig 3 3 Constellation I Q diagram for QPSK modulated signal Re
329. e using the keyboard Depending on the Modulation Order n the value can be in the range 0 to n 1 c Select the next symbol field or insert a new one and continue to define the other symbols To scroll through the fields for long patterns use the scrollbar beneath the input area The number beneath the scrollbar at the right end indicates the sequential number of the last symbol field the number in the center indicates the sequential number of the currently selected symbol field To remove a symbol field select it and press Remove 7 Select Save to save the pattern under the specified name The pattern is stored on the instrument as an xml file named Name xm1 under Installation directory gt vsa Pattern If you copy this file to another location you can restore the pattern at a later time e g after deletion User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 231 R amp S FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis KEE dl How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements Example Defining a pattern xl Name TETRA SA Description Special Continuous Downlink Burst Mod Order 4 Symbols Format Binary 6 Hex Decimal inicio Size 3 lo 2123 31 1 11 Ca Remove Fig 8 1 Pattern definition 8 2 2 3 How to Manage Patterns To change the display for the list of patterns 1 Inthe Overview select Signal Descri
330. e window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 for a list of available window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the windows on each side of the splitter As opposed to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 397 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter perma nently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define conflicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error SSS SSS TN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 400 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring the Result Display y 100 x 100 y 100
331. eate Known Data files An auxiliary tool to create Known Data files from data that is already available in the VSA application is provided on the instrument free of charge See To create a Known Data file using the recording tool for sequences on page 234 The syntax for Known Data files is described in chapter A 5 Known Data File Syntax Description on page 460 When you use Known Data files as a reference some dependencies to other settings and restrictions for other functions apply Modulation Order The Modulation Order selected in the Modulation settings in the VSA application must correspond to the modulation order value specified in the xml file lt ModulationOrder gt element Demodulation Demodulation using synchronization to the Known Data may increase the measurement duration as each detected symbol must be compared to each possible sequence in the data file Result Length The Result Length specified in the Result Range dialog box in the VSA application must be identical to the length of the specified symbol sequences in the xml file lt Result Length gt element Result Range Alignment e Bursted signals When you align the result range to a bursted signal due to the uncertainty of the burst search the determined result range might start up to 2 symbols before or after the actual burst However an offset of only one symbol has the effect that none of the predefined symbol sequences in the Known Data
332. ects the measurment or the reference signal as the data source for a trace Suffix lt t gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt TrRefType gt MEAS REF RST The default for trace 1 is always the measurement signal MEAS For all other traces the default signal type depends on the current measurement Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Evaluation on page 208 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode In case of max hold min hold or average trace mode you can set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt VALue Note that synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in single sweep mode Depending on the result display not all trace modes may be available IESSE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 378 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Parameters Mode Example Manual operation Analysis WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Average Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sw
333. ed between the R amp S FSW and the connected instrument both instruments must be able to process data at this rate the clock rate of the R amp S FSW at the output connector is 100 MHz e Input sample rate ISR the sample rate of the useful data provided by the connec ted instrument to the digital input e User Output Sample rate SR the sample rate that is defined by the user e g in the Data Aquisition dialog box in the I Q Analyzer application and which is used as the basis for analysis or sent to the digital output e Usable UO Analysis bandwidth the bandwidth range in which the signal remains unchanged by the digital decimation filter and thus remains undistorted this range can be used for accurate analysis by the R amp S FSW User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 66 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth Slowl Q measurements Slowl Q measurements are measurements where the user defined sample rate exceeds the rate used to transfer valid samples In the R amp S FSW the user defined sam ple rate may exceed 10 GHz for Slowl Q measurements This happens for example when an analog signal is sampled by external hardware e g an oscilloscope with a sample rate larger than 10 GHz is stored there in a memory temporarily and then read from the memory and transmitted to the R amp S FSW at a slower rate than it was sampled In this case make sure the input sample rate is defined cor
334. eeeeeeesaeeeeeeeaaeseeeeeeeeeas 351 ISENSe DDEMed SEARCH SYNGMO TEE 352 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELE Ct 0 0 AAA 352 SENSe DBEMGGSEARCHIS VINGIS TAN set nana dene eget tud ER ee de 352 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern CONFigure AUTO lt AutoConfigure gt This command sets the IQ correlation threshold to its default value Setting parameters lt AutoConfigure gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Q Correlation Threshold on page 184 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC AUTO lt AutoPattSearch gt This command links the pattern search to the type of signal When a signal is marked as patterned pattern search is switched on automatically Setting parameters lt AutoPattSearch gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Manual operation See Enabling Pattern Searches on page 184 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC IQCThreshold lt CorrelationLev gt This command sets the IQ correlation threshold for pattern matching in percent A high level means stricter matching E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 351 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA SS a M rl Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt CorrelationLev gt numeric value Range 10 0 to 100 0 RST 90 0 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Q Correlation Threshold on page 184 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE lt MeasOnlyOnPatt gt
335. eeeseeeee nennen nnne nnne nnne 273 Obtaining Technical Support leeseeesseeseesseesseeseeen enne nnn nennen nnn 280 Remote Commands for VSA cene 282 Iptrod etion zeguer 282 COMMON S ffixes decodes cosets ede Seed rne uera Ine Ba aaa 287 Activating Vector Signal Analysis eee enne 287 MM H User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 4 R amp S FSW K70 Contents 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 A 7 lt UR Ee El D 291 CONTIQUIING VSA E 293 Performing a Measurement eeeeesseeeeeeeeneeeee ennemi nn nennen nnne 371 HEI M c 377 Configuring the Result Display eseeseeeessseeeeeeeneeeennnrnn nnne nnn 396 Retrieving Results terni eite tr eret niente Eaa 409 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results 426 Status Reporting System eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee enne nennen nennen nnn nnn nena 428 Commands for Compatibility e ecce nennen nennen 439 Programming Examples asseeeeesseeeseeeeeeeenennnn nennen trn santet taian ansaa 440 e d 448 le pe
336. eeeseseseeeee nennen 384 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 385 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzMAximum APDtak sese see nennen etna s 385 GALGulate n MARKer m MAXImu m LEF T einen inet e dinaanan iaeiaiai nian 385 CAL Culate nz M AbkermzMAximumNENT esee ne nsns ne nns sn estan s 385 CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzMAximum RICH 385 CAL Culate nzM Abkercmz M ANimum PDEAKT nter 385 CAL Culate nz M Abkerzmz MiNimum LEET 386 CAL Culate nz M Abkermz MiNimumNENT ees en enn ni sent ss ases n aa as 386 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt enne enses stein s 386 CALOCulate n MARKer m MlINimum PEAK eeeeseseesssesesesennn nennen nnne 386 CAL Culate nz M Abker SEARCH ss ssnnttssasssib isi ss entries ases asas 386 CAECUIIE ET ege EE E 387 GALE DUulateMARKebX SEIMISIRIGEL Seeerei gees kenne ied 387 CAL CulateMAhker XG IMitstGTATel eene nennen tnter nennen 387 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum APEak This command positions the active marker or deltamarker on the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 213 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 383 R amp SS9FSW K70
337. eens 187 RII 188 Pattern EEN 188 Fatemi Soati RI Mrs 188 Meas Only if Pattern Symbols Comect 11 eet getto tene Papeles ca 188 Standard Patterns selecting an assigned pattern The Standard Patterns are the patterns assigned to the currently selected standard You can add existing patterns to the standard or remove patterns already assigned to the standard The highlighted pattern is currently selected for pattern search Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect on page 352 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 186 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration REESEN Burst and Pattern Configuration Removing patterns from a standard Removes the assignment of the selected patterns to the standard The patterns are removed from the Standard Patterns list but not deleted Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh SYNC PATTern REMove on page 355 Adding patterns to a standard Adds the selected patterns in the list of available patterns All Patterns to the list of assigned patterns Standard Patterns For details see To add a predefined pattern to a standard on page 230 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern ADD on page 355 Displaying available patterns The All Patterns list contains the patterns available in the VSA application You can assign available patterns to the selected standard
338. eep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment See Trace Mode on page 207 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Example Usage Manual operation DISP TRAC3 ON SCPI confirmed See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 on page 207 See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 209 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 379 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Analysis 11 7 2 Working with Markers 11 7 2 1 Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Manual configuration of markers is described in chapter 6 3 Markers on page 210 e Individual Marker Settings icit eii e cie 380 e Marker Search and Positioning SettingS 22 cccceeeeeseeeeeeteeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeees 383 Individual Marker Settings In VSA evaluations
339. ef Signal Magnitude Absolute MAGNitude Magnitude Relative MAGNitude Phase Wrap PHASe Phase Unwrap UPHase Frequency Absolute FREQuency Frequency Relative FREQuency Real Imag UO RIMag Eye Diagram Real I IEYE Eye Diagram Imag Q QEYE Eye Diagram Frequency FEYE Constellation UO CONS Constellation UO Rotated RCON Vector UO COMP Constellation Frequency CONF Vector Frequency COVF Symbols Binary Octal Decimal Hexadecimal Error Vector EVM MAGNItude Real Imag l Q RIMag EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 19 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays mAL H PEgERRNK NENNT Result Types in VSA Evaluation Data Result Type SCPI Parameter Source Vector UO COMP Modulation Errors Magnitude Error MAGNItude Phase Error PHASe Frequency Error Absolute FREQuency Frequency Error Relative FREQuency Modulation Accuracy Bit Error Rate BERate Result Summary RSUM Equalizer Impulse Response Magnitude MAGNItude Impulse Response Phase UPHase Impulse Response Real Image RIMag Frequency Response Magnitude MAGNItude Frequency Response Phase UPHase Group Delay GDELay Channel Frquency Response Magni MAGNitude tude Channel Group Delay GDELay For details on selecting the data source and result types for evaluation see chapter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page
340. elcome to the Vector Signal Analysis Application Understanding the Display Information 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on measurement application 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode additional tabs and elements are available A colored back ground of the screen behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA operating mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Channel bar information In VSA application the R amp S FSW shows the following settings Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in VSA application Ref Level Reference level Freq Center frequency for the RF signal Mod Modulation type if no standard is active or default standard is changed Res Len Result Length SR Symbol Rate Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Offset Reference level offset Cap Len Capture Length instead of result length for capture buffer display see Capture Length Settings on page 172 Input Input type of the signal source see chapter 5 5 1 Input Settings on page 141 Burst Burst search active see Enabling Burst Searches on page 182 Pattern Pattern search a
341. elects user filter mode for the meas filter ENS DDEM MFIL USER D MyMeasFilter Selects the user defined meas filter Manual operation See Type on page 202 See Load User Filter on page 202 EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 367 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 5 10 Configuring VSA Defining the Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which range of the result is to be evaluated Manual configuration of the evaluation range is described in chapter 5 11 Evaluation Range Configuration on page 202 CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt STATe 2 cecceccccscuitanaceceeeveseseedeuete aiiai ide eae 368 CALOCulate n ELIN startstop VALue esessessseseenee eene aaa nnne 368 CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt STATe Auto This command restricts the evaluation range The evaluation range is considered for the following display types e eye diagrams e constellation diagrams e modulation accuracy e statistic displays e spectrum displays Suffix lt startstop gt 1 2 irrelevant Setting parameters Auto ON OFF 1 0 ON The evaluation range extends from the start value defined by CALC ELIN1 VAL to the stop value defined by CALC ELIN2 VAL see CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue on page 368 OFF The complete result area is evaluated RST OFF Manual operation See Evaluating the
342. ely Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band USB of the LO the test sweep trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band LSB i e the reference sweep Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that perform frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance Mathematical functions with traces and trace copy cannot be used with the Signal ID function Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 308 Auto ID Activates or deactivates automatic signal identification Auto ID basically functions like Signal ID However the test and reference sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak values of each sweep point The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if Signal ID is active at the same time If Signal ID is not active the result can be displayed in any of the traces 1 to 3 Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this calculated trace Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that perform frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 308 Auto ID Threshold Defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison Auto ID on page 148 function The input range is between 0 1 dB and 100 dB Values o
343. emodulation Filters nal processing unit of transmitter VSA Vector Signal Analysis Measurement at complex modula ted RF carriers A 2 Predefined Standards and Settings In the Digital Standards menu predefined basic settings for standards can be selected and user defined standards stored see chapter 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards on page 128 The most common measurements are predefined as standard settings for a large number of mobile radio networks The instrument comes prepared with the following settings for those standards e Capture length and result length e Signal description e Modulation e Transmit filter and measurement filter e Burst Pattern search configuration e Result range alignment e Evaluation range settings e Display configuration The standard settings are grouped in folders to facilitate selecting a standard REEL RU N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 449 Annex R amp S9FSW K70 Predefined Standards and Settings e qejieAe SI WO POUS e Jo euieu pJepuejs SU WO SIOJIP 11 eeuw pepi oud si spueuuuloo zowa 104 JejeureJed We SUL x 450 E 1 3903 Wvo9l 7 YSN 3903 49199 mei ASNO 3904 sw G rvL E o uaped Srl 3903 WVO9I pezueeur zHM e90 z INVO9L v LL 091 3903 sunqjew IoN 3903 481 3903 YSN 3903 aN 3933 Ja Uu99 8 9 YSWO 39q03 E N G rvL C Opujened Srl OOSL 3904 pezueeun zHW e90 z MSd8 8 LE Sag
344. emodulation in the analyzer where only information of the current symbol and none of neighbouring symbols is present symbol points These points are also called ISI free points ISI intersymbol interference If the transmitter does not provide an ISI free signal after the transmit filter TX filter this condition can be fulfilled by signal specific filtering of the analyzer input signal receive filter or Rx filter If an RRC root raised cosine filter is used in the transmitter an RRC filter is also required in the analyzer to obtain ISI free points In many PSK systems RRC filters are used as transmit ISI and measurement filters To determine the I Q modulation error the measurement signal must be compared with the corresponding ideal signal For this purpose a reference filter is required which is cal culated by the analyzer by convolving the coefficient of the transmit filter Tx filter and the meas filter see figure 4 2 If unfiltered signals have to be measured as well e g to determine nonlinear signal dis tortions no measurement filter is switched into the signal path and the reference filter is identical to the Transmit filter see figure 4 2 In the baseband block diagrams see figure 4 2 the system theoretical transmitter and analyzer filters are shown for PSK and QAM demodulation For the sake of clearness RF stages IF filters and the filter stages of the digital hardware section are not shown For a correct de
345. emote control is off this command has no immediate effect Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABSolute Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL Retrieving Results The following commands are required to retrieve the calculated VSA parameters E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 409 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Retrieving Results All results that are not based on the capture buffer data are calculated for a single result range only see chapter 4 6 1 Result Range on page 118 To retrieve the results for several result ranges use the SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURSt CALC on page 348 command to move from one result range to the next 11 9 1 e Retrieving Trace Data and Marker Values 2 seen recie 410 e Retrieving Parameter Values eene EERE 414 e Retrieving Limit Check Res lts ceca nnn d 425 Retrieving Trace Data and Marker Values In order to retrieve the trace and marker results in a remote environment use the following commands CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzXABGolute sese nnas 410 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz SREL ative enne nennen nnns 410 GALCGulatesmsMARKersWotY EE 410 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACects MI SCALelGTARt eene 411 FORMatDEXPort DSEPALalor tatiiie crate tee a iaa dd rumen e dde dena vega a qe cen uad 411 FORMSEDEXPoFEHBEADOt 2 2
346. ence level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See RF Attenuation on page 163 See Attenuation Mode Value on page 163 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly This function is not available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See RF Attenuation on page 163 See Attenuation Mode Value on page 163 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 334 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This command is only available with option R amp S FSW B25 It is not available if R amp S FSW B17 is active E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 333 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB M
347. ency are present as well as additive noise The measured signal model is expressed as MEAS Apysr t ef Porh y oh with n t is a disturbing additive noise process of unknown power Apisr t is the distorted magnitude model and gP ST is the distorted phase model The magnitude model is given by Apisr t Ke with K is a constant scaling factor which can be interpreted as the system gain and a is the amplitude droop in Nepers per second The phase model is given by ES User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 113 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Opisr B Pree t c Ct V5 D with B is a scaling factor which results in a reference deviation error C is a carrier frequency offset in radians per second D is a frequency drift in radians per second per second Tis a timing offset in seconds and is a phase offset in radians For the above phase model an equivalent frequency distortion model may be expressed as Sossr B fag et ch fo fat with B is the scaling factor which results in a reference deviation error fo C 2 77 is a carrier frequency offset in Hz f5 D 2 rr is a frequency drift in Hz per second and Tis the timing offset in seconds The measured signal model in terms of the instantaneous frequency and all distortion parameters is given by pon B Seer unt dur fot Vo fyt MEAS t K em el e bi n 4 5 2 2 Estimation
348. ent CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see table 11 1 EEUU RA m User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 288 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Activating Vector Signal Analysis Example INST CRE REPL Spectrum2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named Spectrum2 by a new measurement channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activated Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL Spectrum4 Deletes the spectrum channel with the name Spectrum4 INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement
349. entire or a spe cific part of the capture buffer without intervals C Mag CapBuf gun 211 Ln NI 40 dBm 60 dBm 80 dBm Fig 4 67 Result ranges for a continuous signal Result Range Length The result range length is defined by the number of symbols that are to be demodulated All traces over time are displayed over the result range For example if you have a burst User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 119 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics mLAMA i Measurement Ranges of 100 symbols and you define the result length as 200 symbols you can examine the burst ramps in detail by selecting the alignment Burst Center The maximum result length is 64 000 symbols for a sample rate of 4 or 256 000 samples Result Range Alignment By defining the number of the symbol which marks the beginning of the alignment refer ence source burst capture buffer or pattern you can define an offset of the x axis in addition to the one defined for the signal structure see Offset on page 140 For example if you align the result to the center of the pattern and set the Symbol Num ber at Pattern Start to 0 you can easily find the pattern start in the EVM measurement simply by moving a marker to the symbol number O When you define the Symbol Number at Reference Start remember to take the offset o defined for the signal structure into consideration see Off
350. eqAbs Meas amp Ref Stop 101 562 kHz J Start 101 562 kHz Std Res Len GSM NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz 9 1M 92M Stop 101 56 562 kHz 1M Clrw noe wh de he me h HOUTA poai IL M UD ee 1 T ol lite Start 0 sym Stop 148 sym Fig 6 1 Statistics measurement window C measured signal symbols highlighted window A sta tistics for all trace points window B statistics for symbol instants only Symbols only Statistics are calculated for symbol instants only See window B in figure 6 1 Infinite mediate times Statistics are calculated for all trace points symbol instants and inter See window A in figure 6 1 Auto Oversampling is automatically set to Symbols only Statistics are cal culated for symbol instants only Remote command CALCulate n STATistics MODI 6 6 Zoom Functions E on page 407 The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar R amp SS9FSW K70 Analysis mmm ss U t Zoom Functions wis MM CEDE 221 DNC Ee MEDIEN 221 Restore Onginal BILE 221 Deactivaung ZOOM Selection mode faded elle aed e Feast der Rada odas 221 Single Zoom ER A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STA
351. er specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Compar ison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the car file are not changed not compressed and thus it is possible to read the I Q data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first _L_L______ MN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 476 R amp S FSW K70 Annex UO Data File Format iq tar Sample iq tar files Some sample iq tar files are provided in the C R S Instr user vsa DemoSignals directory on the R amp S FSW Contained files An iq tar file must contain the following files e Q parameter XML file e g xyz xml Contains meta information about the I Q data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single UO parameter XML file inside an iq tar file e Q data binary file e g xyz complex float32 Contains the binary UO data of all channels There must be only one single UO data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file e Q preview XSLT file e g open IgTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the UO parameter XML file and a preview of the UO data in a web browser A sample style
352. er 8 User QAM Modulation type ssssesem 134 User sample rate Dr me M 62 66 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 504 R amp S FSW K70 Index V Vector frequency Result tyDe nier rrr rer rtr 51 Vector I Q Result TYPO 1 nter rrr enn tenere 51 Ww Window configuration Data SOUICE T 218 Remote 403 Result type 218 Result type transformation ssss 218 SOfIKGy 1er 217 218 Windows Adding remote TE 398 Closing remote eene 400 Configuring inerenti nene 132 Layout remote 400 Maximizing remote 397 Querying remote sese 399 Replacing remote rne 400 Splitting remote m Types remote ut irren tnn Window title bar information eseeeseeeess 14 X X axis EISE E 169 Range Reference position ccccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 169 240 Reference value eese 169 240 Scaling Scaling auto softkey sssss 168 205 Scaling auto all windows softkey 205 Scaling default Scaling automatically Sg Dc P X value Mucha TET 211 Y Y axis Mix max values sssssssss 168 RANGE aeiio 241 Range per division n 168 Refere
353. er 9 3 4 Evaluating the Rising and Falling Edges on page 258 2 Display the UO constellation diagram of the signal in window 1 Source Meas amp Ref Signal Result type Constellation I Q see chapter 9 2 3 Changing the Display Configuration on page 250 A clear 8PSK constellation is displayed C Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Cir D MagAbs Meas amp Ref Start 26 sym Stop 174 sym Fig 9 11 Evaluation lines properly adjusted EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 259 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals In order to understand the effect of an incorrectly set evaluation range change the evaluation range to include the entire result range a Inthe Overview select Evaluation Range b Enable the Entire Result Range option The displayed constellation diagram is no longer clear it contains additional points This is due to the fact that the constellation diagram now displays symbol instants that are beyond the burst C Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Cirw D MagAbs Meas amp Ref Stop 174 sym Fig 9 12 Evaluation lines not properly adjusted red lines in the title bar D All measurement windows that consider the evaluation range are marked with two small A Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 9 3 6 Comparing the Measurement Signal to the Reference Signal You have seen that it is possible to add different traces such as maximum hold or average to each windo
354. er Manual 1173 9292 02 07 173 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Signal Capture Capture Sol 7 27 Data Acquisition Trigger i Source Level Hysteresis Drop Out Time Slope Rising i Holdoff Time Preview Preview Mag CapBuf Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym The TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW can only be used for input in the VSA application for use as external triggers No configuration settings are available for trigger input For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the R amp S FSW User Manual D MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal Thus no trigger settings are available in the VSA application in MSRA operating mode However a capture offset can be defined with a similar effect as a trigger offset It defines an offset from the start of the captured data from the MSRA Master to the start of the application data for vector signal analysis See Capture Off set For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Miss 175 L Free 0o M 175 L External Trigger HE e teeth echte tta dx tei sa Les acp 175 E 2 MEME 176 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 174 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Signal Capture L Baseband PIE casas Sos geed ees ud te tidie 176 UE Pe eee ee 176 ee 176 BN ere E 177 Bids c 177 abl e
355. er Manual 1173 9292 02 07 301 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 5 1 2 Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt Name gt string Path and file name of the vam file Example SENS DDEM FORM UQAM Define the use of a user defined modulation SENS DDEM USER NAME D MyModulation vam Select the file name to be loaded Manual operation See Modulation Type on page 134 See Load User Modulation on page 135 Signal Structure The signal structure commands describe the expected input signal and determine which settings are available for configuration You can define a pattern to which the instrument can be synchronized thus adapting the result range IENSGeIDDE Mod GEARch BURGCLENGhMAvimum EE 302 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSEtLENGth MINimum esee 302 SENSe DDEMod SEARCI B URSESKIPOEALEEiBO ote n ri auae air dees 303 SENSe IDBEMod SEARGh BURSESKIP RISIng 1 niti aste eoe seeker dd 303 SENSe DBEMod SEARch SYNO CATalog 2 ee ce ieee trenta knee eee EEN AER 303 ISENS amp JDDEModg SI Na PA TTEN airain ai i aaa i a aA aA 304 SENSe DDEMod iSIGNal VALU 2 nee Eed anaidai ana andai aiiiar e nete rez 304 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet STAT cccceecceeeceeceeeeeeeesaaeeeaeeeaeseeeeaeeeas 304 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet VAL ue 304 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt LENGth MAXimum lt MaxLength gt This command
356. er is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate IMMediate on page 374 Continue Single Sweep After triggering repeats the number of evaluations set in Statistics Count without delet ing the trace of the last measurement While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate CONMeas on page 372 N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 179 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration EENEG Signal Capture Refresh non MSRA mode Repeats the evaluation of the data currently in the capture buffer without capturing new data This is useful after changing settings for example filters patterns or evaluation ranges Remote command INITiate REFMeas on page 374 Statistic Count Defines the number of measurements to be considered for statistical evaluations The behavior depends on the active sweep mode Activate Description to display a visualization of the behavior of the current settings Note If the Statistic Count is setto f trace averaging is not performed Max Hold and Min Hold however remain active unlike in the Spectrum application Auto In single sweep mode captures the UO data once and evaluates it In continuous sweep mode captures UO data continuously for each evaluation the a
357. er of returned values depends on the modulation scheme you have selected Eye diagram For eye diagrams the command returns one value for each sample The number of returned values is the product of evaluation range length and display points per sym bol Result Summary For the Result Summary the command returns all values listed in the result table from top to bottom i e lt EVM_RMS gt lt EVM_Peak gt lt MER_RMS gt lt MER_Peak gt lt Phase Error RMS gt lt Phase Error Peak MagError RMS gt lt MagError_Peak gt lt Carrier Fre quency Error Rho lI Q Offset gt lt I Q Imbalance gt lt Gain Imbalance gt lt Quadratue Error gt Amplitude Droop gt lt Power gt lt Symbol Rate Error gt Note that the Symbol Rate Error was appended at the end to provide compatibility to previous versions and instruments For each result type both the current and statistical values are provided The order of the results is as follows result1 current result1 mean lt result1_peak gt lt result1_stddev gt result1 959 ile result2 current result2 mean Empty cells in the table return nothing The number of returned values depends on the modulation scheme you have selected PSK MSK and QAM modulation returns 85 values FSK modulation returns 55 values The unit of each value depends on the particular result Equalizer I User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 413 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands f
358. erere a b RR edd 406 CAlCulate cnz GTATlstceMODtE ener enne tete tnnt renes e nns e ennt ennt serere e nain nnd 407 CALCUulate n S TATistics TT E 335 CAL CulatecnzGTATlsticeGCAleAltOoONCE nennen enn nenen sh nnns sn nnresn nenne nr nina 335 CAL CulatecnzGTATlsticeGCAlexvBCOunt en enenr eterne enhn nennen sen rnnn inn rnn nsn CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer CALCulate lt n gt STATisticS SCALE Y UNIT arnor a aea raaa E aR N EENE EEA EA EAA A eA AE EE EESIN CALCulatecnzGTATlsticeGCAlev Uber CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet nennen nnne nnne 356 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment DEF au 356 SSE e A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLUISSSMA User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 486 R amp S FSW K70 List of Remote Commands VSA CALCulate n TRACe t ADJust VALue ettet ttt ttt 356 GAUDGUlate sm RAC Ste TE 378 Elte ONE ARIS 337 CALtCulstecnsX UNTTTIME ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt 2d 337 DisSPiay LU osos eee eee M DUE LED P EE E D aed 397 DiSblautWINDowenshTTEMELINETEVALuel ttt 407 DiSblautWINDowenslPRATe AUTO 408 DISPlayWINDow n PRATe VALue ttt ttt 409 DISPlayL WINDows n S ZE aratri rite tbt rtt tatu dc db tct 397 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe SYMBol ttt ttt rot 409 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SPACing ettet ttt ot 339 DiSblautWiNDowensTRACextzcChLel ttt ttt 338 DISP
359. ers lt TransmitChannel gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 194 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERror lt RefDevComp gt This command defines whether the deviation error is compensated for when calculating the frequency error for FSK modulation Setting parameters lt RefDevComp gt ON OFF 1 0 ON Scales the reference signal to the actual deviation of the mea surement signal OFF Uses the entered nominal deviation for the reference signal RST 1 Manual operation See Compensate for FSK on page 195 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQIMbalance lt ComplQImbalance gt This command switches the compensation of the IQ imbalance on or off Setting parameters ComplQImbalance ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 194 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQOFfset ComplQOffset This command switches the compensation of the IQ offset on or off _L_L_________ MM User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 364 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt ComplQOffset gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 194 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize SRERror lt SymbolClockError gt This command switches the compensation for symbol rate error on or off Setting parameters lt SymbolClockError gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual
360. ersion loss on page 147 SENSe MIXer PORTSs lt PortType gt This command specifies whether the mixer is a 2 port or 3 port type Parameters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 146 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe lt State gt If enabled the band limits are extended beyond RF Start and RF Stop due to the capabilities of the used harmonics Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See RF Overrange on page 146 Conversion Loss Table Settings The following settings are required to configure and manage conversion loss tables ISENS amp CORR amp cClion CV BAND iiic iia iaceo e ete kde eade ce p ENEE 314 SENSeTCORRectom OO VIBIAS EE 315 SENSe CORRection CVL CATAlog cessssssesesesesesee eren nennen nnns tnt nr reri r tenens 315 SENSe IC ORRECION e EE 316 SENSe CORRection CVILCOMMBBnt cient dai ee adi need Fen uve e E FER Ra Pen eR EEN AER 316 SENSEJCORRecton C VDDDATR iacu preti ato nt E aee tau exe oe Rea akute RE eqq nen 316 SENSeJCORReclohn e E 317 SENS amp JCORR ction CVIMIXGBI uso ceu te t incen Ye rk haere ect ED eoe de ee etd dilate 317 ISENSeJCORReclo De Ee EE 317 E eet 318 EE E Ke E EE 318 SENSe CORRection CVL BAND Type This command defines the waveguide band for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the
361. es that the R amp S FSW has already been set up for remote operation in a network as described in the base unit manual e Note that basic tasks that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described here For a description of such tasks see the R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this includes e Managing Settings and Results i e storing and loading settings and result data e Basic instrument configuration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation e Using the common status registers The following tasks specific to VSA are described here EM rues cj DES 282 Common QUIMXOS NEED T IU ST 287 Activating Vector Signal ADslysig neon Eugene 287 Digital Standardsed aia Cete nr t usen ti rte en ee RE ehe ERREUR EH ERR A LR ees 291 Coniguing VSA T 293 e Performing a Measutemoell diei tioor erae SSES EEN 371 QE cL mE 377 e Configuring the Result Display 28202 396 e PeeviHo ROS uote Egide eg 409 e Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results 426 e Status Reporting Gvstem nennen ementi 428 e Commands for Compstbiliby 1 raodo neat ee nanc tre n Pcr nnde cd 439 Programming EXSmplges meti Fee teo diee et o Fede or aee etd 440 11 1 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instrument or software They operate its functions setting Commande or events
362. esind 3904 ucH s g Zi v o wened 24 ven 3903 epw3od3 HMSZE DSdO v ic do 3903 esind L LOSL Sd MOLEN O YSH 39d3 Eod C edeus esingwoue Lauer 0081 Sd asind wi 3903 NusH is SLZLL EI o wened 1L 0 NSH 3904 ueN3OGd3 ZHMSZE DSdO v dO 200 4281 3ed3 Wvoze de YSN 3903 Jaju29 mei ASNO 3904 sow SUE o wened evi 3003 wvoze pezueeur ze cce 0 z WvOzE v u per 39d3 Ae spe abuey Buet waned sung PEIE Budden x Id9S uonenje 3 3ueuuBi v ynsey uloged Jojuojeeg Jojuojeeg jg eudiv puisueJl aye1joquiAs uonejnpoy pjepuejs JopJoJ User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 Annex R amp S9FSW K70 Predefined Standards and Settings e qe ieAe SI WO UOous e Jo eujeu pJepuejs OU WO Sall 11 eeuw pepi oud si spueuuuloo zowa 104 JejeuleJed ke SUL x 38 V INQOM 9 amd YN dom 9 W097 OM YNOM v emdeo 008 ZZO OHH ZHWr8 ASdO NACOM 9 ddd NMOGO N V131 yuljumoq 1902 S VHl3l OM VELSL snonugu vvz 0 onising EE d vulal SE Oud ZH 8L ASdOQ p 4 0D vara INAOOO z N v11 CS VHl3L p yuuwoq J9 USD odd Vulal snonumnuoo Geh onising 9vz IS Veal d S 0 OM ZH 8L MSdOQF v Ai sid verat IER PE LOSL Wvoz YSH 3903 esind epi C MSH 3903 esindepiM auer 00S1 Weg adeys esind 3904 usu wy GLZLL y op weHed LL eu 3903 e pm 3903 zu SZE WWOZE P U OZ
363. esult type for the window based on the data source selected in the Display Configuration 6 5 1 Window Configuration For each window you can select a different evaluation method result type based on the data source selected in the Display Configuration Further window settings are available for some result types The Window Configuration is displayed when you select the Window Config softkey from the main VSA menu Some settings are only displayed after you select the More button in the dialog box To hide these settings select the Less button Signal SOURCE EE 218 Result KT 218 Result Type Tiaksformatioh uch eee cess ctenee aces ERR cenaeecbaeeeesaneebaeeeensecenneseeesess 218 alle Ill gas doo EE 219 Bisplay POMMSIS DEET 219 jer c nR 220 Signal Source Data source as selected in the Display Configuration see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 15 If you change the signal source setting here the default result type for the new data source is activated for the current window Remote command LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 Result Type The result type defines the evaluation method used in the current window The available result types in VSA are described in chapter 3 2 Result Types in VSA on page 19 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 Result Type Transformation For certain result types it is not only possible to see the common over ti
364. et MEAN STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAK STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt STATe lt LimitState gt This command switches the limit check for the selected result type and limit type on or off Suffix lt ResultType gt CFERror Carrier Frequency Error EVM Error Vector Magnitude FERRor Frequency error FSK only FDERror Frequency deviation error FSK only MERRor Magnitude Error OOFFset UO Offset PERRor Phase Error RHO Rho SSS MN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 389 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA C COM A H en Q Analysis lt LimitType
365. etails on the individual parameters see chapter 3 3 Common Parameters in VSA on page 52 and chapter A 6 Formulae on page 462 CALCU sA TEE 415 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ADROOp eese 415 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzFUNGCHonDDEMod STATiepc ALL 416 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic CFEbror 416 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonDDEMod STATlepe EVM 416 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonDDEMod STATiepcF DEbror 417 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK CFDRift cccceceeeee 417 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic cFSK DERROr 418 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK MDEViation 419 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK RDEViation 419 e S User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 414 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA pc c M S H LLLLILIIIIIIIILIIILIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIICIIIIIIIIDLICLGILLLIZZZZZIILIZECEILUELZUZLZLUELILU ZZIZNLGIIZLIEXZZXLUEZEuuu S Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic GIMBalance 419 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic IQIMbalance 420
366. eter Frequency Error RMS The average RMS and peak frequency error in The fre FSK DERRor Peak quency error is thedifference of the measured frequency and the reference frequency The frequency error is normal ized to the estimated FSK deviation FSK Deviation Error The deviation error of FSK modulated signals in Hz The FDERror FSK deviation erroris the difference of the FSK deviation of the measured signal and the FSK referencedeviation you have set FSK Meas Deviation The estimated deviation of FSK modulated signals in Hz FSK MDEViation FSK Ref Deviation The reference deviation you have set in Hz FSK RDEViation Carrier Frequency Drift The mean carrier frequency drift in Hz per symbol FSK CFDRift Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic lt Parameter gt EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 53 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing 4 Measurement Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in VSA is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings For information on the basic processing of I Q data in the R amp S FSW see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual e Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Drocessinmg A 54 e Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Banchwidt 61 e Symbol Mapping DEET 68 e Overview of the Demodulation Process
367. f about 10 dB i e default setting generally yield satisfactory results Remote command SENSe MIXer THReshold on page 309 Bias Settings Define the bias current for each range which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s T User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 148 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration m GG O H UM H EM M Neqsart Input and Frontend Settings The trace is adapted to the settings immediately so you can check the results To store the bias setting in the currently selected conversion loss table select the Write to lt CVL table name gt button Remote command SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW on page 308 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH on page 308 Write to CVL table name gt Bias Settings Stores the bias setting in the currently selected Conversion loss table for the range see Managing Conversion Loss Tables on page 149 If no conversion loss table is selected yet this function is not available CVL Table not selected Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 315 Managing Conversion Loss Tables In this tab you configure and manage conversion loss tables Conversion loss tables cons
368. f the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 214 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer SEARch lt MarkReallmag gt This command specifies whether the marker search works on the real or the imag trace for all markers Setting parameters lt MarkReallmag gt REAL IMAG RST REAL Manual operation See Real Imag Plot on page 213 _L_________ N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 386 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA mA C CHU P HE al Analysis CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits LEFT lt SearchLimit gt This command defines the left limit of the marker search range If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Parameters lt SearchLimit gt The value range depends on the span or sweep time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements RST left diagram border lt Limit gt Range 1e9 to 1e9 RST 0 0 Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 10MHz Sets the left limit of the search range to 10 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 214 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits RIGHT lt SearchLimit gt This command defines the right limit of the marker search range If you perform a measurement in the ti
369. ference level offset e attenuation e Signal source and digital UO input settings e input coupling e YIG filter state After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily Apart from these settings the following default settings are activated directly after a measurement channel has been set to VSA or after a Preset Channel Table 5 1 Default settings for VSA channels Parameter Value Digital standard 3G_WCDMA Sweep mode CONTINUOUS Trigger settings FREE RUN Trigger offset 0 Modulation QPSK WCDMA mapping Transmit filter RRC a 0 22 Measurement filter Transmit filter Signal type Continuous no pattern Symbol rate 3 84 MHz Sample rate 4 Symbol rate 15 36 MHz Capture length 8000 symbols Usable UO Bandwidth 12 228 MHz Result length 800 symbols User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 127 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration mA Sn SS Se S R Configuration According to Digital Standards Parameter Value Result Range alignment Left at capture buffer start Evaluation range Entire result range Demodulation Compensation for UO offset and amplitude droop Estimation points per symbol auto 1 Evaluations Window 1 Constellation UO Meas amp Ref Window 2 Result Summary Window 3 Magnitude abs
370. figuration block in the Overview only if Specifics for option is disabled E Select the SmartGrid icon from the toolbar 2 Replace window 1 by an eye diagram of the inphase component of the measurement signal a Select the Meas amp Ref data source from the SmartGrid selection bar and drag it over window 1 ES Close the SmartGrid mode by tapping the Close icon at the top right corner of the toolbar c Select the Window Config softkey d Select the result type Eye Diagram Real I 3 Close the dialog to take a look at your new display configuration EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 250 Measurement Examples R amp S FSW K70 DEE Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal 9 2 4 Navigating Through the Capture Buffer Using the R amp S FSW VSA application you can navigate through the capture buffer i e control which part of the capture buffer is currently analyzed Note In the Spectrum application this functionality is referred to as gating 1 Inthe measurement display take a closer look at window 3 magnitude of the capture buffer The green bar shows how far the current measurement has already procee ded i e how much of the signal has been evaluated C Mag CapBuf Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym j 2 Press the RUN SINGLE key Since the signal you are currently analyzing is continuous as opposed to containing bursts the entire capture buffer is analyzed and hence will be mar
371. figuring the measurement settings and if necessary storing the settings in a file VSA application VSA measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW which you activate using the MODE key on the front panel When you switch the application of a measurement channel to VSA the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application see chapter 5 1 Default Settings for Vector Signal Analysis on page 127 After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate a measurement channel for the VSA application a VSA measurement for the input signal is started automatically with the default configuration The VSA menu is displayed and provides access to the most important configuration functions Automatic refresh of preview and visualization in dialog boxes after configuration changes The R amp S FSW supports you in finding the correct measurement settings quickly and easily after each change in settings in dialog boxes the preview and visualization areas are updated immediately and automatically to reflect the changes Thus you can see if the setting is appropriate or not before accepting the changes Importing and Exporting UO Data The I Q data to be evaluated in VSA can not only be measured by the VSA application itself it can also
372. fined equalizers Instead of tracking equalizer values repeatedly for different input signals you can store existing values to a file and load them again later This is useful if signals from the same input source are measured frequently In this case you only have to perform a calculation once and can use the same equalizer filter again and again Filter length The length of the equalizer can be defined in symbols The longer the equalizer the higher the resolution in the frequency domain is and the more distortion can be compensated The shorter the filter length the less calculation time is required during the equalizer s tracking or averaging phase Estimation points per symbol You can define how many sample points are used for the equalizer calculation at each symbol Estimation points per symbol see chapter 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol on page 121 Typically this is one point per symbol symbol rate or a factor of 2 Channel EVM The equalizer not only compensates for distortions in the measurement signal but also improves the accuracy of the estimated ideal reference signal Thus it is usually recom mendable to enable the equalizer once you have analyzed the original input signal on the R amp S FSW By default the error results are calculated using the compensated values if the equalizer is enabled However you can disable the compensation for channel results in order to analyze the actual error
373. formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SSE SSS z User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 376 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Analysis SYSTem SEQuencer State This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYS
374. g Fig 4 30 MSK for GSM and NATURAL and DMSK Constellation Diagram including the symbol map ping Similar to PSK differential coding can also be used with MSK In this case too the information is represented by the transition of two consecutive symbols The block dia gram of the coder is shown below Fig 4 31 DMSK differential encoder in the transmitter d input symbol 0 1 of differential encoder d 4 input symbol delayed by the symbol period Ts d output symbol 0 1 of differential encoder The logical symbol mapping is then performed on the XOR coded bitstream d 4 3 8 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation QAM In the case of QAM the information is represented by the signal amplitude and phase The symbols are arranged in a square constellation in the UO plane To ensure reliable demodulation symbol numbers should be distributed evenly with respect to the symbol alphabet As arule of thumb the result length should correspond to at least 8 times the modulation order For example with 64 QAM a result length of at least 8 64 512 symbols should be used User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 81 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Symbol Mapping QAM Mappings The following QAM mappings are obtained from the mapping of the 1st quadrant which is always rotated by 11 2 for the subsequent quadrants and supplemented by a GRAY coded prefix for each quadrant Table 4 14 Derivation of QAM mappings n2 Le
375. g boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes Enable the Specifics for option The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window The indicated data flow is updated for the selected data source If the Specifics for option is not enabled the overview displays the default data flow and the general settings independantly of the selected window Note The Display Config button is only available in the general overview not in the window specific overview Digital Standards Opens a file selection dialog to manage predefined measurement settings for conven tional mobile radio standards See chapter 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Stand ards on page 128 e M Q p User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 132 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Signal Description 5 4 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optimizes burst and pattern detection and allows for the application to calculate an ideal reference signal The signal description consists of information on the used modulation and on the signal s structure Jiegdulateg ee aa
376. ge Query only Manual operation See Modulation Mapping on page 136 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue Mapping To obtain a list of available symbol mappings for the current modulation type use the SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog query Setting parameters Mapping string Example SENS DDEM MAPP GSM Sets mapping to GSM Manual operation See Modulation Mapping on page 136 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 297 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod MSK FORMat lt MSKformat gt This command defines the specific demodulation order for MSK Setting parameters MSKformat TYPE1 TYPE2 NORMal DIFFerential TYPE1 NORMal Demodulation order MSK is used TYPE2 DIFFerential Demodulation order DMSK is used RST TYPE1 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 135 SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat lt PSKformat gt Together with DDEMod PSK NST this command defines the demodulation order for PSK see also SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate on page 298 Depending on the demodu lation format and state the following orders are available NSTATe Name Order 2 any BPSK 8 NORMal 8PSK 8 DIFFerential D8PSK 8 N3Pi8 3pi 8 8PSK EDGE 8 PI8D8PSK Pi 8 D8PSK Setting parameters lt PSKformat gt NORMal DIFFerential N3Pi8 PIED8PSK RST NORMal Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 135 SENSe
377. gger Mode Signal Type A Trigger Offset bg Signal Description Input Frontend Signal Capture Estimation RPS Result Length Align Pattern liqnment EJ Demodulation Cut Result Ranges Burst Pattern Meas Filter Start Stop eg Meas Filter Evaluation Range Display Config La Specific Settings for In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The individual configuration steps are displayed in the order of the data flow Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview In particular the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Signal Description See chapter 5 4 Signal Description on page 133 Input and Frontend Settings See chapter 5 5 Input and Frontend Settings on page 141 Signal Capture including Triggering See chapter 5 6 Signal Capture on page 171 Burst Pattern Configuration See chapter 5 7 Burst and Pattern Configuration on page 181 Result Range Definition See chapter 5 8 Result Range Configuration on page 190 Demodulation Settings See chapter 5 9 Demodulation Settings on page 192 Measurement Filter Settings See chapter 5 10 Measurement Filter Settings on page 200 Evaluation Range Definition Se
378. guring VSA E ES Presets the selected waveguide band Event See Preset Band on page 146 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue Band This command selects the external mixer band The query returns the currently selected band This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 307 Parameters Band Manual operation KA Q U V E W F D G Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band See Band on page 1 45 Table 11 2 Frequency ranges for pre defined bands Band Frequency start GHz Frequency stop GHz KA A 26 5 40 0 Q 33 0 50 0 U 40 0 60 0 V 50 0 75 0 E 60 0 90 0 Ww 75 0 110 0 F 90 0 140 0 D 110 0 170 0 G 140 0 220 0 J 220 0 325 0 Y 325 0 500 0 USER 32 18 68 22 default default The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe State This command specifies whether a second high harmonic is to be used to cover the band s frequency range SSS M User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 311 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 146 See Range 1 2 on page 146 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue lt HarmOrder gt This command specif
379. h BURSt MODE lt MeasOnlyOnBurst gt This command sets the vector analyzer so that a measurement is performed only if a burst is found The command is available only if the burst search is activated see SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt STATe on page 350 Setting parameters lt MeasOnlyOnBurst gt MEAS BURS MEAS Measurement is always performed BURS Measurement is performed only if a burst is found RST MEAS Manual operation See Measuring only if burst was found on page 182 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt STATe lt SearchState gt This command switches the search for a signal burst on or off Setting parameters lt SearchState gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 350 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt TOLerance lt SearchTolerance gt This command controls burst search tolerance Setting parameters SearchTolerance numeric value Range 0 to 100000 RST 4 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Burst Configuration on page 183 See Search Tolerance on page 183 11 5 6 2 Pattern Searches The pattern search commands define when a pattern is detected in the analyzed signal IGENGe JDDEMod SEARch PDATTem CONPioure AUTO 351 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh SYNC AUTO 0 cecccece cece eee cee eaa neces cae aeae sega sea eesaaesaeesaeesaeeeas 351 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC IOCThreshold 22 ecsecceeeceece
380. he application data of the VSA application in MSRA mode Data coverage for each active application Generally if a signal contains multiple data channels for multiple standards separate applications are used to analyze each data channel Thus it is of interest to know which application is analyzing which data channel The MSRA Master display indicates the data covered by each application restricted to the channel bandwidth used by the corre sponding standard by vertical blue lines labeled with the application name Since the VSA application supports several standards and the standard used by the currently ana lyzed data is not known the Symbol Rate defined in the Signal Description settings is used to approximate the channel bandwidth Analysis interval However the individual result displays of the application need not analyze the complete data range The data range that is actually analyzed by the individual result display is referred to as the analysis interval In the R amp S FSW VSA application the analysis interval is automatically determined according to the evaluation range or result range settings as in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode The currently used analysis interval in seconds related to capture buffer start is indicated in the window header for each result display Exception Equalizer In the Equalizer displays do not indicate the analysis interval in MSRA mode SS
381. he equalizer used to compensate for channel distortion and parameters of the distortion itself The default result type is Frequency Response Magnitude The following result types are available chapter 3 2 18 Impulse Response Magnitude on page 37 chapter 3 2 19 Impulse Response Phase on page 37 chapter 3 2 20 Impulse Response Real Imag on page 38 chapter 3 2 15 Frequency Response Magnitude on page 35 chapter 3 2 16 Frequency Response Phase on page 36 chapter 3 2 17 Group Delay on page 36 chapter 3 2 2 Channel Frequency Response Magnitude on page 23 chapter 3 2 3 Channel Group Delay on page 23 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 _L____S_ Se SSS Sq User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 18 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Result Types in VSA 3 2 Result Types in VSA The available result types for a window depend on the selected evaluation data source The SCPI parameters in the following table refer to the CALC FORM command see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 Table 3 1 Available result types depending on data source Evaluation Data Result Type SCPI Parameter Source Capture Buffer Magnitude Absolute MAGNitude Real Imag I Q RIMag Frequency Absolute FREQuency Vector UO COMP Magnitude Overview Absolute MOVerview Meas amp R
382. he ideal reference signal Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 2 MagRel Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 14 Result display Magnitude Relative Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 DISP TRAC Y MODE REL to define relative values see DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe MODE on page 409 ES User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 41 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Result Types in VSA TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 3 2 24 Magnitude Error Displays the magnitude error of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time MAG _ ERR t MAG uas MAG ger t with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 219 1 Mag Error 49 sym Fig 3 15 Result display Magnitude Error Available for source types e Modulation Errors Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to
383. he measurement signal can be chosen to be dB What level is this relative od 279 Question How can get the demodulated symbols of all my GSM bursts in the capture butter IM remote Control n reias aia a a a EE EE 279 Question Why do the EVM results for my FSK modulated signal look wrong 280 Problem The trace is not entirely visible within the measurement window Solution e 1 Select the measurement window e 2 Press the AUTO key e 3 Press the Y Axis Auto Scale softkey Problem The trace of the measurement signal is visible in the measurement win dow the trace of the reference signal is not Solution e 1 Select the measurement window e 2 Press the TRACE key User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 273 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement REESEN Frequently Asked Questions e 3 Press the Trace Config softkey e 4 Select a second trace choose Clear Write as Trace Mode and toggle to Ref in the Evaluation column iTrace Wizard Screen Trace Trace Mode Evaluation Trace 1 Clear Write Trace 2 Clear Write H Trace 3 Blank Ref M L S S J e Trace 4 Blank L Trace 5 Blank Ref ce _ amac Trace 6 Blank Ref L _ 4 Preset Select Select All Traces Max Avg Min Max ClrWrite Min Problem The measurement window does not show average results Solution emm Il emm f
384. he size of the divisions Y Axis Reference Value Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions Defines a reference value on the y axis in the current unit The y axis is adapted so that the reference value is displayed at the Y Axis Reference Position on page 168 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RVALue on page 338 Y Axis Reference Position Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions Defines the position of the Y Axis Reference Value on the y axis The position is defined as a percentage value where 0 refers to the bottom edge 100 refers to the top edge of the screen The y axis is adapted so that the reference value is displayed at the ref erence position Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition on page 338 Range per Division Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions Defines the value range to be displayed per division Since the display consists of 10 divisions by default the displayed range is Range 10 lt Range per Division gt Note If fewer divisions are displayed e g because the window is reduced in height the range per division is increased in order to display the same result range in the smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond to the actual display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision on page 338 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 168 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration mA
385. her the pattern is part of the signal but also to use the pattern for synchronization in order to obtain the correct reference signal For details on synchronization see chapter 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Proc ess on page 89 If Auto mode is selected the detected data is used In manual mode you can select one of the following settings Data Default the detected data is used for synchronization i e unknown symbols Use this setting if no pattern is available or if the pattern is short or does not have suitable synchronization properties e g a pattern that consists of only one repeated symbol Pattern Known symbols from a defined pattern are used for synchronization Depending on the signal using the pattern can speed up your mea surement considerably and make it more robust against high carrier frequency offsets Make sure that the pattern is suitable for synchronization e g a GSM pattern Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC AUTO on page 365 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh PATTern SYNC STATe on page 365 Fine Synchronization In addition to the coarse synchronization used for symbol decisions a fine synchroniza tion is available to calculate various results from the reference signal e g the EVM However when the signal is known to have a poor transmission quality or has a high noise level false symbol decisions are more frequent which may cause spikes in the EVM resul
386. hianat aiani aiaei a Eae E Ra Eras eaa a aenea Ee dO Rae Egan IEN Ge Mixer HAbMontdL OW Eja EIADNCHDAO LT M SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH orn trente ha trono rene aee EEE ae been degno inan SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe lOW 5 enitn tnnt ontario tnn noni rando ISENSe JMiXer LOSSFEOW PEE SENS MIXet e EE SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe sese nne rnrrtt rsen rene sene tns en neis SENSe MIXer SIGNal Aude toc irte rte te ata ree eT dp Ep REESEN Eja EIC ele E Eja IB ULCUS iaaa SENSe MSRA CAP Ture OFFSet 5 eene treten tnn taret E Fe ERR Fe PER snd Nidri Eya inida Vaatii SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID PARTnumber SENSe PROBe p ID SRNumber cernere nro te enira kb etii insana iad CER udo den ege ke do 327 SENSe PROBe p SETUup MOBDPBE eerte rri rn Penh b o RE EYE AERE pane pER SEENEN 327 SENSe PROB sp SETup NAME Y etn trt etre eer tree tarn Era ia aai deas arisia 327 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETUpP STATC ccccsescsssieesscsssesonscnstensnsenssecsnecasatensesecsesasseesssdestensasesensdsssedsetensetacsnens 328 SENSe PROBe p SETUup TYBE enn tir rr terr pao ER RE ipa e ERE ER ER MER dear eae nean 328 SENSE SWAP Mem 341 SENSe SWEep COUNtCURRE NL i cc cccecsscestsreesscssscassecersencesssensnessccessvacusccsestcetetdsstesadbeesutenseenesansaasenseoen
387. ies the harmonic order to be used for the high second range Parameters lt HarmOrder numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band def inition Example MIX HARM HIGH 2 Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 146 See Harmonic Order on page 146 SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE lt OddEven gt This command specifies whether the harmonic order to be used should be odd even or both Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Parameters lt OddEven gt ODD EVEN EODD RST EVEN Example MIX HARM TYPE ODD Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 146 See Harmonic Type on page 146 SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the low first range Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band def inition RST 2 for band F Example MIX HARM 3 Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 146 See Harmonic Order on page 146 RETREAT RA N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 312 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA b J OOwE c e m Configuring VSA SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire high sec ond rang
388. if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 307 Parameters lt BiasSetting gt RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 148 SENSe MIXer LOPower Level This command specifies the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Parameters Level numeric value Range 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm Increment 0 1 dB RST 15 5 dBm Example MIX LOP 16 0dBm Manual operation See LO Level on page 148 SENSe MIXer SIGNal State This command specifies whether automatic signal detection is active or not EEUU RA I SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 308 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA DESEN Configuring VSA Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that perform frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance Parameters State OFF ON AUTO ALL OFF No automatic signal detection is active ON Automatic signal detection Signal ID is active AUTO Automatic signal detection Auto ID is active ALL Both automatic signal detection functions Signal ID Auto ID are active RST OFF Manual operation See Signal ID on page 148 See Auto ID on page 148 SENSe MIXer THReshold Value This command defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison see SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 308
389. in VSA Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM RIM to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 Magnitude Absolute In the Magnitude Absolute result display the actual signal amplitude is displayed Mag yas IMEAS with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 219 Available for source types e Capture Buffer e Meas amp Ref Signal Displays the actual signal amplitude for the selected evaluation range 3 Mag CaptureBuffer 8000 sym Fig 3 12 Result display Magnitude Absolute for capture buffer data Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL CBUF to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA _L_________ SSSR User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 39 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 22 Result Types in VSA to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 Magnitude Overview Absolute Magnitude of the source signal in the entire capture buffer the actual signal amplitude is displayed Mag vas
390. in the Known Data file e result range alignment leads to a mismatch of the input data with the defined sequen ces A BER value of 0 5 means that for at least one measurement no matching sequence was found See also chapter 4 4 3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions on page 94 2 Bit Error Rate Current Bit Error Rate 0 499 021 530 Total of Errors 510 Total of Bits 1022 The following information is provided in the BER result display e Bit Error Rate error bits number of analyzed bits e Total of Errors number of detected bit errors known data compared to symbol decisions e Total of Bits number of analyzed bits For each of these results the following values are provided BER Result Description Current Value for current result range Minimum Minimum Current value during the current measurement Maximum Maximum Current value during the current measurement Accumulative Total value over several measurements for BER Total of Errors Total of Bits similar to average function Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MACC to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM BER to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 CALC BER to query the results see CALCulate lt n gt BERate on page 415 E PP P PVVV
391. including the logical symbol mapping for DVB C hexadec imal and binary the binary form shows the upper right section of the diagram only D D D D 0011010 0011011 0001011 0001010 H H H H 0011000 0011001 0001001 0001000 D D H D D H 0010000 0010001 0010101 0010100 0011100 0011101 D D D D D D 0010010 0010011 0010111 0010110 0011110 0011111 H D H H D H 0000010 0000011 0000111 0000110 0001110 0001111 D D D D D D 0000000 0000001 0000101 0000100 0001100 0001101 Fig 4 37 Constellation diagram for 128QAM including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal and binary the figure shows the upper right sections of the diagram only Fig 4 38 Constellation diagram for 256QAM including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal the figure shows the upper right section of the diagram only User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 84 Symbol Mapping Measurement Basics R amp S FSW K70 Ze Ze ge Ze Ze Be Se Zo Se Se Ze Jo Ze Se Jo Se Ze Be Se ge Se Se Ze Ze Ze Se de Ze Se Se Ge Ze Zo Se Ze Be He be Ze De De te Ze je Yo Se Ze Be De 5e Se Ge Ze Se Ze Ge Ze Ze Ze Ge je je Ee Ce Ze Ze Be Be Se Be Be Be Ze Be Se Se Ze Re Ee Ee Ee Ee Se Se Se So Ge Ge He De Ge Ge Ve de Ee Le Ee Eo Ze Se He Se Ze De He be Ze de Ue be Ge Co Ee Ee Be ge Ze Ze Ze Se Ze Ze Se Ge Ze De De Ge Ge Ge Ge Be fe Be Be Be fe Be P D Be Ge Be Be Be Be Ue Ue Be De Be Le Be Be De De Qe De De Be De De de He He Ee Ze Be He te Se Do be be Ze De Ee be de ge de Ze Be Be de De De U
392. information on the R amp S9RTO probes see the device manuals Microbutton ACION sessin a a E A A ERE 158 Microbutton Action Active R amp S probes except for RT ZS10E have a configurable microbutton on the probe head By pressing this button you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe Select the action that you want to start from the probe Run single Starts one data acquisition No action Prevents unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the microbut ton Remote command SENSe PROBe p SETup MODE on page 327 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 158 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration SS Input and Frontend Settings 5 5 2 Frequency Settings Frequency settings for the input signal can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Select the FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey e Select the Frequency tab in the Input Settings dialog box Frequency Center 13 25 GHz Center Frequenc Stepsize VIER 1 0 MHz Frequency Offset KEE MEN MN E D MEL 159 Center ies RT 159 Frequency OffS Gb eee iat tee denied de nea Abele dees 160 Center Defines the normal center frequency of the signal The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 Spanmin 2 S fcenter E fmax a Spanmin 2 fmax and
393. ing parameters Reference TRIGger BURSt PATTern TRIGger The reference point is defined by the start of the capture buffer BURSt The reference point is defined by the start center end of the burst PATTern The instrument selects the reference point and the alignment RST TRIGger Manual operation See Reference on page 191 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe VOFFset lt VOffset gt This command defines an offset to numbering of the symbols Except capture buffer Setting parameters lt VOffset gt numeric value Range 100000 to 100000 RST 0 Default unit NONE Manual operation See Symbol Number at Reference Start on page 192 SENSe DDEMod TIME lt ResultLength gt The command determines the number of displayed symbols result length Setting parameters lt ResultLength gt numeric value Range 10 to 64000 RST 800 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Result Length on page 191 Demodulation Settings During demodulation of the vector signal some undesired effects that may occur during transmission can be compensated for Furthermore you can influence the synchroniza tion process Manual configuration of the demodulation process is described in chapter 5 9 Demod ulation Settings on page 192 E el EN Ee dE 358 SENSe DEBEMOoUgEDALSOFEPSBL eroe peece eee eere ense eee tren rne cto EEN 358 ISENSeIDDEMOod EPIRSlQA UI e EE 359 ISENGe JDDEMod EPhRateVAl ue 3
394. ing start frequency sweep time detector etc is created or not A small header with the instrument model the version and the date is always transferred Setting parameters Header ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Header on page 210 FORMat DEXPort MODE lt Mode gt This command defines which data are transferred raw Q data or trace data Setting parameters Mode RAW TRACe RST TRACe Manual operation See Data Export Mode on page 209 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe Trace lt FileName gt This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file Parameters lt Trace gt Number of the trace to be stored lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 3 TEST ASC Stores trace 3 from window 1 in the file TEST ASC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Trace ASCII Export on page 210 See Export on page 223 See Export Trace to ASCII File on page 223 TRACe lt n gt DATA Trace This command queries the trace data Which data is returned depends on the result display in the window specified by the suffix n e Capture Buffer For the Capture Buffer result display the command returns the y axis values of the data that is stored in the capture buffer The number of returned values depends on the size of the capture buffer and the sample rate For example a capture buffer size of 500 symbols in co
395. ing to Transmit Filter Type RRC e Alpha BT 0 22 M Preview Preview Constellation I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 2 794 Stop 2 794 L Load User EE 202 23 5 EE n r a aa iaa 202 Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto If the Auto option is enabled the measurement filter is defined automatically depending on the transmit filter specified in the Modulation settings see Transmit Filter Type on page 137 Note If a user defined transmit filter is selected and the measurement filter is defined automatically a Low ISI measurement filter according to the selected user filter is cal culated and used Remote command SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO on page 366 E H PV O o User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 201 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration REESEN Evaluation Range Configuration Type Defines the measurement filter type if the Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto setting is not enabled Predefined An overview of available measurement filters is provided in chapter A Filter gt 3 2 Measurement Filters on page 456 User User defined filter Define the filter using the Load User Filter function or the SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER command For more information on user defined filters see chapter 4 1 5 Cus tomized Filters on page
396. ion nz EVM CONDiton ener 436 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM ENABle STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz EVMNTbRansiton enne 438 STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz EVMP Ransttion eee 438 STATusOUEG onable MODulation nz EVMIEVEN eene ennt 436 STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz FG CONDton nennen 436 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n FSK ENABle sse esee eene nnne nnne nena STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK NTRansition STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz FGkP Ransitton eene STATusOUEG onable MODulation nz FSKI EVEN 436 STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz IObRHoCONDtion nennen 436 STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz IObRHotENAble enne STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz IObRtoNTbRansitton nnne STATus QUEStionable MODulation n IQRHo PTRansition STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO EVEN nennen 436 STATusOUEG onable MODulation nz MAGhNtude CONDiton eee ee cet eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaeeeeaeees 436 STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz M AchNtude ENAble nennen 437 STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz M AcGhNtudehN Tanson 438 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n MAGNIitude PTRansition sese 438 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude EVENt 436 STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nzNTbRansiton eene enne nnne nnne nnne 438 STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz PHAGeCONDitton ne 436 SGTATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz PHAGeENAbie eene nnne 437 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n PHASe NTRansiti
397. ired effects that may occur during transmission can be compensated for Furthermore you can influence the synchroniza tion process e Democulation Compensatii siti tic cso edite ru tx eta Rare eh Fa Len RR edd IRR RR DER RuR E 193 e Advanced Demodulation Synchronization 196 E P e User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 192 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Demodulation Settings 5 9 1 Demodulation Compensation o Note that compensation for all the listed distortions can result in lower EVM values Demodulation settings are displayed when you select the Demodulation button in the Overview or the Demod Meas Filter softkey in the main VSA menu A live preview of the constellation with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Demodulation settings depend on the used modulation y Ech Demodulation Demodulation Advanced Meas Filter Compensate for I Q Offset I Q Imbalance Amplitude Droop Symbol Rate Error Channel Equalizer Mode Filter Length Reset Equalizer Preview Preview Const I Q Meas amp Ref iM Clrw Start 0 002 Stop 0 002 Fig 5 2 Demodulation settings for PSK MSK and QAM modulation User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 193 R amp S FSW K70 Configu
398. is command specifies whether the signal is bursted or continuous Setting parameters lt SignalType gt CONTinuous BURSted RST CONTinuous Manual operation See Signal Type on page 139 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet STATe lt PattOffsState gt This command de activates the pattern offset Setting parameters lt PattOffsState gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Pattern Settings on page 139 See Offset on page 140 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet VALue lt PatternOffset gt This command defines a number of symbols which are ignored before the comparison with the pattern starts Setting parameters lt PatternOffset gt numeric value Range 0 to 15000 RST 0 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Pattern Settings on page 139 See Offset on page 140 LEE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 304 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA 11 5 2 Input and Frontend Settings The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources The frequency and amplitude settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup Manual configuration of the input and frontend is described in chapter 5 5 Input and Frontend Settings on page 141 XE iios m 305 e Using External MIXOES ore eth ree err ree Laer i tne SER eege 307 e Configuring Digital UO Input and Output 320 e Configuring Input via the Analog Baseb
399. ise R amp S FSW PNOISE Phase Noise K40 VSA R amp S FSW K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS BWCD 3G FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW MWCD 3G FDD UE K73 TD SCDMA BTS BTDS TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW MTDS TD SCDMA UE K77 cdma2000 BTS R amp S FSW BC2K CDMA2000 BTS K82 cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW MC2K CDMA2000 MS K83 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW BDO 1xEV DO BTS K84 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW MDO 1xEV DO MS K85 WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN WLAN LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE LTE Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName ChannelName1 lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN Spectrum2 Spectrum3 Renames the channel with the name Spectrum2 to Spectrum3 INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt Selects the application channel type for the current channel See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 288 For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 EEUU RA T User Manual
400. ist of value pairs that describe the correction values for conversion loss at certain frequencies The correction values for frequencies between the reference points are obtained via interpolation The currently selected table for each range is displayed at the top of the dialog box All conversion loss tables found in the instrument s C r_s instr user cv1l directory are listed in the Modify Tables list Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Digital IQ ET 150 Edit Ee tester eMe ba v Medos Me tta E Medos HR eta MERO E ans TERI OL ER DU I e ua 150 pig eT 150 Import Table ER 150 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 149 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration DEEN Input and Frontend Settings New Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to configure a new conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 150 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 318 Edit Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to edit the selected conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 150 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 318 Delete Table Deletes the currently selected conversion loss table after you confirm the action Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr on page 316 Im
401. ith the defined name Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard SAVE on page 293 Delete Standard Digital Standards Deletes the selected standard Standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz can also be deleted A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion of the standard Note Restoring predefined standard files The standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery can be restored using the Restore Stand ards softkey See Restore Standard Files on page 128 Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard DELete on page 292 Restore Standard Files Digital Standards Restores the standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery Note that this function will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Remote command SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue on page 291 Configuration Overview Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus E MMN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 130 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Configuration Overview Overview Vector Signal Analysis Modulation Input Capture Length Symbol Rate Center Freq Sample Rate Tx Filter Ref Level Tri
402. ive windows from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result UA uA lc Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values lt WindowIndex gt Index number of the window Usage Query only E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 399 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA EMG EC C SH D J mem P Configuring the Result Display LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowT ype gt This command replaces th
403. ked with the green bar The last evaluated result range i e the currently evaluated result range at the time the measurement stopped is highlighted in blue C Mag CapBuf Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym 3 To go back to a previously evaluated result range within the same capture buffer press the SWEEP key and then the Select Result Rng softkey By selecting different result ranges for example using the rotary knob you can move the highlighted blue area through the capture buffer and choose your currently demodulated result range h 251 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal Select Result Range x C Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym The results for this range are displayed in the Current column in the Result Sum mary in the eye diagram and in the symbol table Note Generally all Clear Write traces and the are affected by this selection 9 2 5 Averaging Several Evaluations By default all measurement windows are displayed with a single trace which is the Clear Write trace This trace displays the result of the current evaluation i e the highlighted blue area from the example in chapter 9 2 4 Navigating Through the Capture Buffer on page 251 However for most real world measurement tasks you need to obtain a result that is averaged over a certain number of evaluations or a worst case result of a certai
404. l ues of the measured signal in window 4 Source Meas amp Ref Signal Result type Magnitude Absolute see chapter 9 2 3 Changing the Display Configuration on page 250 Press RUN SINGLE The rising and falling edges of the burst in the selected result range are displayed in window 4 You could now add an average trace to evaluate the rising and falling edges further E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 258 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples i SS H u s Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 d m Std EDGE 8PSK SR 270 833 kHz Att 24dB Freq 1 0GHz Bes Len 200 SGL Stat Count 8 BURST PATTERN AEVM 1 Clrw B Result Summary Phase Err RMS Gain Imbalance i er I Q Capture Amplitude Droop Start 26 sym i i n Stop 174 sym d C Mag CapBuf D MagAbs Meas amp Ref 4 i I Pattern Search Start 0 sym i Stop 10000 sym Start 26 sym 07 10 2010 13 32 07 Fig 9 10 Result range that exceeds the burst length 9 3 5 Setting the Evaluation Range In some scenarios such as in Evaluating the Rising and Falling Edges the result range contains symbols that are not supposed to be considered for the EVM or other calculated parameters that are displayed in the Result Summary Thus you would not include them in the evaluation range To change the evaluated data 1 Start from the configuration described in chapt
405. l 1173 9292 02 07 52 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays REENEN Common Parameters in VSA Table 3 4 Parameters for PSK QAM and MSK modulation Parameter Description SCPI Parameter EVM RMS Peak Error Vector Magnitude EVM MER RMS Peak Modulation Error Ratio SNR Phase Error RMS The phase difference between the measurement vector and PERR Peak the reference vector Magnitude Error The average RMS and peak magnitude error in The mag MERRor RMS Peak nitude error is the difference of the measured magnitude to the magnitude of the reference signal The magnitude error is nor malized to the mean magnitude of the reference signal Carrier Frequency The mean carrier frequency offset in Hz CFERror Error Symbol Rate Error Difference between the currently measured symbol rate and SRER the defined symbol rate in ppm Only for PSK QAM or UserQAM modulation and only if com pensation for SRE is activated see chapter 5 9 1 Demodu lation Compensation on page 193 Rho RHO UO Offset Offset in the original input OOFFset UO Imbalance Not for BPSK IQIMbalance Gain Imbalance Not for BPSK GIMBalance Quadrature Error Not for BPSK QERRor Amplitude Droop The decrease of the signal power over time in the transmitter ADRoop Power The power of the measured signal MPOWer Table 3 5 Parameters for FSK modulation only Parameter Description SCPI param
406. l Decisions This stage operates on the result range and aims to make the correct symbol decisions The algorithm is illustrated in figure 4 47 using the example of a QPSK modulation After timing and scaling recovery a frequency offset and phase offset estimator is employed After this coarse synchronization the VSA application makes symbol decisions i e recovers which symbols were transmitted by the device under test DUT Typically the employed estimators are non data aided NDA estimators This means that they operate on an unknown data sequence Since the local oscillators LO of the transmitter device under test and the receiver R amp S FSW are normally not coupled their phase offset with respectto each other is unknown The unknown transmission delay between DUT and R amp S FSW adds a further unknown phase offset User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 94 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics REENEN Overview of the Demodulation Process Due to this unknown phase offset the result of the demodulation can be ambiguous with respect to the absolute phase position because of the rotational symmetry of e g a PSK constellation For example in the case of non differential QPSK modulation the mea surement signal the reference signal and the decided UO symbols may have a constant phase offset of 0 11 2 rr or 317 2 This offset can only be detected and eliminated if a pattern was successfully detected at symbol level see also chapte
407. l inter ference free USER User defined filter Define the filter using the Load User Filter function or the SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER command For details see chapter 8 2 1 How to Select User Defined Fil ters on page 229 NONE No measurement filter is used The frequency response of the available standard specific measurement filters is shown in chapter A 6 6 2 Measurement Filter on page 470 A 3 3 Typical Combinations of Tx and Measurement Filters Typical combinations of Tx and Meas filters are shown in table 1 4 they can be set in the VSA application using Meas filter AUTO see Using the Transmit Filter as a Mea surement Filter Auto on page 201 E H User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 457 R amp S9FSW K70 Annex ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data AA Table 1 4 Typical combinations of Tx and Meas filters Gauss Transmit filter Measurement filter Remarks analyzer RC raised cosine filter combination without intersymbol interfer ence ISI RRC root raised cosine RRC filter combination without ISI GMSK filter combination with low ISI Linearized GMSK EDGE NSR standard specific filter filter combination with ISI filter combination with low ISI Rectangular filter combination without ISI Half Sine filter combinatio
408. late lt n STAtisties SCALE X BCOUM cric ie rauca cect tiiir er Tha ema E Ee 336 CALCulatesn gt STATistices SCALe Y LOWEf iiic aada aaa 336 CAL Culate nzSTATletceGCAlev Uber 336 CALECulatesms S TrATistics SCALer GT WEE 336 Bey cba cs P a 337 E BE BIO Kan TT 337 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectz XI SCALelb ivislon n 337 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RPOSItION eee ceeee cece cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeees 337 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe RVALue eeessessseseeene ener 337 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe sess nnne nnns 338 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe PDlVision eee 338 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition eese 338 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RVALUGC enne nne 338 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SPACing cesses eem nennen 339 CALCulate n STATistics PRESet This command sets the x and y axis of the statistics measurement to measurement dependent default values Usage Event Manual operation See X Axis Scaling on page 169 See Default Settings on page 169 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE This command initiates an automatic scaling of the diagram x and y axis To obtain maximum resolution the level range is set as a function of the measured spac ing between peak power and the minimum power for the APD measurement and of
409. late lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK CFDRift type This command queries the results of the carrier frequency drift for FSK modulated signals User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 417 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Query parameters type Usage Retrieving Results lt none gt Carrier frequency drift for current sweep AVG Average FSK carrier frequency drift over several sweeps RPE Peak FSK carrier frequency drift over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of FSK carrier frequency drift PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK carrier frequency drift Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK DERRor type This command queries the results of the frequency error of FSK modulated signals Query parameters lt type gt Usage lt none gt RMS frequency error of display points of current sweep AVG Average of RMS frequency errors over several sweeps PAVG Average of maximum frequency errors over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS frequency error over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum frequency errors over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum frequency errors over several sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of frequency errors over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several s
410. lay WINDow lt n gt TRACEe Y SCALe AUTO ONE 369 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MODE DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe PDlVision cett 338 DISPlayWINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel ettet 331 DISPlayWINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet ttt 331 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition stt 338 DISPlayWINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RVALue ettet ttt 338 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALE PDIVISION sssscsssssssessssssessssseessssseesssseessssseesssstessesseessssseesen 337 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe RPOSition ttt 337 DISPlayWINDow n TRACe t X SCALe RVALue tttt ttt 337 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe STARt stt 411 DISPlayWINDow n TRACe t X SCALe VOFFset ettet DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ALL DlSblavf WiN Dow nzTR ACectGtGrATel eene nne nnne ne nennen nenne nnns DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA eene enne nennen ennt nnr rentre trn etas en nn sites enn serre nnns nn nnis DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA sss nnne nnns DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe sse DlSblavf WiNDow nzlkZ0O0OMGTATe nenne tenerte neret terns inst nente rsen seen n nernet FORMat DEXPort DSEP
411. lays on page 15 Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains the start and stop symbols or time of the evaluation range Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar CMM User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 14 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Evaluation Data Sources in VSA 3 Measurements and Result Displays Various different result displays for VSA measurements are available Which result types are available depends on the selected data source You can define which part of the measured signal is to be evaluated and displayed The determined result and evaluation ranges are included in the result displays where useful to visualize the basis of the displayed values and traces For background information on the result and evaluation ranges see chapter 4 6 Mea surement Ranges on page 117 e Evaluation Data Sources in VSA etie erit tee reae ee charte stus 15 LS ND If sec cave E ven nerd ae aaeode nee eee eda 19 e Common Parameters in VSAL c0i0c 00cccc ccc ccecececcstessnceneesetasnecsecscusaneesudscnseiesdadenntes 52 3 1 Evaluation Data Sources in VSA All data sources for evaluation available for VSA are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode The data source deter
412. le info iser specitic filter 0 035 RRC alpha 0 22 L 10 ISI_SNR 18 5 dB 0 03 0 025 0 02 0 015 DO 0 01 tinT symbol Fig 4 4 FILTWIZ filter tool for VSA It is possible to load customized transmit filters and customized measurement filters If a customized transmit filter is selected the internal receive filter coefficients are calculated automatically on the fly Note that this is different to the R amp S FSQ K70 where it is necessary to also transfer a user receive filter If you upload a customized transmit filter and leave the measurement filter set to auto matic the internally calculated receive filter will be used as measurement filter Note that this filter is not necessarily suitable for your specific signal The filter is optimized such that the intersymbol interference is low Hence you will probably be able to see a clear eye diagram and an Vector HO diagram with a recognizable constellation However a filter that has low intersymbol interference might lead to noise enhancement which is commonly undesirable for a measurement filter In order to avoid noise enhancement it is recommended that you e a design your own measurement filter and upload it as a user filter e b select a suitable measurement filter from the list ERREUR RA N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 60 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth Transferring filter files to the R amp
413. le pattern search DEM SEAR SYNC CAT CURR Query the names of all defined patterns assigned to the current standard DEM SEAR SYNC SEL EDGE TSC CUST Select a pattern DEM STAN SYNC OFFS 10 Ignore the first 10 symbols of the signal before comparing pattern DEM STAN SYNC OFFS STAT ON DD U D D Ug D DEM SEAR SYNC STAT ON Programming Examples DDEM STAN SAVE C TEMP CustomizedBurstMeas INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiate a new measurement and wait until it has finished ELLE Retrieving Results TRAC3 DATA TRACE1 Query the trace results of the capture buffer display Results TRAC2 DATA TRACE1 Query the results of the result summary Results R amp S9FSW K70 Annex A Annex Abbreviations The following sections are provided for reference purposes and include detailed infor mation such as formulae and abbreviations A 1 Abbreviations e E 448 Predefined Standards and Settings Predefined Measurement and Tx Filters ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data Known Data File Syntax Description gp cm M 462 Q Data File Format iq tar The following abbreviations are commonly used in the description of the R amp S FSW K70 option Abbreviation Meaning See section FSK Frequency Shift Keying Modulation mode for which the information is encrypted in the fre quency Frequency Shift
414. les in the context of the measure ment Configuration Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command UO Data Import and Export Description of general functions to import and export raw I Q measurement data How to Perform Measurements in VSA The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods Measurement Examples Detailed measurement examples to guide you through typical measurement scenar ios and allow you to try out the application immediately Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the test setup Remote Commands for VSA Remote commands required to configure and perform VSA measurements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FSW User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes Annex Reference material List of remote commands Alpahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 7 R amp SS9FSW K70 Preface Documentation Overview e Index 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the
415. liminate amplitude variations caused by noise or the modulation itself the instantaneous power of the whole capture buffer is computed and then a moving average filter is applied The length of this filter is automatically determined with the help of the user settings The filtered power of the capture buffer is subsequently compared to an automatically chosen threshold and the rising and falling edges of bursts are identified With the help of the detected edges and some further processing it is possible to decide whether the burst candidates comply with the user settings All bursts must have a length between Min Burst Length Search Tolerance and Max Burst Length Search Tolerance to be accepted See Burst Settings on page 139 and chapter 5 7 1 Burst Search on page 181 for a more detailed description of these parameters 8 Min Burst Length Min Gap Length Max Burst Length Fig 4 45 Burst Search parameters You can influence the robustness of the burst search directly by entering the correct minimum gap length minimum burst length and maximum burst length see Burst Set tings on page 139 and Min Gap Length on page 183 Refer to figure 4 45 for an illustration of the three parameters The detected bursts in the capture buffer for the current burst search settings are indi cated by blue lines in the preview area of the Burst Search configuration dialog box see chapter 5
416. llowed This value depends on which bandwidth extension options are installed if any see chapter 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable I Q Bandwidth for RF Input on page 62 All installed bandwidth extension options are activated Note that using band width extension options R amp S FSW B160 B320 may cause more spurious effects OFF The maximum analysis bandwidth is restricted the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B320 and possibly also B160 is deactivated Which maximum bandwidth applies is determined by the subsequent TRACe 10 WBANd MBWIDTH command RST ON Manual operation See Maximum Bandwidth on page 172 EEUU RA a User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 341 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 5 4 Configuring VSA TRACe IQ WBANd MBWIDTH Limit Defines the maximum analysis bandwidth if TRACe 10 WBANd STATe is OFF The corresponding bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B160 or B320 is deactivated Parameters Limit 80 MHz 160 MHz Numeric value double Entries other than the given fixed values are rounded to the next higher fixed value RST 80 MHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See Maximum Bandwidth on page 172 Triggering Measurements The trigger commands define the beginning of a measurement MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal Thus no trigger settings are available in the VSA a
417. lowing tips may help you optimize or troubleshoot the measurement 10 1 Flow Chart ter Treubleshoolg loce eode depre t RH Ht eerte 262 Explanation of Error Messages 264 Frequently Asked Que soni 1 2 1er trt teer teet tee Rh LEER bra Ra ded get 273 Obtaining Technical SHDDOLTL 2 rrr eret eee te eee dent eene 280 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting If you experience a concrete measurement problem you might want to try solving it with the help of the flow chart R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Troubleshooting Overview Flow Chart for Troubleshooting Press Preset in order to start from a known state Y Check the following parameters at the DUT and the K70 Center frequency Reference Level overload Symbol rate Transmit filter Modulation Type Demodulation Failed dications are e g Sync Failed Unstable Message in the Status Bar The measurement UO Constellation does not look at all like a constellation Check the Input RF Baseband Sideband inversion Swap IQ Y To make sure you realize once the problem is fixed switch on the EVM trace and keep an eye on it N Y Press the SWEEP Hardkey and set the statistic count to 1 Then press Single Sweep The FSW will stop capturing IQ data which makes it easier for you to debug gt measurement Mag CapBuffer
418. lt Magnitude gt The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless Range 1E 5 to 1 0 RST 1 0 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UPP 0 01 Manual operation See Defining Min and Max Values on page 168 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT lt Unit gt This command selects the unit of the y axis Parameters lt Unit gt PCT ABS RST ABS Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UNIT PCT Sets the percentage scale Manual operation See Y Axis Unit on page 170 EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 336 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA CALCulate lt n gt UNIT ANGLe Unit This command selects the default unit for angles Setting parameters Unit DEG RAD RST RAD Manual operation See Y Axis Unit on page 170 CALCulate lt n gt X UNIT TIME Unit This command selects the unit symbols or seconds for the x axis Setting parameters Unit S SYM RST SYM Manual operation See X Axis Unit on page 170 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe PDIVision lt PDiv gt This command defines the scaling of the x axis for statistical result displays For all other result displays this command is only available as a query Setting parameters lt PDiv gt numeric value Defines the range per division total range 10 lt PDiv gt Manual operation See X Axis Scaling on page 169 See Range per Division on page 169 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCA
419. lt Range with refer ence to the captured data a detected burst or a detected pattern For details on the functions see chapter 5 8 Result Range Configuration on page 190 1 In the Overview select Range Settings 2 Select the Result Range tab 3 Define the Result Length i e the number of symbols from the result that are to be analyzed Note that when you use Known Data files as a reference the Result Length speci fied here must be identical to the length of the specified symbol sequences in the xml file lt ResultLength gt element See chapter 4 8 Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions on page 122 4 Define the Reference for the result range i e the source to which the result will be aligned The reference can be the captured data a detected burst or a detected pat tern 5 Define the Alignment of the result range to the reference source i e whether the result starts at the beginning of the reference source ends with the reference source or is centered with the reference source 6 Optionally define an offset of the result range to the reference source e g to ignore the first few symbols of the captured data 7 Optionally define the number of the symbol which marks the beginning of the refer ence source to change the scaling of the x axis This offset is added to the one defined for the signal description SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 236 R amp S FSW K70 How t
420. lt n gt FEED lt Feed gt Selects the signal source and for the equalizer also the result type for evaluation Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 8 2 Working with Windows in the Display on page 397 Only for the Equalizer Impulse Response and Equalizer Frequency Response this command is required SS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 404 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring the Result Display Setting parameters Feed string XTIM DDEM MEAS Measured signal XTIM DDEM REF Reference signal XTIM DDEM ERR VECT Error vector XTIM DDEM ERR MPH Modulation errors XTIM DDEM MACC Modulation accuracy XTIM DDEM SYMB Symbol table TCAP Capture Buffer XTIM DDEM IMP Equalizer Impulse Response XFR DDEM RAT Equalizer Frequency Response XFR DDEM IRAT Equalizer Group Delay CALCulate lt n gt FORMat lt Format gt This command defines the result type of the traces Which parameters are available depends on the setting for the data source see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 and table 3 1 Whether the result type shows absolute or relative values is defined using the DISP WIND TRAC Y MODE command see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MODE on page 409 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 405 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Setting parameters Forma
421. lt window 2 Select AMPT gt YScale Config gt Y Axis Reference Value 3 Enter a reference value for the y axis in the current unit 4 Select AMPT gt YScale Config gt Y Axis Reference Position 5 Enter the position at which this value is to be displayed on the y axis The position is a percentage of the entire length where 100 refers to the top edge 6 Select AMPT gt YScale Config gt Y Axis Range Example If you want the to analyze errors greater than 95 you can define the y axis range as 5 and position the y axis to start at 95 To do so enter the reference value 95 and the reference position 0 A EVM Error 1 Clrw 2 Clrw Start 151 0 sym Stop 299 0 sym Fig 8 3 Defining the y axis scaling using a reference point To define the scaling automatically 1 Focus the result window 2 Select AMPT gt Y Axis Auto Scale The y axis is adapted to display the current results optimally only once not dynam ically 8 3 1 2 How to Scale Statistics Diagrams Statistic diagrams show the distribution i e probabilities of occurrence of the values as a set of bars You can define the number of bars to be displayed i e the granularity of classifications Additionally you can specify whether absolute or percentage values are displayed For statistics measurements both the x axis and the y axis can be scaled to optimize the display User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 239 R amp S FSW K70
422. lter for GSM EDGE 3GPP TS 45 004 normal symbol rate Standard specific filter for GSM EDGE higher symbol rate EDGE Wide Pulse Shape Standard specific filter for GSM EDGE higher symbol rate Half Sine Half Sine filter APCO25 C4FM Filter for the APCO25 C4FM standard APCO25 H CPM Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard APCO25 H DQPSK Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard APCO25 H D8PSK Narrow Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard APCO25 H D8PSK Wide Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard CDMA2000 1X Forward Filter for CDMA ONE forward link TIA EIA IS 95 A May 1995 and CDMA2000 1X forward link http www 3gpp2 org Public html specs C S0002 C_v1 0 pdf 28 05 2002 CDMA2000 1X Reverse Filter for CDMA ONE forward link TIA EIA IS 95 A May 1995 and CDMA2000 1X reverse link http www 3gpp2 org Public html specs C S0002 C v1 0 pdf 28 05 2002 Rectangular Rectangular filter in the time domain with a length of 1 symbol period None No filter is used USER User defined filter Define the filter using the SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER command The most frequently required measurement filters are predefined in the VSA application E SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 456 R amp SS9FSW K70 Annex mmm U Predefined Measurement and Tx Fi
423. lters Table 1 3 Overview of predefined measurement filters EDGE NSR Measurement filter required for the EDGE Normal Symbol Rate standard see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 4 6 Modulation Accu racy The resulting system is NOT inter symbol interference free EDGE HSR Narrow Pulse Measurement filter required for the EDGE High Symbol Rate Narrow Pulse standard EDGE HSR Wide Pulse Measurement filter required for the EDGE High Symbol Rate Wide Pulse standard Gauss Classic Gauss filter with an adjustable BT Low ISI Meas Filter Measurement filter implemented to retain a low intersymbol infer ference Best suited for eye diagrams or UO vector diagrams Not necessarily suited for EVM evaluation due to amplification in the pass band Low Pass Narrow Pass band up to Feymbo 2 Stop band starts at Fsymboi 40dB Low Pass Wide Pass band up to Fsymbol Stop band starts at 1 5 F 40dB Rectangular Rectangular filter in the time domain with a length of 1 symbol period integrate and dump effect RRC Root Raised Cosine Filter The roll off parameter Alpha is set according to the Transmit filter if the Auto according to Transmit filter option is enabled see Using the Transmit Filter as a Mea surement Filter Auto on page 201 Otherwise it must be set manually If the Transmit filter is also a Root Raised Cosine filter with the same roll off parameter the resulting system is inter symbo
424. lways equal to or smaller than the result range and defines e Therange over which traces that do not have a time axis are displayed e g polar diagrams e Therange over which the following parameters are calculated for the Result Sum mary EVM MER Phase Error Magnitude Error Power User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 120 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol Evaluation range display In all displays over time except for capture buffer displays the evaluation range is indi cated by red lines D MagAbs Meas amp Ref Start 26 sym i i Stop 174 sym Fig 4 68 Evaluation lines in absolute magnitude diagram In symbol tables the evaluated symbols are indicated by red square brackets D Symbol Table Hexadecimal ETZEHEJEGZEDETZEREZE A In other result displays that are based on the evaluation range only two red vertical lines are displayed in the diagram header to indicate a limited evaluation basis B Result Summary Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol Estimation points per symbol During synchronization the measurement signal is matched to the reference signal and various signal parameters are calculated as well as the optional equalizer You can define how many sample points are used for this calculation at each symbol Typically this is one point per symbol symbol rate or a factor of 4 sample rate Display points per symbol The n
425. m level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 384 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA mE uw s s Analysis Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 214 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 213 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum APEak sets the marker to the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Usage Event Manual operation See Max Peak on page 214 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 213 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 213 See Search Next Peak on page 214 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak
426. m the USB stick To load a user transmit TX filter 1 Inthe Overview select the Signal Description button 2 Inthe Modulation tab of the Signal Description dialog box select Transmit Filter Type User 3 Select Load User Filter 4 Load your vaf file from the USB stick How to Perform Pattern Searches To configure a pattern search 1 Inthe Overview select Signal Description 2 Select the Signal Structure tab 3 Select the Burst Signal signal type 4 Enable the Pattern option 5 From the Name selection list select a pattern that is assigned to the currently defined standard ES User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 229 R amp S9FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis 10 11 12 13 How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements If the pattern you require is not available continue with To add a predefined pattern to a standard on page 230 or chapter 8 2 2 2 How to Define a New Pattern on page 231 Optionally select the Offset option and enter the number of symbols in the signal to be ignored during the pattern search Close the Signal Description dialog box In the Overview dialog box select Burst Pattern and switch to the Pattern Search tab Select On to enable the search To enable a search only if a pattern is part of the signal description enable the Auto option The results of the pattern search with the selected pattern on the curre
427. m the estimation range In the special case that the signal is indicated as a burst signal but is so highly distorted that the burst search cannot detect a burst the estimation range corresponds to the pat tern and if an offset of the pattern is indicated the useful part of the burst from its start to the pattern start E User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 102 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors 4 5 1 3 Modulation Errors Error vector EV Fig 4 53 Modulation error error vector The error vector is the difference between the measurement signal vector Meas vector and the reference signal vector Ref vector Error Vector Magnitude EVM Fig 4 54 Modulation error EVM magnitude error phase error The magnitude ofthe error vector in the diagram is specified as the error vector magnitude EVM It is commonly normalized to the mean reference power The EVM should not be confused with the magnitude error see below Magnitude Error The magnitude error is defined as the difference between the measurement vector mag nitude and the reference vector magnitude see figure 4 54 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Phase Error Q Error Vector Fig 4 55 Modulation error Phase error error vector phase The phase error is the phase difference between the measurement vector and the ref erence vector PHASE _ ERR t
428. mand DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe SYMBol on page 409 Display Points Sym Defines the number of display points that are displayed per symbol If more points per symbol are selected than the defined Sample Rate the additional points are interpolated for the display The more points are displayed per symbol the more detailed the trace becomes For more information see chapter 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Sym bol on page 121 Note If the capture buffer is used as the signal source the Sample Rate defines the number of displayed points per symbol the Display Points Sym parameter is not avail able If Auto is enabled the Sample Rate value is used Alternatively select the number of points to be displayed per symbol manually The available values depend on the source type 4 only the symbol time instants are displayed 2 4 8 16 32 more points are displayed than symbols Capture Oversampling the number of samples per symbol defined in the signal capture settings are displayed see Sample Rate on page 172 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe VALue on page 409 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe AUTO on page 408 UUU User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 219 Oversampling Zoom Functions Defines the sample basis for statistical evaluation This setting is only available for the result type transformation Statistics Ref Level 10 00 dBm 30dB Freq 15 0 GHz A E Start 101 562 kHz C Fr
429. mand defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command is available for any trigger source not just IF Power Note If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger the R amp S FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and UO data measurements ERREUR RA M User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 343 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA Parameters Period RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 178 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trigger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 177 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower lt Level gt This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger This command is available for the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 and the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters lt Level gt Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 DBM Example TRIG LEV BB 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 177 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel E
430. manual of the R amp S SMU which can be downloaded from the Rohde amp Schwarz website www rohde schwarz com downloads manuals smu200A html Frequency 1 GHz Level 0 dBm Modulation QPSK EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 245 Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal Symbol Rate 1 Msym s Filter Root Raised Cosine with Roll Off 0 35 To define the settings for the R amp S SMU 1 Press the PRESET key to start from a defined state Press the FREQ key and enter 1 GHz 2 3 Press the LEVEL key and enter 0 dBm 4 To define the modulation a Press the DIAGRAM key b Select the first block Baseband A in the settings overview and press ENTER R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal c Select Custom Digital Mod E Custom Digital Modulation ab Set to Default SaveRecall Data Source Data Source PRES PRBS Type PRBS 9 Set acc to standard User Save Recall User Symbol Rate L 1000 000 000 sym Coding OFF Power Ramp Control Off Cosine 1 00 sym Trigger Marker Auto bag Clock Internal Fig 9 2 R amp S SMU Custom Digital Modulation Dialog d Under Modulation Type select PSK gt QPSK 5 In the Custom Digital Modulation dialog box a Enter the Symbol Rate 1 MHz b Select the Filter Root Cosine c Enter the Roll Off Factor 0 35 d Toggle the
431. matter i d j d L4 t D e d t a ER 1 wa ne 04 05 05 oF Rew Gain Distortion Analyzer n7 A La JJ 06t 05 4 4 H 3 04 E o3 4 e D 01 D 0 0 01 02 03 DA 05 06 0 04 Rew The effect of nonlinear amplitude distortions on a 64QAM signal are illustrated in table 4 17 only the first quadrant is shown The transfer function is level dependent the highest effects occur at high input levels while low signal levels are hardly affected The signal is scaled in the analyzer so that the average square magnitude of the error vector is minimized The second column shows the signal after scaling Table 4 18 Amplitude transfer functions Amplitude transfer function transmitter Amplitude transfer function analyzer Appitude Tanski furchas Ters mtie 5 Output P ower Input Power dog S E e e T T T T T A A A A n w u H 6 b 4 2 0 Tout Pawer lag Aa pitude Tanefer Function Analyzer 1 A A A A A 4 16 M A 10 4 b heut Power log A logarithmic display of the amplitude transfer functions is shown in table 4 18 The ana lyzer trace is shifted against the transmitter trace by this scale factor EEUU RA MN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 109 R amp S FSW K70 Phase Distortion Table 4 19 Effect of nonlinear phase distortions Measurement Basics DESSERT Signal Model Estimation and Modula
432. mbination with a sample rate of 4 would return 2000 level values The unit is dBm e M 5 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 412 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Retrieving Results Cartesian diagrams For cartesian diagrams the command returns the y values of the trace only magni tude phase frequency real imag eye diagrams The number of returned values is the product of the Result Length and the display points per symbol The unit depends on the unit you have set previously You can query the x value that relates to the first value of the y axis using DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt on page 411 When querying the results for eye diagrams the results are merely superimposed in the display This means that the eye diagram result displays are the same as the real imag result display Polar diagrams For polar diagrams the command returns a pair of values for each trace point The first value is the real part the second value the imaginary part The number of returned value pairs depends on the result type Vector UO evaluation range length display points per symbol Constellation UO evaluation range length Constellation Frequency and Vector Frequency one value for each trace point on the y axis Symbols For the symbol table result diagrams the command returns one value for each num ber in the table The command always returns the values in the decimal format The numb
433. me application The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the available memory on the instrument Only one measurement can be performed at any time namely the one in the currently active channel However in order to perform the configured measurements consecu tively a Sequencer function is provided If activated the measurements configured in the currently active channels are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs including the MultiView as the measurements are performed Sequential operation itself is independant of the currently displayed tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during analyzer operation All dif ferent information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections MultiView 33 Spectrum Ref Level T 3G WCDMA SR 3 84 MHz SGL 0 Stat Count 10 2 Result Summary EVM RMS MER Phase Frror Peal Magnitude Error MS ak Carrier Frequency Frror 445021 50 Rho 0 000 008 1 0 Off 36 57 7g 0 08 46 60 Quac 159 53 Start 3 135 5 VE Op 0 000 000 3 Mag Capture Buffer Symbol Hexadecimal 73 ergs TY User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 12 R amp S FSW K70 W
434. me represen tation of the measurement but also the spectrum or the statistics in form of a histogram These are the transformations of the results These settings are not available for symbol evaluation i e the following signal sources e Symbols e Modulation Accuracy Normal Evaluation in time domain X axis displays time values e M M X User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 218 R amp S FSW K70 Analysis REESEN Display and Window Configuration Spectrum Evaluation in frequency domain X axis displays frequency values The usable UO bandwidth is indicated in the display Statistics Statistical evaluation histogram X axis displays former y values Y axis displays statistical information e Trace 1 the probability of occurrence of a certain value is plotted against the value e Trace 2 the cumulated probability of occurance is plotted against the value Remote command CALCulate n DDEM SPECtrum STATe on page 404 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe on page 406 Highlight Symbols If enabled the symbol instants are highlighted as squares in the window for measured and reference signals in time normal display as well as error displays Only evaluations that are based on symbols e g constellations or traces support this function Remote com
435. me as in the base unit and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes 2 1 Starting the VSA Application The VSA application adds a new application to the R amp S FSW To activate the VSA application 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel of the R amp S FSW A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW 2 Select the VSA item VSA The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the VSA application User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 11 R amp S FSW K70 Welcome to the Vector Signal Analysis Application ES Se ee ee eee ee ee Understanding the Display Information The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the VSA Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu see chapier 5 3 Configuration Overview on page 130 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application The same application can be acti vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the sa
436. me domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Parameters lt Limit gt The value range depends on the span or sweep time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements RST right diagram border lt Limit gt Range 1e9 to 1e9 RST 800 0 Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 214 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits STATe State This command turns marker search limits on and off If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed EET RU E e A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULLULULUUIMM User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 387 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 7 3 11 7 3 1 11 7 3 2 Analysis Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches on search limitation Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 214 Configuring Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically Manual configuration of limit lines is described in chapter 6 4 Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines on page 215 e dOene ral COMMAS ee ete tee tenebre eb eteeve ct esbnc E sb ener ee beo
437. measured data e Last New Sequence Found time that has passed since the most recent unique sequence was detected e Throughput current data processing speed of the tool Note that while the tool is running the R amp S FSW is set to remote mode i e the manual interface is not available As soon as the tool is closed the remote mode is automatically deactivated 5 When all known possible sequences have been detected or when a significantly large amount of time has passed so as to assume no more sequences will be detec ted stop the tool by selecting Stop 6 e Ifthe results are acceptable select Store for K70 to store a valid xml file with the recorded data sequences on the instrument A file selection dialog box is displayed in which you can select the storage location and file name You can also add an optional comment to the file e Otherwise reset the tool to start a new recording possibly after changing the demodulation settings or input data 7 Close the tool window to return to normal operation of the VSA application User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 235 R amp S FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis SS SSS SS a a a es How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements The created xml file can now be loaded in the VSA application as described in chap ter 8 2 3 1 How to Load Known Data Files on page 233 8 2 4 How to Define the Result Range You can define which part of the source signal is analyzed Resu
438. mines which result types are available see table 3 1 For details on selecting the data source for evaluation see chapter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 217 In diagrams in the frequency domain Spectrum transformation see Result Type Trans formation on page 218 the usable UO bandwidth is indicated by vertical blue lines 3 Spectrum RealImag CapBuf J usable IQ Bandwidth Start 7 68 MHz Stop 7 68 MHz Capture BUfIGE eoe rtr tre Ren ee hen etr ee rh a darko eeneg 16 Measurement amp Reference Signal trea tee oed rana td d ra reno d IRR 16 let T M 17 Error VOO RE Hs 17 E a User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 15 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays mmm J P Evaluation Data Sources in VSA Mod ulatoM Gre 17 Modulation EE 18 Se pe ETE 18 Capture Buffer The captured UO data In capture buffer result diagrams the result ranges are indicated by green bars along the time axis The currently displayed result range is indicated by a blue bar 3 Mag CaptureBuffer 0 sym 8000 sym Fig 3 1 Result ranges for a burst signal Note Tip You can use the capture buffer display to navigate through the available result ranges using Select Result Rng softkey and analyze the individual result ranges in separate windows You c
439. mm sc be mm mm mm mr d e mm mm e ei Amman em mmm eben de mmm ee Aas e e mm mm le e e mm e e be mm mm mm ms de e zt kg Se BI Hece 8p epnyiubeyy DEET See eee eee eee EEEEERN 80 100 14 16 1 6 1 2 04 06 O86 0 2 Frequency in feymbol ISI Filters Low The following frequency responses are obtained when using a low ISI measurment filter and the Transmit filter indicated in the title of each diagram Formulae APCO25 CAFM D D DH D q 4 2 2 pBp 2 2 24 2 2 22 2Bp 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 24 2 2 2 2 2 2p 2 22 24 20 gp apnyubepy DH DH D i r D DH D DH e D DH L DH D D r DH DH D i r DH DH D D L D D D d 1 qe BR T KA e zm zm ms ms e ms zm mm mm mm le o ms zm zm ss wk o mm ms zm o das zm ss et ms ms zm o ms ss a mm mm mm mm dl zm o ee mm mm mm e 40 e 4 Jg Pessac mmm mmm umm e bese 80 100 04 06 08 0 2 kt Frequency in D8P SK Narrow APCO25 H q 4 p 22024 2 2 2 2 2 pBp 22 2 p 2 2 2 224 2 2 2p 2 2 2 2Q4 20 ap epnyiubeyy 42 22 22 qe BR K EN E i S A0 H 7 ae e 80 6 08 D 0 4 0 2 100 fsymbol Frequency in APCO25 H DEPSK Wide See eee eee ee eee eee ee eee 20 D 1 1 D D
440. modulation the following filters have to be accurately specified for the analyzer e Transmit filter filter characteristic of transmitter e Meas filter PSK QAM UserQAM MSK The and the Q part of the measurement and the reference signal are filtered with this filter FSK The instantaneous frequency of the measurement reference signal are filtered In many applications the measurement filter is identical with the ISI filter The receive filter ISI filter is configured internally depending on the transmit filter The goal is to produce intersymbol interference free points for the demodulation The reference filter synthesizes the ideal transmitted signal after meas filtering It is calculated by the analyzer from the above filters convolution operation Transmit filter Meas Filter EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 56 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing Typical combinations of Tx and Meas filters are shown in table 1 4 they can be set in the VSA application using Meas filter AUTO see Using the Transmit Filter as a Mea surement Filter Auto on page 201 If RC raised cosine RRC root raised cosine and Gaussian filters are used the Alpha RC RRC filters or BT Gaussian filters param eters must be set in addition to the filter characteristic roll off factor Typically the Alpha BT value of the measurement filter should be the same as that of th
441. mote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 371 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well For information on other input settings see chapter 5 5 1 Input Settings on page 141 Preamplifier option B24 Input Settings If option R amp S FSW B24 is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For R amp S FSW 26 models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the preamplifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the following settings are available You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 332 INPut GAIN VALue on page 331 Input Coupling Input Settings The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct current DC This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications re
442. mote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 330 Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Amplitude and scaling settings allow you to configure the vertical y axis display and for some result displays also the horizontal x axis AMPlitUdS SENGS LIE 160 e Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input 164 WN E EE 166 UE c 170 Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings affect the signal power or error levels To configure the amplitude settings select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Con fig softkey The amplitude settings for Analog Baseband input are described in chapter 5 5 3 2 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input on page 164 Hite RB um VSA 3 e ed Amplitude Scale Unit Reference Level Input Settings Value 10 0 dBm Offset 0 0 dB Input Coupling Impedance RF Attenuation Electronic Attenuation State Mode Mode Value User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 160 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings o Note that amplitude settings are not window specific as opposed to the scaling and unit settings Retetrencelleyel n aiit er ERR REIR SE EE 161 L Shifting the Display O feet sete tntetn tnnt 161 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 162 Jojejt dei up ER 162 L Preamplifier option B34 tenete tenen tette tente tente ten 162 e re EE 162 RE Aftentation ii eode HE ere EX DER ERE LE dee
443. mote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM CONS to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 3 2 6 Constellation UO Rotated The complex source signal as an X Y plot As opposed to the common Constellation UC display the symbol decision instants including the rotated ones are drawn and not con nected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal This result type is only available for signals with a rotating modulation User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 26 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Result Types in VSA 1 ConstRot I Q Meas amp Ref IMG 2 Const I Q Meas amp Ref Fig 3 4 Result display Constellation I Q Rotated vs common Constellation I Q for 377 4 QPSK modulation Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM RCON to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 3 2 7 Error Vector Magnitude EVM Displays the error vector magnitude as a function of symbols or time EVM t P with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the
444. n NOACtion Nothing is started on pressing the micro button RST RSINgle Manual operation See Microbutton Action on page 158 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup NAME Queries the name of the probe LSS SSS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 327 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA REESEN Configuring VSA Suffix p 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input Return values lt Name gt Name string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup STATe Queries if the probe at the specified connector is active detected or not active not detected To switch the probe on i e activate input from the connector use INP SEL ATQ see INPut SELect on page 306 Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input Return values lt State gt DETected NDETected RST NDETected Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup TYPE Queries the type of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input I Return values lt Type gt String containing one of the following values None no probe detected
445. n Out Kt Offset Elek TEE 139 ce e 2un RE 139 L Min Length Max Delight netten edis eon b mei Gesn Rara 139 2 ro marc Pr 139 D 0 Mee P 139 SEL MEE 139 lo mi s 139 L Ee ET 139 ENEE eene 140 m J T User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 138 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration El Signal Description Signal Type Determines whether the signal is continuous or contains bursts Remote command SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue on page 304 Burst Settings For bursts further settings are available Min Length Max Length Burst Settings Shortest and longest expected burst length in symbols 15000 The symbols are con verted to seconds for reference Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt LENGth MAXimum on page 302 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt LENGth MINimum on page 302 Run In Burst Settings The number of symbols before the signal is assumed to have valid modulated symbols The symbols are converted to seconds for reference Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt SKIP RISing on page 303 Run Out Burst Settings The number of symbols before the falling edge that do not necessarily need to have a valid modulation The symbols are converted to seconds for reference Remote command SENSe DDEMod
446. n is selected in the demodulation settings In this case the imbalance does not affect the EVM Note thatthe gain imbalance is not estimated and cannot be compensated for in a BPSK signal The distortions gain imbalance and quadrature error can only be measured without ambiguity if the following two conditions are fullfilled o Preconditions for Gain Imbalance and Quadrature Error measurements e a pattern is detected e the modulation is a non differential non rotating QAM or PSK Otherwise only the measurement parameter UO Imbalance which is a combination of the gain imbalance and the quadrature error is significant Quadrature Error Quadrature Inphase Fig 4 58 Effect of Quadrature Error The quadrature error is another modulation error which is shown in figure 4 58 In this diagram the and Q components of the modulated carrier are of identical amplitude but the phase between the two components deviates from 90 This error also distorts the coordinates In the example in figure 4 58 the Q axis is shifted Note that the quadrature error is not estimated and cannot be compensated for in a BPSK signal UO Imbalance The effect of quadrature error and gain imbalance are combined to form the error param eter UO imbalance E 3 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 1
447. n number of evaluations This section explains how to achieve this To evaluate EVM vs Time 1 Configure window 1 such that it displays the EVM versus time measurement Source Error Vector Result Type EVM see chapter 9 2 3 Changing the Display Con figuration on page 250 Tap in the window to set the focus on it 2 To display the trace averaged over several measurements or the maximum hold trace over several measurements press the TRACE key 3 Add further traces by pressing the TRACE key and then either using the Trace 2 3 or the Trace Config softkeys Set the second trace to Average and the third trace to Max Hold Note that the configured traces appear in the window title M User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 252 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals Start 0 sym i Stop 800 sym Fig 9 5 Several traces in one window 4 Press RUN SINGLE again The current capture buffer is evaluated for this trace setup In the channel information bar you can see the number of completed evaluations Stat Count Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 dBm Mod Att 24 dB Freq 1 0GHz Res Len SGL Stat Count 10 A EVM 1 Clrw 5 To change the number of evaluations press the SWEEP key and select Statistic Count Config Select Manual and enter the desired number of evaluations e g 12 When you press RUN SINGLE the VSA application will capture UO data until 12 evaluations
448. n of the measurement filter is described in chapter 5 10 Measure ment Filter Settings on page 200 For more information on measurement filters refer to chapter 4 1 4 Measurement Fil ters on page 57 Useful commands for defining measurement filters described elsewhere SENSe DDEMod FILTer ALPHa on page 295 SENSe DDEMod FILTer STATe on page 296 Remote commands exclusive to configuring measurement filters GENSeIDDEMod Mier AL PHa ettet tette tentent ttn tena 366 SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO center tnnt tette ttti 366 SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME eccentric 367 SENSe DDEMod MFILter STATe eccentric 367 SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER eccentric 367 SENSe DDEMod MFILter ALPHa lt MeasFiltAlphaBT gt This command sets the alpha value of the measurement filter Setting parameters MeasFiltAlphaBT numeric value Range 0 1 to 1 0 RST 0 22 Default unit NONE Manual operation See Type on page 202 See Alpha BT on page 202 SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO lt MeasFilterAuto gt If this command is set to ON the measurement filter is defined automatically depending on the transmit filter see SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on page 301 Setting parameters lt MeasFilterAuto gt ON OFF 1 0 RST ON E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 366 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA EC C
449. n order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depending on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abor tion has been completed Usage SCPI confirmed INITiate CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using INIT CONT OFF or finished in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped EGER RET N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 372 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA mE 4 HA Performing a Measurement As opposed to INITiate IMMediate this command does not reset traces in max hold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measurements using maxhold or averaging functions Example for Spectrum application INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 2
450. n page 398 Remote commands exclusive to configuring VSA windows CALCulate lt n DDEM SPECiUm ESTAT EC rnn a aaa a a aa 404 CAL E TEE 404 GAL Gulatespns FORMA oce tonto et epu oce a rente Ma eoo Coo ded deed 405 CAL Culate nz GTATiettce CCDETSTATel eene enne renent 406 CALCulatesms S TATISUGS ll 407 BISPlayPWINBowens I TEMELINEJQEVALUue 2 21er neret coe 407 DISPlayWINDow lt n gt PRATSAUTO seanina ENNEN nennen nnne nennen 408 DISPlay E WINDowens GETT ET 409 DISPlay WINDowsns TRAGe SYMBOL EE 409 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MODE eeeeeeeeee eene 409 EEUU RA N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 403 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring the Result Display CALCulate lt n gt DDEM SPECtrum STATe lt AddEvaluation gt This command switches the result type transformation to spectrum mode Spectral eval uation is available for the following result types e MAGNitude e PHASe UPHase e FREQuency e Real Imag RIMAG The result types are defined using the CALC FORM command see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 Setting parameters lt AddEvaluation gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS Selects the meas signal CALC FORM PHAS Selects the phase measurement CALC DDEM SPEC STAT ON Selects the spectral display of the phase Manual operation See Result Type Transformation on page 218 CALCulate
451. n switch to the External Mixer tab under Input Source Note that external mixers are not supported in MSRA mode For details on using external mixers see the R amp S FSW User Manual e SOM E 144 HE BASIC SOUINGS M 147 e Managing Conversion Loss Tables ier toin eerie nnde 149 e Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables eese 150 Mixer Settings Radio Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Band Settings Mixer Type RF Start Digital IQ RF Stop Handover Freq La RF Overrange Preset Band Mixer Settings Harmonic Type Range Harmonic Order Conversion Loss ED EE E m User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 144 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration a a SS ns S Input and Frontend Settings T OMS INN E 146 Posat Beal MT 146 leg buo E 146 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration eee nennen 146 L EN s NERO 146 LRange 2 ERR MERE 146 L Harmonie OPISr eere tenis apad te Eent 146 L Conversion MORE Aere Ee 147 External Mixer State Activates or deactivates the external mixer for input If activated ExtMix is indicated in the channel bar of the application together with the used band see Band on page 145 Remote command SENSe MIXer STATe on page 307 RF Start RF Stop Displays the start and stop frequency of the selecte
452. n without ISI CDMA2000 1X FORWARD Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI CDMA2000 1X REVERSE Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI APCO25 C4FM Rectangular filter combination without ISI APCO25 H CPM Rectangular filter combination without ISI APCO25 H DQPSK Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI APCO25 H D8PSK Narrow Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI APCO25 H D8PSK Wide Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape EDGE HSR Narrow Pulse standard specific filter filter combination with ISI EDGE Wide Pulse Shape EDGE HSR Wide Pulse standard specific filter filter combination with ISI User Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination with low ISI ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the keyword Trace lt n gt lt n gt number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or several columns depending on the result type which are also separated by a semicolon If several traces in several windows are exported to one file the data for each window is listed subsequently Within the data for a single window the data for the individual traces is listed subsequently For details on
453. nal Mixer B21 oae 146 Presetting Channels rette eii 132 Default values p Pre thigger Eee EUR Probes MicrobDUttOn enr ner enne thirteen 158 TE ue E 158 Programming examples Burst GSM EDGE signal aae 442 Continuous QPSK Signal 0 0 0 0 cece eects 440 External Mixer B21 sees 318 Protection RE input remote sisiraan inasai 305 PSK Differential corren rh reri tern Error model E Mixed Tore er rne ir iaid rte teen Modulation type eu See Ke joo EE Rotating differential sssssssssssssess 75 Symbol mapping ouer 0 rnit 69 Q QAM Error model rrt tob ere nen ena dena 101 Modulation type soirs sisindiran 134 Symbol mapping sse 81 QPSK COMUINUOUS e I aw saens Measurement example tienda RE E 76 Offset symbol mapping sene 76 Programming example esee 440 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation SOS QAM M 81 Quadrature error Bie V 107 ndr Formula os Preconditions for measurement cece 107 Quick Config cc m 208 R IERT Uer UE 155 R amp S EX IQ BOX leen 155 Range Perl 169 Range per division be EE 168 Raw data EXpOTting irre iter eren 209 Real Imag IO Result type iei Hide trien 45 EI EE 56 Recording tool Khown data WEE 234 Reference Result ue
454. nal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range O0 dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 205 SENSe ADJust LEVel SENSe DDEMod PRESet RLEVel This command initiates a measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current measurement This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Usage Event Performing a Measurement When the VSA application is activated a continuous sweep is performed automatically However you can stop and start a new measurement any time Furthermore you can perform a sequence of measurements using the Sequencer see Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function on page 12 Pr eben gh eege ege Nee ZEN Eege Aaen deeg 372 ll qe EE 372 TESCO Ne E 373 EINEN 374 INITiate EE
455. nal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input m UUl User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 164 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the R amp S FSW hardware is adapted according to this value it is recommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Note that the Reference Level value ignores the Shifting the Display Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle Note that for input from the External Mixer R amp S FSW B21 the maximum reference level also depends on the conversion loss see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual for details Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel on page 331 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed
456. nce The result of the current setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box Note Note the following restrictions to this parameter e Anoffset Ois not possible if you align the result range to the left border of the capture buffer e Anoffset that moves the pattern outside the result range is not allowed For example if you align the result to the left border of the pattern only offsets S 0 are allowed Otherwise you would never be able to find the pattern within the result range Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet on page 356 Symbol Number at Reference Start Defines the number of the symbol which marks the beginning of the alignment reference Source burst capture buffer or pattern The result of the current setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box In effect this setting defines an offset of the x axis in addition to the one defined for the signal structure see Offset on page 140 Note When you define the Symbol Number at Reference Start remember to take the offset defined for the signal structure into consideration see Offset on page 140 The Symbol Number at Pattern Start refers to the first symbol of the pattern offset not the first symbol of the pattern Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe VOFFset on page 357 Demodulation Settings During demodulation of the vector signal some undes
457. nce position ee 168 239 Reference value essen 168 239 ife 166 Scaling AU eec ter tre eren 239 241 Scaling auto softkey sssss 168 205 Scaling auto all windows softkey 205 Scaling statistics 168 Dc geet GE 170 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating eeesseeesssss 143 Activating Deactivating remote 306 Z Zooming Activating remote s esee 395 Area Multiple mode remote 395 Area remote cito tette taret 394 Deactivalirig 4 1 2 itt ett rt rine 221 Multiple mode rrt nerit 221 Multiple mode remote 395 396 FROM OLS sess ce 394 Restoring original display ssseesss 221 Single mode EE 221 Single mode remote ssssessess 394 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 505
458. nd Frontend Settings If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 334 INPut EATT AUTO on page 334 INPut EATT on page 333 5 5 3 2 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input The following settings and functions are available to define amplitude settings for input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 in the applications that support it They can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude tab of the Input dialog box Input Source Power Sensor Amplitude Frequency Reference Level Input Settings Value 0 0 dBm I Q Mode lLowiFT Offset 0 0 dB Input Config Auto Level Swap I Q Off Fullscale Level Mode Value 0 25 V Peak The input settings provided here are identical to those in the Input Source gt Analog Baseband tab see chapter 5 5 1 4 Analog Baseband Input Settings on page 156 For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Peters SVE e o EEMS 164 L Shifting the Display Offset essent tentent tes 165 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 165 Fullscale Level Mode value eene 165 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Sig
459. ne that corresponds to the component and one that corresponds to the Q component If Offset EVM is enabled however the VSA application compensates the delay of the Q component with respect to the component in the measurement signal as well as the reference signal before calculating the error vector That means that the error vector contains only one symbol instant per symbol period Remote command SENSe DDEMod ECALc OFFSet on page 358 Measurement Filter Settings The measurement filter can be used to filter both the measured signal and the reference signal and thus the error vector You can configure the measurement filter to be used For more information on measurement filters see chapter 4 1 4 Measurement Filters on page 57 LSS SSSR ee User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 200 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration mm A A A A 88 Measurement Filter Settings Measurement filter settings are displayed when you select the Meas Filter button in the Overview or the Demod Meas Filter softkey in the main VSA menu and then switch to the Meas Filter tab A live preview of the constellation with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly n Demodulation amp Meas Demodulation Demodulation Advanced Meas Filter Measurement Filter Auto accord
460. nere nne tr inrer SENSe DDEMod QAMF ORMal crie dcr RE reb Gh Y e Pe ERR LE SEDE De UE nena IENGeIDDEMod OAMNSTate ENEE SENSe DDEMOd QPSK FORMAal 4 ripis e ertet e tpe Ten a D Ra EE ea Va Eee cue dy db a da IGENSGe IDDEMod RL ENob AUTO ES User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 491 R amp S FSW K70 List of Remote Commands VSA IEN Ge IDDEMod RL ENGT VAL ue SENS DDEMGd SBAN EE IEN Ge IDDEMod SGEARch BURGCAUTTO nennen eere en nennen rnit ennt eterne IGENZGe IDDEMod SE AbRch BUPRGrCCONPoure AUTO IGENZGe IDDEMod SE AbRch BUPRGCGL ENG MiNimum eene IGENZGe IDDEMod SE ARch BUPRGCL ENG MANimum nnne SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt LENGth MINimun SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSEtMODE sse trennen enne SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt SKIP EA mg IEN Ge IDDEMod SGEARch BURG Skip Rlz ing eese nennen SENSe DDEM d SEARGh BURSESTATE tenentem tnter tnnt tn nnne n nennen IEN Ge IDDEMod SGEAbRch BURG TOL erance rennen nennen enne nnne IGENZGe IDDEMod SGEARch MBUPRSt CAL IGENZGe IDDEMod GE AbRch PATTem CGONPoure AUTO IGENZGe IDDEMod SE AbRch PATTem SGNC AUTO SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC STATe SENSe DDEMod SEARCh SYNC AUTO sse entente nne ennt kaiakiaki nanenane SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC CATalog esses nennen rennen tenentes SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent sess nnne trennen tette nni SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COPY esses innen enne nn
461. nfiguration remote sss 305 FSK Calculating errors sese 463 Compensation reete deett dias dense 463 Deviation error formula sess 466 Error model de Estimation 5 rrr trenes Measurement deviation formula 466 Modulation type ids e Reference deviation sess 136 Signal model EE 111 FSK deviation error Compensation E 195 DefihitiOri 1 arent trennen 116 FSK reference deviation zen 466 Fullscale level Analog Baseband B71 remote control 325 Analog Baseband GB 165 Full scale level Digital VQ E 154 Digital 1 Q remote eessseeess 322 323 Unit digital UO remote esses 323 G Gain distortion Ile S 109 Gain imbalance ppum 106 Effect ds rm 465 Preconditions for measurement 107 ierunt TET 251 Group delay Channel result type een 23 Result type srasni ege oce eta icu 36 GSM Programming example eee 442 H Handover frequency External Mixer B21 remote control 310 External Mixer B21 Hardware settings DISPIAV Ec 13 Harmonics Conversion loss table B21 sss 152 External Mixer B21 remo
462. ng is mandatory The ACL extension is automatically appended during storage Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 318 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 151 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration SS 8 S Input and Frontend Settings Comment An optional comment that describes the conversion loss table The comment can be freely defined by the user Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent on page 316 Band The waveguide or user defined band for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BAND on page 314 Harmonic Order The harmonic order of the range for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic on page 317 Bias The bias current which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It cor responds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s Tip You can also define the bias interactively while a preview of the trace with the changed setting is displayed see Bias Settings on page 148 Remote c
463. nput and output le Viele ET STATO EE 324 leif ee ULEscales AUTO EEN 325 INPutlOEULLscaleLEVel nennen enne nennen nnne nns nn srt nnne n nnn 325 dil ziis mora do EET 325 INPut IQ BALanced STATe State This command defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Ana log Baseband connectors or as a plain I Q signal via 2 simple ended lines User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 324 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA Parameters State ON Differential OFF Simple ended RST ON Example INP IQ BAL OFF Manual operation See Input configuration on page 157 INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO State This command defines whether the fullscale level i e the maximum input power on the Baseband Input connector is defined automatically according to the reference level or manually Parameters State ON Automatic definition OFF Manual definition according to INPut 10 FULLscale LEVel on page 325 RST ON Example INP IQ FULL AUTO OFF Manual operation See Fullscale Level Mode Value on page 165 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel lt PeakVoltage gt This command defines the peak voltage at the Baseband Input connector if the fullscale level is set to manual mode see 1NPut 10 FULLscale AUTO on page 325 Parameters lt PeakVoltage gt 0 25V 0 5V 1V 2V Peak voltage level at the connector For probes the possible fullscale values are adapted according to the probe s a
464. ns can be defined and then assigned to a standard Patterns are defined in the New Pattern dialog box which is displayed when you select the New button in the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box E mN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 188 R amp S9FSW K70 Configuration Burst and Pattern Configuration Name EDGE_HSR_QPSK_TSC1 Description Mod Order Symbols Format Binary Hex Remove f Size 31 For details on defining a pattern see chapter 8 2 2 2 How to Define a New Pattern on page 231 NaO EEN 189 PS CFI N E 189 lee De 190 ijs I 190 o pon PRIORE 190 E E o MM E E E E 190 L Removing EE 190 eor PL 190 Name Pattern name that will be displayed in selection list Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 354 Description Optional description of the pattern which is displayed in the pattern details Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 355 EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 189 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration 5 8 Result Range Configuration Mod order The order of modulation e g 8 for an 8 PSK Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate on page 355 Symbols The pattern definition is a symbol table consisting of one or more symbols The number of symbols is indicated as the Size to the left of the symbol table
465. nt measure ment data is displayed in the Preview area of the dialog box Whether a pattern was detected or not is indicated in the Information area If necessary adapt the I Q correlation threshold If bursts are not detected reduce the threshold if false bursts are detected increase the threshold Optionally enable the Meas only if pattern symbols correct option In this case measurement results are only displayed if a valid pattern has been detected Close the dialog box The selected pattern is used for a pattern search in the next measurement 8 2 2 1 How To Assign Patterns to a Standard Only patterns that are assigned to the currently selected VSA standard are available for the pattern search To add a predefined pattern to a standard 1 2 3 In the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box In the list of All Patterns select the required pattern If the required pattern is not displayed see To change the display for the list of patterns on page 232 Select Add to Standard The selected pattern is inserted in the list of Standard Patterns Select the pattern to be used for the pattern search from the list of Standard Pat terns To remove a predefined pattern from a standard 1 In the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab EEUU
466. nual 1173 9292 02 07 195 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration 5 9 2 Demodulation Settings Tracking The results of the equalizer in the previous sweep are considered to calculate the new filter until adaquate results are obtained This learn ing effect allows for powerful removement of larger distortions within a minimum of sweeps During the tracking phase calculation of the equal izer requires additional processing time Freeze The filter is no longer changed the current equalizer values are used for subsequent sweeps User A user defined equalizer loaded from a file is used Averaging The results of the equalizer in all previous sweeps since the instrument was switched on or the equalizer was reset are considered to calculate the new filter To start a new averaging process select the Reset Equalizer button Calculation of the equalizer requires additional pro cessing time Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer MODE on page 360 Filter Length Equalizer Settings Defines the length of the equalizer in symbols The longer the equalizer the more accu rate the filter becomes and the more distortion can be compensated However this requires extended calculation time The shorter the filter length the less calculation time is required during the equalizer s tracking or averaging phase Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LENGth on page 360 Reset Equalizer
467. o Perform Vector Signal Analysis b M l Ma How to Analyze the Measured Data Example Defining the result range In figure 8 2 a result range will be defined for the first 100 symbols of the capture buffer starting at the second symbol which has the symbol number 1 the capture buffer starts at symbol number 1 the first symbol to be displayed is the second symbol due to the offset 1 1 2 Result Range Alignment and Evaluation Range Result Range Length Result Length 26 042 us Result Range Alignment Reference Capture Burst Pattern Waveform Alignment Left C Center C Right Offset sym Symbol Number at Capture Start sym Visualization Fig 8 2 Example Defining the Result Range The result range is indicated by a green bar along the time axis in capture buffer result displays see chapter 4 6 Measurement Ranges on page 117 8 3 How to Analyze the Measured Data Once the data has been stored in the capture buffer the results can be analyzed in numerous ways The following tasks are meant to make you familiar with the most com mon VSA application features For a description of all analysis functions and settings see chapter 6 Analysis on page 206 1 Press the MEAS CONFIG key to display the VSA menu 2 Select the Display Config button in the Overview or the Display Config softkey and select the data sources for evaluation that are of interest to you see chapter 6 5 Display and
468. o Ue De Ee Ce Eo Ze de Ze Ze Ge Be Be Be De Ue Ve fe Ue De Ee te Ke de Je de Je Be Be Be Be De De Ue Ge Ee Le Ee Ee de de de ie Ge Be Me be Ge He Ee tie Ge Ee Ee Ee Ee fe fe bs Ee Ee N e e Se Ze Ge Ze Ze S o EI 071 LU 075 LI 031 01B 019 013 011 07B 079 073 DE 01D 017 045 O7F 07D 077 DIE GIC O16 014 040 L 041 044 T 000 L 001 L 004 01A 018 012 010 07A 078 072 070 DE 01C 016 014 O7E 07C 076 074 ee S Tw Ls Lu LE LR T 032 033 036 figure shows the upper right section of the diagram only CO O uc qo e a v qc Uy Pp oF D o7 0 5 03A 038 03B 039 03C 03F 03D 037 Det Fig 4 39 Constellation diagram for 512QAM including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal the 85 Fig 4 40 Constellation diagram for 1024QAM including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal the figure shows the upper right section of the diagram only User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 Symbol Mapping 4 3 9 ASK 2ASK OOK ASK stands for Amplitude Shift Keying 2ASK binary is often also referred to as On Off Keying OOK With this type of modulation the information is solely represented by the absolute amplitude of the received signal at the decision points Fig 4 41 Constellation diagram for 2ASK 4ASK 4ASK is a 4 ary Amplitude Shift Keying mapping type With this type of modulation the information is solely represented by the absolute
469. o channels the in phase I and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as UO signals UO signals are useful because the specific RF or IF frequencies are not needed The complete modulation information and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be analyzed in the I Q baseband Importing and exporting UO signals is useful for various applications e Generating and saving UO signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in exter nal software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FSW later e Capturing and saving UO signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to analyze them with the R amp S FSW or an external software tool later For example you can capture UO data using the I Q Analyzer application and then per form vector signal analysis on that data using the R amp S FSW VSA application if available For example you can capture UO data using the I Q Analyzer application if available and then perform a VSA measurement on that data later using the R amp S FSW VSA appli cation As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values Q data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The UO data is stored in a format with the file extension iqg tar For a detailed description see chapter A 7 UO Data File Format iq tar on page
470. o switch it off align your Result Range to the pattern make sure it does not exceed the burst ramps and choose Continuous Signal as the Signal Type in the Signal Descrip tion dialog For more information see e chapter 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Process on page 89 Message Sync Prefers Longer Pattern This message can only occur if the coarse synchronization is data aided i e is based on a known pattern In case the pattern is very short pattern based coarse synchronization might be unstable If demodulation is stable e g you get a reasonable EVM there is no need to change anything Otherwise you have two options e Switch to the non pattern based mode by setting the parameter Coarse Synchroni zation Data see Coarse Synchronization on page 199 e H 5 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 272 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement REESEN Frequently Asked Questions e f possible use a longer pattern For more information see chapter 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Process on page 89 Message Result Ranges Overlap This message does not indicate an error It is merely displayed to inform you that the defined result ranges in the capture buffer overlap Thus some captured data is evalu ated more than once For example the same peak value may be listed several times if itis included in several result ranges and averaging is performed on partially duplicate val
471. ols CALC TRAC ADJ BURS Defines the burst as the reference for the result range User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 443 Programming Examples CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG LEFT Aligns the result range to the left edge of the burst CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG OFFS 10 Defines an offset of 10 symbols from the burst start DISP TRAC X VOFF 10 Defines the symbol number 10 as the result range start CALC ELIN STAT ON CALC ELIN1 10 CALC ELIN2 190 Evaluation range starts at symbol 10 and ends at symbol 190 LAY WIND4 REM Close symbol table display window 4 DISPlay WINDow1 TRACe2 MODE MAXH Add a second trace in max hold mode to EVM vs Time display window 1 LAY ADD 3 RIGH MEAS Create new window to the right of capture buffer window 3 with measurement signal as data type Result 4 CALC4 FORM MAGN Set result type for window 4 to magnitude DISPlay WINDow4 TRACe2 MODE WRIT CALC4 TRAC2 REF Add a second trace in clear write mode for the reference signal CALC LIM MACC STAT ON Activates limit checks for all values in the Result Summary INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiate a new measurement and wait until the 10 sweeps have finished CALC2 MARK FUNC DDEM STAT EVM AVG CALC LIM MACC EVM RCUR Query the value and check the limit for the EVM RMS value in the result summary for the current evaluation range Result CALC2 MARK FUNC DDEM STAT EVM PAVG R amp S FSW K70 Remot
472. olute Capture buffer Window 4 Symbol table hexadecimal Display points per symbol Sample rate 4 Apart from the Preset Channel function see Preset Channel on page 132 the fol lowing functions are available to restore factory settings to the VSA application via soft keys in the MEAS menu Restore Factory ZEIEN Em 128 L Restore Standard Eiles eese nentes nas 128 L Restore Pattern Eies AE 128 Restore Factory Settings Opens a submenu that allows you to restore all standards and pattern settings on the instrument to the values predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery Restore Standard Files Restore Factory Settings Restores the standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery Note that this function will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Remote command SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue on page 291 Restore Pattern Files Restore Factory Settings Restores the pattern files predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery Remote command SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue on page 291 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards Various predefined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the VSA application In addition you can create your own settings files for user specific measurements For an overview of predefined standards and
473. ommand SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 315 Mixer Name Specifies the name of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer on page 317 Mixer S N Specifies the serial number of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber on page 318 e B User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 152 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration 5 1 3 Input and Frontend Settings Mixer Type Specifies whether the external mixer for which the table is to be applied is a two port or three port type This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs on page 317 Position Value Each position value pair defines the correction value for conversion loss for a specific frequency The reference values must be entered in order of increasing frequencies A maximum of 50 reference values can be entered To enter a new value pair tap the Position Value table or select the Insert Value b
474. ommand queries the results of the error vector magnitude measurement of digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table ES User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 416 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA a cOH a J 4 U nn Retrieving Results Query parameters type none RMS EVM value of display points of current sweep AVG Average of RMS EVM values over several sweeps PAVG Average of maximum EVM values over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS EVM value over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum EVM values over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum EVM values over several sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of EVM values over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FDERror type This command queries the results of the FSK deviation error of FSK modulated signals Query parameters type none Deviation error for current sweep AVG Average FSK deviation error RPE Peak FSK deviation error SDEV Standard deviation of FSK deviation error PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK deviation error Usage Query only CALCu
475. omponent with respect to the component in the measurement signal as well as the reference signal before calculating the error vector That means that the error vector contains only one symbol instant per symbol period OFF the VSA application substracts the measured signal from the ref erence signal to calculate the error vector This method results in the fact that the error vector contains two symbol instants per symbol period one that corresponds to the component and one that corresponds to the Q component RST 1 Manual operation See Offset EVM on page 200 SENSe DDEMod EPRate AUTO lt LinkMode gt Defines how many sample points are used at each symbol to calculate modulation accu racy results automatically If enabled the VSA application uses the following settings depending on the modulation type Modulation Est Points PSK QAM 1 Offset QPSK 2 FSK MSK Sample rate see SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 340 Setting parameters lt LinkMode gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Estimation Points Sym on page 198 SENSe DDEMod EPRate VALue lt EstOverSmplg gt Defines how many sample points are used at each symbol to calculate modulation accu racy results For more information see Estimation points per symbol on page 121 You can also let the VSA application decide how many estimation points to use see SENSe DDEMod EPRate AUTO on page 359
476. on sss 438 IESSE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 489 R amp S FSW K70 List of Remote Commands VSA STATus QUEStionable MODulation n PHASe PTRansition sese 438 STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz PDHAGeIEVENOY nennen nnne 436 STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz P Ransttion nennen nnne 438 SGTATusOUEG onable MODulsaton nzfEMENUN nnne een nennen nere nnd 436 STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDiition esses eene enne nennen nnn tnit nennt nennen 436 STATusOUEG onable POWer ENAbBle AA 437 STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRamnsition eene ennt enne n nnne nente 438 SGTATusOUEGtonable PbOuWerP Ransitton eene enemies nnn 439 STATusOUEGtonable POMWert EVEN 437 STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDItION 0 eene nnetnn nennen rnnt n tren 436 STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABIO AA 437 TRACelOWBANdTSTATel nnne ret rd trrtrre tereti rre treten nennen etre s tnit Be Cr MENU E TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff TRIGger SEQuence DT IMe 1 conr tort enn it inre etre th eth rin e eher ck Freinage reas TRIGger SEQuence HOLDPofI TIME erret ru erret AALE EEr TRIGger SEQuenceJ IFPower HOLDOff esses nennen nnne nre nnnee trennt ense trnnen tenens enne TRIGger SEQuence FPower HYSTeresis reete nente rane tn tn nni tb hana trier TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower ener renaa tenni tan anat tu n innu hana aka dn Ra S Ea EE a naa Eee ea
477. on The minimum symbol rate is 25 Hz The maximum symbol rate depends on the defined Sample Rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and I Q Bandwidth on page 61 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SRATe on page 300 Transmit Filter Type Defines the type of transmit filter An overview of available transmit filters is provided in chapter A 3 1 Transmit Filters on page 456 For more information on transmit filters see chapter 4 1 3 Modulation and Demodulation Filters on page 56 Remote command SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on page 301 To define the name of the transmit filter to be used SENSe DDEMod TFILter STATe on page 301 To switch off the transmit filter SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER on page 301 To select a user defined filter Load User Filter Transmit Filter Type Opens a file selection dialog box to select the user defined transmit filter to be used Note If a user defined transmit filter is selected and the measurement filter is defined automatically see Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto on page 201 a Low ISI measurement filter according to the selected user filter is cal culated and used For details see chapter 4 1 5 Customized Filters on page 59 For detailed instructions on working with user defined filters see chapter 8 2 1 How to Select User Defined Filters on page 229 Remote command SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER on p
478. on total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division Manual operation See Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions on page 168 See Range per Division on page 168 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid The R amp S FSW adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly For measurements with the external generator R amp S FSW B10 the command defines the position of the reference value Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions on page 168 See Y Axis Reference Position on page 168 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid EEUU RA N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 338 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 5 3 Configuring VSA For external generator calibration measurements requires External Generator Control option R amp S FSW B10 this command defines the power offset value assigned to the reference position Parameters lt Value gt RST 0 dBm coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Sets the power value assigned to the reference position to 20 dBm Manual operation See Configuring
479. on I Q on page 25 Table 10 1 Constellation I Q and Vector HO for pi 4 DQPSK modulation VSA lam std TETRA_C ik SR 18 0 kHz Freq 1 0GHz Res Len 5 C Constellation I Q Meas amp Ref Start 5 13 D Vector 1 Q Meas amp Ref R amp S FSQ K70 R amp S FSW K70 Problem the MSK FSK signal demodulates on the R amp S FSQ K70 but not on the R amp S FSW K70 or Why do I have to choose different transmit filters in the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R amp S FSW K70 When generating an MSK FSK reference signal the R amp S FSQ K70 automatically repla ces the Dirac pulses generated by the frequency mapper with square pulses with the length of one symbol In the R amp S FSW K70 however this replacement is part of the transmit filter routine Thus the R amp S FSQ and the R amp S FSW require different transmit filters for measuring the same FSK MSK signal Example e f your transmit filter for the R amp S FSQ K70 was NONE you need to choose Rec tangular as the transmit filter type in the R amp S FSW e f your transmit filter for the R amp S FSQ K70 was GAUSS you need to choose GMSK as the transmit filter type in the R amp S FSW Problem The EVM trace looks okay but the EVM in the result summary is signifi cantly different Solution e Make sure that the position of the Evaluation Lines is reasonable The Result Sum mary only evaluates sample instants that are within the evaluation lines Hence in the case
480. on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 3 2 32 Vector UO The complex source signal as an X Y plot all available samples as defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 219 are drawn and connected The scaling of the capture buffer depends on the input source e Scaling is relative to the current reference level for RF input e Scaling is relative to the full scale level for I Q input User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 51 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Common Parameters in VSA Available for source types e Capture Buffer e Meas amp Ref Signal e Error Vector 1 Vector I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Fig 3 24 Result display for Vector LO Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM COMP to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 3 3 Common Parameters in VSA Depending on the modulation type you are using different signal parameters are deter mined during vector signal analysis Details concerning the calculation of individual parameters can be found in chapter 4 5 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors on page 101 and chapter A 6 For mulae on page 462 User Manua
481. on shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value Note however that the Reference Level value ignores the Reference Level Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle To determine the required offset consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal A positive value indicates that an attenuation took place R amp S FSW increa ses the displayed power values a negative value indicates an external gain R amp S FSW decreases the displayed power values The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 331 ST User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 161 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the fullscale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal com pression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 204 Re
482. op 10000 sym Fig 9 8 Preview of capture buffer 9 3 3 Navigating Through the Capture Buffer This example describes how to navigate through the capture buffer for a continuous sig nal This navigation feature is especially important for bursted signals Therefore we provide a further navigation example for the GSM EDGE signal 1 In order to see more details in the capture buffer close window 4 a Press the Display Config softkey or the Display Configuration button in the Overview b Select the luj Delete icon for window 4 g Close the SmartGrid mode by tapping the Close icon at the top right corner of the toolbar 2 Press the RUN SINGLE key 3 In the EVM vs Time display window 1 add a maximum hold trace by pressing the TRACE key and then selecting the Trace Config softkey see chapter 9 2 5 Aver aging Several Evaluations on page 252 4 Re evaluate the whole capture buffer by pressing the SWEEP key and then the Refresh softkey 5 Use the Select Result Rng softkey to navigate through your capture buffer Thus you can determine which peak was caused by which burst e M 3 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 257 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals spectrum VSA Ref Level 25 00 dBm Std EDGE 6P
483. or IQ Offset By default all parameters are displayed If you select a specific parameter the Result Summary display is replaced by the individual result display EVM RMS 0 84 B Mean Fig 3 21 Result display for individual value in Result Summary In addition to the current measurement value the statistical results see on page 46 and the peak limit value see on page 216 for the selected parameter are displayed For details on the displayed results see on page 52 Remote command on page 407 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 49 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Result Types in VSA 3 2 30 Symbol Table Symbol numbers are displayed as a table Each symbol is represented by an entry in the table The symbols can be displayed in binary octal hexadecimal or decimal format Selected symbols using markers are highlighted by a blue frame Example 4Symbols Hexadecimal FTN INTR eT ae WS VITA NIRE WIE TNR NIRE TR SO RE leg ale ele A2 gt 208 2 224 240 256 272 288 304 320 336 SI 368 384 400 Se r IJ 1 1 OU Di GJ f PO fe O QINIOIOIO iG i i IC Li Mes em He UM tul 3 IJ IC HOH hic QIN IO yi bi IW IO ris rie JI elt MOO GJ GJ w NJ RO IC Q N ND ND IO e e GG i GJ w C olo MJ h MC oO Fig 3 22 Result display for Symbols in hexadecimal mode If a pattern sea
484. or VSA 11 9 2 Retrieving Results For Equalizer diagrams the command returns the y axis values of the equalizer trace The number of returned values depends on the result type For impulse response diagrams filter length sample rate 1 For frequency response channel and group delay diagrams 4096 values You can query the x value that relates to the first value of the y axis using DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt on page 411 Setting parameters lt Trace gt TRACe1 TRACe2 TRACe3 TRACe4 TRACe5 TRACe6 TRACe1R TRACe1 TRACe2R TRACe21 TRACe3R TRACe3l TRACe1 2 3 4 5 6 The complete data from the corresponding trace TRACe1R TRACe2R TRACe3R The real data from the corresponding trace The parameters are available for the Real Imaginary result types TRACelI TRACe2I TRACe3l The imaginary data from the corresponding trace The parameters are available for the Real Imaginary result types Retrieving Parameter Values For each parameter the VSA application calculates and shows various statistical values e Current value e Mean value Calculated as the average of the number of results defined by the Statistic Count e Peak value e Standard deviation e 95 percentile Unlike the mean value the 95 ile is a result of all measurement results since the last start of a single or continous sweep or of all measurements since the last change of a measurement parameter For d
485. or hexadec imal For lt ModulationOrder gt values 232 use binary 2 lt ModulationOrder gt lt Modulation Order gt 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 Number of values each symbol can represent order of modula tion e g 8 for 8 PSK For lt ModulationOrder gt values 232 use lt Base gt 2 lt ResultLength gt lt ResultLength gt 1 up to 2000 Number of symbols in each Data element The number must be identical to the Result Length setting in the Result Range dialog box i e the number of symbols to be demodulated the exact number also depends on available memory space User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 460 R amp S FSW K70 Annex me ay Known Data File Syntax Description Syntax Possible Values Description lt Data gt lt Data gt One character per symbol in One possible sequence of symbols that can be demodulated the sequence from the input signal Possible characters are Up to 6000 different sequences i e lt Data gt elements can be 0 to n 1 where n is the defined in total lt ModulationOrder gt Spaces tabs and line breaks are ignored lt RS_VSA_KNOWN_DATA FILE as specified File End the exact number also depends on available memory space Sample xml file for known data lt RS VSA KNOWN D
486. origin offset after demodulation and error compensation The effect of an UO offset in the transmitter is shown in figure 4 56 The UO offset can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings In this case the offset does not affect the EVM R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics El Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Example The following figures compare the results for a compensated UO offset of 2 596 and a non compensated offset UO Offset compensated for UO Offset NOT compensated for A IZQ Const Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw A IZQ Const Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Stop 2 52 e 1 Clrw Stop 2 52 Start 0 sym Stop 300 sym Start 0 sym Stop 300 sym Gain Imbalance Quadrature B E E ae eee 1 0 5 0 0 5 1 Inphase Fig 4 57 Effect of gain imbalance The gain difference in the and Q channels during signal generation in the transmitter is referred to as gain imbalance The effect of this error on the constellation diagram and the unit circle are shown in figure 4 57 In the example the gain in the channel is slightly reduced which causes a distortion of coordinates in the direction The unit circle of the ideal constellation points has an elliptic shape User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 106 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors The gain imbalance can be compensated for if the corresponding optio
487. ormula p Result types er e eere ien ees eta ed 17 Error Vector Magnitude EVM DefihitiOrt rasiri treni 103 onr AER 462 Result type uiii eti ii eiie 27 RMS peak formulae ssssssesss 465 Estimation Aldorithitfis EE 101 FSK 114 Points per symbol ss cc seernes 102 121 198 PSK QAM MSK ieesccieei itte tnn tine 102 bcure m IEA 102 Evaluation Refreshing P Specific range X 2 Ur m Evaluation methods Data SOFO M 15 bcucme 398 Evaluation range V ele Lee EE 202 Configuration remote ssssesssss 368 ueniet 120 Display zi Entire result range esses 203 Start stop values mener 203 LS lge EE 458 Exporting FUNCOMS e 222 UO data 126 222 223 476 480 UO data remote eee 426 SOfIKOy x sod tae rrr re repe se ro e d Ee 223 Trace data 242 Uc M 223 External Mixer B21 esses 145 Activating remote control 307 Lun 310 Basic Settings cette eia edd 147 Configuration as 144 Conversion loss seeseee 147 Conversion loss tables eeseeeeseese 150 Frequency range 145 Handover frequency ssssseeee 145 Harmonic Order ret nennen 146 H
488. orresponds to that of the originally measured signal With respect to the I Q reconstruction the mea sured magnitude is timing compensated using the timing offset estimated from the mea sured instantaneous frequency This ensures that the measured magnitude and fre quency remain synchronized in the reconstructed UO waveform A 6 2 Result Summary Evaluations The evaluations for the result summary take place at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 219 This value can be one of the following e 1 only the symbol instant contributes to the result e 2 two samples per symbol instant contribute to the result required for offset QPSK e the Sample rate defined for data acquisition see Sample Rate on page 172 all samples contribute to the result equally The results are determined by the evaluation range The sampling instants at this rate are referred to as t here i e t n Tp where Tp equals the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter U User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 464 R amp S9FSW K70 Annex A 6 2 1 Formulae PSK QAM and MSK Modulation For PSK QAM and MSK modulation the estimation model is described in detail in chapter chapter 4 5 1 PSK QAM and MSK Modulation on page 101 The parameters of the PSK QAM and MSK specific result summary table can be related to the distortion mo
489. ow to Check Limits for Modulation Accuracy on page 241 Checking Modulation Accuracy Lits ooi etr Rec ert ER Reed rion uzine 216 Sene DEI e 216 Gumeni Mean Peak iussisti iiaa edades caua e i ta cad dus e D Ra dd una 216 GE 216 Tc 217 Checking Modulation Accuracy Limits Activates or deactivates evaluation of modulation accuracy limits in the result summary Remote command CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy STATe on page 388 Set to Default Restores the default limits and deactivates all checks Remote command CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy DEFault on page 388 Current Mean Peak Defines and activates the limits for the currently measured value the mean and the peak value on separate tabs Note that the limits for the current and peak values are always the same Limit Value Current Mean Peak Define the limit with which the currently measured mean or peak value is to be compared A different limit value can be defined for each result type Depending on the modulation type different result types are available Result type Remote command PSK MSK QAM EVM RMS CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent VALue on page 390 EVM Peak CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent VALue on page 390 Phase Err Rms CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent VALue on page 392 Phase Err Peak CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy P
490. ower Optimization Minimize RMS Error Estimation Points Sym Auto Coarse Synchronization Fine Synchronization Preview Const I Q Meas amp Ref Normalize EVM 10 TEE 197 e TP Lo EEN 198 EstitiadomPolhte S VTL eege ee se fasion aaa dee 198 EIERE SION REC UT 199 SINT e EE 199 If SSE c 200 ern 200 Normalize EVM to Normalizes the EVM to the specified power value This setting is not available for MSK or FSK modulation e Max Ref Power Maximum power of the reference signal at the symbol instants e Mean Ref Power mean power of the reference signal at the symbol instants e Mean Constellation Power User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 197 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration REESEN Demodulation Settings Mean expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants e Max Constellation Power The maximum expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants Remote command SENSe DDEMod ECALc MODE on page 358 Optimization Determines the method used to calculate the result parameters The required method depends on the used standard and is set according to the selected standard by default Minimize RMS Optimizes calculation such that the RMS of the error vector is minimal Error Minimize Optimizes calculation such that EVM is minimal EVM Remote comman
491. own power Estimation The VSA application includes two synchronization stages The first stage has already been described in the context of the Demodulation amp Symbol Decisions block see chapter 4 4 3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions on page 94 The second stage is realized within the Synchronization block Here the measurement signal is matched to the reference signal by minimizing the mean square of the error vector magnitude This is done by selecting the optimum parameter vector 2 x arg wi MEAS REF at The minimization takes place at the sample instants specified by the Estimation Points Sym parameter i e t n T with Tg the sampling period used for estimation Subsequently the measurement signal is corrected with the determined parameter vec tor Note that with a subset of the parameters you can enable or disable correction see chapter 5 9 1 Demodulation Compensation on page 193 Estimation ranges The estimation ranges are determined internally according to the signal description e For continuous signals the estimation range corresponds to the entire result range since it can then be assumed that the signal consists of valid modulated symbols at all time instants e Forbursted signals the estimation range corresponds to the overlapping area of the detected burst and the Result Range Furthermore the Run In Run Out ranges see Burst Settings on page 139 are explicitly excluded fro
492. page 184 See Pattern Search On on page 188 Configuring Patterns New patterns can be defined and assigned to a signal standard Useful commands for configuring patterns described elsewhere SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 352 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh SYNC CATalog on page 303 Remote commands exclusive to configuring patterns SENSe jDDEMod SEARch SYNG COMNMIBRI nus nnd un nhan nent paenitens 353 SENSe IDDEMod SEARch SYNG CODY usua eaa tuk enn eura euh ur eue mnn kh iden uui nena nuhi n eR na eats 353 SBENS amp IDDEMod SEARch SYNCG BDEL lfe enata rri err nn ere ens 354 ISENSe JDDEMod SEARcCh S YNG DATA adhaerent nna hu sunu EENS 354 SENS amp DDEMod SEARCH SYNC NAME essi ireeecidine cha pna tetur a ntu pa aaa tu tina IR ENKEN DOSEN e 354 SENSe JDDEMod SEARch S YNG NSTalte 2 1 aote otra iode n tero aaa 355 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern ADD eeeeeeeeeeneneeneen nennen nnne nnn 355 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern REMoOve eeeeeeeene nennen 355 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNG TEXT 2a cnu tr Ruhe nap aE 355 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent Comment This command defines a comment to a sync pattern The pattern must have been selected before using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 354 Setting parameters Comment string Manual operation See Edit on page 187 See New on page
493. page 237 SS n User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 226 R amp S FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis REESEN How to Perform VSA According to Digital Standards To load predefined settings files 1 In the Meas menu select the Digital Standards softkey 2 Inthe file selection dialog box select the standard whose settings you want to load To change the path press the arrow icons at the right end of the Path field and select the required folder from the file system 3 Press the Load button The dialog box is closed and the instrument is adjusted to the stored settings for the selected standard To store settings as a standard file 1 Configure the measurement as required see chapter 8 2 How to Perform Custom ized VSA Measurements on page 228 2 In the Meas menu select the Digital Standards softkey 3 In the File Name field enter the name of the standard for which you want to store settings To change the path press the arrow icons at the right end of the Path field and select the required folder from the file system To insert a new folder select the New Folder button and enter a name in the New Folder dialog box 4 Press the Save button The dialog box is closed and the current measurement settings are stored in a stand ard file To delete standard files 1 In the Meas menu select the Digital Standards softkey 2 In the Manage VSA Standards file selection dialog box
494. pending on sample rate parameter Sample rate parameter Max symbol rate 4 symbol rate 2500 MSymbols 8 symbol rate 1250 MSymbols 16 symbol rate 625 MSymbols 32 symbol rate 312 5 MSymbols 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input Definitions e Input sample rate ISR the sample rate of the useful data provided by the connec ted instrument to the R amp S FSW input e User Output Sample rate SR the sample rate that is defined by the user e g in the Data Aquisition dialog box in the UO Analyzer application and which is used as the basis for analysis or output e Usable UO Analysis bandwidth the bandwidth range in which the signal remains undistorted in regard to amplitude characteristic and group delay this range can be used for accurate analysis by the R amp S FSW For the I Q data acquisition digital decimation filters are used internally The passband of these digital filters determines the maximum usable I Q bandwidth In consequence signals within the usable UO bandwidth passband remain unchanged while signals outside the usable UO bandwidth passband are suppressed Usually the suppressed signals are noise artifacts and the second IF side band If frequencies of interest to you are also suppressed you should try to increase the output sample rate since this increa ses the maximum usable UO bandwidth D Bandwidth extension options The maximum usable UO bandwi
495. play LAYout WINDow n ADD Direction WindowType This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this command the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 for a list of available window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtify WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Query only LAY out WINDow lt n gt REMove This command removes the window
496. ple rate of the R amp S FSW may differ and is defined using SENS DEM PRAT see SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 340 E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 323 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 154 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital UO input signal is set automatically by the con nected device This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 154 11 5 2 4 Configuring Input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 The following commands are required to control the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 in a remote environment They are only available if this option is installed For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual Useful commands for Analog Baseband data described elsewhere INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 306 SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 329 SENSe SWAPig on page 341 Commands for the Analog Baseband calibration signal are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands exclusive to Analog Baseband data i
497. port Table Imports a stored conversion loss table from any directory and copies it to the instrument s C r_s instr user cv1 directory It can then be assigned for use for a specific frequency range see Conversion loss on page 147 Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables Conversion loss tables can be defined and edited in the Edit conversion loss table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Table button in the External Mixer gt Conversion loss table settings A preview pane displays the current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries E MMN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 150 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Table J File Name USERTABLE Comment User defined conversion loss table for USER band Band Settings Harmonic order Mixer S N 123 4567 Bias 1 0 mA Mixer Type Value Position 55 00000000000 GHz 20 00 dB 75 00000000000 GHz 30 00 dB NEN TE H EH MIKOF KEE 153 osito t dz ege EE ee 153 Insert E 153 BAT C E 153 cR REATUS 153 Sip MEER 153 DAVE RR 153 File Name Defines the name under which the table is stored in the C r_s instr user cvl directory on the instrument The name of the table is identical with the name of the file without extension in which the table is stored This setti
498. position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt This command queries the first value of the x axis in symbols or time depending on the unit setting for the x axis Note using the CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet com mand the burst is shifted in the diagram the x axis thus no longer begins on the left at 0 symbols but at a selectable value Usage Query only FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Manual operation See Decimal Separator on page 210 rr lM User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 411 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA PERENNEM CUM D w n nm mD Retrieving Results FORMat DEXPort HEADer Header This command defines if a file header includ
499. pplication in MSRA operating mode However a capture offset can be defined with a similar effect as a trigger offset It defines an offset from the start of the captured data from the MSRA Master to the start of the application data for vector signal analysis See Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Tasks for manual configuration are described in chapter 5 6 2 Trigger Settings on page 173 TRIGger GEQuence BBPowerHOEBDuol 1 22 noire rere cheat aaa aaa retten hin 342 TRIGGSrESEQuemce DTME T R E EEE E a 343 TRiGger SEQuence HOLDOfif TIME 2 2 s lt casesceccceiacccececntaccceuchaanecedsveseedevecatacceccvnaas 343 TRlGoert GtOuencellEbower HOL Doft 343 TRIGger SEQuencelIFPowerYS Teresis conterere teh nett red rnnt 344 TRIGger SEQuence EEVOlBBPOWeL irrito ii hene eres kei neta eres 344 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel EXTernal port eese nennen 344 TRIGgen SEQuencel LE VelFPOWr 2 tacuit ente a sre etre cuanto truth enhn 345 TRIGger SEQu nce LEVelIOPOWO6F eoe nk nnn nn hn nnne er ee a ee 345 lee RE s 345 TRiGoert SEQuence SOURCE neret aaka iadenin iiaia iaie anana 346 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff lt Period gt This command defines the holding time before the baseband power trigger event The command requires the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or th
500. ption and switch to the Signal Structure tab 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 To display all available patterns select Show All To display all patterns that are compatible to the defined standard select Show Compatible To display only patterns that contain a specific prefix enter the Prefix in the edit field To edit a predefined pattern 1 Inthe Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 Select the pattern from the list of All Patterns User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 232 R amp S FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements 4 Press Edit Pattern 5 Change the settings as required as described in chapter 8 2 2 2 How to Define a New Pattern on page 231 To delete a predefined pattern 1 Inthe Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 Select the pattern from the list of All Patterns 4 Press Delete Pattern The pattern is removed from the lists of available and assigned patterns and can no longer be assigned to any standard Any existing assignments to other standards are removed as well To restore predefined patterns Default patterns provided by Rohde
501. quire DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 305 SS B o User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 162 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration REESEN Input and Frontend Settings RF Attenuation Defines the mechanical attenuation for RF input This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital Baseband Interface option R amp S FSW B17 Attenuation Mode Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting By default and when Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 is not available mechanical attenuation is applied This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB also using the rotary knob Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is speci fied in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum
502. r 4 4 4 Pattern Sym bol Check on page 97 If modulation types are used where the information is represented by the phase transition e g differential PSK or MSK the absolute phase position is not an issue Thus the ambi guity of the starting phase does not have an influence on the symbol decisions If the measurement signal contains a known pattern it is also possible to use a data aided DA estimator at this stage This means that the estimator operates on a known data sequence i e the pattern If the signal contains a pattern it is possible to choose between the above described non data aided estimator and the data aided estimator with the setting Coarse Synchronization Pattern If the data aided estimator is employed the phase ambiguitiy can be resolved at this stage ERE A E SSS SSF User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 95 Overview of the Demodulation Process Demodulation amp Symbol Decision Senge IQ Samples From Result Range Extract Result Range IQ Meas with corrected timing IQ Meas with corrected timing phase frequency offset scaling Symbol Decision IQ Meas corrected IQ Symbols Passed on to Pattern Symbol Check Fig 4 47 Demodulation and Symbol Decision algorithm R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics EENEG Overview of the Demodulation Process 4 4 4 Pattern Symbol Check This stage performs a bit by bit comparison between the selected
503. r information to be included To export the traces in all windows select Export Trace to ASCII File for all Win dows To export the traces only for the currently selected window select Export Trace to ASCII File for Specific Window To export the data from another window select it from the Specifics for list then export again In either case all traces of the selected window s are exported Define a file name and storage location and select OK The data is stored in a file and can be analyzed in an external application E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 243 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Connecting the Transmitter and Analyzer 9 Measurement Examples Some sample measurements for the digital GSM and EDGE standards provide a quick introduction to typical vector analyzer measurements The individual measurements are in logical order and are meant to familiarize you gradually with the measurements required of general vector signal analysis The following equipment is required in addition to the R amp S FSW with option R amp S FSW K70 e 1 test transmitter GSM compatible for Measurement 2 preferably R amp S SMU 1141 2005 02 with the digital standard option GSM EDGE order number 1160 7609 02 e 1 ParData Adapter R amp S SMU Z5 for R amp S SMU 1160 4545 02 e 1RF cable with 2 male N connectors e 2RFcable with 2 male BNC connectors e 2power cables Transmitter operation is only described as far
504. race If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 386 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 384 e Y Y VYVVM MM O MM User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 214 R amp S FSW K70 Analysis Ech Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT on page 386 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 384 6 4 Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically see Modulation Accuracy on page 18 Limits and the limit check are configured in the Limits dialog box that is displayed when you press the ModAcc Limits Config softkey in the Lines menu Modulation Accuracy Limits a Limit Checking On Off Set to Default Current Mean Peak Limit Value Check Magnitude Error RMS Magnitude Error Peak Oem ge oie wage 1 0 kHz Rho 0 999 I Q Offset 40 0 dB Note Limits for Current and Peak are always equal User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 215 R amp S FSW K70 Analysis EE Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines For details on working with limits see chapter 8 3 2 H
505. rap Meas amp Ref e 1M Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 17 Result display Phase Wrap Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL REF to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM PHASe to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 3 2 27 Phase Unwrap The phase of the signal the display is not limited to 180 180 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 44 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Result Types in VSA 1 Phase Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 18 Result display Phase Unwrap Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM UPHase to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 3 2 28 Real Imag UO Real and imaginary part of the measurement or reference signal in separate measure ment diagrams the x axis scaled in time units or symbols is identical for both diagrams Available for source types e Capture Buffer e Meas amp Ref Signal e Error Vector The scaling of the capture buffer depends on the input source e Scaling is relative to the current reference le
506. ration Demodulation Settings Demodulation amp Measurement Filter e W e Demodulation Demodulation Advanced Meas Filter LS Compensate for Carrier Frequency Drift FSK Deviation Error Symbol Rate Error Equalizer State Mode Filter Length Reset Equalizer Preview Preview Const Freq Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 21 888 MHz Stop 21 888 MHz Fig 5 3 Demodulation settings for FSK modulation r r r rr oa Oo Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM If enabled compensation for various effects is taken into consideration during demodu lation Thus these distortions are not shown in the calculated error values Note Note that compensation for all the listed distortions can result in lower EVM values e Q Offset default on e QImbalance User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 194 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration EE Demodulation Settings e Amplitude Droop default on e Symbol Rate Error required to display the SRE in the Result Summary e Channel default on Note that channel distortion can only be determined if the equalizer is on see State on page 195 Thus compensation can only be disabled if the equalizer is on By default channel compensation is enabled to improve accuracy of the error results If compensation is disabled the EVM is calculated from the original input signal with channel distortions For details on these effects see chapter 4 5 1 3 Modulation Errors on page 1
507. ration on page 190 e chapter 8 2 4 How to Define the Result Range on page 236 Message Short Pattern Pattern Search Might Fail The R amp S FSW performs the pattern search in two stages e Stage 1 involves the generation of an I Q pattern waveform by modulating the pattern symbol sequence The UO pattern is then correlated with the measured signal At SS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 270 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement REESEN Explanation of Error Messages positions where the correlation metric exceeds the I Q Correlation Threshold bel Q pattern is found e Stage 2 demodulates the measured signal at the I Q pattern location and the trans mitted symbols are checked for correctness against the pattern symbol sequence In case of a very short pattern i e a pattern length in the order of the inter symbol inter ference ISI duration a number of issues can arise e False positive The UO pattern is found at positions where the transmitted symbols differ from the pattern symbols Solution Try one of the following Activate Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct Increase the I Q Correlation Threshold see chapter 5 7 2 Pattern Search on page 183 e False negative The I Q pattern search misses a position where transmitted symbols match the pat tern symbols Solution Decrease the I Q Correlation Threshold see chapter 5 7 2 Pattern Search on page 183 In
508. rcentile for these values is calculated based on their absolute values Again the Rho value is handled differently Here the 5 Percentile is displayed since the lowest Rho value represents the worst case Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MACC to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM RSUM to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 CALC MARK FUNC DDEM STAT parameter to query individual parameter values see chapter 11 9 2 Retrieving Parameter Val ues on page 414 Result Summary Individual Results The Result Summary can display either all or only a single modulation accuracy param eter Only the most important parameters can be displayed individually namely those for which modulation accuracy limits can be defined see Limit Value on page 216 Individual results are selected for display by tapping the Result Summary table header A Table Configuration dialog box is displayed in which you can select the parameter to be displayed LEE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 48 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Result Types in VSA Result Summary Configuration Curren Me Results to be displayed H L EVM RMS L EVM Peak L i Phase Errors RMS e Phase Error Peak e Magnitude Error RMS e Magnitude Error Peak e Carrier Frequency Err
509. rch is active a found pattern is indicated by a green background in the symbol table If during demodulation individual symbols do not match the pattern after all these symbols are indicated by a red frame 4 Symbols Hexadecimal Smia saias nian ania Wie legt lege lu ey O C mMOui io d e IO IO B em O m 21010 O O eo KO OO leo O Bl O O e OOl ie e 0 e le Men Ba Mam Un HMM O m O bert S 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 e O O O O O Pattern Not Found Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL XTIM DDEM SYMB to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 TRAC DATA TRACE1 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 50 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Result Types in VSA to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 3 2 31 Vector Frequency The instantenous frequency of the source signal as an X Y plot all available samples as defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 219 are drawn and connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 3 Vector Freq Meas amp Ref 1M CIW Fig 3 23 Result display for Vector Frequency Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM COVF to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat
510. re per symbol The sample rate in MHz is indi cated for reference This parameter affects the demodulation bandwidth and thus the usable UO bandwidth The maximum sample rate depends on the defined Symbol Rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth on page 61 For details on selecting the suitable sample rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth on page 61 Remote command SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 340 Maximum Bandwidth Defines the maximum bandwidth to be used by the R amp S FSW for UO data acquisition This setting is only available if the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B160 B320 is installed Otherwise the maximum bandwidth is determined automatically For details on the maximum bandwidth see chapter 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 62 p User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 172 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration EE Signal Capture Auto Default The currently available maximum bandwidth is allowed This value depends on which bandwidth extension options are installed if any see chapter 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Band width for RF Input on page 62 All installed bandwidth extension options are activated Note that using bandwidth extension op
511. reete nitent irit aTi 220 Result type transformation ssssss 218 Status registers DeSCriptiOn tm 428 Querying 434 STAT QUES POW isishidan iiaiai aeii 305 Status reporting system sssssssssssssesssss 428 StdDev zone 467 Storage location SENGS cree e tei te reete der cre 129 Suffixes iere un EP 287 Sweep ADOMUNG pene 179 Configuration remote E Count see Statistic count sseessessssss 180 SONGS EE 178 Symbol check le e 97 Bemodulation netten tnn 97 Dici m M 97 Symbol decisions le el 94 Demodulation m we 94 Demodulation process sessssseeeeeee 90 KNOWN data rente ttr tnter een 95 Symbol error rate SER Fine synchronization sss 200 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 R amp S9FSW K70 Index LEE 87 Rotating differentialPSK 75 Rotating PSK User defined Wizard mapwil2 2 in nba tet te tenes 88 Symbol number Result range start s sees 192 Symbolrate ni ebe dere etre tee etie 121 136 Basics Display A E MSRA mode ront titii rita nnno Relationship to sample rate T ac RR Symbol Rate Errtor oriri eer eee doe e Symbol Rate Error SRE Definition sei nir rrr tren 104 Symbols
512. release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the R amp S website on the R amp S FSW product page at hitp www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html gt Downloads Firmware 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 3 4 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as dia ments log boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quota tion marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation marks 1 3 2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instru LEE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 9 Conventions Used in the Documen
513. ret tra eerie tome Digital UO si Display configuration sessseeses 217 doo 24 cs fos 223 External sis Free RUM eR Frequency Config oerte eet cete 159 UO Power IF Power IMPON eR E SQ Input Frontend Sa E Input Source Config sssssssssesss 141 edo M 223 IQ Import s Lower Level Hysteresis 205 Marker Contig EE 210 Marker to Trace 212 Meastime Auto e rnit nennen nnne 204 Meastime Manual 0 ccceeceeceeeeseeeeseeeneeeeeees 204 MIR cst ModAcc Limits ET e KE dE Next Peak ii mim rrr rne rire Norm Delta Se i PaK M Preamp 5d d t cei aE Ref Level m Ref Level Offset 5 nece Dolce RF Atten Auto RF Atten Manual Signal Capture EE Signal Description 7 Single Sweep nania iaki Trace Te Trace Config x Trigger Gate Config sese Trigger Offset iit teret Upper Level Hysteresis m Window configuration sese Specifics for COmfiQuration E 132 Spectrum Result type transformation ssssss 218 SR see Symbol rate serosoa aniani niis 13 Standards see Digital standards 128 Statistic COUNT eene tnr rre 180 Display 13 Statistics xn se M 467 Oversarmiplinig sissies 2
514. ri 1 NENNEN SEENEN 438 STATusOUEGnonable DiO P Ranesition seen enne nnne nnns 438 STA TuS QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansillon 2222 2 eie tcdcu ena tnc t Rare d 438 STATus QUESHonmable LiMitem PTRAFSITIOTI iioi eoru tees ere petente orar ope herd 438 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin m PTRansition eese 438 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PTRansition sees 438 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA mL IT H S T H Status Reporting System STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CFRequency PTRansition eese 438 STATusOUEGuonable MODulaton nz EVMP Ransiton seen eene 438 STATusOUEGuonable MODulaton nz F kP Ransition 438 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n IQRHo PTRansition e eese eene 438 STATus OUEGuonable MODulaton nz M ACGhtude P Ransition 438 STATusOUEGuonable MODulaton nz DHAGeD Ransiton 438 STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition ccccccccceceecesecesseeceececceeeecseseececeeseueeeenaes 439 STATusOUEzuonable GvhNC PD Ransitton seen nn nnns 439 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation l
515. riod used for estimation see Estimation Points Sym on page 198 For estimation of the frequency parameters the following least squares criterion is mini mized Crreo B fo fast 3 Suras B face Qt fo fa ges with respect to the model parameters B fo fy and 7 The term denotes the reference instantaneous frequency with a possibly fractional delay of samples For FSK modulation the default sampling period used for estimation is the capture sam pling period 4 5 2 3 Modulation Errors A 2FSK signal is generated using a GMSK frequency pulse Examples of carrier drift and reference deviation are shown in figure 4 63 and figure 4 64 respectively User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 115 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurement Basics mam A e r D Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Carrier frequency drift A carrier frequency drift is modeled as a linear change in the carrier frequency with respect to time The effect of carrier drift on the instantaneous frequency of an FSK signal is illustrated in figure 4 63 Instantaneous Frequency GMSK Modulation 1 5 0 5 0 5 Frequency Ref Deviation e Freq Ref Freq Meas 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Time Symbols Fig 4 63 The reference and distorted instantaneous frequency of a GMSK signal with a carrier fre quency drift FSK deviation error The FSK
516. rises information about limit violations in Phase Error evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUI EStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe CON STATus QUI Dition and EStionable MODulationcn PHASe EV ENt Bit No Meaning Error in current RMS value Error in mean RMS value Error in peak RMS value These bits are not used Error in current peak value Error in mean peak value Error in peak peak value 8 15 These bits are not used 11 11 5 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude Register This register comprises information about limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUI STATus QUI EStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude CON EStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude Dition and ENt EV User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 432 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Status Reporting System Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RMS value 1 Error in mean RMS value 2 Error in peak RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current peak value 6 Error in mean peak value 7 Error in peak peak value 8 15 These bits are not used 11 11 6 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency Register This register comprises information about limit violations in Carrier Frequency evaluation It can be queried with
517. rn Search on page 93 If the parameter is set to 100 only I Q patterns that match totally with the input signal are found This is only the case for infinite SNR R amp S FSW K70 Configuration 5 7 3 Burst and Pattern Configuration If the threshold Auto option is enabled the default value of 90 is used As long as the pattern is found there is no need to change this parameter However if the pattern is very short approximately lt 10 symbols or if the signal is highly distorted tuning this parameter helps the pattern search to succeed To define a threshold manually disable the Auto option Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC IQCThreshold on page 351 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh PATTern CONFigure AUTO on page 351 Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct If enabled measurement results are only displayed and are only averaged if a valid pattern has been found When measuring signals that contain a pattern and are averaged over several measurements it is recommended that you enable this option so that erro neous measurements do not affect the result of averaging Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE on page 352 Selected Pattern for Search Indicates which of the patterns that are assigned to the current standard is selected and will be searched for The selected pattern is indicated for information only and cannot be edited here only in the Signal St
518. rn search The offset of the pattern would be the offset of the pattern start with respect to the start of the useful part of the burst However if the entered offset is not correct within about 4 symbols of tolerance the pattern will not be found Spectrun VSA Ref Level 22 00 dim Mod Modulation amp Signal Description m el Att 10 0 d8 Freq 1 0GHz Cap Ler SGL TRG EXT BURST PATTERN Modulation Signal Description A EVM z T Signal Type Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst Min Length 148 sym 546 462 Max Length 148 sym 546 462 Run In B sym 211 077 Run Out B sym 11 077 l w Pattern Start 3 sym Stop 151 sym C Mag CapBuf Name el Pattern S 0 0 s Descriptio e Burst Length Rum EA Rune Offset Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym 09 09 26 Fig 10 7 GSM EDGE burst Pattern is actually located in the middle of the burst The correct value for Offset here would be 58 Solution Try one of the following Remove the offset unknown Enter the correct offset within about 4 symbols of tolerance For more information see Offset on page 140 e The specified pattern does not coincide with the pattern in your signal In the R amp S FSQ K70 it is possible to search for multiple patterns at the same time For example in a GSM measurement the capture buffer can be checked for all TSCs simultaneously This is not possi
519. ronization Non Data Aided User Pattern for Sync Off Estimation range shorter than 40 symbols see chapter 4 5 1 2 Estimation on page 102 e Fine Synchronization Estimation range shorter than 10 symbols see chapter 4 5 1 2 Estimation on page 102 E we User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 271 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Explanation of Error Messages Solution e Ifthe signal contains a pattern set Coarse Synchronization Pattern see Coarse Synchronization on page 199 Example measurement of a GSM EDGE pattern that has a length of 26 symbols C Mag CapBuf i Crw D Const I Q Meas amp Ref e 1M Clrw 20 dBm 40 d m 60 d m Stop 200 sym Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 13 03 2010 08 21 13 8 1M Clrw 20 dBm 40 dBny 60 dBm Start 0 sym Stop 200 sym Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 12 03 2010 08 21 35 Fig 10 11 User Pattern for Sync On e Choose a longer Result Range e Ifthe signal is bursted and the bursts are short Make sure your Result Range comprises the entire burst Make sure that Run In Out is not chosen too large since the Run In Out ranges are excluded from the synchronization e Ifthe signal is bursted and contains a pattern Only switch off the burst search if absolutely necessary If you need t
520. rough the available result ranges and analyze the individual result ranges in another window The currently displayed result range is indicated by a blue bar in the capture buffer display Optionally zoom into a diagram to enlarge an area of the displayed data Optionally change the display scaling for diagrams see chapter 8 3 1 How to Change the Display Scaling on page 238 Optionally check the modulation accuracy against specified limits see chapter 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modulation Accuracy on page 241 Optionally export the trace data of the measured signal to a file see chapter 8 3 3 How to Export the Trace Data to a File on page 242 How to Change the Display Scaling Depending on the type of display time spectrum or statistics various scaling functions are available to adapt the result display to the current data How to Scale Time and Spectrum Diagrams The range of the displayed y axis for time and spectral diagrams can be defined in the following ways manually by defining the range size reference values and positions automatically according to the current results E TN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 238 R amp S FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis How to Analyze the Measured Data To define the scaling manually using a reference point With this method you define a reference value and a position at which this value is to be displayed on the y axis 1 Focus the resu
521. rrespondingly for the con nected instrument see Input Sample Rate on page 154 The following table describes the restrictions for digital in and output Table 4 2 Restrictions for digital in and output Parameter Minimum Maximum Record length 2 complex samples 220 1024 1024 complex samples Input sample rate ISR 100 Hz 10 GHz Sample Rate SR Digital input active Digital output active Max 100 Hz ISR 8388608 100 Hz Max 200 MHz Min 10 GHz 2 ISR 100 MHz Usable UO bandwidth Digital input and filter active Min 0 8 SR 0 8 ISR Bandwidths Depending on the sample rate the following bandwidths are available User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 67 Symbol Mapping Usable IQ bandwidth ISR Filter can be turned off V BW 0 8 SR BW 0 8 ISR Fig 4 8 Bandwidths depending on sample rate for active digital input 4 3 Symbol Mapping Mapping or symbol mapping means that symbol numbers are assigned to constellation points or transitions in the I Q plane e g PSK and QAM In the analyzer the mapping is required to decode the transmitted symbols from the sampled UO or frequency time data records The mappings for all standards used in the analyzer and for all employed modulation modes are described in the following Unless indicated otherwise symbol numbers are specified in hexadecimal form MSB at the left R amp S9FSW K70 Measurement
522. rs lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency PTRansition BitDefinition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHo PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 438 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 12 Commands for Compatibility STATus QU
523. rst Move a delta marker to the end of the burst and compare the burst length to the settings in the Signal Description dialog Increase the search tolerance in the Burst Search dialog Keep an eye on the green red field If the burst search succeeds you can see the length of the found bursts Setthe minimum burst length to 50 and the maximum burst length to 5000 For more information see Burst Settings on page 139 Burst Configuration on page 183 e The signal is highly distorted and or has modulation noise One possibility to enhance the robustness of the burst search is to increase the min imum gap length If the bursts within your capture buffer are not closely spaced it makes sense to increase the value of this parameter Burst amp Pattern Search Burst amp Pattern Search Burst Search AEE Burst Search Rar Sara NM Auto according to Signal Description irst fou N Auto according to Signal Description Burst found e on Off on Off Meas only if Burst was found Meas only if Burst was found Auto Configuration Auto Configuration Search Tolerance 4 sym 769 us Search Tolerance 4 sym 14 769 us Min Gep Length Can 3 692 us Min Gep Length C10 sym gt 36 923 us Related Settings Related Settings Signal Description i Signal Description Trace Trace Mag CapBuf 1 Cir Mag CapBuf Stop 1500 sym Fig 10 6 Example for adjusting the minimum gap length For more information see Min G
524. rther analysis For details see chapter 6 2 Trace Export Settings on page 209 RETE RU RA I EE e LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLUIALIIISS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 206 R amp S FSW K70 Analysis Trace Settings Mode Evaluation Clear Write Trace 2 Meas Ref View Blank Quick Config Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace Gifracep 207 Tra a WOO MERIT 207 Se WEE 208 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Conrfig oiii etie Lain has 208 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys sea eee teen innate cerrar 209 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is high lighted orange For the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display only one trace is available Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t STATe on page 379 Selected via numeric suffix of TRACe t commands Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces The available trace modes depend on the selected result display Not all evaluations support all trace modes For the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display only the trace modes Clear Write and View are available For the Magnitude Absolute result display the trace modes Average MinHold MaxHold are applied to the individual result ranges and thus may not provide useful results User Manual 1173
525. ructure settings see Name on page 139 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect on page 352 Pattern Found Indicates whether a pattern was found in the currently captured data Pattern Configuration For common signal standards the patterns to be searched for in the captured signal are predefined in the VSA application In addition new patterns can be defined and assigned to a signal standard manually Patterns are configured in the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Select the Pattern Config softkey in the main VSA menu e Inthe Signal Description dialog box switch to the Signal Structure tab and select the Pattern Config button SSE e A A User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 185 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Burst and Pattern Configuration Pattern Details Name EDGE_TSCO Description EDGE Normal Burst Comment Remove from Standard EDGE_TSCO Pattern Search On Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct Standard Patterns selecting an assigned p ifen 186 Removing patterns trom a standard 2 3 p Gh EE 187 Adding patterns to a ee DEER 187 Displaying available pGattems AE 187 Mu NN Eegen 187 L Show Compatible Show AL 187 Le M 187 SAVE PVG SS 187 NEW
526. s 349 SENSe SWEep COUNIt VALUe cette ernannt nre nonna nene tuntur onto inta tha Entra ae iaa enge dena aa dada anas 348 LEE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 493 R amp S FSW K70 Index Symbols EIGCIEOTIIC c eege 163 Manual P 163 4ASK V loe 163 Constellation diagram seeseee 86 Protective remote sss 305 8PSK Auto ID Constellation diagram sene 71 External Mixer B21 remote control 308 16APSK External Mixer B21 a Constellation diagram sene 87 Threshold External Mixer B21 148 95 ile Threshold External Mixer B21 remote control gener 467 309 Auto level A Hysteresis nette e Eder 205 Reference level 162 165 204 Aborting Softkey ssssssssseteeteteee 162 165 204 Sweep S eege TETTE TE TERTII 179 Automatic AC DC coupling ENEE 142 162 Configuration ccccscecscsssseseseseecsesescsessseesesesaeetsees 204 Activating Configuration remote sees 369 VSA remote becht epuer eege eeng 287 Auto settings Active probe Meastime Auto softkey e 204 MICKODUMON c erhalt e ede de 158 Meastime Manual softkey EE EE 204 Alignment Averaging Result range ENEE 192 Measurements esee 182 185 188 Alpha BT 1 iiio nene o deer ta 137 202 Amplitude
527. s allow you to load a file that describes the possible data sequences in the input signal see chapter 8 2 3 How to Manage Known Data Files on page 233 Additional information provided by the loaded file is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box This information is not editable directly The Known Data settings are displayed when you select the Signal Description button in the Overview or the Signal Description softkey in the main VSA menu and then Switch to the Known Data tab Modulation amp Signal Description e R Known Data Known Data is needed for the BER measurement and can be used for fine synchronization see Demodulation dialog wi Known Data Filename KnownData example xml Load Data File Additional Information Result Length Number of Sequences 5 Modulation Order 8 Base Hexadecimal Comment Standard EDGE 8PSK User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 140 R amp S FSW K70 5 5 5 5 1 0 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Auxiliary tool to create Known Data files An auxiliary tool to create Known Data files from data that is already available in the VSA application is provided on the instrument free of charge See To create a Known Data file using the recording tool for sequences on page 234 Known R iz INNEREN TROU TERES 141 Load Bat PB ee See IERI e EE UE Hle E Ele 141 Known Data Activates or deactivates the use of the loaded data file if available
528. s no effect if the frequency is below that value Note For the following measurements the YIG Preselector is off by default if available e Q Analyzer and thus in all applications in MSRA operating mode e Multi Carrier Group Delay e GSM e VSA Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 306 Preamplifier option B24 If option R amp S FSW B24 is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For R amp S FSW 26 models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the preamplifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the following settings are available You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 143 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration T Input and Frontend Settings Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 332 INPut GAIN VALue on page 331 5 5 1 2 External Mixer Settings The external mixer is configured in the External Mixer tab of the Input dialog box which is available when you do one of the following if the R amp S FSW B21 option is installed e Press the INPUT OUTPUT key then select the External Mixer Config softkey e From the Overview select Input the
529. s the MODE key on the front panel and select the VSA application Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for VSA Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal character istics If the input data is largely known in advance define files with the known data to com pare the measured data to see chapter 8 2 3 How to Manage Known Data Files on page 233 This can improve demodulation significantly Select the Input Frontend button to define the input signal s center frequency amplitude and other basic settings Select the Signal Capture button and define how much and which data to capture In MSRA mode define the application data instead see chapter 4 9 VSA in MSRA Operating Mode on page 124 e Capture length the duration or number of symbols to be captured e Sample rate how many points are to be captured for each symbol Optionally select the Trigger tab and define a trigger for data acquisition for exam ple an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted In MSRA mode define a Capture Offset instead see chapter 4 9 VSA in MSRA Operating Mode on page 124 For bursted signals select the Burst Pattern button and define the criteria to detect the individual bursts within the input signal see chapter 8 2 2 How to Perform Pat tern Searches on page 229 Select the Cut Result Ranges button and define which of the cap
530. sample rate for signal capture see SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 340 For the default value 24 the maximum is 64000 symbols For larger sample rates the maximum record length in symbols can be calculated as Recordlengthyax 256000 points per symbol EEUU E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 340 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA M n Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt RecordLength gt numeric value RST 2 083 ms Default unit s not symbols as in manual operation Manual operation See Capture Length Settings on page 172 SENSe SWAPiq State This command defines whether or not the recorded IQ pairs should be swapped I lt gt Q before being processed Swapping and Q inverts the sideband This is useful if the DUT interchanged the and Q parts of the signal then the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it Parameters lt State gt ON and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j I OFF and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q RST OFF Manual operation See Swap Q on page 157 TRACe IQ WBANd STATe State This command determines whether the wideband provided by bandwidth extension options is used or not if installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF ON If enabled the currently available maximum bandwidth is a
531. se commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous com mand e Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted 11 1 2 Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpos
532. sed sample rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indicated by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the con nected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sample rate is displayed 1 Current sample rate is displayed lt FullScaleLevel gt The level in dBm that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 if transferred from connected device If not available 9 97637 is returned Example INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 Out A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 Manual operation See Connected Instrument on page 155 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO lt State gt If enabled the digital input full scale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 322 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 154 INPut DIQ RA
533. see INSTrument SELect on page 290 IR FORM mM 397 DISPlaypWIMDowsrs SEE aeree texe cat at tenu hase no ee eae ete nue uada nr eure Aieiaia nio 397 DISPlay FORMat Format This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters Format SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active channels SINGIe Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SPL Example DISP FORM SING DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL com mand see LAYout SPLitter on page 400 Parameters Size LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG 11 8 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measurement channel Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the c
534. set on page 140 If you define an offset of the pattern with respect to the useful part of the burst in the signal description and align the result to the pattern the Symbol Number at Pattern Start refers to the first symbol of the useful part of the burst not the first symbol of the pattern Run In Run Out Time The parameter Run In Out can be used to influence the range over which the EVM is minimized The internal synchronization range is the overlapping area of the result range and the burst excluding its Run In Out areas Hence this parameter also allows for demodulation of bursts with mixed modulations e g Bluetooth because it can be used to explicitely exclude symbols from influencing the synchronization Useful length The burst excluding its Run In Out areas is sometimes referrred to as the useful part The minimum length of the useful part Min Length Run In Run Out must be 210 4 6 2 Evaluation Range In some scenarios the result range contains symbols that are not supposed to be con sidered for the EVM or other calculated parameters that are displayed in the Result Sum mary For example while you may want to display the ramps of a burst and thus include them in the result range they do not contribute to the error vectors or power levels Thus you would not include them in the evaluation range See also chapter 9 3 4 Evaluating the Rising and Falling Edges on page 258 The evaluation range is a
535. settings see chapter A 2 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 449 For detailed instructions see chapter 8 1 How to Perform VSA According to Digital Standards on page 226 I User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 128 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Configuration According to Digital Standards Digital standard settings are available via the Digital Standards softkey in the MEAS menu Dika rine o E 129 L Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Elles 129 d TEE 129 d EE 129 ail MORTEM 129 L toad Standafd EE 129 EEAS EE 130 L Save Standart 130 L RE EE 130 L Restore Standard Elles eese nene 130 Digital Standards Opens a file selection dialog to manage predefined measurement settings for conven tional mobile radio standards Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files Digital Standards Select the storage location of the settings file on the instrument or an external drive The Drive indicates the internal C or any connected external drives e g a USB stor age device The Path contains the drive and the complete file path to the currently selected folder The Files list contains all subfolders and files of the currently selected path The default storage location for the standards files is C FSW vsa Standards or for user defined standards C FSW user vsa Standards New Folder Digital Standards Creates a new folder in the file system in which you can save the settings file Fil
536. sheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt A 7 1 I Q Parameter XML File Specification The content of the UO parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz comf file RsIqTar xsd In particular the order ofthe XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an UO parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample UO parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt gt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt DateTime 2011 01 24T14 02 49 DateTime lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt UUU User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 477 R amp S9FSW K70 Annex UO Data File Format iq tar lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOf
537. standards and patterns RST ALL Usage Setting only E User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 291 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA PERENNE EE CIU m i 1 Digital Standards Manual operation See Restore Factory Settings on page 128 See Restore Standard Files on page 128 See Restore Pattern Files on page 128 See Digital Standards on page 129 SENSe DDEMod PRESet STANdard Standard This command selects an automatic setting of all modulation parameters according to a standardized transmission method or a user defined transmission method The standar dized transmission methods are available in the instrument as predefined standards Setting parameters Standard string Specifies the file name that contains the transmission method without the extension For user defined standards the file path must be included Default standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz do not require a path definition A list of prede fined standards including short forms is provided in the annex see chapter A 2 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 449 Example DDEM PRES TETRA NDDOWN Switches the predefined digital standard TETRA Discontinuous Downlink on DDEM PRES C R_S Instr usr standards USER_GSM Switches
538. sult range repeat section retrieving results for Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit In this example a user defined pattern is used to detect bursts and the calculated mea surement results are checked against defined limits The configuration settings are stored as a user defined standard User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 445 Programming Examples RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 1GHz Set the center frequency DISP TRAC Y RLEV 4dBm Set the reference level INST CRE NEW DDEM VSA Create new measurement channel for vector signal analysis named VSA a Creating a pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME EDGE TSC CUST Create new pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC NST 4 DDEM SEAR SYNC DATA 00030001000000000003000200020001000300010001 DDEM SEAR SYNC COMM Customized pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC TEXT Special edge normal Burst DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME EDGE TSC CUST Store customized pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC PATT ADD EDGE TSC CUST Add new pattern to current standard Configuring the expected input signal DDEM FORM QPSK Set the modulation type DDEM QPSK FORM NORM Set the modulation order DDEM MAPP CAT Query the available symbol mappings for QPSK modulation DDEM MAPP WCDMA Set the symbol mapping to WCDMA DDEM SRAT 1 MHz Set the symbol rate DEM SIGN BURS Define input signal as burst signal DEM SIGN PATT ON Enab
539. t Manual operation Configuring the Result Display MAGNitude PHASe UPHase RIMag FREQuency COMP CONS IEYE QEYE FEYE CONF COVF RCONStellation RSUMmary BERate GDELay MOVerview NONE MAGNitude Magnitude Absolute MOVerview Magnitude Overview Absolute entire capture buffer PHASe Phase Wrap UPHase Phase Unwrap RIMag Real Imag I Q FREQuency Frequency Absolute COMP Vector I Q CONS Constellation UO IEYE Eye Diagram Real I QEYE Eye Diagram Imag Q FEYE Eye Diagram Frequency CONF Constellation Frequency COVF Vector Frequency RCONStellation Constellation UO Rotated RSUMmary Result summary BERate Bit error rate GDELay Group delay See Result Type on page 218 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe lt AddEvaluation gt This command switches the measurement of the statistical distribution of magnitude phase or frequency values on or off User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 406 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA PRENNE EE COM Q M seven wp Configuring the Result Display Setting parameters lt AddEvaluation gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Result Type Transformation on page 218 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics MODE lt StatisticMode gt This command defines whether only
540. t Here is a comment Date amp Time 2011 03 03 14 33 05 Sample rate 6 5 MHz Number of samples 65000 Duration of signal 10 ms Data format complex float32 Data filename xzy complex 1ch float32 Scaling factor 1v Comment Channel 1 of 1 Power vs time y axis 10 dB div x axis 1 ms div Spectrum y axis 20 dB div x axis 500 kHz div E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet http Awww rohde schwarz com Fileformat version 1 R amp S FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis How to Perform VSA According to Digital Standards 8 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis Using the VSA option you can perform vector signal analysis measurements using pre defined standard setting files or independently of digital standards using user defined measurement settings Such settings can be stored for recurrent use Thus configuring VSA measurements requires one of the following tasks e Selecting an existing standard settings file and if necessary adapting the measure ment settings to your specific requirements e Configuring the measurement settings and if necessary storing the settings ina file e How to Perform VSA According to Digital Standarde 226 How to Perform Customized VSA Measuremenmts AA 228 How to Analyze the Measured Datta cc cccceeses
541. t Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data and the comment to the specified file Manual operation See Export on page 223 See IQ Export on page 223 MMEMory STORe IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured UO data to a file The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores the captured UO data to the specified file N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 427 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Status Reporting System Manual operation See Export on page 223 See IQ Export on page 223 11 11 Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument e g information on errors or limit violations which have occurred This infor mation is stored in the status registers and in the error queue The status registers and the error queue can be queried via IEC bus In this section only the status registers bits specific to the VSA application are described For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual CD
542. t Query the number of demodulated bursts within the capture buffer For n 1 NumberOfBursts SENSe1l DDEMod SEARch MBURSt CALC n TRACe4 TRACel Query the result symbols in window D End Step through all bursts and query the demodulated symbols Question Why do the EVM results for my FSK modulated signal look wrong Answer For an FSK modulated signal the signal processing differs to an PSK QAM MSK modu lated signal The estimation model does not minimize the EVM but the error of the instan taneous frequency see chapter 4 5 2 1 Error Model on page 113 Therefore the measurement value that corresponds to the EVM value for FSK is the the Frequency Error Absolute Relative Source Type Modulation Error Result Type Frequency Error Absolute Relative 10 4 Obtaining Technical Support If problems occur the instrument generates error messages which in most cases will be sufficient for you to detect the cause of an error and find a remedy Error messages are described in chapter 10 2 Explanation of Error Messages on page 264 In addition our customer support centers are there to assist you in solving any problems that you may encounter with your R amp S FSW We will find solutions more quickly and efficiently if you provide us with the information listed below e System Configuration The System Configuration dialog box in the Setup menu provides information on Hardware Info hardware assemblies
543. t n gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHo CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM EVENt lt ChannelName gt
544. tation ment or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard oper ating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a keyboard R amp S FSW K70 Welcome to the Vector Signal Analysis Application Starting the VSA Application 2 Welcome to the Vector Signal Analysis Appli cation The R amp S FSW K70 is a firmware application that adds functionality to perform Vector Signal Analysis VSA to the R amp S FSW The VSA application performs vector and scalar measurements on digitally modulated single carrier signals To perform the measurements it converts RF signals into the com plex baseband It can also use the optional Digital Baseband interface R amp S FSW B17 option to analyze UO signals already delivered to the complex baseband The VSA application features e Flexible modulation analysis from MSK to 1024QAM e Numerous standard specific default settings e Various graphical numerical and statistical evaluations and result displays e Spectrum analyses of the measurement and error signal e Flexible burst search for the analysis of complex signal combinations short bursts or signal mix This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application provides including remote control operation All functions not discussed in this manual are the sa
545. te n DELTamarker AOFF This command turns all delta markers off Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off ERREUR RA N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 381 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA mAAET Vw Analysis Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 211 See Marker Type on page 212 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute
546. te control 311 312 Order External Mixer B21 Type External Mixer B21 High pass filter Remote RF input Hysteresis Lower Auto level Trigger Upper Auto level 146 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 497 R amp S FSW K70 Index l UO bandwidth Np 55 173 UO correlation threshold Pattern Search 1 irn rre rre nenn 184 UO data Export file binary data description Export file parameter description EI ln eL Exporting Importing esses Exporting remote aen tinlo nnt Importing Exporting eene 222 Importing remote Maximum bandwidth essen 62 Sample rate cione teres neediest 62 UO imbalance Compensation E 194 IDefinitlOn E 107 ie L P 465 UO offset Origin Offset Definition sssssesssssss 105 Compensating E e Compensation Ll M X UO pattern search see Pattern search sssesssseseee 93 UO Power Trigger softkey rtt peine 176 Trigger level remote sssssessssss 345 IF Power Trigger softKey NEE 176 Trigger level remote ssesessessss 345 IF WIDE OUTPUT GOMMOCION eEE 172 Importing FUNCIONS E 222 UO data UO data remote
547. teceeeesenteeeteseneceeeeseenteceeesentie 237 8 1 How to Perform VSA According to Digital Standards In order to perform vector signal analysis as specified in digital standards various pre defined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the VSA option In addition you can create your own settings files for user specific measurements For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter A 2 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 449 This section provides instructions for the following tasks e To perform a measurement according to a standard on page 226 Toload predefined settings files on page 227 To store settings as a standard file on page 227 e To delete standard files on page 227 Torestore standard files on page 227 To perform a measurement according to a standard 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the VSA application 2 Press the MEAS key and select the Digital Standards softkey 3 Select the required settings file and then Load see To load predefined settings files on page 227 The instrument is adjusted to the stored settings for the selected standard and a measurement is started immediately 4 Press the RUN SINGLE key to stop the continuous measurement mode and start a defined number of measurements The measured data is stored in the capture buffer and can be analyzed see chap ter 8 3 How to Analyze the Measured Data on
548. ters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 _L__L_____ E e A LLL L L L LLALLLALOI XJ User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 317 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 153 SENSe CORRection CVL SELect lt FileName gt This command selects the conversion loss table with the specified file name If file name is not available a new conversion loss table is created This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt FileName gt lt File name gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Manual operation See New Table on page 150 See Edit Table on page 150 See File Name on page 151 SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber lt SerialNo gt This command defines the serial number of the mixer for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 318 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt SerialNo gt Serial number with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX 123 4567
549. tes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite format requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 11 2 Common Suffixes In VSA the following common suffixes are used in remote commands Suffix Value range Description m 1 4 Marker n 1 16 Window lt t gt 1 6 Trace 11 3 Activating Vector Signal Analysis Vector signal analysis requires a special application on the R amp S FSW A measurement is started immediately with the default settings INSTI umenteREate DUPLicale 2 1 2I test tae et cde rene o peur eco p eso t qaaa Rn pax qu ii hn da 288 INS Tiument CREAMS C NEW EEN 288 INS Tr mepbe RESI TEPISGB Leer better aee aee E Ds prr iR E E P eles eras 288 INSTI mentDELele eee SEENEN naso Race dai eo dee Rae ed 289 kenge GE OTRO T 289 INS TromesnbpRIENSITIe 2 2 tenti ended eo eon tdeo ctas Ee eddi SE 290 INS Trument SELecl eri erret tat ENEE EENS ees 290 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute eissessssssessseeseeenesenennn rennen entrare 291 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 287 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA a D M A Uee
550. th a large frequency spectrum e g FSK modulated signals a higher sample rate may be necessary For further details see chapter 4 1 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing on page 54 For an indication of the required sample rate view the Real Imag I Q display of the capture buffer with a Spectrum transformation If the complete signal is displayed and fills the width of the display the selected value is suitable A Spec Reallmag CapBuf 1 Clrw 80 dB 100 dB 140 dB Start 541 667 kHz Stop 541 667 kHz Fig 4 5 Determining the HO bandwidth Real Imag l Q display of the capture buffer with a spectrum transformation User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 61 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth If the signal is cut off increase the sample rate if it is too small decrease the sample rate by changing the Symbol Rate defined in the Signal Description settings or the Sample Rate parameter in the Data Acquisition settings As described above the sample rate is determined by the number of samples to capture per symbol Thus the maximum sample rate depends on the maximum number of sym bols to be captured the symbol rate and vice versa The maximum sample rate for the R amp S FSW is 10 GHz see chapter 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Band width for RF Input on page 62 Thus the maximum symbol rate is Table 4 1 Maximum symbol rate de
551. that are to be demodu lated and analyzed together For example bursted signals have intervals between the bursts that are not of interest when analyzing peaks or overshoots Thus the result range usually coincides with the range of the capture buffer in which the burst is located The maximum result range length is the entire capture buffer which is 64 000 symbols for a sample rate of 4 or 256 000 samples Evaluation Range User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 117 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics Measurement Ranges The evaluation range defines the symbols from the result range that are to be included in the evaluation of specific parameters e g error vectors For example while you may want to display the ramps of a burst and thus include them in the result range they do not contribute to the error vectors or power levels Thus you would not include them in the evaluation range g i dei Fig 4 65 Schematic overview of Capture Length Result Range and Evaluation Range The determined result and evaluation ranges are included in the result displays where useful to visualize the basis of the displayed values and traces 4 6 1 Result Range The result range defines the symbols from the capture buffer that are to be demodulated and analyzed together In some cases the data in the capture buffer contains parts that are not relevant for the evaluation task at hand Thus you can exclude them from the result range se
552. the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement In addition the probability scale for the number of test points is adapted To get valid results you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the auto range process This is only possible in single sweep mode Parameters ONCE Example CALC STAT SCAL AUTO ONCE WAI Adapts the level setting for statistical measurements Usage Event Manual operation See X Axis Scaling on page 169 See Adjust Settings on page 169 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 335 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X BCOunt lt StatNofColumns gt This command defines the number of columns for the statistical distribution Setting parameters lt StatNofColumns gt numeric value Range 2 to 1024 RST 101 Default unit NONE Manual operation See X Axis Scaling on page 169 See Quantize on page 169 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer lt Magnitude gt This command defines the lower vertical limit of the diagram Parameters lt Magnitude gt The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless Range 1E 9 to 0 1 RST 1E 6 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 001 Manual operation See Defining Min and Max Values on page 168 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer lt Magnitude gt This command defines the upper vertical limit of the diagram Parameters
553. the applications that support it They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box TIE p D v id 4 K Ban e IL I x Input Source Power Sensor Frequency Input Settings External I Mod Mixer Q Mode Input Config Digital IQ Swap 1 Q Analog Baseband Signal Patt Center Frequency CF P For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Analog Baseband Input State lace ceene accen ien nne caa c Rana naa 156 fbl 156 Juegt er e 157 cde E 157 ead rp 5E eect NAAA EAA AAAA 157 Analog Baseband Input State Enables or disable the use of the Analog Baseband input source for measurements Analog Baseband is only available if the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 306 UO Mode Defines the format of the input signal For more information on UO data processing modes see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual jQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two inputs are required for a complex signal one for the in phase com ponent and one for the quadrature component EES User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 156 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Only Low IF I The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT I connector is filtere
554. the default settings of the currently selected standard Usage Event SENSe DDEMod STANdard SAVE lt FileName gt This command stores the current settings of the vector signal analysis as a new user defined digital standard If the name of the digital standard is already in use an error message is output and a new name has to be selected It is recommended that you define a comment before storing the standard Setting parameters lt FileName gt string The path and file name to which the settings are stored Example DDEM STAN COMM GSM AccessBurst with Pattern Defines a comment for the settings DDEM STAN SAVE C R_S Instr usr standards USER_GSM Stores the settings in the user defined digital standard USER_GSM Usage Setting only Manual operation See Digital Standards on page 129 See Save Standard on page 130 See Save Standard on page 130 11 5 Configuring VSA EE SIGN Al Eer TEE 294 e lnputand Frontend Settings de EEN EENS ee 305 AE SMe AUS E 339 Hee Ne ET E 342 Seg E EET 348 e Contiguring Bursts and Patterns etas petente ide aeta reet 349 e Defining the Result tee eerste eiae cR Rd AE 355 e Demodulation RE ln EE 357 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 293 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 5 1 11 5 1 1 Configuring VSA e Measurement Filter SCtiINnGS 222 c ccccedeccceseeeeesceneceneeeeseacecnetendedeesteaenaessacers 366 e Defining the Evalua
555. the left or right borders of the display 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modulation Accuracy The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically If limit check is activated and the measured values exceed the limits those values are indicated in red in the result summary table If limit check is activated and no values exceed the limits the checked values are indicated in green rr MMI User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 241 R amp S FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis How to Analyze the Measured Data B Result Summary EVM RS __Peak 100 00 LLL Peak Rho 0 000 000 IQ Offset Gain imbalance Quadrature Error f 0 000 0 0 000 000 193 010300 0 000 Oppe Power a05 00 200 00 dem For details on the limit check functions and settings see chapter 6 4 Modulation Accu racy Limit Lines on page 215 To define a limit check 1 Configure a measurement with Modulation Accuracy as the Source see chap ter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 217 2 Press the LINES key on the front panel 3 Press the ModAcc Limits Config softkey in the Limits menu 4 Inthe Current tab define limits that the current value should not exceed for any or all of the result types Note the limits for the current value are automatically also defined for the peak value and vice versa However th
556. the user defined digital standard USER GSM on Manual operation See Digital Standards on page 129 See Load Standard on page 129 SENSe DDEMod STANdard COMMent Comment This command enters the comment for a new standard The comment is stored with the standard and is only displayed in the selection menu manual operation When remote control is used the string is deleted after the standard has been stored allowing a new comment to be entered for the next standard In this case a blank string is returned when a query is made Setting parameters Comment string Manual operation See Digital Standards on page 129 See Comment on page 129 SENSe DDEMod STANdard DELete lt FileName gt This command deletes a specified digital standard file in the vector signal analysis The file name includes the path If the file does not exist an error message is displayed e P P R User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 292 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt FileName gt string File name including the path for the digital standard file Usage Setting only Manual operation See Digital Standards on page 129 See Delete Standard on page 130 SENSe DDEMod STANdard PREset VALue This command restores
557. ting the R amp S FSW in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the software func tions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are described here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on maintenance instru ment interfaces and troubleshooting In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the application are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parameters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSW is not included in the application manuals RETE RA I User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 8 R amp S FSW K70 Preface EE EE El Conventions Used in the Documentation All user manuals are also available for download from the R amp S website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified functions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corresponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the
558. tion Errors Nonlinear distortions phase distortion transmitter Phase distortion analyzer Imaginary 08 06 05 DA 03 Phase Distortion Transmitter Ir site DE Prase Distomen Analyzer a amp 4 ER 4 hi 4 A 1 d 4 05 6 8 The effect of nonlinear phase distortions on a 64QAM signal is illustrated in table 4 19 only the first quadrant is shown The transfer function is level dependent the highest effects occur at high input levels while low signal levels are hardly affected These effects are caused for instance by saturation in the transmitter output stages The signal is scaled in the analyzer so that the average square magnitude of the error vector is mini mized The second column shows the signal after scaling Table 4 20 Phase transfer functions Nonlinear distortions phase distortion transmitter Phase distortions analyzer Phase Transtr Function Tramentler O15 J OH 4 z 005 o Ob IDCM b TAA ege a 205 HM A 015 02 A A n A i y 20 18 4 2 40 8 4 4 2 0 Irps Power deg In Phase Enor 0 1 005 005 Phase Trawster F unetoe Anayzer A 4 4 4 4 A A t4 12 10 d 6 4 2 Input Poser og A logarithmic display of the phase transfer functions is shown in table 4 20 The analyzer trace is shifted by the phase described above as against the transmitter trace _L
559. tion Range oeseri Ht Ree Me REED iens 368 e Adjusting Settings Automatically iter enitn ttt rr t eene 369 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optimizes pattern and burst detection and the calculation of the ideal reference signal Manual configuration of the signal description is described in chapter 5 4 Signal Description on page 133 Modulatoare eia o Ee EE 294 E EE TE 302 Modulation The modulation settings vary depending on the selected modulation type in particular FSK modulation provides some additional settings CALOCulate n FSK DEViation REFerence RELative sss 294 CALOCulate n FSK DEViation REFerence VALue eese 295 E Mel ee NET LE KC 295 SENS DDEMOT ASK NS Fal iei edebant La seine eoe RED ED lei oe dle et 295 SENSe JDDEMod FIL Tet AWP EE 295 SENSe DDEMod FILTer STATe ccce ettet 296 I SENSeJDDBEMod FORMal 22e tutte dn samen uu natam EES MR a DRER AAA 296 SENS amp JDBEMod FSK NSTate erre ee cete ducc terne ie ette a et LR Vae arn se de dae 297 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CAT alog enne nnne nennen es snnt nne rennen 297 SENSe JDDEMod MAPPingE VALUS 25 2 2 2 52 1121 Enn a AACHEN ENEE 297 SENS amp DEEMOoOHMSISFORMIl leere pore oer ee SEA epe a rosea ent Aara Kee cn 298 IERT RE e EE 298 SENSE DDEMOd EE 298 E el e ee TE EE 298 SENS amp DDBEMOd Q
560. tions R amp S FSW B160 B320 may cause more spurious effects 80 MHz Restricts the analysis bandwidth to a maximum of 80 MHz The band width extension option R amp S FSW B160 B320 is deactivated 160 MHz Restricts the analysis bandwidth to a maximum of 160 MHz The band width extension option R amp S FSW B320 is deactivated Remote command TRACe IQ WBANd STATe on page 341 TRACe IQ WBANd MBWIDTH on page 342 Usable UO Bandwidth Shows the usable I Q bandwidth which depends on the selected sample rate For details see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth on page 61 This information is provided for reference only Note In diagrams in the frequency domain Spectrum transformation see Result Type Trans formation on page 218 the usable UO bandwidth is indicated by vertical blue lines Swap UO Activates or deactivates the inverted UO modulation If the and Q parts of the signal from the DUT are interchanged the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it On and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l Off and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe SWAPiq on page 341 5 6 2 Trigger Settings The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger settings can be configured via the TRIG key or in the Trigger dialog box which is displayed when you select the Trigger button in the Overview ES Us
561. to the existing window lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY ADD 1 LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See Capture Buffer on page 16 See Measurement amp Reference Signal on page 16 See Symbols on page 17 See Error Vector on page 17 See Modulation Errors on page 17 See Modulation Accuracy on page 18 See Equalizer on page 18 See Signal Source on page 218 REED RA SSS User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 398 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA a C J J m npnppP Configuring the Result Display Table 11 3 lt WindowType gt parameter values for VSA application Parameter value Data source default result display CBUFfer Capture buffer Magnitude absolute MEAS Meas amp Ref Magnitude relative REF EQUalizer Equalizer EVECtor Error vector EVM MACCuracy Modulation Accuracy Result Summary MERRor Modulation Errors Magnitude error SYMB Symbols Hexadecimal LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all act
562. tor must be configured for Input EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RFPower First intermediate frequency Not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 IFPower Second intermediate frequency Not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 this command is interpreted as BBPower for compatibility reasons IQPower Magnitude of sampled UO data For applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 BBPower Baseband power for digital input via the Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 GPO GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 For applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications and only if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS con nector The parameter specifies which general purpose bit 0 to 5 will provide the trigger data The assignment of the general purpose bits used by the Digital IQ trigger to the LVDS connector pins is provided in
563. ts To improve these calculations the reference signal can be estimated from a smaller area that includes a known symbol sequence in the input signal In this case the results for the limited reference area are more precise at the cost of less accurate results outside this area Thus the result range should be set to the length of the reference area The reference area can be defined either using a pattern or using a known data sequence from a Known Data file If no predefined data sequences are available for the signal the detected data is used by default If Auto mode is selected and a Known Data file has been loaded and activated for use the known data sequences are used Otherwise the detected data is used Note You can define a maximum symbol error rate SER for the known data in reference to the evaluated data If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit the default syn chronization using the detected data is performed Known Data The reference signal is defined as the data sequence from the loaded Known Data file that most closely matches the measured data Pattern The reference signal is estimated from the defined pattern E MN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 199 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration 5 10 Measurement Filter Settings Detected Default The reference signal is estimated from the detected data Data Remote command SENSe DDEMod FSYNc AUTO on page 362 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc MODE
564. ts obtained after ISI free demodulation are shown as with common PSK methods This diagram corresponds to the display on the analyzer The position of the constellation points is standard specific For example some QPSK standards define the constellation points on the diagonals while other standards define the coordinate axes In table 4 3 the symbols are assigned to phase shifts The QPSK INMARSAT mapping corresponds to simple QPSK with phase differential coding Tables table 4 4 and table 4 5 show two types of differential BPSK modulation Differential coding according to VDL is shown in table 4 6 It can be used for modulation types with 3 bits symbol e g 8PSK _L_L________ TN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 73 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics REESEN Symbol Mapping Other types of modulation using differential coding method are described in chapter 4 3 4 Rotating Differential PSK Modulation on page 75 Fig 4 21 Constellation diagram for DQPSK INMARSAT and NATURAL including the symbol mapping Table 4 3 DQPSK INMARSAT Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 90 90 180 Fig 4 22 Constellation diagram for D8PSK including the symbol mapping for APCO25 APCO25 Phase 2 GRAY NATURAL and TETRA Table 4 4 D8PSK NATURAL Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indica 000 001 010 011
565. tte ever ul e Error Vector Magnitude EVM Eye Diagram Frequency sse Eye Diagram Imag Q seseseesssese Eye Diagram Real I Frequency Absolute Frequency Error Absolute sss 33 Frequency Error Relative i Frequency Relative esses Frequency Response Magnitude 35 Frequency Response Phase E Group Delay 2 tee eet eite iet ee aed Impulse Response Magnitude 37 Impulse Response Phase i Impulse Response Real Imag 38 Magnitude Absolute ssssssesesee 39 Magnitude Error sei Magnitude Overview Absolute usssss 40 Magnitude Relative esses 41 Meas amp Ref SH e Modulation accuracy sssssseeenneen 18 Modulation errors ee essen 17 Overview j Phase EMON iconic nint herren 43 Phase Uriwrap cette tenter noe 44 Phase Wrap Real Imag WO 45 Result Summary sess 46 SCPI parameters e erede tic 19 Symbols usd Symbol Table rro iid deren icit 50 Vector Frequency esssses csse 51 i em 51 RF attenuation Auto SOftKey eniin eene Manual softkey e ial Il EE Overload protection remote sssss 305 Eu 305 306 RF overr
566. ttenuation and maximum allowed power RST 1V Example INP IQ FULL 0 5V Manual operation See Fullscale Level Mode Value on page 165 INPut IQ TYPE lt DataType gt This command defines the format of the input signal _L_L_________ M User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 325 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 5 2 5 Configuring VSA Parameters lt DataType gt IQ IJQ IQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two input channels are required for each input signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature component l The in phase component of the input signal is filtered and resam pled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is not 0 see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 329 the in phase component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF I Q The quadrature component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the quadrature component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF Q RST IQ Example INP IQ TYPE Q Manual operation See I Q Mode on page 156 Setting up Probes Probes can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed SENSe PROBE p ID PARTnbmber cu iecore usce nente e Y eh xao ANER rok na en reas
567. tured data is to be demodulated see chapter 8 2 4 How to Define the Result Range on page 236 Select the Demodulation button to configure and optimize the synchronization proc ess Select the Meas filter button to select a different or user defined measurement filter to improve the accuracy of the error vector see chapter 8 2 1 How to Select User Defined Filters on page 229 SS HG MM l User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 228 R amp S FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis 8 2 1 8 2 2 How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements 11 Select the Evaluation Range button to define which part of the demodulated data is to be evaluated and displayed 12 Press the RUN SINGLE key to stop the continuous sweep and start a new sweep with the new configuration The measured data is stored in the capture buffer and can be analyzed see chap ter 8 3 How to Analyze the Measured Data on page 237 How to Select User Defined Filters The most frequently required measurement and TX filters required for vector signal analysis according to digital standards are provided by the R amp S FSW VSA application However you can also load user defined filters To load a user measurement filter 1 Inthe Overview select the Meas Filter button 2 Inthe Meas Filter tab of the Demodulation amp Measurement Filter dialog box select Type User 3 Select Load User Filter 4 Load your vaf file fro
568. type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 DISP TRAC Y MODE REL to define relative values see DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe MODE on page 409 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 32 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays SSS SS SSS SSS SS SS ae Result Types in VSA 3 2 13 Frequency Error Absolute Displays the error of the instantaneous frequency in Hz of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time FREQ _ ERR FREQwras FREQ t with tn T5 and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 219 Note that this measurement does not consider a possible carrier frequency offset This has already been compensated for in the measurement signal This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but can O also be used for the PSK QAM modulations However since these modulations can have transitions through zero in the UO plane in this case you might notice uncritical spikes This is due to the fact that the phase of zero or a complex value close to zero has in fact limited significance but still influences the result of the current frequency measure ment 1 Freq Error Abs gt i Clrw 349 sym Fig 3 10 Result displ
569. ual operation Configuring VSA NORMal DIFFerential NPIA DPI4 OFFSet N3PI4 NORMal Demodulation order QPSK is used DIFFerential Demodulation order DQPSK is used NPI4 Demodulation order 1 4 QPSK is used DPI4 Demodulation order 11 4 DQPSK is used OFFSet Demodulation order OQPSK is used N3PIA Demodulation order 311 4 QPSK is used RST NORMal DDEM FORM QPSK Switches QPSK demodulation on DDEM QPSK FORM DPI4 Switches 11 4 DQPSK demodulation order on See Modulation Order on page 135 SENSe DDEMod SRATe lt SymbolRate gt This command defines the symbol rate The minimum symbol rate is 25 Hz The maximum symbol rate depends on the defined Sample Rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth on page 61 Setting parameters lt SymbolRate gt Manual operation numeric value Range 25 to 250e6 RST 3 84e6 Default unit Hz See Symbol Rate on page 136 SENSe DDEMod TFILter ALPHa Alpha This command determines the filter characteristic ALPHA BT The resolution is 0 01 Setting parameters Alpha numeric value Range 0 1 to 1 0 RST 0 22 Default unit NONE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 300 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA l NC C SX X Configuring VSA Manual operation See Alpha BT on page 137 See Type on page 202 See Alpha BT on page 202 SEN
570. ualizer Settings on page 195 See Store Load Current Equalizer on page 196 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer MODE Mode Switches between the equalizer modes For details see chapter 4 4 5 The Equalizer on page 98 EEUU RA N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 360 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Setting parameters Mode Example Manual operation Configuring VSA NORMal Switches the equalizer on for the next sweep TRACking Switches the equalizer on the results of the equalizer in the pre vious sweep are considered to calculate the new filter FREeze The filter is no longer changed the current equalizer values are used for subsequent sweeps USER A user defined equalizer loaded from a file is used AVERaging Switches the equalizer on the results of the equalizer in all previ ous sweeps since the instrument was switched on or the equalizer was reset are considered to calculate the new filter To start anew averaging process use the SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer RESet on page 361 command RST TRACe DDEM EQU MODE TRAC Activates the tracking mode of the equalizer See Equalizer Settings on page 195 See Mode on page 195 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer RESet This command deletes the data of the currently selected equalizer After deletion training can start again using the command DDEM EQU MODE TRA see SENSe DDEMod Usage Manual operation
571. ude Absolute on page 39 e chapter 3 2 25 Phase Error on page 43 chapter 3 2 13 Frequency Error Absolute on page 33 chapter 3 2 14 Frequency Error Relative on page 34 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR see LAYout ADD WINDOow on page 398 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 17 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays o ew Hm Evaluation Data Sources in VSA Modulation Accuracy Paraeters that characterize the accuracy of modulation The default result type is Result Summary The following result types are available e chapter 3 2 29 Result Summary on page 46 e chapter 3 2 1 Bit Error Rate BER on page 21 The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically If limit check is activated and the measured values exceed the limits those values are indicated in red in the result summary table If limit check is activated and no values exceed the limits the checked values are indicated in green 1 Result Summary Current EVM RMS i Peak MER RMS 18 00 Peak 0 28 Phase Error RMS 6 62 Peak 44 67 Magnitude Error RMS Peak 48 74 Carrier Frequency Error 201 04 Rho 0 984 404 I Q Offset 40 15 I Q Imbalance 57 56 Gain Imbalance 0 01 Quadrature Error 0 14 Amplitude Droop 0 000 53 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL MACC see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 Equalizer Filter characteristics of t
572. uency response of the available standard specific measurement filters is shown in chapter A 6 6 2 Measurement Filter on page 470 Customized Filters The analytical filter types RC raised cosine RRC root raised cosine and GAUSSIAN as well as the most important standard specific filters are already integrated in the VSA application In addition it is possible to use user defined measurement and transmit fil ters Customized filters may be useful for the following purposes e Development of new networks and modulation methods for which no filters are defined yet e Measurements of transmitter characteristics with slightly modified e g shortened transmitter filters An external program FILTWIZ is offered to convert user defined filters This program generates filter files vaf which can be transferred to the analyzer with a USB device for example The program can be downloaded together with a detailed description as a precompiled MATLABO file MATLAB pcode on the Internet at http www rohde schwarz com search term FILTWIZ LEE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 59 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing Rohde amp Schwarz Filter Wizard Version 1 5 9 lol xl File operations Tools Display File name MyFilter vaf 7 ERE Time domain Load Save Save as Exit Analytic design C Time domain Highlight Conv TX ea C Frequency domain Description Fi
573. ues However a negative influence on the measurement results is not to be expected 10 3 Frequently Asked Questions Problem The trace is not entirely visible within the measurement window 273 Problem The trace of the measurement signal is visible in the measurement window the trace of the reference signal iS DIE E eee reae eed ee ee H 273 Problem The measurement window does not show average results 274 Problem The spectrum is not displayed in the logarithmic domain 275 Problem The Vector UO result display and the Constellation UO result display look dif jj DES 275 Problem The Constellation UO measurement result display has a different number of constellation points in the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R amp S FSW K70 275 Problem the MSK FSK signal demodulates on the R amp S FSQ K70 but not on the R amp S FSW K70 or Why do have to choose different transmit filters in the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R amp S E rf AEN ain 276 Problem The EVM trace looks okay but the EVM in the result summary is significantly el REL 276 Question Why isn t the FSK Deviation Error in R amp S FSW K70 identical to the FSK DEV ERROR in R amp S A RE 278 Problem The PSK QAM Signal shows spikes in the Frequency Error result display ncc ana ve Oba ef Um seabed SC ID DM Ee 279 Question The y axis unit for the spectrum of t
574. uired source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM FREO to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 _L_L_________ E e LL A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLIX X User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 31 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays SS SSS SS SS SSS SS ee a Result Types in VSA 3 2 12 Frequency Relative The instantaneous frequency of the signal source The results are normalized to the symbol rate PSK and QAM modulated signals the estimated FSK deviation FSK modulated signals or one quarter of the symbol rate MSK modulated signals l d FREQ yzss t 2 5 49 with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 219 also be used for the PSK QAM modulations See also the note for chapter 3 2 11 Fre CD This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but can quency Absolute on page 30 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 3 FreqRel Meas amp Ref o 1M CIW 49 sym Fig 3 9 Result display Frequency Relative Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM FREO to define the result
575. ulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean EVM peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical SSE TN User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 390 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA SS M M n ug Analysis Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 100 RST 1 5 Default unit 96 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the lower limit for the current peak or mean center frequency deviation error Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical This command is available for FSK modulation only Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 1000000 RST 1 kHz Default unit Hz CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy
576. ulateMAbkerx GLUIMuebRIGHT eene enne eterne nnns nennen nnns entr nennen innen 387 CAL CulateMAbker XG IMtstGTATel A 387 CAL Culate ERT ET e EE 393 CAL CulateMSbRA ALUINetVAL ue 393 CALCulate MSRA WINDOWS lt N gt IVAL cccscccssssssecsessessscssoncsenscnsancenscesnacceauasenseesancessecssuecensessancasanessaneasaass 394 CALC latesn gt EE 415 CAL Culate cnz DDEM SbECimuml STATel nennen enitn nee nnns sen rnts stent sentent eene 404 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker AOFF b CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXiMUM APEK nennen enne enn nnntn nennen nnn 383 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimuUM LEET 383 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MAximum NENT 384 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXiMUM RIGHT eene entren enn rennen 384 CAlCulate nz D I Tamarker mz MAXimumf PDEART nene 384 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmumNENT eene enne nennen nnns ntes inna 384 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmum HIGH 385 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimumg PEAK eese nennen 384 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe esent nnen en nrnen en nnnnn rne tent nsn renn snnt nnns inna 382 CAL Culatesn DELTamarkersm X nerian costes testas c eere rat eere dedo rennen ane cb cenducubdasabscebasnaehaebiaarnansas 382 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X ABSolute 410 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker zmz SREL attive nennen enne tenentes nnn
577. umber of points per symbol used for calculation may vary from the number of points used to display the results of the calculation If more points per symbol are selected than the defined sample rate the additional points are interpolated for the display The more ST User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 121 R amp SS9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions points are displayed per symbol the more detailed the trace becomes as illustrated in figure 4 69 I Q Vector Meas amp Ref imMcirw B I Q Vector Meas amp Ref 6 1M Cirw Stop 2 91 amp 1M Clrw Stop 2 91 Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 Fig 4 69 Result display with different numbers of points per symbol window A 1 window B 2 window C 4 window D 16 The displayed points per symbol also determine how many values are returned when the trace data is queried by a remote command see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 For results based on the capture buffer one display point is displayed for each sample taken i e the display points per symbol are always identical to the sample rate For the Result Summary the number of display points corresponds to the estimation points per symbol By default 1 for QAM and PSK modulated signals and the sample rate for MSK and FSK modulated signals This value also controls which samples are considered for the peak and RMS values and the power result For all other result displ
578. umber of symbols that may differ from the burst length without influencing the burst detection A search tolerance of 5 for example with a minimum and maximum burst length of 100 will detect bursts that are 95 to 100 symbols long The minimum and maximum burst length is defined in the Signal Structuresettings Note Due to the fact that the VSA does not have knowledge of the ramp length there is an uncertainty in the burst search algorithm Thus setting this parameter to 0 will result in a failed burst search for most signals Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt TOLerance on page 351 Min Gap Length Burst Configuration Represents the minimum distance in symbols between adjacent bursts The default value is 1 symbol in order to make sure that the burst search finds bursts that are very close to each other However in case the capture buffer does not contain very close bursts it is recommended that you increase the value This makes the burst search faster and also more robust for highly distorted signals Note that this parameter only influences the robustness of the burst search It should not be used to explicitly exclude certain bursts from the measurement For example setting the minimum gap length to 100 symbols does not ensure that the burst search does not find bursts that have a very small gap Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt GLENgth MINimum on page 350
579. urrently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 290 LAY GUEADDIVWVIN DOW ce TT 398 LAYout CATalog WINDOW P 2 ctii cepe neta eorura ck ekz EEA Ye ERR er RR idee 399 Baden 399 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 397 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring the Result Display LAYout REMoVeEWINDJONW ecce eine inn eenkhetennnnnuhh cn ne sen Rp ennt an ERA da Lana a Ro bn acad 400 LAY out REPLace b WINDOW enters EM Ite Ec EMEN EE o DARAN ERR Dritte a aee eoe tone Mad 400 BAe S PEIUS ele 400 LAYout WINDow sAr le E 402 LAYouEWUNDowsmsIDENUE rione ea a A nett aaa a aaa 402 KO NEIE leese aleeden 402 LAY Gut WINDOWSA E E 403 LAY Out WINDOWS OT VN PET rede eder Eod Enea aaa ro erre aa E aane E a aana 403 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowT ype gt This command adds a window to the display This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new window is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative
580. us Minimum Gap Length 3 692 us Information Expected Burst Length 148 4 sym Burst Found Preview Preview Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Kee E 182 T 182 oceans tu MILI MM ee guar 183 L Search Tola iplis metet rta ds svtaz d vua da Dod editas E 183 L IEN E 183 Enabling Burst Searches Enables or disables burst searches If Auto is selected burst search is enabled only if the signal structure defines a bursted signal in the Signal Structure tab of the Modu lation amp Signal Description dialog box see on page 139 Remote command I on page 349 Measuring only if burst was found If enabled measurement results are only displayed and are only averaged if a valid burst has been found When measuring bursted signals that are averaged over several measurements it is recommended that you enable this option so that erroneous meas urements do not affect the result of averaging Remote command f I on page 350 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 182 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration REESEN Burst and Pattern Configuration Burst Configuration The conditions under which a burst is detected in the captured data can be configured either manually or automatically according to the defined signal structure settings see Burst Settings on page 139 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt CONFigure AUTO on page 350 Search Tolerance Burst Configuration Defines the n
581. used RST NONE 11 10 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results The I Q data to be evaluated in the VSA application can not only be measured by the VSA application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated UO data from the VSA application can be exported for further analysis in external applications For details on importing and exporting UO data see chapter 7 UO Data Import and Export on page 222 E H M PP P VM M User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 426 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA mau EE QPC m Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results MMEMON Bee en E VE 427 MMEMoneSTORGIO COMMeONE Eesen 427 MMEMory S TORGIOG STAT KEE 427 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores UO data from a file The file extension is iq tar Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only Manual operation See Import on page 223 See IQ Import on page 223 MMEMory STORe IQ COMMent Comment This command adds a comment to a file that contains UO data Parameters Comment String containing the commen
582. using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on page 371 Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page 370 Auto Scale Once Auto Scale Window If enabled both the x axis and y axis are automatically adapted to the current measure ment results only once not dynamically in the selected window To adapt the range of all screens together use the Auto Scale All function Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 369 Auto Scale All Adapts the x axis and y axis to the current measurement values only once not dynam ically in all measurement windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow n
583. ust be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed NumberOfChan nels Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the I Q data binary file For multi channels the UO samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the I Q data file see chapter A 7 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 480 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the UO data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt e xyz a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples e xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 e xyzreal 1ch int16 e xyz complex 16ch int8 UserData Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content PreviewData Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the I Q data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an
584. utton Correction values for frequencies between the reference values are obtained by inter polation Linear interpolation is performed if the table contains only two values If it con tains more than two reference values spline interpolation is carried out Outside the fre quency range covered by the table the conversion loss is assumed to be the same as that for the first and last reference value The current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries is displayed in the preview pane to the right of the table Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL DATA on page 316 Insert Value Inserts a new position value entry in the table If the table is empty a new entry at 0 Hz is inserted If entries already exist a new entry is inserted above the selected entry The position of the new entry is selected such that it divides the span to the previous entry in half Delete Value Deletes the currently selected position value entry Shift x Shifts all positions in the table by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the x axis Shift y Shifts all conversion loss values by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the y axis Save The conversion loss table is stored under the specified name in the C r_s
585. vel for RF input e Scaling is relative to the full scale level for I Q input User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 45 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Result Types in VSA 4Real RealImag CaptureBuffer 4 Imag RealImag CaptureBuffer 8000 sym Fig 3 19 Result display Real Imag l Q Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 398 CALC FORM RIMag to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 405 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 3 2 29 Result Summary The Modulation Accuracy results in a table For details on the parameters see chapter 3 3 Common Parameters in VSA on page 52 Basis of evaluation The majority of the values that are displayed in the Result Summary are calculated over the Evaluation Range see chapter 5 11 Evaluation Range Configuration on page 202 They are evaluated according to the setting of the Display Points Sym parameter For example if Display Points Symbol is 1 only the symbol instants con tribute to the result displayed in the result summary Table 3 2 Results calculated over the evaluation range PSK MSK QAM FSK EVM Frequency Error MER Magnitude Error Phase Error Power Magnitude Error Rho Power User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 46 R amp
586. verage is calculated over the last 10 capture sets moving average Manual In single sweep mode captures UO data until the defined number of evaluations have been performed In continuous sweep mode captures UO data continuously if trace averaging is selected the average is calculated over the defined num ber of capture sets moving average Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt VALue on page 348 Select Result Rng Selects the result range from the capture buffer that you want to evaluate This function is available in single sweep mode only By default the application shows the results over all result ranges that have been cap tured in the signal capturing process and are in the R amp S FSW s memory By selecting a range number you can evaluate a specific result range e g a particular burst The range depends on the number of result ranges you have captured previously For more information refer also to chapter 4 6 Measurement Ranges on page 117 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh MBURst CALC on page 348 Er ss User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 180 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration 5 7 5 7 1 Burst and Pattern Configuration Refresh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated and only for MSRA appli cations The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the
587. view select Signal Description Switch to the Known Data tab Activate the usage of a Known Data file by enabling the Known Data option This enables the Load Data File function Select the Load Data File button A file selection dialog box is displayed Select the xml file which contains the possible data sequences of the input signal The file must comply with the syntax described in chapter A 5 Known Data File Syntax Description on page 460 The header information of the xml file is displayed in the dialog box Once a Known Data file has been loaded the Bit Error Rate result display becomes available If the Fine Synchronization setting in the Demodulation dialog box is set to Auto mode the known data is also used for synchronization Otherwise it can be selected manually Defining a maximum symbol error rate for the known data in ref erence to the analyzed data avoids using a falsely selected or unsuitable file for syn chronization see also If SER lt on page 200 8 2 3 2 How to Create Known Data Files You must create the Known Data files yourself according to the possible data sequences of the input signal Use any xml editing tool you like following the rules described in chapter A 5 Known Data File Syntax Description on page 460 Before loading the file to the VSA application make sure the syntax of your file is valid Auxiliary tool to create Known Data files An auxiliary tool to creat
588. w When evaluating the measurement signal it is also possible to display the ideal reference signal as an additional trace This can be a significant help when troubleshooting since it allows for an immediate comparison 1 Start from the configuration described in chapter 9 3 4 Evaluating the Rising and Falling Edges on page 258 Select window 4 to set the focus on it Press the TRACE key and then the Trace 2 softkey Select Clear Write as the Trace Mode and Evaluation Ref This adds a second trace to your result display This trace is the ideal reference signal that can now be compared to the measurement signal see figure 9 13 E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 260 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals To view the traces in more detail enlarge the window using the Split Maximize key Ea and zoom into the display using the icon in the toolbar see the dotted rectangle in figure 9 13 Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 dBm Std EDGE_8PSK SR 270 833 kHz Att 24dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen 200 BURST PATTERN D MagAbs Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 2R Clrw Start 26 sym Stop 174 sym I Fig 9 13 Zooming Now you can compare the measured and the ideal reference signal SS M n User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 261 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting 10 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement If the results do not meet your expectations the fol
589. ware Operating Manual Example 1 SOURce EBOX RST SOURce EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Remote commands exclusive to digital UO data input and output Ode le dere e 321 INPurt DID ee UPPE e OT 322 le Vieille ee TT E 323 INPut elle ere DI BEEN 323 INPuCDIORANGet Uppert UNIT sess nennen nennen nnns nnri nin ia sinn nn nnns 323 ze DIGS RAT TE 323 NPT DIG SRA TCA e me 324 INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital I Q input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For details see the section Interface Status Information for the Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 in the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 321 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA a COM u emen Configuring VSA lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently u
590. weeps Query only User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 418 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA nM C J snqu TU P aer Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK MDEViation lt type gt This command queries the results of the measurement deviation of FSK modulated sig nals Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Measurement deviation for current sweep AVG Average FSK measurement deviation over several sweeps RPE Peak FSK measurement deviation over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of FSK measurement deviation PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK measurement deviation Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK RDEViation lt type gt This command queries the results of the reference deviation of FSK modulated signals Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Measurement deviation for current sweep AVG Average FSK measurement deviation over several sweeps RPE Peak FSK measurement deviation over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of FSK measurement deviation PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK measurement deviation Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic GIMBalance lt type gt This command queries the results of the Gain Imbalance error measurement of digital demodulation
591. which data is stored for which result display see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 412 Table 1 5 ASCII file format for VSA trace data export File contents Description Header Type FSW Instrument model User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 458 R amp S9FSW K70 Annex ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data File contents Version 1 40 Description Firmware version Date 01 Apr 2012 Date of data set storage Header section for individual window Screen 1 Window name Points per Symbol 4 Points per symbol x Axis Start 13 sym Start value of the x axis x Axis Stop 135 sym Stop value of the x axis y per div 0 22000000000000003 Y axis range per division Ref value y axis 10 00 dBm Y axis reference value Ref value position 100 Y axis reference position Header section for individual trace Trace 1 Meas Result IQ First trace Result type Meas Signal Meas Data source measurement or reference data Demodulator Offset QPSK Demodulation type ResultMode Trace Result mode x unit sym Unit of the x axis y unit dBm Unit of the y axis Trace Mode Clear Write Trace mode Values 800 Number of measurement points Data section for individual trace 10000 10 3 15 7 10130 11 5 16 9 10360 12 0 17 4 Measured values x value lt y1 gt lt y2 gt lt y2
592. x in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both keywords to the same effect E User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 284 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 1 6 11 1 6 1 Introduction Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values Numene Vallis ee eere pica Deele Ee 285 onleg onni Eege E 286 Character RE 286 Character STINGS EE 287 e JBlock DANG EE 287 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the command uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 159 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number
593. y CENTer on page 329 Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax iS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 159 E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 329 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Configuring VSA SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt LinkMode gt Defines the step width of the center frequency Setting parameters lt LinkMode gt ON OFF 1 0 ON Links the step width to the current standard currently 1 MHz for all standards OFF Sets the step width as defined using the FREQ CENT STEP com mand see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 329 RST 1 Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 159 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet Offset This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application See also Frequency Offset on page 160 Parameters Offset Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 160 11 5
594. y Error RMS value 2 Error in peak Frequency Error RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current Frequency Error peak value 6 Error in mean Frequency Error peak value 7 Error in peak Frequency Error peak value 8 9 These bits are not used 10 Error in current Frequency Deviation value 11 Error in mean Frequency Deviation value 12 Error in peak Frequency Deviation value 13 15 These bits are not used 11 11 9 Querying the Status Registers The following commands query the contents of the individual status registers STATUs QUESHonmable ACPLImIECONDIEOD 1 zeit ede eterne SNE eeneg 436 STATus QUESIt nable DIQ CONDIOR ctr atem a nece aa E aii ia 436 STATus QUEStionable FREQUEN CON le E KE 436 STATus QUEStIonable LIMit m CONDIIEOn 1 rinita road non ne E ERER 436 STATus QUEStionable LMARgmn em CONDion enne 436 STATus OUEGuonable MODulaton nz CONDiton eene 436 SGTATusOUEGtonable MODulatton nz CFReouencv CONDitton nenene 436 STATusOUEGuonable MODulaton nz EVMCONDion eene 436 STATusOUEGuonable MODulaton nz FSkCGONDmon seen 436 STATus OUEGuonable MODulaton nz JORHo COhNfDton 436 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n MAGNitude CONDiton 436 STATusOUEGuonable MODulaton nz DHAGe CONDitton eene 436 User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 434 Status Reporting System STATusOUEGuonable POWerCOhNDiton sees ee enhn nnns nn nnn as 436 STATus QUESHonable SYNG OCON
595. ying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 11 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 283 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM E N User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 286 R amp SS9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA Common Suffixes 11 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 11 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the transmission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all by
596. you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command EE User Manual 1173 9292 02 07 285 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 1 6 2 11 1 6 3 Introduction Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quan tities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of digits after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represented by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Quer
597. z sse 88 Markers Absolute peak ssiri iaiia iaaiiai 214 Assigned trace zs Sergile Lull 210 Configuring softkey sess 210 Coupling ai Deactivating rcr eee teneri earned Delta Markers cisccesssccsess rne ense General settings remote E Set MINIMUM SE 214 Next MINIMUM iiie tnter trente nnns 215 Next peak xL qc POSIOMING EP Querying position remote Retrieving values remote Search settings eite deren Settings remote e zs kii M Iul OC M Marker to Trace SOKOV EE 212 Matched filter vg t ttr ene 56 Maximizing Windows remote ssssee 397 Max Peak kl cy M 214 Mean Formula D MX 467 Meas amp Ref Data SOUNGE rne ttn ied iaaa Result types T MEAS filter trece tete teo aae Meas only if burst was found 1 0 0 0 cece sesers 182 Measurement bandwidth esse 55 Measurement channel Creating remote s essen 288 Deleting remote n Duplicating remote sse 288 Querying remote esseseeenenee Renaming remote Replacing remote Measurement example Burst GSM EDGE Signals n eee 253 Continuous QPSK sse 245 Measurement examples Burst GSM EDGE signal remote

R&S FSW K70 VSA User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSW K70 VSA User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSW K70 VSA User Manual